Star Tut

TUTORIALS
STAR-CD VERSION 3.26
CONFIDENTIAL FOR AUTHORISED USERS ONLY
2005 CD-adapco
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION Tutorial Structure ..........................................................................................................1 Basic Definitions ..........................................................................................................1 Running a Tutorial ........................................................................................................2 Working with commands ................................................................................ 1-2 Using tutorial command files .......................................................................... 1-3 Tutorial 1 - TWO-DIMENSIONAL FLOW IN A LABYRINTH Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 1-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 1-1 Tutorial 1.1 LAMINAR FLOW ............................................................................... 1-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 1-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 1-18 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 1-19 Tutorial 1.1 LAMINAR FLOW (continued) .......................................................... 1-23 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 1-23 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 1-28 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 1-29 Tutorial 1.2 TURBULENT FLOW ........................................................................ 1-33 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 1-33 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 1-37 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 1-37 Tutorial 2 - 3-D FLOW IN A PARTIALLY BLOCKED ELBOW Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 2-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 2-1 Tutorial 2.1 BASE CASE ......................................................................................... 2-3 Preliminaries .................................................................................................... 2-3 Mesh Creation ................................................................................................. 2-3 Checking and Fixing the Grid ....................................................................... 2-12 Setting Up the Analysis ................................................................................. 2-12 Checking the Model ...................................................................................... 2-16 Running the Analysis .................................................................................... 2-17 Post-Processing the Results ........................................................................... 2-18 Tutorial 2.2 FLOW WITH SOLID PARTICLES ................................................... 2-23 Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 2-23
Version 3.26 i
Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 2-23 Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 2-23 CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 2-28 Post-processing .............................................................................................. 2-29 Tutorial 2.3 FLOW WITH LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION (STEADY) ................ 2-33 Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 2-33 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 2-33 Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 2-33 CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 2-40 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 2-40 Tutorial 2.4 FLOW WITH LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION (TRANSIENT) .......... 2-45 Problem Description ...................................................................................... 2-45 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 2-45 Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 2-45 User Subroutines ........................................................................................... 2-51 CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 2-53 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 2-54 Tutorial 2.5 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM ............. 2-61 Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 2-61 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 2-61 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 2-61 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 2-65 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 2-65 Tutorial 2.6 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM ..... 2-71 Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 2-71 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 2-71 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 2-71 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 2-75 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 2-75 Tutorial 2.7 FLOW IN A MEDIUM WITH ISOTROPIC FLOW RESISTANCE 2-81 Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 2-81 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 2-81 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 2-81 User Subroutine ............................................................................................. 2-85 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 2-86 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 2-87 Tutorial 3 - TURBULENT FLOW OVER A BLUNT OBJECT
ii Version 3.26
Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 3-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 3-1 Tutorial 3.1 FLOW USING COARSE MESH ......................................................... 3-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 3-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 3-21 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 3-21 Tutorial 3.2 FLOW USING FINE MESH .............................................................. 3-27 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 3-27 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 3-34 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 3-35 Tutorial 4 - FLOW IN A TWO-DIMENSIONAL Y-JUNCTION Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 4-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 4-1 Tutorial 4.1 SINGLE STREAM FLOW ................................................................... 4-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 4-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 4-21 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 4-21 Tutorial 4.2 TWIN STREAM FLOW .................................................................... 4-27 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 4-27 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 4-40 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 4-40 Tutorial 5 - 3-D TURBULENT FLOW IN A DILUTION PIPE Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 5-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 5-1 Tutorial 5.1 STEADY 3-D FLOW ........................................................................... 5-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 5-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 5-26 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 5-26 Tutorial 5.2 TRANSIENT 3D FLOW .................................................................... 5-33 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 5-33 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 5-38 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 5-38 Tutorial 6 - MIXING OF TWO SUPERSONIC STREAMS Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 6-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 6-1 Tutorial 6.1 CONFINED MIXING .......................................................................... 6-3
Version 3.26 iii
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 6-3 CFD Analysis and Post-Processing ................................................................. 6-8 Tutorial 6.2 UNCONFINED MIXING ................................................................... 6-13 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 6-13 CFD Analysis and Post-Processing ............................................................... 6-15 Tutorial 7 - FLUID FLOW IN A MIXER Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 7-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 7-1 Tutorial 7.1 2-D TRANSIENT FLOW WITH SLIDING MESH ............................ 7-2 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 7-2 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 7-25 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 7-25 Tutorial 7.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH ARBITRARY SLIDING MESH ......... 7-31 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 7-31 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 7-35 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 7-36 Tutorial 7.3 3D FLOW WITH AUTOMATIC EVENT GENERATION .............. 7-39 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 7-39 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 7-51 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 7-51 Tutorial 7.4 STEADY FLOW WITH IMPLICIT MULTIPLE FRAMES ............. 7-55 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 7-57 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 7-66 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 7-66 Tutorial 7.5 3D FLOW WITH CAVITATION EFFECTS .................................... 7-69 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 7-69 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 7-74 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 7-74 Tutorial 8 - AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 8-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 8-1 Tutorial 8.1 BASE CASE (MESH 1) ....................................................................... 8-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 8-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 8-15 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 8-16 Tutorial 8.2 MESH REFINEMENT WITH 2-LAYER MODEL (MESH 2) ......... 8-25 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 8-25
iv Version 3.26
CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 8-36 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 8-36 Tutorial 8.3 SOLUTION-ADAPTED MESH REFINEMENT (MESH 3) ............ 8-41 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 8-41 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 8-48 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 8-49 Tutorial 9 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR SIMULATION Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 9-1 Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 9-1 Tutorial 9.1 BASE CASE ......................................................................................... 9-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ............................................................................ 9-3 CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 9-21 Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF) ........................... 9-23 Pre-processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................... 9-23 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 9-27 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-27 Panel Definition ............................................................................................. 9-32 Tutorial 9.3 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) ........................ 9-41 Combustion Modelling Strategy ................................................................... 9-41 Numerical Considerations ............................................................................. 9-42 Pre-processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................... 9-42 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 9-50 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-51 Tutorial 9.4 TOLUENE COMBUSTION (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF) ................ 9-55 Pre-processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................... 9-55 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 9-62 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-63 Tutorial 9.5 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF) ....... 9-69 Pre-processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................... 9-69 User Subroutines ........................................................................................... 9-75 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 9-78 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-79 Tutorial 9.6 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION) ............... 9-87 Pre-processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................... 9-87 CFD Analysis (STAR) .................................................................................. 9-96 Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-96 Tutorial 10 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN
Version 3.26 v
Introduction ................................................................................................... 10-1 Material Properties ........................................................................................ 10-2 Tutorial 10.1 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN ......... 10-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 10-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 10-14 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 10-14 Tutorial 10.2 RADIATION EFFECTS ................................................................. 10-21 Introduction ................................................................................................. 10-21 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 10-21 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 10-28 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 10-28 Tutorial 10.3 RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID ............... 10-33 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 10-33 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 10-37 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 10-38 Tutorial 11 - 2-D FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 11-1 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 11-1 Tutorial 11.1 TRANSIENT FLOW SIMULATION .............................................. 11-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 11-3 User Subroutine ........................................................................................... 11-23 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 11-25 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 11-25 Tutorial 12 - THERMAL RADIATION IN AN ENCLOSURE Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 12-1 Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 12-1 Tutorial 12.1 ADIABATIC STEERING RACK .................................................... 12-3 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 12-3 Numerical Analysis ..................................................................................... 12-18 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 12-19 Tutorial 12.2 CONDUCTING STEERING RACK .............................................. 12-29 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 12-29 Numerical Analysis ..................................................................................... 12-31 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 12-31 Tutorial 13 - FLOW IN AN ENGINE CYLINDER Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 13-1
vi Version 3.26
Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 13-1 Tutorial 13.1 EXHAUST AND INTAKE STROKE SIMULATION .................... 13-4 Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) .................................................................... 13-4 Grid Changing Commands .......................................................................... 13-20 Event Verification ....................................................................................... 13-25 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 13-27 Post Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 13-28 Tutorial 14 - CELL COUPLE MATCHING Tutorial 14.1 MATCHING OF COMMON PERIMETER SURFACES ............... 14-2 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 14-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 14-14 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 14-15 Tutorial 14.2 MATCHING OF ARBITRARY PERIMETER SURFACES ........ 14-19 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 14-19 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 14-32 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 14-33 Tutorial 15 - FREE SURFACE CALCULATION OF A COLLAPSING WATER COLUMN Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS ............................................................ 15-2 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 15-2 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................ 15-11 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 15-11 Tutorial 16 - EULERIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW Tutorial 16.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES ........................................ 16-2 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 16-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................. 16-9 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ......................................................................... 16-9 Suggestions for Further Exercises ............................................................... 16-11 Tutorial 16.2 AERATION TANK ........................................................................ 16-13 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 16-13 CFD Analysis (STAR) ............................................................................... 16-20 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 16-20 Suggestions for Further Exercises ............................................................... 16-23 Tutorial 16.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER .............................................................. 16-25 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 16-25 User Subroutine ........................................................................................... 16-33 CFD Analysis (STAR) ............................................................................... 16-34
Version 3.26 vii
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 16-34 Tutorial 16.4 BOILING SIMULATION .............................................................. 16-37 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 16-37 User Subroutines ......................................................................................... 16-46 CFD Analysis (STAR) ............................................................................... 16-51 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 16-51 Discussion of Results .................................................................................. 16-55 Validation Check ......................................................................................... 16-55 Suggestions for Further Exercises ............................................................... 16-56 Tutorial 17 - LIQUID FILM SIMULATION Tutorial 17.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL ............................ 17-2 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) .......................................................................... 17-3 CFD Analysis (STAR) ................................................................................. 17-9 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 17-10 Suggestions for Further Exercises ............................................................... 17-13 Tutorial 17.2 SPRAY WALL IMPINGEMENT .................................................. 17-15 Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) ........................................................................ 17-15 CFD Analysis (STAR) ............................................................................... 17-24 Post-Processing (pro-STAR) ....................................................................... 17-25
viii
Version 3.26
INTRODUCTION
Tutorial Structure
This document contains examples of applying STAR-CD to a variety of tutorial problems, thus demonstrating some of the codes features and illustrating its use. However, for a detailed description of the softwares overall capabilities, you are advised to consult the User Guide in addition to this document . Each tutorial starts with a brief description of the physical problem. There follows a description of all GUI operations (and their equivalent commands) required to set up the model covered by the tutorial, perform a CFD analysis and display the results. In those instances where graphical output is generated, selected screen plot images are also included in the description. This enables you to check that you have followed the tutorial correctly up to that point. The tutorials are structured in such a way that, for a given model geometry, a number of different variants are analysed to illustrate different options. The tutorial numbering system reflects this structure. For example, Tutorial 2.3 refers to case no. 3, model geometry no. 2.
Basic Denitions
Throughout this volume, it is assumed that you will be using the Graphical User Interface facilities of the code. Therefore, the discussion is in terms of GUI operations (e.g. selecting items from a screen menu, clicking option buttons in a dialog box, etc.) unless the required action can only be performed by typing a command in pro-STARs I/O window. Wherever possible, the required operation is performed using the STAR GUIde panels. These represent the latest pro-STAR user interface tools and enable you to build models for most commonly-occurring CFD problems in a systematic and user-friendly way. The on-screen placement of pro-STAR windows and dialog boxes while working on a tutorial is entirely at your discretion. However, the arrangement shown below is recommended for greatest ease of use. This consists of: The STAR GUIde window on the left this displays the Navigation Centre tree structure for nding your way around the system, plus various panels for detailed specication of a particular operation. The main pro-STAR window on the right this enables you to display your current model as well as manipulate various aspects of its on-screen appearance. The latter is achieved via several buttons and pop-up menus along the top and down the left-hand side of the window. Some of the less obvious buttons are labelled in the illustration shown overleaf. The I/O window at the bottom this conrms the action taken by pro-STAR in response to a GUI operation. It also enables you to type instructions in command form in cases where no equivalent GUI operation is available. Note that, throughout this volume, all GUI operation descriptions are followed by their equivalent pro-STAR commands. This serves users who cannot employ the codes GUI version for some reason, or those that prefer to build a model by typing commands.
Version 3.26
Working with commands
Show STAR GUIde window Plot with legend Reset buttons Plot four views Turn mesh plotting on / off Turn edge plotting on / off Orientation slider controls Turn light shading on / off Quick Draw option Plot orientation cube Select a cell set Select a vertex set Select a spline set Select a block set Select a boundary set Select a couple set Select a droplet set Store/recall set, surface or view Display the cell table Display coordinate systems Display/edit a user table
Throughout the document, > signs denote successive mouse clicks on menu names, menu list items, dialog box buttons, etc. For example Tools > Cell Tool > Edit Types means click Tools on the menu bar, then click the Cell Tool item in the drop-down list, then click the Edit Types button on the displayed Cell Tool dialog box. Where pro-STAR command equivalents are included in the text, they are shown in upper-case letters and enclosed in a box to emphasize the fact that they represent alternative actions. Detailed instructions on how to perform a STAR-CD CFD analysis from start to finish are given in the User Guide (Chapter 2, Running a CFD Analysis). These instructions should be followed in running the tutorials, together with any specific guideance given for each individual tutorial. A summary of the currently available CFD example cases and associated features appears in Table 1 to Table 3 at the end of this chapter. Additional cases will be issued on a regular basis as and when they become available.
Running a Tutorial
Working with commands If you wish to follow through any of the tutorials by working in command mode, use the commands given in the boxed-in sections within the tutorial text.
2 Version 3.26
Using tutorial command les
Alternatively, you can: 1. Type in just the command name. This will cause the system to prompt you for the required parameters and will also show you the system defaults. 2. Replace any number of commands with your own abbreviation, dened via command *ABBREVIATE. This substitute can be used repeatedly throughout the session in place of the original commands. A comprehensive discussion of the various facilities for customising or abbreviating command-mode input is given in Chapter 1 of the Commands volume (section on pro-STAR Commands). 3. Repeat all commands in a single action, by making use of the tutorial command les supplied in your STAR-CD installation CD-ROM (see the STAR-CD Installation and Systems Guide for information on where these les may be found). The les are written in separate sub-directories for each tutorial and contain all commands included within the boxed-in sections of a tutorial chapter. The command files are called either prep.inp (for pre-processing) or post.inp (for post-processing). Also included are auxiliary files needed by particular cases, e.g. user-defined subroutines, cgrid files containing grid-changing commands, etc. Using tutorial command les The usual procedure for repeating the pre- or post-processing part of a tutorial via the supplied tutorial command files is as follows: 1. Create a directory for the tutorial and copy the prep.inp, post.inp and auxiliary les (e.g. user subroutines) to it. 2. If the tutorial involves a restart from a previous case, copy all STAR-CD generated les (e.g. tut.mdl, tut.pst, etc.) from their current location to the new directory. 3. For a pre-processing session, start up pro-STAR in the usual way, supply a tutorial name (e.g. tut) and then type the following commands: curs file ifile prep.inp Important Note: When running tutorials involving use of the screen cursor, make sure that both the main pro-STAR window and the graphics area within it remain at their normal (default) sizes. Altering these in any way will invalidate the screen coordinate information stored in le prep.inp and the tutorial will fail. 4. Following the automatic execution of all commands, terminate the pro-STAR session by typing. quit, save 5. The procedure for a post-processing session is identical to the above, except that the le name supplied is now post.inp and the run is terminated by typing quit, nosave
Version 3.26 3
Table 1: Summary of Tutorial Features 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.2 4.1 Tutorial Number DIMENSIONALITY
Two-dimensional Three-dimensional
CELL TYPES
Solid cells Porous cells Bafe cells
MESH PROPERTIES
Local mesh renement Cell matching Rotating coordinates Moving mesh Cell removal/addition Conditional attachment Sliding mesh All-tetrahedral mesh Imported mesh/geometry
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Constant properties

Ideal gas density Isobaric density Conc. dependent density Iso. & conc. dep. density Polynomial viscosity Polynomial specic heat Polynomial conductivity
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS Laminar ow

Non-Newtonian ow Turbulent ow Incompressible Compressible (subsonic) Compressible (transonic) Compressible (supersonic)
TURBULENCE MODELS
k- model (standard) k- model (RNG/Chen) Low Re k- model
Version 3.26
4.2
Table 1: Summary of Tutorial Features 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.2 4.1 Tutorial Number
Two-layer models Non-linear models k-l model Effective viscosity
HEAT TRANSFER
Isothermal Radiation Solar radiation Transparent solids Convection Conduction Conjugate heat transfer Buoyancy
MISCELLANEOUS
Multi-component Multi-stream Fluid injection Two-phase Lagrangian Free surface/Cavitation User coding Solution mapping Tabular input
REACTION TYPES
Chemical kinetics Eddy breakup Combined PPDF Heterogeneous
ANALYSIS TYPE
Steady Transient Pseudo transient
SOLUTION ALGORITHMS SIMPLE

PISO SIMPISO
BOUNDARY TYPES
Inlet boundary Outlet boundary Version 3.26
4.2
5
Table 1: Summary of Tutorial Features 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.2 4.1 Tutorial Number
Fixed-ow outlet boundary Pressure boundary Stagnation boundary Sym. plane boundary Cyclic boundary Free-stream boundary Transient wave boundary
WALL TYPE
Stationary wall Moving wall No-slip wall Slip wall Impermeable wall Permeable wall Adiabatic wall Conducting wall
BAFFLE TYPE
Stationary bafe Moving bafe No-slip bafe Slip bafe Impermeable bafe Permeable bafe Adiabatic bafe Conducting bafe
DISPLAY FEATURES
Graphs Engineering data monitoring User panels User macros Animation
Version 3.26
4.2
Table 2: Summary of Tutorial Features 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 8.1 8.2 Tutorial Number DIMENSIONALITY
CELL TYPES
MESH PROPERTIES
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Constant properties Ideal gas density Isobaric density Conc. dependent density Iso. & conc. dep. density Polynomial viscosity Polynomial specic heat Polynomial conductivity
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
Laminar ow Non-Newtonian ow Turbulent ow Incompressible Compressible (subsonic) Compressible (transonic) Compressible (supersonic)
TURBULENCE MODELS k- model (standard)

k- model (RNG/Chen) Low Re k- model
Version 3.26
8.3
7
Table 2: Summary of Tutorial Features 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 8.1 8.2 Tutorial Number
Two-layer models Non-linear models k-l model Effective viscosity
HEAT TRANSFER
MISCELLANEOUS
REACTION TYPES
ANALYSIS TYPE

PISO SIMPISO
BOUNDARY TYPES
Inlet boundary Outlet boundary 8

Version 3.26
8.3
Table 2: Summary of Tutorial Features 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 8.1 8.2 Tutorial Number
WALL TYPE
BAFFLE TYPE
DISPLAY FEATURES
Version 3.26
8.3
9
Table 3: Summary of Tutorial Features 10.1 10.2 10.3 11.1 12.1 12.2 Tutorial Number DIMENSIONALITY
CELL TYPES
MESH PROPERTIES
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Constant properties Ideal gas density Isobaric density Conc. dependent density Iso. & conc. dep. density Polynomial viscosity Polynomial specic heat Polynomial conductivity

k- model (RNG/Chen) Low Re k- model
10
Version 3.26
13.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Table 3: Summary of Tutorial Features 10.1 10.2 10.3 11.1 12.1 12.2 Tutorial Number
Two-layer model Non-linear models k-l model Effective viscosity
HEAT TRANSFER
MISCELLANEOUS
REACTION TYPES
ANALYSIS TYPE

PISO SIMPISO
BOUNDARY TYPES
Inlet boundary Outlet boundary Version 3.26

11
13.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Table 3: Summary of Tutorial Features 10.1 10.2 10.3 11.1 12.1 12.2 Tutorial Number
WALL TYPE
BAFFLE TYPE
DISPLAY FEATURES
12
Version 3.26
13.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Table 4: Summary of Tutorial Features 14.1 14.2 15.1 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 17.1 Tutorial Number DIMENSIONALITY
CELL TYPES
MESH PROPERTIES
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Constant properties

Ideal gas density Isobaric density Conc. dependent density Iso. & conc. dep. density Polynomial viscosity Polynomial specic heat Polynomial conductivity

k- model (RNG/Chen) Low Re k- model Version 3.26
17.2
13
14.1
14.2
15.1
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
17.1
Tutorial Number
Two-layer model Non-linear models k-l model Effective viscosity
HEAT TRANSFER
MISCELLANEOUS
Multi-component Multi-stream Fluid injection Two-phase Lagrangian Free surface/Cavitation Eulerian multi-phase Liquid Films User coding Solution mapping Tabular input
REACTION TYPES
ANALYSIS TYPE

PISO SIMPISO
BOUNDARY TYPES
Inlet boundary 14
Version 3.26
17.2
14.1
14.2
15.1
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
17.1
Tutorial Number
Outlet boundary Fixed-ow outlet boundary Pressure boundary Stagnation boundary Sym. plane boundary Cyclic boundary Free-stream boundary Transient wave boundary Degassing boundary
WALL TYPE
Stationary wall Moving wall No-slip wall Slip wall Impermeable wall Permeable wall Adiabatic wall Conducting wall Initial wall lm
BAFFLE TYPE
DISPLAY FEATURES
Version 3.26
17.2
15
Physical Problem Description
Tutorial 1 TWO-DIMENSIONAL FLOW IN A LABYRINTH

Physical Problem Description The problem of flow in a labyrinth has been chosen for the first tutorial because of its geometric simplicity. The labyrinth consists of a space enclosed by walls with one inlet, one outlet and four baffles (zero-thickness solid cells) at the locations shown in Figure T1.0-1. The fluid within the labyrinth is air and its physical properties are as follows: Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity 1.205 1.81 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/m3 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
Air at standard pressure and temperature (1 bar and 293 K) enters the labyrinth with a velocity of 2 m/s. The total mass entering the labyrinth exits through the outlet. The flow is assumed to be two-dimensional, with constant fluid temperature, density and viscosity. Modelling Strategy Given the geometric simplicity of this test case, the following modelling strategy is appropriate: Uniformly spaced mesh made up of hexahedral cells. The nal mesh structure is shown in Figure T1.0-2 Inlet, outlet, wall and symmetry plane (see NOTE 1) boundary conditions. Isothermal, incompressible and steady ow options Appropriate physical parameters for air k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics
A multi-step modelling approach is chosen whereby the geometry and flow conditions are set up and tested in stages in order to demonstrate more clearly various features of the software. The tutorial itself is divided up into a number of sub-tutorials whose aims and methods are described in subsequent sections. NOTE 1: Two-dimensional simulations in STAR-CD are in no way different from three-dimensional ones. Their distinguishing feature is that the mesh in the direction normal to the plane of analysis is only one cell thick. This necessitates placing symmetry planes on either side of the cells used in the analysis. Make sure that you follow the instructions given in Chapter 2 of the STAR-CD User Guide regarding setting up the pro-STAR environment, creating a sub-directory for the model and running STAR.
NOTE 2:
Version 3.26
1-1
Modelling Strategy
0.05
0.1 Outlet 0.1 0.03
Y 0.25 1 2 3 4
0.15 Z 0.05 Inlet 0.1 0.3 0.1
All dimensions in metres
Figure T1.0-1
Two-dimensional labyrinth
Figure T1.0-2
Mesh structure for 2-D labyrinth model
1-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
This sub-tutorial is divided into two parts. It aims to familiarise you with the pro-STAR features you can use to set up simple problems in a relatively short time. At the end of this sub-tutorial, you should be able to: Check pro-STAR settings Set up a mesh for a simple model geometry in a Cartesian coordinate system Select solution variables Specify inlet, outlet and symmetry boundary locations and conditions Set up solution control parameters Create the necessary pro-STAR data les Resume pre-processing from a previously saved data le Dene bafe cells (zero-thickness solid cells) Run STAR and then post-process the solution results
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut1-1). Start the pre-processing task by entering the pro-STAR program (Motif version), typing the tutorial name and making the appropriate choices for an initial run. Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Check that the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option is deselected Check that the Append to Previous .echo File? option is deselected Click Continue
A title (optional) can also be given for further identification of this run In the pro-STAR menu bar, select File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 1.1 - TWO-DIMENSIONAL LAMINAR FLOW IN A LABYRINTH in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 1.1 - TWO-DIMENSIONAL LAMINAR FLOW IN A LABYRINTH Mesh Creation Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If it is not, activate it by clicking the special Open STAR GUIde button shown below:
In the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of this window, click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel. This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels
1-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation
that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the default settings in the panel are appropriate to the task so no further action is necessary. Click folder Create and Import Grids Click sub-folder Create Grids Click Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel
The panel provides a useful check on the currently-active coordinate system and cell type. It is seen that both the active coordinate system and the active cell type identifiers are set to 1. These are the system defaults and refer to the global Cartesian coordinate system and fluid cells, respectively. CSLI 1 1 1 CTLI 1 1 1 Additional coordinate systems and cell types can be added to the list, as shown in Tutorial 2 and Tutorial 3, respectively. The default settings (Cartesian coordinates, fluid cells) are what is required so no changes are necessary. The first task is to set up the computational mesh. The method employed depends, by-and-large, upon the complexity of the problem at hand. In this case there are no geometric complexities and thus the most convenient method for mesh creation is to use the text boxes under the Extent of Domain heading. The geometry, as depicted in Figure T1.0-1, is divided up into two sections. The first one covers an area of 0.3 m (X-direction) by 0.3 m (Y-direction). The second covers an area of 0.1 m (X-direction) by 0.03 m (Y-direction). The panel should therefore be used twice to set up the mesh. For the first section, enter the parameters shown below:
Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0.0 0.3 30 0.0 0.3 30 0.0 0.01 1 This creates a block of cells and their constituent vertices corresponding to the values entered above. The block extends from X1 = 0.0 to X2 = 0.3, Y1 = 0.0 to Y2 = 0.3, Z1 = 0.0 to Z2 = 0.01 where X, Y and Z are all interpreted in the currently-active local coordinate system. The number of cells in the X, Y and Z directions are 30, 30 and 1, respectively. These parameters, together with the total
1-4 Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
number of vertices and cells generated, are echoed on your I/O window. The cells created are automatically included in a cell set and then displayed in the main pro-STAR window. To look at them from a different viewpoint: Select Wire (Surface) from the cell plot type menu in the main window Set the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1. The viewing direction parameters are continuously updated at the bottom of the window. Figure T1.1-1
CSET ALL PLTY NORM VIEW 1 1 1 CPLOT
To look at the vertices making up these cells, it is necessary to collect them into a separate vertex set before plotting: In the main window, dene the vertex set by selecting V > All Click Cell Plot Display Option Vertex Choose Plot > Vertex Plot from the menu bar Figure T1.1-2 Deselect the Vertex plotting option, ready for the next operation
VSET ALL CDISP ON VERT VSTYLE,3,6,4 VPLOT CDISP OFF VERT

Version 3.26 1-5
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
To generate vertices and cells for the second part of the model, enter the parameters shown below in the STAR GUIde panel:
Click Generate Mesh In the main window, select Wire (Surface) as the current cell plot type Figure T1.1-3
VC3D 0.3 0.4 10 0.27 0.3 3 0.0 0.01 1 CSET ALL CPLOT As before, all cells currently in existence are collected into a set and displayed automatically.
1-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
The shape of the generated mesh is identical to the overall model geometry (see Figure T1.0-1). However, since the two parts of the model were meshed up separately, a discontinuity will be present at their interface. This can be seen most clearly via an edge plot, obtainable by clicking the edge plotting button shown below:
Click this button on the left side of the main window
Figure T1.1-4
EDGE ON CPLOT
Version 3.26
1-7
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
The internal edge indicates that there are two sets of vertices at the interface between the two sections of the model. While occupying the same position in space, these vertices are not shared by all the cells present on either side of the interface. To remove this discontinuity, the vertices must be merged as follows: Go to the STAR GUIde window and select the Assemble Grids panel Check that the Vertex Merge tab is displayed and that the All Vertices and Lowest options are selected in the Vertices and Keep menus, respectively Click Merge In the main window, click Cell Plot Figure T1.1-5
VMER ALL CPLOT This operation merges all coincident vertices and retains only the lowest vertex ID numbers (check this against the information displayed on the I/O window).
1-8
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Figure T1.1-5 shows that the discontinuity at the interface of the two sections no longer exists. Edge plotting may now be turned off and the cells re-plotted Click the edge button to deselect edge plotting Figure T1.1-6
EDGE OFF REPLOT
Version 3.26
1-9
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Locations
The mesh is now complete apart from still having to define the internal baffles. The strategy adopted in this sub-tutorial is to run an initial analysis without baffles. This means that you will be effectively simulating laminar flow into a box with one inlet and one outlet. The baffles will be defined later to illustrate other code capabilities. Before setting up material properties, it is sensible to save all the pre-processing information entered so far. Select cell plot type Hidden Surface File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl This operation creates a file called tut.mdl that will enable you to resume the pre-processing task at the present point (e.g. to apply further modifications to the model geometry, or to recover from a system crash). Boundary Locations The next step in the modelling process is to specify the boundary locations. Check the status of the boundary definitions as follows: In STAR GUIde, click folder Locate Boundaries and then select the Create Boundaries panel Check the current boundary denitions; the Boundary Regions scroll list should be empty, apart from the default wall boundary
BOUND STAT Boundary locations can be defined in various ways. The most convenient one for this tutorial is a graphical method that uses the Create Boundaries panel facilities plus the screen cursor. In order to employ the method, surfaces on which boundary conditions are to be imposed must be displayed on the screen. To display only the exterior surfaces of the mesh, the active cell plot type option must be either Hidden Line or Hidden Surface. The latter is already selected by default, so the only additional action needed is to view the mesh from a suitable direction. The location of the inlet is defined first. To display the inlet side of the model, view the mesh from the negative X- direction: In the main window, set the viewpoint to (-1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > -1,1,1
PLTY EHID VIEW -1 1 1 REPL Make this boundary region no. 1 as follows:
1-10
In STAR GUIde, highlight region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then select Inlet from the Type menu An optional name may be given to the boundary region. In this case, type
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
the name inlet1 in the Name box and click Dene region. The boundarys type and name now appear in the scroll list. Click Pick Cell Faces Select the cell faces corresponding to the inlet (lower ve cell faces with total height of 0.05 m) by clicking on them one by one with the screen cursor Terminate the selection by clicking DONE
RDEF 1 INLE $ $ RNAME 1 inlet1 BCRO ADD 1 The outlet boundary, called region no. 2, can be located in a similar fashion: Set the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 In STAR GUIde, select region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and dene the region type by selecting Outlet from the Type menu An optional name may be given to the boundary region. In this case, type the name outlet1 in the Name box and click Dene region. The boundarys type and name now appear in the scroll list. Click Pick Cell Faces Select the cell faces corresponding to the outlet (a total of three faces at the right-hand corner) using the cursor Terminate the selection by clicking DONE
VIEW 1 1 1 REPL RDEF 2 OUTL $ $ RNAME 2 outlet1 BCROSS ADD 2 Check the number of boundaries in existence and display them in the main window; they are distinguished by differently-coloured boundary faces. In the I/O window, you should now see that eight (five inlet and three outlet) boundaries have been defined. Click Plot All Click Count All Figure T1.1-7
COUNT BOUND BSET ALL BDISP ON CPLOT
Version 3.26
1-11
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Since the problem is two dimensional, all cell faces in the Z-direction must become part of two symmetry planes. To do this, first view the faces from a suitable direction and then use the appropriate panel button to turn them into symmetry planes: In the main window, click the Bound button to deselect the boundary plotting option Set the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z In STAR GUIde, highlight region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then select Symmetry from the Type menu Click Dene region. The boundary type corresponding to this region now appear in the scroll list Click Surface Based on Edges Click on any vertex not lying on the edge of the displayed plot
The result of the last operation is to mark all visible cell faces as boundaries and assign them to region no. 3. BDISP OFF VIEW 0 0 1 REPL RDEF 3 SYMP BZON 3 ALL This process is now repeated for the opposite side of the mesh
1-12
Set the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z In the STAR GUIde panel, click Surface Based on Edges
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Material Properties
Click on any vertex not on the edge of the displayed plot
VIEW 0 0 -1 REPL BZON 3 ALL The remaining (undefined) boundary region, consisting of the boundary surfaces at the mesh bottom, top, above the inlet and below the outlet, will be set up as a no-slip wall (region no. 0) by default. Save the work done up to this point: File > Save Model
This will over-write the previous tut.mdl file. Material Properties Check the main flow characterisitics by opening and displaying the relevant STAR GUIde panels. Click folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Click sub-folder Liquids and Gases Check the default fluid properties (air at standard temperature and pressure) by clicking Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel
Given that the flow is isothermal and incompressible, the property data that need to be checked are fluid density and molecular viscosity. The default property setting in pro-STAR is for air at standard temperature and pressure and therefore requires no change. Check the turbulence and thermal model settings by clicking Turbulence Models and Thermal Models
The default settings displayed (corresponding to a laminar and isothermal flow) are appropriate for this case, so no adjustment is necessary. Check the monitoring cell number, set by default to 1. This needs to be changed, given that the monitoring cell should be positioned in a sensitive location within the flow (so as to serve as another means of checking convergence of the solution). In this case, any cell located well within the solution domain interior will do. Click Monitoring and Reference Data Click the mouse icon and then select a cell using the cursor. The number of the cell selected appears in the Monitoring cell number text box. Click Apply
PROP STAT MONI 165 Boundary Conditions

Version 3.26
Having defined the locations of the boundaries and their associated region numbers, boundary conditions are imposed as follows:
1-13
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Conditions
Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region 1 in the scroll list Type 2.0 in the U velocity box; accept the defaults for all other boundary values Click Apply Select region 2 in the scroll list Accept the displayed default value for Flow Split (=1, i.e. there is no ow split since all uid mass exits through the single outlet)
RDEF 1 INLE 2 0 0 1 0 1.205 RDEF 2 OUTL SPLI 1.0 The default wall boundary conditions (no-slip with wall functions, stationary, impermeable, non-conducting, non-radiating) are applied by default to the domain boundaries defined as walls (i.e. region number 0). All boundaries may now be collected into a set and plotted by switching the boundary display facility on: Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Set the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 CPLOT This displays all boundaries (inlet, outlet and symmetry planes) except the default wall. To remove the symmetry plane boundaries from the current set: Select a new boundary set by choosing B > Unselect > Symplane Click Replot Figure T1.1-8
BSET DELE SYMP REPL
1-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Turn off the boundary display option and re-plot in Hidden Surface mode: Deselect the Bound option button Click Replot Figure T1.1-9
BDIS OFF REPL
Version 3.26
1-15
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Solution Controls
Update the pro-STAR model file: Solution Controls File > Save Model
It is important to check at this point that the correct solution algorithm will be used and that the variables of interest (in this case U, V velocity components and pressure) are going to be solved. Click folder Analysis Controls Click sub-folder Solution Controls Click Solution Method to display the corresponding panel and conrm that the case will be run as a steady-state problem using the SIMPLE algorithm Click sub-folder Equation Behavior Click Primary Variables to display the corresponding panel
It will be seen that the three components of velocity U, V and W (in the global Cartesian X-, Y- and Z-directions, respectively) plus pressure are selected for solution by default. Since the flow in this example is two dimensional, it is not necessary to solve for the W velocity component and therefore it is sensible to switch off the solution for the W momentum equation. Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations Click Apply
SOLV LW N In the I/O window, this is indicated by the change in the W velocity solution flag (LW) from T(rue) to F(alse). For more detailed information on the solution control status, type STAT Output Controls Specify that the STAR solution file is to be refreshed at a frequency of 30 iterations. Click sub-folder Output Controls Click Analysis Output to display the corresponding panel Enter 30 in the Solution Output Frequency text box Click Apply
WDAT REST 30 The frequency at which flow data are saved is purely arbitrary. This, however, should be set to a reasonable number compared with the maximum number of iterations. Model Checks The geometry and other model details can now be checked fully as follows: Click folder Check Model Setup Click Check Everything to display the corresponding panel Click the All button at the bottom of the panel
Version 3.26
1-16
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Final Operations
The results of the checks performed by pro-STAR are displayed in the I/O window, showing that no problems were encountered. It is advisable to check all the displayed information regarding mesh entities, such as boundaries, against the expected values. Final Operations At this point, the basic problem definition is complete. The next step is to check the maximum number of iterations. Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display the corresponding panel
It will be seen that the maximum number of iterations is currently 100. This needs to be reset to a higher value because a converged solution should be obtained before the maximum is reached. If this does not actually happen, the solution can still be continued in a later session, provided a solution file exists as discussed below. Enter 150 in the Number of Iterations text box Click Apply
ITER 150 The pre-processing task is now complete. At this point you have two choices: 1. Terminating the current pro-STAR session and then running STAR explicitly to perform the CFD analysis as described in the User Guide (see Chapter 2, Running a CFD Analysis, Step 6). If you follow this method, pro-STAR needs to be run afresh to evaluate (post-process) the results. 2. Running STAR interactively as part of the current pro-STAR session. This is a more convenient approach, especially for simple cases. If this method is adopted: (a) Feedback on how the STAR analysis is progressing is displayed graphically and in real time via the StarWatch utility (b) You can perform the post-processing operations as soon as STAR has nished running, without interupting your current pro-STAR session Given its obvious benefits, the second approach is recommended. If for any reason you wish to terminate the session at this stage, you will need to write and save all files necessary for running STAR (tut.prob and tut.geom) as follows: File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob By default, the geometry file is written with Scale Factor = 1.0, File Type = Binary
Version 3.26 1-17
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
CFD Analysis (STAR) Flow Analysis
and Option = Check. The problem file, on the other hand, is written by default in coded form. Finally, before exiting from pro-STAR, make sure that the model file (tut.mdl) is saved for possible future modification. QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) Flow Analysis During execution, STAR will provide basic information on the progress of the numerical solution. Some of this information, in the form of field values and solution residuals, can be displayed graphically by StarWatch. The latter is a solution monitoring utility activated automatically when STAR starts running as part of a fully interactive pro-STAR session. Before StarWatch can begin monitoring a STAR run, the StarWatch daemon must be activated outside pro-STAR as described in Chapter 21, The StarWatch Utility. Provided the /etc/services file has been updated, the following steps will start the daemon: Open a window on your computer Type starwdaemon to start off the StarWatch daemon and then send it to the background File > Quit > Save & Quit
To perform the analysis interactively, you need to go to the relevant STAR GUIde panel and, if necessary, supply additional information about the model (such as units used) before running STAR. If not done already, file tut.mdl should also be saved. File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The CFD analysis will then start automatically on the basis of information stored in the geometry and problem description files (files tut.geom and tut.prob, respectively). These are also written and saved automatically. To make use of StarWatch: Select Connect > Host In the Select Host dialog, verify that the host machine name displayed is that of the machine running your case and then click OK In the Select STAR Job dialog, select your runs job ID from the list and then click OK. StarWatch will start displaying the results of your simulation at this point. The default display shows solution residuals versus iteration number.
Note that numerous StarWatch display adjustments are possible at any stage of the
1-18 Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Solution Checks
run (e.g. graph scale), as described in Chapter 21, The StarWatch Utility. The display should show that convergence was achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. The results of the analysis are written to file tut.pst. Solution Checks The solution monitoring information produced during the analysis is also written to file tut.run. This file may be inspected at any time after completion of the run to confirm the model settings or to check the rate of convergence. The easiest way of doing this is as follows: In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run History of Previous Analysis panel Click Browse Standard Output File to display the required information
The file may also contain a warning on whether error messages were produced during the run. File tut.info will contain these messages. To view its contents: Click Browse Additional Output File
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries The first step of the post-processing task is to load file tut.pst, containing the CFD analysis data. This may be done using STAR GUIdes post-processing panel as followsprostar: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Basic Plots To plot any flow variables, it is necessary to store them in memory first. To store cell-centred data, use the Data tab facilities. For example, for velocity vectors: Select Data Type Cell. pro-STAR will display the available analysis data inside the three scroll lists on this tab. In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UV to load the 2D velocity components calculated by STAR in the x-y plane In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data
GETC U V NONE pro-STARs action is confirmed by the message VECTOR COMPONENT U STORED VECTOR COMPONENT V STORED in the I/O window. Having stored the data, specify the plot type, change the viewpoint and plot.
Version 3.26
Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel

1-19
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Basic Plots
In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen In the main window, select viewing direction (-1, 1, 1) by choosing View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Figure T1.1-10
POPT VECT PLTY QHID VIEW -1 1 1 CPLOT
It can be seen that velocity vectors are superimposed on the plotted mesh. By switching on edge plotting, the vectors can be displayed more clearly Turn on edge plotting by clicking the Edge button Figure T1.1-11
EDGE ON REPL
1-20
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
The edge plotting facility is kept on for the remaining plots. Pressure can be plotted in a similar way. For example, the interpolated vertex-based pressure contours are produced as follows: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Static Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot option Contour (lled) and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T1.1-12
PLTY EHID GETV NONE PSTAT POPT CONT CPLOT
Version 3.26
1-21
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Final Operations
This completes the post-processing task. More plotting operations are introduced in subsequent tutorials. Final Operations It is evident that all the predicted results are plausible, therefore the post-processing session can be terminated. As there were no changes to the model geometry or solution parameters, there is now no need to save file tut.mdl QUIT N The baffles can now be defined, as described in the next section. File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
1-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
LAMINAR FLOW (continued)
Tutorial 1.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries This session will continue from the previously stored model file, namely tut.mdl. The same case name could be specified on starting the new pro-STAR session. This, however, is not recommended because file tut.mdl would then be overwritten when saving new data about the model. A different case name, tutc, will therefore be used in this part of the tutorial. As a result, it is necessary to copy tut.mdl to a new file, tutc.mdl, before running pro-STAR. Start the pre-processing task as before and enter the following information in the introductory panel: Type tutc in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
File tutc.mdl will be read and the main parameters of your model will be displayed in the I/O window. It is always sensible to review at least some of the existing model details prior to implementing any changes. A number of facilities, accessible from the Lists menu, are available for this purpose. For example, to check the vertex, cell and boundary definitions use Lists > Vertices Click Close Lists > Cells Click Close Lists > Boundaries Click Close
in addition to the obvious on-screen mesh display Click Cell Plot
VLIS 1 10 1 CLIS 1 10 1 RLIS ALL CPLOT It is evident from the combined print and plot information that the input data are all correct. The baffles can now be defined. Creating Bafes A two-stage process is chosen for the baffle definition: 1. Expose the cell faces on which the bafes are to be placed. 2. Use the CZONE operation to create the bafe cells.
Version 3.26
1-23
Tutorial 1.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Creating Bafes
There are many ways of exposing cell faces in the mesh interior. Given that all relevant dimensions can be specified easily, a suitable method is to use command CSET with the NEWS and GRAN options (type HELP CSET to display the command details). In the I/O window, type: CSET NEWS GRAN 0.0 0.055 0.145 0.30 CPLOT Figure T1.1-13
This will plot all cells within the range given by the CSET command and thus enable definition of the first set of baffles. First, activate the Cell Tool and check the cell table to make sure that the baffle cell type is already present Tools > Cell Tool
CTLI ALL It is seen that baffle is one of the default cell types and therefore no further input is necessary. The baffles need to be placed on cell faces on the right-hand side of the currently displayed plot. This requires a change in the viewing direction to (1,0,0): In the main window choose View > Axis > +X Figure T1.1-14
VIEW 1 0 0 REPL
1-24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
Use the CZONE operation to attach baffles to the visible cell faces in the current plot. The system will confirm your action by marking these faces. In the Cell Tool, select cell type Bafe (number 3) on the Cell Table scroll list Choose Add Bafes > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the mesh
CZON BAFF 3 ALL Change the viewing direction and plot type, collect all cells into a set and plot. In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by choosing View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Select plot type Quick Hidden Line Select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T1.1-15
VIEW 1 1 1 PLTY QHID CSET ALL CPLOT
Version 3.26
1-25
Tutorial 1.1
The baffle cells created so far can now be seen on the screen. The remaining three baffles are defined in a similar manner. For simplicity, the required operations are given in command form: PLTY CSET VIEW CPLO CZON VIEW PLTY CSET CPLO PLTY CSET VIEW CPLO CZON VIEW PLTY CSET CPLO PLTY CSET VIEW CPLO CZON
1-26
EHID NEWS GRAN 0.0 0.105 0.0 0.155 1 0 0 BAFF 3 ALL 1 1 1 NORM ALL EHID NEWS GRAN 0.105 0.155 0.145 0.30 1 0 0 BAFF 3 ALL 1 1 1 NORM ALL EHID NEWS GRAN 0.155 0.205 0.0 0.155 1 0 0 BAFF 3 ALL
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Geometry Checks
VIEW 1 1 1 PLTY NORM CSET ALL CPLO To display only the baffle cells you have created: Check that cell type Bafe (number 3) is still selected in the Cell Table scroll list of the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > Subset > Type (Current) In the I/O window, check the total number of selected cells (4 * 15 = 60) Click Cell Plot Figure T1.1-16 Close the Cell Tool
CSET SUBS TYPE 3 CPLOT
Change the plot type to Quick Hidden Line In the main window, select plot type Quick Hidden Line
PLTY QHID Geometry Checks Check the geometry by confirming the number of cells and baffles created: Utility > Count All
COUN ALL
Version 3.26
1-27
Tutorial 1.1
CFD Analysis (STAR) Control Parameters
The number of cells for cell type FLUID (cell table index 1) and BAFFLE (cell table index 3) should be 930 and 60, respectively. Control Parameters Check the current control parameters Click the Analysis Controls folder and inspect the settings in the various sub-folders.
CONT STAT As the solution for this version of the problem will be different to that of the previous sub-tutorial, it is acceptable to begin the analysis from the default initial conditions set up automatically by pro-STAR. Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Analysis (Re)Start to display the corresponding panel. Conrm that the Restart File Option is set to None
RDAT NONE Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using STAR GUIdes interactive running facilities. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM [carriage return] PROB [carriage return] QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) Flow Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, use the STAR GUIde facilities as follows:
1-28
File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries
This action has the desired effect and enables STAR to run to completion. As before, verify that the problem solution was achieved without any problems by checking the contents of files tutc.run and tutc.info. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Click Open Post File
LOAD tutc.pst Postprocessing The data display operations in this session repeat those described in the previous session and are as follows: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot In the Load Data panel, open the Data tab and select Data Type Cell. In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UV to load the 2D velocity components calculated by STAR in the x-y plane In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen In the main window, select plot type Quick Hidden Line Select viewing direction (-1, 1, 1) by choosing View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Figure T1.1-17 Turn on edge plotting by clicking the Edge button Figure T1.1-18
GETC U V NONE CSET ALL POPT VECT VIEW -1 1 1 CPLOT EDGE ON REPL
Version 3.26
1-29
Tutorial 1.1
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Post- processing

1-30
Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.1
Click Plot to Screen In the main pro-STAR window, select plot type Quick Hidden Line
Figure T1.1-19
GETV NONE P POPT CONT PLTY QHID REPL
Note that when plotting in Quick Hidden Line mode, contours are displayed as lines instead of the usual continuous colour shading. Final Operations QUIT N File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
Version 3.26
1-31
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
In the previous sub-tutorial, the flow was assumed to be laminar. Working out the Reynolds number of the flow based on the inlet port height as HV Re = -----------
3 1.205 0.05 2.0 - = 6.657 10 Re = ----------------------------------------5 1.81 10
it is evident that the flow is turbulent. Therefore, to account for the turbulence level generated and the associated effect on the flow, it is necessary to employ a turbulence model. In this sub-tutorial, a new version of the model is presented as an illustration of how to set up turbulent flow problems and their associated boundary conditions. By the end of this sub-tutorial, users should be able to: Select a turbulence model Specify values for turbulence parameters at inlet boundaries Restart STAR from a previously written solution le
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries This session will continue from the pro-STAR restart file, tutc.mdl, stored at the end of Tutorial 1.1 but will be run as a separate case. As noted in the User Guide (see Chapter 2, Running a CFD Analysis, Step 2) it is advisable to start the session in a different sub-directory (say tut1-2). Therefore, before running pro-STAR, copy file tutc.mdl from directory tut1-1 into file tut.mdl in directory tut1-2. This implies that the case name specified for this run will be tut. Upon completion of this task, run pro-STAR as before: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
On reading file tut.mdl, details of the model will be displayed on your screen. A new title is chosen for this sub-tutorial: File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 1.2 - TWO-DIMENSIONAL TURBULENT FLOW IN A LABYRINTH in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 1.2 - TWO DIMENSIONAL TURBULENT FLOW IN A LABYRINTH Check the model details displayed in the I/O window and then plot the mesh
Version 3.26 1-33
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Turbulence Model
Select C > All Click Cell Plot
Figure T1.2-1
CSET ALL CPLO
The imported model geometry is correct. The required modifications can now be made. Turbulence Model To check the current definition of the flow character, use the STAR GUIde facilities as follows: PROP STAT It is seen that the setting in this panel is Off, as expected, so you now need to select an option that turns on one of the available turbulence models. The choice of model, by and large, is problem-dependent. In the present tutorial, the standard two-equation k- model, which is adequate for most situations, will be employed.
1-34
Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Turbulence Models panel
Click On to turn on turbulence Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the menu at the top of the panel Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
TURB KE STAT The system also displays details about the turbulence model employed (such as numerical values of model coefficients) on the I/O window. Note that coefficient values may also be inspected on the STAR-GUIde panel, by clicking the Show Coefficients button. Boundary Conditions Check the current definitions of the boundary regions: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel
RLIS 0 3 1 Switching on a turbulence model means that certain turbulence parameters have to be prescribed at the inlet. In this problem, there is only one inlet (i.e. Region 1) where values for both k and are required. As inlet conditions appropriate to laminar flow have already been defined in Tutorial 1.1, the Dene Boundary Regions panel should now be used to modify the existing conditions, as follows: Select region no. 1 (Inlet) in the scroll list Select option k/Epsilon from the Turb. Switch menu Type 0.06 in the k box Type 0.483 in the Epsilon box Click Apply
RTURB,1,KEPS,0.06,0.483 The prescribed values, 0.06 for k and 0.483 for , are based on the assumption of 10% turbulence intensity and a mixing length of 0.005 (one order of magnitude less than the inlet port height). The equations used were: k = 1.5 ( U I ) 2 where U I and =
0.75 C

1.5
inlet velocity turbulent intensity
k ------l
where C k l
0.09 (from the turbulence model) turbulent kinetic energy turbulent mixing length
Version 3.26
1-35
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Control Parameters
Alternatively (and more conveniently) you may use the Turb. Switch menu to specify turbulence parameters in terms of turbulence intensity I and mixing length l. To do this: Select option TI/Length Note the change in labelling for the text boxes to the left of Turb. Switch; new values should be entered in the Turb. Intensity and Length boxes, corresponding to the new input setting
The equivalent command is: RINLET,1,,MIXL Control Parameters Check the current control parameters: CONT STAT Since the model in this sub-tutorial is not substantially different (in terms of overall geometry) from that in Tutorial 1.1, it is reasonable to use the latters converged solution file (tut.pst) as the initial guess for the current velocity and pressure field. This may be done as follows: Click Analysis (Re)Start to display the corresponding panel Select option Initial Field Restart from the Restart File Option pop-up menu Select option Restart (New Boundary Values) from the Initial Field Restart pop-up menu Click Apply Click the Analysis Controls folder and inspect the settings in the various sub-folders. Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display the corresponding panel
RDAT INIT B The initial field values of k and should also be set to correspond to the inlet values specified above.
1-36
Click folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Click sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Initialization to display the corresponding panel Select Manual Initialization from the pop-up menu at the top of the panel Select the Turbulence tab Enter 0.06 in the Turbulent Energy box Enter 0.483 in the Epsilon box
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
CFD Analysis (STAR) Final Operations
Click Apply
CINI N N INIT STAN, , , , , , ,KEPS, 0.06, 0.483 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities to run STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) As the solution from Tutorial 1.1 is to be used to restart the computation, it is necessary to copy file tutc.pst to file tut.pst before starting the STAR run. To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open panel Run Analysis Interactively Leave all settings at their default values and click Restart Analysis
Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations.
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis: Select folder Post-Processing and open the Load Data panel Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing

Version 3.26
Perform the following post-processing operations and examine the results: In the Load Data panel, go to the Data tab and select Data Type Cell
1-37
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UV to load the 2D velocity components calculated by STAR in the x-y plane In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Select viewing direction (-1, 1, 1) by choosing View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 In the main pro-STAR window, select plot type Quick Hidden Line Figure T1.2-2 U V NONE VECT ON -1 1 1
GETC POPT EDGE VIEW CPLO

1-38
Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure and then click Get Data Click Go To Create Plots to display the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T1.2-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
PLTY EHID GETV NONE P POPT CONT REPL
To plot vertex-based values for k and : Go back to the Data tab by clicking Go To Load Data In the Scalar Data list, select item Turb Kinetic Energy Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot In the Scalar Data list, select item Dissipation Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot
Figure T1.2-4
Figure T1.2-5
GETV NONE TE REPL GETV NONE ED REPL
Version 3.26
1-39
Tutorial 1.2
TURBULENT FLOW
Final Operations
QUIT N
File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
1-40
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2 3-D FLOW IN A PARTIALLY BLOCKED ELBOW

Physical Problem Description The problem geometry is shown in Figure T2.0-1. Air at standard pressure (1.0 bar) and temperature (293 K) enters the channel at a velocity of 10 m/s (Reynolds number = 16910). The fluid, having passed a partial blockage and a 90 degree elbow, exits vertically through the outlet. Its physical properties are as follows: Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity 1.205 1.81 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/m3 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
In Tutorial 2.1, all fluid properties are assumed to be constant. Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is used: Combination of Cartesian and cylindrical coordinate systems with uniformly spaced hexahedral cells. The required mesh structure is shown in Figure T2.0-2. Mesh generation based on a multi-block technique Inlet, outlet, and wall boundary regions Incompressible and steady ow options Appropriate physical parameters for the uid k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics
Version 3.26
2-1
Modelling Strategy
Outlet
Y 4
O c + 2
Inlet A 1 1 A B B
Figure T2.0-1
Three-dimensional partially blocked elbow
Figure T2.0-2
2-2
Mesh structure for three-dimensional elbow model

Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Preliminaries
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
This tutorial contains an extensive introduction to pro-STARs STAR GUIde graphical user interface. Accordingly, the user is presented with an overview of the entire procedure of creating and running a CFD model using STAR-CD. The STAR GUIde interface has been developed to allow CFD models to be created, run, and post-processed without needing to learn text-based pro-STAR commands or menu-driven operations. The graphical interface encourages a step-by-step approach to CFD model building and this can result in substantial time savings, particularly for the novice user. Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-1) and then start up pro-STAR as follows: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Check that the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option is deselected Check that the Append to Previous .echo File? option is deselected Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.1 - 3D TURBULENT FLOW IN A PARTIALLY BLOCKED ELBOW (AIR, ISOTHERMAL) in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.1 - 3D TURBULENT FLOW IN A PARTIALLY BLOCKED ELBOW (AIR, ISOTHERMAL) Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If it is not, activate it by clicking the Open STAR GUIde button shown below:
Mesh Creation Given that the problem has no significant geometric complexities, it is reasonable to use one of pro-STARs automatic meshing facilities to create the basic grid. The strategy chosen here is to divide the geometry into three sections (see Figure T2.0-1). The appropriate STAR GUIde panel is subsequently applied to each section in turn to create three subsets of the final mesh. These are then joined together to create a mesh covering the entire model.
Version 3.26 2-3
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Mesh Creation Section 1
Section 1
The first section represents the region between the inlet and the beginning of the elbow (see Figure T2.0-1) and is defined in the default Cartesian coordinate system, as follows: In the STAR GUIde window, go to the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section on the left-hand side and click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel on the right-hand side. This master panel enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are active during the current session. The default settings displayed are appropriate for this tutorial, so no further action is necessary. Click folder Create and Import Grids Click sub-folder Create Grids Click Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel
Use the text boxes in the Extent of Domain section to enter appropriate parameters for this part of the grid, as shown below:
Click Generate Mesh In the main window, use the slider controls of the plot orientation cube to set the viewing direction to approximately (0.3, 0.3, 1) Figure T2.1-1 0.0 2.0 8 0.0 1.0 8 0.0 1.0 8 ALL 0.3 0.3 1 EHID
VC3D CSET VIEW PLTY CPLO
2-4
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Section 2
The second section is the elbow itself and is meshed up using a local cylindrical coordinate system whose origin is at point Oc (2, 2, 0) (see Figure T2.0-1). The origin is defined as follows: Click Select a Coordinate System In the Coordinate Systems dialog, highlight system no. 11 in the scroll list Select option Cylindrical in the pop-up menu Type 2.0, 2.0, 0.0, respectively, in the rst three boxes under the scroll list Click New (Local)
LOCA 11 CYLI 2.0 2.0 0.0 CSLI 11 STAT Since this is a newly-dened coordinate system, pro-STAR adds it to the coordinate system table and displays its attributes on the scroll list. Note the asterisk at the beginning of the definition line, signifying that the active coordinate system is now 11. Use the Extent of Domain boxes again to create the mesh for the elbow section and display everything created so far:
Version 3.26
2-5
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Click Generate Mesh
Figure T2.1-2
VC3D 1.0 2.0 8 270.0 360.0 9 0.0 1.0 8 CSET ALL CPLO
Section 3
The third section lies between the end of the elbow and the outlet (see Figure T2.0-1) and can be defined in the Cartesian coordinate system. Since, however, the currently-active coordinate system is still no. 11 (cylindrical), it is necessary to change back to no. 1 (Cartesian) before creating the remaining grid. In the Coordinate Systems dialog, highlight system no. 1 and then click the Set Active button Click Close
CSYS 1
2-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Use the Extent of Domain boxes to create the mesh for the final section and display the entire mesh:
Click Generate Mesh
Figure T2.1-3
VC3D 3.0 4.0 8 2.0 6.0 8 0.0 1.0 8 CSET ALL CPLO
The overall shape of the generated mesh (Figure T2.1-3) corresponds exactly to the model geometry (Figure T2.0-1). However, since the three mesh blocks were created separately, there will be discontinuities (double vertices) at each block interface. These can be seen by plotting the grid edges only: Select option Wire (Surface) from the plot type pop-up menu Click the edge plotting button
Version 3.26
2-7
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
located on the left-hand side of the main window PLTY NORM EDGE ON REPL
Figure T2.1-4
To remove the discontinuities, the vertices must be merged as follows: In the Create and Import Grids folder, click Assemble Grids to display the corresponding panel Ensure that the Vertex Merge tab is displayed and that the Vertices menu is set to option All Vertices Click Merge In the main window, click Cell Plot Figure T2.1-5
VMER ALL N CPLO
2-8
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Turn off edge plotting and re-plot the cells: Select option Hidden Surface from the plot type pop-up menu Click the edge button to deselect edge plotting Figure T2.1-6
PLTY EHID EDGE OFF REPL
Version 3.26
2-9
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Mesh Creation Flow Obstruction
Flow Obstruction
The mesh is now complete. However, the flow obstruction still needs to be created. This is done by simply deleting the cells occupying the volume that corresponds to the obstruction. One way of doing this is given below. Select and plot the upstream portion of the model (Section 1). Then turn on cell numbering, change the view to expose the cells to be deleted and replot: Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Choose C > New > Zone and then use the cursor to draw a closed polygon around those cells lying in the range 0 < x < 2. Note that, as an aid to this operation, you may type command TICMARK ON in the I/O window. This will display a grid and coordinate values on top of the plot and thus make the range selection easier. Click Cell Plot Plot > Number > Cell Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (1, 0.1, 0.1) Figure T2.1-7
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.0 2.0,,,,,1 NUMB CELL ON VIEW 1 0.1 0.1 CPLO
The most convenient method of deleting cells in the four-by-four group in the lower left-hand corner (cell ranges 505-508, 441-444, 377-380, 313-316) is via the terminal cursor In the main window, select C > New > Cursor Select Select the cells mentioned above one by one with the cursor and then click Done to end the selection
Version 3.26
2-10
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Mesh Creation Flow Obstruction
Tools > Cell Tool > Delete Cells > Cell Set
CSET NEWS CCRS CDEL CSET Collect the remaining cells, turn off the cell numbering and plot again In the main window, select C > All Plot > Number, then deselect the Cell option button Click Cell Plot Select a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (0.3, 0.3, 1) by dragging with the left mouse button. Figure T2.1-8
CSET ALL NUMB CELL OFF VIEW 0.3 0.3 1 CPLO The mesh generation is now complete.
Before setting up the material properties, remove all vertices that were deleted (merged) while joining up the blocks. Also remove all cells that were deleted while creating the obstruction. The result will be a new, renumbered mesh:
Version 3.26
Tools > Vertex Tool > Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, accept all defaults and click Apply Close the VCompress dialog Close the Vertex Tool In the Cell Tool, click Cell Compress
2-11
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Checking and Fixing the Grid Flow Obstruction
Close the Cell Tool
VCOM ALL Y CCOM Y Store all the pre-processing information typed in so far File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl This will create a pro-STAR model file for this problem called tut.mdl Checking and Fixing the Grid At this point, it is prudent to check the quality of the mesh. pro-STAR provides a number of automated tools that streamline this process. Prior to running the checks, make sure that the appropriate cell set is selected. In this case, the cell set should consist of all fluid cells. As described previously, use the Cell Set button in the main pro-STAR window to select such cells. The check tool is accessed as follows: Click on folder Check and Fix Grid in the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of the STAR GUIde window. Select Check Grid to display the corresponding panel. It can be seen that the Check Option pop-up menu provides checks for double vertices and cells, right-handed cell denitions, cell aspect ratio, etc. Select the item that you wish to check and then click the Apply button at the bottom of the panel.
Note that you can choose whether any cells that do not pass the chosen check should be placed in a new cell set, so that they can be displayed. This selection is made via the second pop-up menu in the panel. Although not needed in this tutorial, pro-STAR provides tools to improve the mesh quality when necessary. In the Check and Fix Grid folder, click Fix Grid Problems to display the corresponding panel. From this panel, the mesh can be smoothed, the cell face warpage reduced, and internal angles and excessively skew cells xed.
Setting Up the Analysis Once an acceptable grid has been created, various parameters required for the CFD analysis must be defined:
2-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Setting Up the Analysis Material Properties and Physical Models
Material This part of model building is conveniently handled through a series of panels under Properties the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder. and Physical Click the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder to display the Models available facilities Click sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel For this tutorial, the fluid is air at standard pressure and temperature. The temperature, density, and viscosity are assumed to be constant. These conditions are also the pro-STAR defaults, so the properties shown on the panel are acceptable. PROP STAT Click Turbulence Models to display the corresponding panel Click On to switch on turbulence Select the desired turbulence model, K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number, from the drop-down menu Click Show coefcients if you want to see the parameters that will be used with this model Click Apply to save your settings Click Monitoring and Reference Data in the NavCenter section to check the cell whose ow variable values will be sent to the solution monitoring le (tut.run). The cell number appears in the Monitoring cell number box and can be left at its default value of 1. The displayed Reference Data defaults for pressure and reference pressure cell location are also acceptable.
TURB KE Boundary Locations and Conditions The next step is to define model boundaries. Specification of boundary conditions involves the use of two panels. The first one, Create Boundaries, enables various boundary regions to be identified within your model. The second one, Dene Boundary Regions, is used to specify the properties of the boundary regions. This procedure is illustrated below: Click folder Locate Boundaries Click Create Boundaries to display the corresponding panel
There are three boundary regions in this case an inlet, an outlet and a wall. pro-STAR automatically assumes that any external surfaces that have not been specified as boundaries by the user belong to Region 0 and, by default, Region 0 is a no-slip, adiabatic wall. Therefore, wall boundaries do not have to be specifically identified in this particular problem. For the other two boundary types, you need to assign a region number and (optional) name to both the inlet and outlet regions. To do this: Go to the Regions tab and select Reg #1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list
2-13
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Setting Up the Analysis Boundary Locations and Conditions
Select Inlet from the Type menu and then click Dene region Repeat for the outlet region, by selecting Reg #2, then Type Outlet and nally Dene region
The scroll list also shows that Reg #0, corresponding to all the undefined external surfaces of the model, is a wall region by default. Now that region numbers have been assigned, the physical locations of the regions can be specified. The panels Set Boundaries section provides four tools for doing this, two of which are illustrated in this example: Change the plot view so that both inlet and outlet regions are visible (see Figure T2.1-9). Select Reg #1 (Inlet) in the Boundary Regions scroll list. Click the Surface Based on Edges button. A vertex set that contains all vertices that lie along the mesh edges is created automatically. The cross-hair cursor will also appear. Click on a vertex inside the inlet region. pro-STAR will assign all cell surface faces enclosed by the nearest edges to the inlet region. Click Reg #2 (Outlet) in the Boundary Regions scroll list. Click the Surface Based on Vset button since the vertex set dening the edges already exists. The cross-hair cursor will appear again. Click on a vertex inside the outlet region. pro-STAR will assign all surface cell faces enclosed by the nearest edges to the outlet region. In the Plot/Count Boundaries section, click Plot All. The inlet and outlet regions should be displayed as shown in Figure T2.1-9.
BOUN STAT RDEF RDEF VSET CSET VIEW CPLO BFIN BFIN BSET BDIS EDGE REPL
1 INLE $ $ 2 OUTL $ $ NEWS EDGE ALL -1 1 1 1 VX 2 VX ALL ON ON
2-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Setting Up the Analysis Boundary Locations and Conditions
Outlet region
Inlet region
Figure T2.1-9
Inlet and outlet boundary regions
Turn off the boundary region plot In the main pro-STAR window, deselect the Bound button
Now that the boundary regions have been physically located, their particular properties (i.e. boundary conditions) can be assigned as follows: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel through which boundary values can be entered. In this panel, choose a region from the panels scroll list. The lower part of the panel will change to display parameters that are appropriate for the particular region selected. Note that the type of boundary condition assigned to each region may also be changed in this panel. Inspect the conditions shown for each boundary region. These are either pro-STAR defaults or derived from data entered in previous panels. Enter new values/settings or accept the ones displayed. Figure T2.1-10 shows the correct values/settings that must be applied. If you have altered any boundary values or chosen a different setting for any region, conrm your input by clicking the Apply button.
BDIS OFF REPL RDEF 1 INLE 10.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 1.205 RTURB 1,KEPS,0.00375,0.0377 RDEF 2 OUTL SPLI 1.0
Version 3.26 2-15
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Checking the Model Boundary Locations and Conditions
Wall Boundary Region Settings Inlet Boundary Region Settings

Default wall boundary conditions: no-slip with wall functions, stationary, impermeable, non-conducting, non-radiating
Specify uid inlet velocity
Set the Turb. Switch to k/Epsilon and enter turbulence data based on 5% turbulence intensity
Density value, as entered in the Molecular Properties

Click here to save the new settings
Outlet Boundary Region Settings
Default ow split condition, with 1.0 as the fraction of ow passing through this boundary region
Figure T2.1-10
Entering boundary condition values
Checking the Model The model building process is now complete. The next step is to do a final comprehensive check for any errors or inconsistencies before starting up the CFD analysis run.
2-16
Click folder Check Model Setup Click Check Everything to display the corresponding panel. Here, you
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Running the Analysis Boundary Locations and Conditions
have the opportunity to perform a nal series of checks on the model data before running the STAR analysis. Click All (Check Everything). No pop-up error message windows should appear. This means that the nal checks have been successfully completed and therefore the model is ready to run.
Running the Analysis This section describes the steps necessary to run a STAR CFD analysis for the current model. First, specify the control parameters that define the run status (new or restart) and the number of iterations. Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display the corresponding panel. The default maximum number of iterations is 100 and it should be adequate for this case. Click Analysis (Re)Start to display the corresponding panel. The setting of the Restart File Option menu should be None, conrming that this is a run from initial conditions.
CONT STAT StarWatch, a solution monitoring utility, may be used to display information on the progress of this run. This requires that the StarWatch daemon be activated outside pro-STAR as described in Chapter 21, The StarWatch Utility. Provided the /etc/services file has been updated, the following steps will start the daemon: Open a window on your computer Type starwdaemon to start the StarWatch daemon and then send it to the background
The STAR GUIde interface may be used to set up either a batch or an interactive run. An interactive analysis is illustrated here: Open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check the units of the pro-STAR model. In this case, the model was built in inches so the corresponding option button should be selected. pro-STAR automatically supplies the appropriate scale factor to convert inches to metres. Accept the default setting for the STAR Executable Precision (Single) Click Start New Analysis to create the problem and geometry files, and then run STAR.
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob Once the run starts, STAR will provide basic information on the progress of the numerical solution. Part of this information, in the form of field values and solution
Version 3.26 2-17
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Post-Processing the Results 3-D Surface Plot
residuals, can be displayed graphically via StarWatch, which is activated automatically as soon as STAR starts running. To make use of StarWatch: Select Connect > Host In the Select Host dialog, verify that the host machine name displayed is that of the machine running your case and then click OK In the Select STAR Job dialog, select your runs job ID from the list and then click OK. StarWatch will start displaying results for your analysis at this point. The default display shows solution residuals versus iteration number. Inspect this information to make sure that the solution has converged. Convergence should occur after 46 iterations.
Save the model data by selecting File > Save Model from the pro-STAR window menu SAVE, tut.mdl Post-Processing the Results This section describes how to post-process the results of the STAR run. Three types of plot 3-D Surface, 2-D Section and Particle Tracks will be demonstrated. All can be quickly and easily generated from within the STAR GUIde environment: 3-D Surface Plot Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel. The solution le (tut.pst) is automatically displayed in the Steady State Post File box. Click Open Post File
First, create a 3-D surface plot of the total pressure: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid In the Load Data panel, select the Data tab Leave the setting of the Data Type menu to Cell; this means that the next plot will be created using cell-centre-based results Select On from the Smooth Option menu to get smooth plot contours Check that the default option in the Vector Data list is None Select option Total Pressure in the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, ensure that tab 3-D Surface is displayed and then choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen to create the plot shown in Figure T2.1-11 tut.pst NEWS FLUID NONE PTOT CSET CONT
Version 3.26
LOAD CSET GETC CAVE POPT

2-18
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Post-Processing the Results 2-D Section Plot
CPLO
Figure T2.1-11
Three-dimensional surface plot of pressure
2-D Section Plot
Next, create a 2-D section plot of the velocity vectors. Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, choose Data Type option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) to create a plot using vertex-based results Check that the default option in the Scalar Data list is None In the Vector Data list, select Velocity Component UVW to load all three velocity components Click Get Data Select Go To Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z values (0, 0, 0.75) for the section Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the x-y plane with a z-value of 0.75, since the Normal x, y values are zero by default. Click Apply Click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window to display the plot shown in Figure T2.1-12
PLTY SECT SPOI,0,0,0.75

Version 3.26 2-19
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
Post-Processing the Results Particle Tracks
SNORM 0 0 1 VIEW SNOR GETV U V W NONE POPT VECT CPLO
Figure T2.1-12
Two-dimensional section plot of velocity vectors
Particle Tracks
The last plot is for particle tracks. For a steady-state run, as in this case, a particle track is essentially a streamline, illustrating the path of an imaginary particle through the flow field. In the Post-Processing folder, select the Particle Tracks sub-folder and then open the Create Particle Tracks panel. In the main pro-STAR window, change the cell plot type to Geometry Plot and Hidden Surface and the view point to something similar to that of Figure T2.1-11 Restore the normal mesh display by clicking on the mesh plotting button and clicking off the edge button
PLME ON EDGE OFF Figure T2.1-13 illustrates the steps required to define the particle tracks and Figure T2.1-14 shows the results.
2-20
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
1 2 3
Steps for Creating a Particle Track 1. Select the Initialization tab 2. Select Points on Cells/Vertices from the top menu 3. Select option Add Vertex 4. Select vertices in the main window using the mouse. These represent the starting points of the particle tracks (see below), and will be listed in the Select Starting Locations scroll list.
6 5. Turn on edge plotting by clicking on the edge button in the main window. 6. Click Apply, then select the Generation tab. 7. Click Generate Tracks to create the particle tracks. Select Go To > Plot Particle Tracks.
Figure T2.1-13
Version 3.26
Creating particle tracks

2-21
Tutorial 2.1
BASE CASE
8. In the Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks panel (Particle Tracks tab), choose the Continuous option from the Display Options menu. Click Plot Tracks.
Figure T2.1-14
Particle track plot
POPT GEOM PLTY EHID VIEW -1 0.5 1 REPLOT PARTICLE,GROUP,1 PARTICLE,ADD,88 PARTICLE,ADD,329 PARTICLE,ADD,488 EDGE ON GETC ALL CAVE ALL PTRACK,STEADY,,0.0,,,NOADJ CPLO PTPLOT,PLOT,,CONT,,,,-1,1,PART,1,3 Animated particle tracks may be produced by choosing the Segments display option. The Speed slider is used to adjust the drawing rate of the particle tracks. Finally, exit from pro-STAR by choosing File > Quit > Quit, Nosave from the main window menu.
2-22 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.2
FLOW WITH SOLID PARTICLES
Physical Problem Description Preliminaries
Tutorial 2.2
Physical Problem Description The problem geometry and flow conditions for this tutorial are as described in Tutorial 2.1. The additional physical complexity comes from the fact that the air stream is now seeded with solid particles, uniformly distributed at the duct inlet. The volumetric loading of particles in the incoming air is 0.01%, corresponding to a volumetric particle flow rate of 6.4516 107 m3 /s. The particle properties are as follows: Density Diameter Initial velocity Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is adopted: The total number of particles entering the domain are grouped into 64 parcels that are uniformly distributed across the inlet plane. All particles rebound perfectly from the walls. Gravity effects are neglected. 1.2 103 4.0 105 (10., 0., 0.) kg/m3 m m/s
This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with how to set up a simple two-phase Lagrangian analysis. At the end of the tutorial, users should be able to: Activate the two-phase Lagrangian calculations Dene initial conditions for the dispersed phase
Pre-Processing Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-2) and copy the model file created in Tutorial 2.1 (tut.mdl in directory tut2-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.2 - 3D FLOW OF AIR POLLUTED BY SOLID PARTICLES in the Title text box Click Apply
Version 3.26
2-23
Tutorial 2.2
Pre-Processing Particle Creation
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.2 - 3D FLOW OF AIR POLLUTED BY SOLID PARTICLES Particle Creation Activate two-phase Lagrangian calculations, with coupling between the continuous and dispersed phases, using the relevant STAR GUIde panels. Also set the maximum size of the particle trajectory file (in Mb) and maximum tracking time (in seconds). In the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of the STAR GUIde window, click Select Analysis Features to open the corresponding panel. This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential to the analysis are displayed. Select option Lagrangian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu and then click Apply. An additional folder, Lagrangian MultiPhase, will appear in the NavCenter tree. Select this folder Open panel Droplet Controls Check that option Coupled is selected in the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations menu Type 30 in the Droplet Trajectory Maximum File Size box. Since it is not possible to predict in advance the amount of data generated for particle trajectories, it is necessary to limit the maximum size of the track file in order to prevent it taking up too much disk space in your computer. Type 25 for the Maximum Tracking Time box. This parameter is useful in situations where, for example, particles enter stagnant or recirculating regions and remain there for a very long period of time (or even never leave at all). Steady-state calculations for particles that have exceeded the maximum tracking time will be stopped. Select option Explicitly dened parcel injection Accept all other default settings on the panel and click Apply A panel will appear warning you that the current injection denitions will be overwritten. Since no denitions have been supplied yet, it is OK to continue by clicking Yes.
TPHL ON COUP DRPO 30 25 DRPMO EXPLICIT Define physical properties and transport mechanisms for the particles in this model on the basis of: 1. Standard STAR-CD procedures for the calculation of momentum transfer between the continuous and dispersed phases 2. Constant physical properties, with density set to 1200 kg/m3 3. Particles bouncing off solid obstacles in the event of a collision These properties are set as follows:
2-24 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.2
Open the Droplet Physical Models and Properties panel Select the Droplet Physical Models tab and check that the Droplet Type # slider is set to 1 Select option Standard in the Momentum Transfer menu and accept the default Mass Coef. and Slip Factor values Accept the default settings for all other parameters and then click Apply Select the Droplet Properties tab Type 1200.0 in the Density text box Accept the default values and settings for all other parameters and then click Apply 1 STANDARD DENS STAN 1200. 1
DRTY DRMO DRPR DTYL
All parcels in this model are to be included in a single injection group. Define the groups injection characteristics, including the initial diameter, velocity magnitude and temperature of a typical particle. Open the Injection Denition panel Enter injection data in the appropriate boxes as indicated below: Diameter 4.0E-5 Velocity Magnitude 10. Temperature 293.0 Mass Flowrate 7.74192e-4 Click Apply
DRGR 1 DRDIA CONS 4.0e-5 DRIN 1 EXPL 10,,,293,GROUP,FIXED,7.74192e-4,,,1 Specify the initial position and injection direction for 64 parcels. The latter are to be located at the centre of each boundary face on the inlet plane and have a uniform velocity in the +X direction. Open the Injection Points panel Select option Boundary Faces from the Set Type menu and accept the default Region Boundary setting in the menu underneath Select the Inlet region from the boundary regions scroll list Go to the bottom of the panel to dene the injection direction, by specifying the components of the entrance velocity unit vector in the current coordinate system (1) Accept the default setting (Constant) in the Entrance Dir. Vector menu and then enter 1, 0, 0 in the DX, DY, DZ boxes to dene a unit vector in the +X direction Click Add New Set. The injection points list at the top of the panel will
2-25
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.2
conrm that a group of 64 injection points has been created. DRCR ADD BREG 1,1,CONST,1,0,0,1 Check the number of specified parcels and their initial conditions on the I/O window by typing DINL ALL C For a visual check of particle initial conditions: Select the parcel group (set no. 1) in the Injection Points list Click Plot points in set Figure T2.2-1
GETD INIT DSET ALL DPLOT
Change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) and replot In the main window, select View > Axis > +Y Figure T2.2-2
VIEW 0 1 0 REPL
2-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.2
Make the particle colour display dependent on the (constant) particle diameter and replot from a different view angle: Select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks Open panel Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks and then select the Droplets tab In the Load Droplet Data section, select option Droplet Initial Conditions from the Load From menu In the Droplet Plot Options section, select option Diameter from the Fill Color menu Click Apply and then Droplet Plot In the main window, select View > Axis > -X Figure T2.2-3
DOPT FILL DIAMETER VIEW -1 0 0 REPL
Version 3.26
2-27
Tutorial 2.2
CFD Analysis Final Operations
Final Operations
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem and geometry files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Accept the default value, 0.0254, shown in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The CFD analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Inspect the information in files
2-28 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.2
Post-processing Particle Tracks
tut.run and tut.info to confirm that no error messages were produced during the run. Post-processing Particle Tracks Plot only the edges of the model geometry: In the main window, select cell plot type Wire (Surface) Click Cell Plot Use the slider controls to set a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (-1, 0.5, 0.9)
POPT GEOM PLTY NORM VIEW -1 0.5 0.9 CPLO Plot particle tracks stored in file tut.trk as moving streaks of finite length: In the NavCenter window, select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks and then open the Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks panel Select the Particle Tracks tab Select option Segments from the Display Option menu Click Plot Tracks
PTPL PLOT,,SEGM,,,,,,PART,1,64 Now plot continuous particle tracks: Select Continuous from the Display Option menu Click Plot Tracks Figure T2.2-4
REPL PTPL PLOT,,CONT,,,,,,PART,1,64
Version 3.26
2-29
Tutorial 2.2
Clear the display, replot the geometry and then display only the tracks for particles 17 to 24 from different viewpoints: Click Clear Tracks In the Particle Tracks tab, select Plot Particle Range from the bottom menu Enter 17 in the First Particle to Plot box Enter 24 in the Last Particle to Plot box Click Plot Tracks Figure T2.2-5 In the main window, reset the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -X Figure T2.2-6 Choose a different viewpoint, (0, -1, 0), by selecting View > Axis > -Y Figure T2.2-7 CLEAR PLOT,,CONT,,,,,,PART,17,24 -1 0 0 0 -1 0
PTPL REPL PTPL VIEW REPL VIEW REPL
2-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.2
Version 3.26
2-31
Tutorial 2.2
Post-processing Final Operation
Final Operation
QUIT NOSA
2-32
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.3
FLOW WITH LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION (STEADY)
Tutorial 2.3
Physical Problem Description The model geometry and flow conditions in this tutorial are as described in Tutorial 2.1, except that the flow is no longer isothermal and the incoming air is at a temperature of 350 K. The additional physical complexity arises from the fact that a water spray is injected from a point located a short distance away from the inlet to increase the concentration of water vapour in the air stream. The amount of liquid injected is 6.09 106 kg/s. The physical properties of the water droplets and their initial (injection) conditions are as follows: Density Surface tension coefcient Specic heat Latent heat of vaporisation Pressure of saturation Initial diameter Initial temperature Injection point location Initial velocity Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is adopted: The total number of droplets entering the domain are grouped into 30 parcels with identical initial conditions Droplets rebound perfectly when they hit a wall The standard turbulence model for Lagrangian ow is used Gravity effects are neglected Droplets exchange momentum, heat and mass with the continuous phase The effect of evaporated droplet mass on the density of the continuous phase is assumed to be negligible 995 kg/m3 0.072 N/m 4179 J/(kg K) 5 24.25 10 J/kg 4858 Pa 5 4.0 10 m 305 K (1.14, 0.08, 0.55) (in model units & default Cartesian coord. system) (-10., 10., 0.) m/s
This tutorial is intended to familiarise the user with how to set up a more complex two-phase Lagrangian calculation. At the end of the tutorial users should be able to: Activate heat and mass transfer between droplets and the continuous phase Activate the turbulent dispersion model Activate the droplet break-up model Set up a scalar variable to calculate and store the vapour mass fraction
Pre-Processing Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-3) and copy the model file created in Tutorial 2.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut2-1) into it.
Version 3.26 2-33
Tutorial 2.3
Pre-Processing Solution Variables & Initial Conditions
Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.3 - 3D FLOW OF AIR WITH INJECTED WATER SPRAY in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.3 - 3D FLOW OF AIR WITH INJECTED WATER SPRAY As in Tutorial 2.2, start by specifying the key feature of your model, i.e. the presence of droplets: In the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of the STAR GUIde window, open panel Select Analysis Features Select option Lagrangian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu and then click Apply. An additional folder, Lagrangian MultiPhase, will appear in the NavCenter tree.
TPHL ON Solution Variables & Initial Conditions Turn on the solution of the energy transport equation for the continuous phase and then set up a uniform initial temperature distribution in the solution domain: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Thermal Models panel Select option Temperature Calculation On and then click Show Options; conrm that option Static Enthalpy appears in the Conservation menu Click Apply Open the Initialization panel In the Flow Conditions tab, type 350.0 in the Temperature box Click Apply
TEMP ON CINI N N INIT STAN,,,,,,,,,,350. Scalar Denition Set up scalar no. 1 (the product of droplet evaporation, i.e. water vapour) and import its physical properties from pro-STARs built-in database:
2-34
Click folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Click sub-folder Additional Scalars Open panel Molecular Properties (Scalar)
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.3
Pre-Processing Droplet Properties
Check that the Scalar # slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 and then choose option Select scalar from database from the menu at the top of the panel Select the appropriate physical substance, WATER(V) in this case, from the Scalar Database scroll list and then click Select Scalar The physical properties of water vapour are read in from pro-STARs property database and entered into the appropriate boxes of panel Molecular Properties (Scalar). Check that the displayed values are reasonable and then click Apply.
SC 1 DEFI ACTI UDEF H2O 18,0.59531,0 1938.19,1.26765e-05,0.0253325 -1.34238e+07,298.15 SCLI,,ALL SCCL,,ALL Droplet Properties Check the basic control settings for droplets and then re-define the maximum size of the droplet track file (in Mb), taking into account droplet trajectories and the maximum tracking times: Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase and open the Droplet Controls panel Check that option Coupled is set in the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations menu Type 30 in the Droplet Trajectory Maximum File Size box Type 25 for the Maximum Tracking Time box Select option Explicitly dened parcel injection Accept all other default settings on the panel and click Apply A panel will appear warning you that the current injection denitions will be overwritten. Since no denitions have been supplied yet, it is OK to continue by clicking Yes.
DRPO 30 25 DRPMO EXPLICIT Activate the turbulent dispersion model and define transport mechanisms and physical properties for the droplets on the basis of: 1. Standard STAR-CD procedures for the calculation of momentum transfer between the continuous and dispersed phases 2. Standard methodology for heat and mass transfer between the dispersed and continuous phases 3. STARs built-in Reitz model for droplet break-up 4. Droplets bouncing off solid obstacles in the event of a collision 5. Constant values for all droplet physical properties
Version 3.26 2-35
Tutorial 2.3
Pre-Processing Droplet Properties
The above parameters are set as follows: Open the Droplet Physical Models and Properties panel Select the Global Physical Models tab Turn On the Turbulent Dispersion option and then click Apply
DRTURB ON DRTY DRMO DRHE DRMA DRBR DRWA Select the Droplet Physical Models tab and check that the Droplet Type # slider is set to 1 For Momentum Transfer, select option Standard and accept the default Mass Coef. and Slip Factor values For Mass Transfer select option Standard For Heat Transfer select option Standard For Droplet Breakup select option Reitz and accept the default values for We(Bag), We(Strip), Te(Bag), Te(Strip) For Droplet-Wall Interaction select option Rebound Click Apply 1 WATER STANDARD ON STAN ON STAN REITZ REBOUN Select the Droplet Properties tab Enter the property values listed in the Physical Problem Description section in the appropriate boxes: Droplet Name WATER Density 995 Surface Tension Coef. 0.072 Specic Heat 4179 Heat of Vaporization 24.25e+5 Saturation Pressure 4858 Click the Evaporates to Scalar Select button Define the previously-defined scalar (H2O, i.e. water vapour) as representing the product of evaporation by selecting it in the Scalars list Click Close. The scalar number (1) will now appear in the Evaporates to Scalar box Click Apply
DRPR DENS STAN 995 DRPR STCO STAN 0.072 DRPRO CP STAN 4179 DRPRO HOVA STAN 24.25e+05
2-36 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.3
Pre-Processing Parcel Creation
DRPRO POSA STAN 4858 DRCM 1 1 1.0 4179 2.425e+06 4858 Note that the assumption made above of constant droplet properties may sometimes lead to non-physical results. This issue is addressed in Tutorial 2.4 where a user subroutine is supplied to calculate the saturation pressure as a function of temperature. Parcel Creation All parcels in this model are to be included in a single injection group. Define the groups injection characteristics, including the initial diameter, velocity magnitude and temperature of a typical particle: Open the Injection Denition panel Enter injection data in the appropriate boxes as indicated below: Diameter 4.0E-5 Velocity Magnitude 14.1421 Temperature 305 Mass Flowrate 6.09e-6 No. of Parcels/injection point 30 Click Apply
DRGR 1 DRDIA CONS 4.0e-5 DRIN 1 EXPL 14.1421,,,305,GROUP,FIXED,6.09e-6,,,30 Specify the initial position and injection direction for 30 parcels, all emanating from a single point: Open the Injection Points panel Select option Single Point from the Set Type menu and option Specify from the Point menu underneath Specify the injection point coordinates by entering (1.14, 0.08, 0.55) in the X, Y, Z boxes Specify a unit vector for the entrance velocity direction by entering (-1,1,0) in the DX, DY, DZ boxes Click Add New Set. The injection points list at the top of the panel will conrm that the required injection point has been dened.
DRCR ADD COORD POINT,1,1.14,0.08,0.55,CONS,-1,1,0,1 For a visual check of parcel initial conditions: Select the parcel group (set no. 1) in the Injection Points list Click Plot points in set In the main window, set the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Figure T2.3-1
Version 3.26
2-37
Tutorial 2.3
Pre-Processing Parcel Creation
GETD INIT DSET ALL DPLOT VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT
Make the parcel colour dependent on droplet temperature and replot from a different view angle: Select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks Open panel Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks and then select the Droplets tab In the Load Droplet Data section, select option Droplet Initial Conditions from the Load From menu In the Droplet Plot Options section, select option Temperature from the Fill Color menu Click Apply and then Droplet Plot In the main window, select View > Axis > +Y Figure T2.3-2
DOPT FILL TEMPERATURE VIEW 0 1 0 REPL
2-38
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.3
Pre-Processing Boundary Conditions
Boundary Conditions
Modify the inlet boundary temperature: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the boundary regions scroll list Type 350.0 in the Temp. box Click Apply
RMOD 1 U U U U U 350. U Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry file and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Accept the default value, 0.0254, shown in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE

Version 3.26 2-39
Tutorial 2.3
CFD Analysis Droplet Tracking
CFD Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Select the Double Precision option for the STAR executable but leave all other panel settings at their default values Click Start New Analysis
When the analysis is complete, inspect the information in files tut.run and tut.info to confirm that no error messages were produced during the run. Post-Processing Droplet Tracking Plot only the edges of the model geometry: In the main window, select cell plot type Wire (Surface) Click Cell Plot Use the slider controls to set a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (-0.4, 0.2, 1)
POPT GEOM PLTY NORM VIEW -0.4 0.2 1 CPLO Plot droplet tracks stored in file tut.trk as moving streaks of finite length: In the NavCenter window, select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks and then open the Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks panel Select the Particle Tracks tab Select option Segments from the Display Option menu Click Plot Tracks. Adjust the Display Increment (Speed) and Display Time (Length) sliders until you get the desired effect on the screen
PTPL,PLOT,,SEGM,,,,,,PART,1,30 Replot the tracks in a continuous fashion: Select the Continuous option from the Display Option menu Click Plot Tracks Figure T2.3-3 Click Clear Tracks
PTPL,PLOT,,CONTI PTPL CLEAR
2-40
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.3
Post-Processing Contour Plotting
Contour Plotting
Generate a contour plot (vertex based) of the water vapour mass fraction: In the NavCenter window, open the Load Data panel In the File(s) tab, click Open Post File In the Data tab, choose Data Type option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) to create a plot using vertex-based results Check that default option None is selected in the Vector Data list Select option H2O in the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots
Define a cross-section and then plot the vapour mass fraction: In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Select Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z values (0, 0, 0.8) for the cross-section Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. Accept the default values for the normal to the section. Click Apply Click the plot orientation cubes Reset button for rotation and then select View > SNORMAL from the main window Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.3-4
LOAD tut.pst PLTY SECT SNORM 0 0 1 SPOI 0 0 0.8

Version 3.26 2-41
Tutorial 2.3
Post-Processing Contour Plotting
VIEW SNORM GETV NONE CONC 1 POPT CONT REPL
Produce a vapour mass fraction section plot at a different constant-Z value: In the Create Plots panel, change the Point Z value to 0.4 Click Apply and then Plot to Screen Figure T2.3-5
SPOI 0 0 0.4 REPL
2-42
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.3
Post-Processing Final Operation
Similarly, select the vertex-based temperature and plot at constant-Z values: Click Go To Load Data Select option Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, change the Point Z value to 0.8 Click Apply and then Plot to Screen Figure T2.3-6
GETV NONE T SPOI 0 0 0.8 REPL Change the Point Z value to 0.4 Click Apply and then Plot to Screen
Figure T2.3-7
SPOI 0 0 0.4 REPL Final Operation File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT NOSA
Version 3.26
2-43
Tutorial 2.3
2-44
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
FLOW WITH LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION (TRANSIENT)
Problem Description Preliminaries
Tutorial 2.4
Problem Description The problem geometry and flow conditions in this tutorial are as described in Tutorial 2.1, except that the flow is no longer isothermal and the incoming air is at a temperature of 350 K. The additional physical complexity comes from the fact that a water spray is injected into the air stream during two time intervals. The amount of liquid injected is 1.00 104 kg/s. The physical properties of the water droplets and their initial (injection) conditions are as follows: Density Surface tension coefcient Specic heat Latent heat of vaporisation Saturation pressure Initial diameter Initial temperature Injection angle Initial velocity Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is adopted: Transient calculation of liquid droplet injection during two time intervals The droplet grouping when injected into the air stream is 10 parcels per time step. All droplets have identical initial conditions Droplets rebound perfectly when they hit a wall The standard turbulence model for Lagrangian ow is used Gravity effects are neglected Droplets exchange momentum, heat and mass with the continuous phase The effect of evaporated droplet mass on the density of the continuous phase is assumed to be negligible 995 0.072 4179 24.25 105 Function of temperature 2.5 105 300 30 degrees, 3-D cone 10.0 kg/m3 N/m J/(kg K) J/kg m K m/s
This tutorial is intended to familiarise the user with the set up of a transient two-phase Lagrangian calculation. At the end of this tutorial users should be able to: Activate user coding (for droplet initial conditions and physical properties) Set up a transient calculation Select cell data items to be written to the transient post le Dene and execute pro-STAR loops
Pre-Processing Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-4) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 2.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut2-1) into it.
Version 3.26 2-45
Tutorial 2.4
Pre-Processing Solution Variables & Initial Conditions
Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.4 - TRANSIENT LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION INTO 3D AIR FLOW in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.4 - TRANSIENT LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION INTO 3D AIR FLOW As in Tutorial 2.2, start by specifying the key features of your model, i.e. the presence of droplets and the fact that this is going to be a transient analysis: In the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of the STAR GUIde window, open panel Select Analysis Features Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu Select option Lagrangian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu Click Apply. An additional folder, Lagrangian Multi-Phase will appear in the NavCenter tree.
TIME SINGLE TPHL ON Solution Variables & Initial Conditions Turn on the solution of the energy transport equation for the continuous phase and then set up a uniform initial temperature distribution in the solution domain: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Thermal Models panel Select option Temperature Calculation On and then click Show Options; conrm that option Static Enthalpy appears in the Conservation menu Click Apply Open the Initialization panel In the Flow Conditions tab, type 350.0 in the Temperature box Click Apply
TEMP ON CINI N N INIT STAN,,,,,,,,,,350.
2-46
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
Pre-Processing Scalar Denition
Scalar Denition
Set up scalar variable no. 1 (the product of droplet evaporation, i.e. water vapour) and import its physical properties from pro-STARs built-in database: Click folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Click sub-folder Additional Scalars Open panel Molecular Properties (Scalar) Check that the Scalar # slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 and then choose option Select scalar from database from the menu at the top of the panel Select the appropriate physical substance, WATER(V) in this case, from the Scalar Database scroll list and then click Select Scalar The physical properties of water vapour are read in from pro-STARs property database and entered into the appropriate boxes of panel Molecular Properties (Scalar). Check that the displayed values are reasonable and then click Apply.
SC 1 DEFI ACTI UDEF H2O 18,0.59531,0 1938.19,1.26765e-05,0.0253325 -1.34238e+07,298.15 SCLI,,ALL Droplet Creation The number of parcels (up to an upper limit of 400) and their initial conditions are to be defined by user coding. As this limit is above the default maximum allowed for by the code, it is necessary at this point to resize pro-STAR by issuing the following commands from the I/O window: MEMORY MAXDRP 400 MEMORY WRITE Check the basic control settings for droplets and then re-define the maximum size of the droplet track file (in Mb), taking into account droplet trajectories and the maximum tracking times. All information about droplet initial (injection) conditions will be included in subroutine DROICO, as explained in section User Subroutines of this tutorial. Click folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase Open the Droplet Controls panel Check that option Coupled is selected in the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations menu Type 30 in the Droplet Trajectory Maximum File Size box Type 25 for the Maximum Tracking Time box Type 400 in the Maximum Number of Parcels box Select option User Subroutine Accept all other default settings on the panel and click Apply A panel will appear warning you that Injection denitions created by user subroutine DROICO will be added to existing denitions. Since no
2-47
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
Pre-Processing Droplet Creation
denitions have been supplied yet, it is OK to continue by clicking Yes. DRPO 30 25 DMAX 400 DRPMODE USER Activate the turbulent dispersion model and define transport mechanisms and physical properties for the droplets on the basis of: 1. Standard STAR-CD procedures for the calculation of momentum transfer between the continuous and dispersed phases 2. Standard methodology for heat and mass transfer between the dispersed and continuous phases 3. STARs built-in Reitz model for droplet break-up 4. Particles bouncing off solid obstacles in the event of a collision 5. User-dened droplet saturation pressure and constant values for all other physical properties The above parameters are set as follows: Open the Droplet Physical Models and Properties panel Select the Global Physical Models tab Turn On the Turbulent Dispersion option and then click Apply
DRTU ON DRTY DRMO DRHE DRMA DRBR DRWA Select the Droplet Physical Models tab and check that the Droplet Type # slider is set to 1 For Momentum Transfer, select option Standard and accept the default Mass Coef. and Slip Factor values For Mass Transfer select option Standard For Heat Transfer select option Standard For Droplet Breakup select option Reitz and accept the default values for We(Bag), We(Strip), Te(Bag), Te(Strip) For Droplet-Wall Interaction select option Rebound Click Apply 1 WATER STANDARD ON STAN ON STAN REITZ REBOUN Select the Droplet Properties tab Enter the property values listed in the Problem Description section in the appropriate boxes: Droplet Name WATER
Version 3.26
2-48
Tutorial 2.4
Pre-Processing Boundary Conditions
Density 995 Surface Tension Coef. 0.072 Specic Heat 4179 Heat of Vaporization 24.25e+5 Signal to pro-STAR that the saturation pressure will be dened by user coding in subroutine DROPRO, see section User Subroutines in this tutorial. To do this, click the Subroutine Usage button next to the property box Click the Evaporates to Scalar Select button Define the previously-defined scalar (H2O, i.e. water vapour) as representing the product of evaporation by selecting it in the Scalars list Click Close. The scalar number (1) will now appear in the Evaporates to Scalar box Click Apply
DRPR DENS STAN 995 DRPR STCO STAN 0.072 DRPRO CP STAN 4179 DRPRO HOVA STAN 24.25e+05 DRPR POSA USER DRCM 1 1 1.0 4179.0 2.425E+6 Make a local copy of user subroutines DROICO and DROPRO and put them in a sub-directory called ufile under your current working directory, as described in Chapter 18 of the User Guide. Once you have finished setting up the model, these subroutines should be edited to the form shown in section User Subroutines of this tutorial. The subroutines will be included automatically as part of the STAR executable before the model is run. In the main window, select File > System Command Type ules in the text box, click Apply and then Close Select Utility > User Subroutines Note that subroutines DROICO and DROPRO are already marked in the lower part of the User Subroutines window as the ones to accept the user code Copy the default code to the ufile sub-directory by clicking Write Auto Close the User Subroutines dialog
SYSTEM ufiles USUB AUTO Boundary Conditions

Version 3.26
Modify the inlet boundary temperature: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open the Dene
2-49
Tutorial 2.4
Pre-Processing Analysis Controls
Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the boundary regions scroll list Type 350.0 in the Temp. box Click Apply
RMOD 1 U U U U U 350. U Analysis Controls Instruct pro-STAR to write the analysis results in the transient post data file (file tut.pstt) at every single time step. In addition, specify what kind of cell data (including scalar variable data) are to be written during the run. Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Output Controls Open the Analysis Output panel and then select the Transient tab Specify the frequency of writing data to the transient post le by typing 0.001 in the Write data every box. As discussed below, this is equivalent to output at every time step. As can be seen in the scroll list, velocity and pressure are already selected by default. Change this selection by i) removing Pressure ii) adding Temperature iii) adding the mass fraction for scalar H2O In each case, click the Post button to include or exclude the desired item Click Apply
WRPOS 1 SPEC 0 0.001 U Y P N T Y SC01 Y The time interval of interest in this case is 0 t 0.07 seconds. Specify that this is to be covered in steps of 0.001 seconds, i.e. 70 time steps in total. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Type 0.07 in the Run for box Click Apply Type 0.001 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set period
RUNT DURAT 0.07 DELT CONST 0.0 0.001 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry file and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section.
2-50
File > Write Geometry File

Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
User Subroutines Final Operations
Accept the default value, 0.0254, shown in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE User Subroutines As explained previously, subdirectory ufile will contain two files, droico.f and dropro.f, corresponding to subroutines DROICO and DROPRO, respectively. 1. DROICO species the number and type of droplets to be injected and the droplet initial conditions at the appropriate calculation time step. Droplets are released in two bursts, over the intervals 0 t < 0.02 secs and 0.03 t < 0.05 secs. 2. DROPRO species the droplet saturation pressure. Replace the default contents of both les with the code shown below, using pro-STARs built-in editor or any other editor. For le droico.f the appropriate code is:
C*********************************************************************** SUBROUTINE DROICO(IDRT,RNDP,XD,YD,ZD,UD,VD,WD,DRD,DENDR,TD, & ICSRGP,OMEGRP) C Droplet initial conditions C*********************************************************************** C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE comdb.inc COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) INCLUDE usrdat.inc EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(001), IDR ) C----------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to specify droplet initial C conditions. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: IDRT, RNDP, XD,YD,ZD, C UD,VD,WD, DRD, DENDR, TD C ICSRGP,OMEGRP C C Droplet type IDRT is passed to this subroutine as a negative C number. C If its value is not changed to positive value (between 1 and 10) C this subroutine will not be called and injection of particles will C be held until the next time step. Version 3.26 2-51
Tutorial 2.4
C C----------------------------------------------------------------------C----------------------------------------------------------------------INTEGER*4 NN,ISEED,TWO14 SAVE NN data NN/0/ C-------------------------------------------------------------------------IF(.NOT.(TIME.LT.(0.02-0.5*DT).OR. & (TIME.GT.(0.03+0.5*DT).AND. & TIME.LT.(0.05-0.5*DT)))) RETURN C-----NUMBER OF PARCELS INJECTED PER TIME STEP NPAPTS=10 IF(IDN.GT.NPAPTS) RETURN PI=3.1415927 DEGRAD=PI/180. C-----DROPLET MASS INJECTION RATE (kg/s) FLOWDR=1.0E-04 C-----DROPLET TYPE IDRT=1 C-----DROPLET DIAMETER (m) DRD=2.5E-05 C-----DROPLET DENSITY (kg/m3) DENDR=995. C-----DROPLET TEMPERATURE (K) TD=300. C-----MASS OF SINGLE DROPLET DRMAS=DENDR*PI/6.*DRD**3 C-----NUMBER OF DROPLETS REPRESENTED BY DROPLET IDR RNDP=FLOWDR/(NPAPTS*DRMAS)*DT C-----INITIAL POSITION OF DROPLET (m) XD=2.9E-02 YD=1.0E-07 ZD=1.4E-02 C-----GET RANDOM NUMBERS RN1 AND RN2 ISEED=150623 TWO14=16384 IF(NN.LT.1500.AND.NN.GT.-1500) NN=ISEED NN=NN*ISEED RN1=MOD(NN,16384)/16384. NN=NN*ISEED RN2=MOD(NN,16384)/16384. C-----INITIAL VELOCITY OF DROPLET (m/s) CONANG=30. FI=(90.+CONANG*RN1)*DEGRAD TH=180.*CONANG*RN2 *DEGRAD UMAG=10.0 UD= UMAG*COS(FI)*SIN(TH) VD= UMAG*SIN(FI) WD= UMAG*COS(FI)*COS(TH) C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C RETURN END
2-52
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
For le dropro.f the appropriate code is:
C*********************************************************************** SUBROUTINE DROPRO(DENDR,CPDR,HV,PS,SFTC,DRVIS,DRCOND) C Droplet properties C*********************************************************************** C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE 'comdb.inc' COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) INCLUDE 'usrdat.inc' INTEGER IFTYPE,RON COMMON /FULTYP/ IFTYPE,RON DIMENSION DRMAFR(50) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT08(001), DRMAFR(01) ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT07(001), DRM ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), PR ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(001), IDR ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(002), IDRT ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(004), TD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(009), XD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(010), YD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(011), ZD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(004), ICO ) C----------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to calculate the droplet C physical properties. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: DENDR,CPDR,HV,PS,SFTC, C ** DRVIS and DRCOND C C----------------------------------------------------------------------IF(IDRT.EQ.1) THEN C-----PRESSURE OF SATURATION AS A FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE: TREDH2OD=TD/647.3 EFNULL=5.92714-6.09648/TREDH2OD-1.28862*(LOG(TREDH2OD))+ * 0.169347*TREDH2OD**6 EFEINS=15.2518-15.6875/TREDH2OD-13.4721*(LOG(TREDH2OD))+ * 0.43577*TREDH2OD**6 PS=22090000.*(EXP(EFNULL+(0.344*EFEINS))) ENDIF C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C RETURN END
CFD Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:

Version 3.26
File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis
2-53
Tutorial 2.4
Post-Processing Preliminaries
Interactively panel Select the Double Precision option for the STAR executable Click Start New Analysis
As before, inspect the information written in files tut.run and tut.info once the run has finished. Post-Processing Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis: In the NavCenter window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Check that tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List. File tut.pstt will be displayed on the list. Select the le on the list and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
TRLO tut.pstt C Postprocessing Set the view angle and plot only the edges of the model geometry In the main window, click Cell Plot Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button
CPLOT VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT Choose appropriate options for a plot where the droplets are coloured according to their temperature, their radius is proportional to the calculated droplet diameter and the droplet velocity vector is not displayed. In the NavCenter window, select folder Particle Tracks Open the Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks panel In the Droplets tab, check that options After, Unhidden and Replot are selected in the Edge Plot Options pop-up menus Select Diameter in the Droplet Radius menu and change the Size value to 0.05 Select Temperature in the Fill Color menu Select None in the Vectors menu Click Apply
DOPT EDGE AFTER NOHIDDEN REPLOT

2-54 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
Post-Processing Post- processing
DOPT RADI DIAM 0.05 DOPT FILL TEMP DOPT VECT NONE Set up a user-specified parameter IT and define a loop which will load each time step from the transient data le (le tut.pstt) read in droplet data plot them
This may be done by typing the following commands in the I/O window: *SET IT 1 1 *DEFINE STORE ITER IT GETD POST DSET ALL DPLOT *END *LOOP 1 64
Figure T2.4-1
The above executes all commands within the loop 65 times to produce successive displays of the droplet distribution at every time step. Two examples, for time steps numbers 37 and 46, are shown in Figure T2.4-1 a and b.
Version 3.26
2-55
Tutorial 2.4
To generate contour plots, select the surface plotting option and set a constant Zvalue for cross-sectional plots, as follows: SURF PLTY SPOI POPT In the NavCenter window, open the Create Plots panel Select the Section Clipped tab Enter the X, Y, and Z values (0, 0, 0.8) for the section Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. Accept the default values for the normal to the section. Click Apply In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot Select plot type Section (Surface) ON SECT 0 0 0.8 CONT
Define a new loop to load vertex-based water vapour mass fractions and plot the results at every other time step. Again, examples for time step numbers 36 and 46, are shown in Figure T2.4-2 a and b: *SET IT 2 2 STORE ITER IT GETV NONE CONC 1 CPLOT *DEFINE NOEXEC STORE ITER IT GETV NONE CONC 1
2-56 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
REPLO *END *LOOP 0 34
Figure T2.4-2
A similar loop will display the time-dependent temperature field: *DEFINE NOEXEC STORE ITER IT
Version 3.26 2-57
Tutorial 2.4
GETV NONE T REPLO *END *LOOP 0 34
Figure T2.4-3
Change the view angle and plot only the edges of the model geometry:
2-58
In the main window, select plot option Geometry Plot

Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.4
Select plot type Wire (Surface)) Use the slider controls to set a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (1, 0.5, 0.9) GEOM NORM ON -1 .5 0.9
POPT PLTY SURF VIEW REPL
Plot droplet tracks stored in file tut.trk as moving streaks of finite length: In the NavCenter window, select folder Post-Processing, then sub-folder Particle Tracks, then open the Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks panel Select the Particle Tracks tab Select option Segments from the Display Option menu Move the Legth slider to the left until it is around two tenths of the way along the scale Click Plot Tracks
PTPL PLOT,,SEGM,,,0.0005,0.0002 Replot the tracks of the first 30 droplets in a continuous fashion: Select Continuous from the Display Option menu Enter 30 in the Last Particle to Plot box Click Plot Tracks
Figure T2.4-4
PTPL PLOT,,CONT,,,,,,PART,1,30
Version 3.26
2-59
Tutorial 2.4
Final Operation
QUIT NOSA
2-60
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.5
FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM
Tutorial 2.5
Physical Problem Description The next three tutorials (Tutorial 2.5 to Tutorial 2.7) are designed to familiarise users with STAR-CDs capabilities for modelling porous media flow. The simple 3-D elbow geometry defined in Tutorial 2.1 is used as a basis for demonstrating how to model flow in highly porous (isotropic and orthotropic) or moderately porous media. In this tutorial, an isotropic porous region of length 0.0381 m (1.5) is introduced into the channel between the elbow and the exit. The porous block is idealised as a packed bed in which the pressure drop per unit length may be described by the Ergun equation (see Chapter 8 of the Methodology volume, Example 1 Packed beds (isotropic resistance)), from which values for the resistance coefficients are derived. In this case = 843.5 and = 54.3. Modelling Strategy The following steps are taken to set up the model: In the cell table list, dene a porosity index for the porous medium Dene porous properties pertaining to that porosity index Select a cell range for the porous medium Modify the cell type of the selected cell range
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-5) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 2.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut2-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.5 - 3D FLOW IN AN ELBOW WITH AN ISOTROPIC POROUS FILTER in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.5 - 3D FLOW IN AN ELBOW WITH AN ISOTROPIC POROUS FILTER Check the model geometry retrieved from file tut.mdl In the main window, click Cell Plot Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button
2-61
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.5
Click off the edge button
Figure T2.5-1
VIEW 0 0 1 EDGE OFF CPLO
Material Properties
In the cell table list, redefine cell type 2 as a porous medium (called POR1 and identified by colour 3 and porosity index 1). In the main window, click the CTAB button Select cell index no. 2 in the Cell Table Editors scroll list Select Fluid from the Cell Type menu Change the value in the Porosity Index box to 1 Type POR1 in the Name box Click Apply and then Close
CTAB 2 FLUID 3 1 CTNAME 2 POR1 CTLI ALL Specify the resistance coefficients in the global Cartesian directions.
2-62
In the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of the STAR GUIde window, click folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Click folder Porosity Click Resistance and Porosity Factor to display the corresponding panel Select option By local coordinate system in the Dene i,j,k menu and
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.5
type 1 in the Local Coord. System box Type 843.5 in the Alphai, Alphaj and Alphak boxes Type 54.3 in the Betai, Betaj and Betak boxes Click Apply
PORO 1 STAN LOCAL 843.5 54.3 843.5 54.3 843.5 54.3 PORL ALL Collect all cells that will take on porous properties into a set: In the pro-STAR I/O window, type command CSET NEWS GRAN 0 4 2.7 4.7 -1 1 Click Cell Plot Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 in the main window Figure T2.5-2
Assign the selected cells to the currently active cell type (no. 2) and plot: Tools > Cell Tool In the Cell Table scroll list, highlight cell type number 2 and then choose Modify Type > Cell Set Click Replot. You will see that the colour of the chosen cells is now green (colour 3), confirming the change to porous cell Close the Cell Tool
CTYPE 2 CSET NEWS GRAN 0 4 2.7 4.7 -1 1

Version 3.26 2-63
Tutorial 2.5
VIEW 1 1 1 CPLO CMOD CSET REPL Finally, select the whole mesh and plot it to confirm visually that the correct cells have become porous. In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T2.5-3
CSET ALL CPLO
Final Operations
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR interactively, as described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Accept the default value, 0.0254, shown in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254

2-64 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.5
CFD Analysis (STAR) Preliminaries
PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. The solution should converge within the specified maximum number of iterations. Check file tut.info for error messages during the run. There should be none. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst You are now ready to start the post-processing session. Postprocessing Load the velocity components and plot the velocity vectors GETC POPT PLTY EDGE CPLO Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UVW to load all three velocity components In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.5-4 ALL NONE VECT EHID ON
Version 3.26
2-65
Tutorial 2.5
Note that the velocity vectors through the porous cells have a magnitude of approximately 10.0 m/s. Now inspect the pressure variation throughout the model: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Static Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.5-5
GETV NONE PSTA POPT CONT PLTY EHID REPL
2-66
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.5
The largest pressure drop occurs across the porous cells. However, the pressure drop across the porous medium is not that depicted in the plot (see Figure Figure T2.5-5) since vertex-centred (i.e. cell-averaged) values have been used. To inspect the actual pressure drop, collect all cells within the porous medium (porosity index 1) into a set and plot cell-centred pressures, i.e. without averaging the contour values. In the main window, select C > New > Porosity When the cursor appears on your screen, click any cell in the porous region. The I/O window message should say that 192 cells have been selected Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select option Cell from the Data Type menu In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Static Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel Click Plot to Screen Click Cell Plot Figure T2.5-6
CSET NEWS PORO 1 GETC NONE PSTA CPLO
Version 3.26
2-67
Tutorial 2.5
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Analysis of Results
Analysis of Results
The maximum pressure drop between the centres of the first and third row of cells is given by the plots pressure range. As the distance between these cell centres is 2/3 porous medium length, one can extrapolate the range to calculate the total simulated pressure drop. This value should be compared with the theoretical pressure drop of 3,756.7 Pa (assuming a superficial velocity of 10.0 m/s throughout the porous medium). Similarly, the turbulence parameters can be inspected as follows: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data Select item Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T2.5-7 In the Load Data panel, select item Dissipation from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T2.5-8
GETC NONE TE REPL GETC NONE ED REPL
2-68
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.5
Turbulence kinetic energy and its dissipation rate are fixed in the porous medium by assuming a turbulence intensity of 10% and length scale of 0.01 m. Consequently, the values for TE and ED should be approximately 1.5 and 30.0, respectively. Note that these could be changed via the Turbulence Properties panel within the Thermophysical Models and Properties > Porosity sub-folder in the NavCenter tree. This panel enables specification of turbulence intensity and length scale.
Version 3.26 2-69
Tutorial 2.5
Finally, it is necessary to confirm correct use of the porous model by normalising the resistance coefficients as follows (again assuming a superficial through-flow velocity of 10.0 m/s): L ------ = 26.67 L ------- = 0.172 V The normalised parameters should be >> 1. Clearly, the conditions for using the STAR-CD porosity model are not satisfied, even though the total resistance term is one order of magnitude greater than the convection term. Therefore, the user should consider implementing the full momentum equations with an additional resistance term (as described in Tutorial 2.7) with which the above results may be compared. Quit the pro-STAR session by choosing: File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT NOSAVE
2-70
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.6
FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM
Tutorial 2.6
Physical Problem Description In this tutorial, an orthotropic porous medium is introduced in the elbow of the model defined in Tutorial 2.1. This has the effect of assisting the turning of the flow in that region. Resistance coefficients are set up so as to prevent flow along the rand z-directions of the local coordinate system defined in the elbow region. The values of these coefficients in the (theta) direction are as calculated in the Methodology volume (see Chapter 8, Example 2 Channel flow (orthotropic resistance)): = 361.5 and = 271.5 Modelling Strategy The modelling steps used in setting up this case are identical to those described in Tutorial 2.5, except that the porous medium now has orthotropic properties and is located at the elbow region. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-6) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 2.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut2-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.6 - 3D FLOW IN AN ELBOW WITH AN ORTHOTROPIC POROUS FILTER in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.6 - 3D FLOW IN AN ELBOW WITH AN ORTHOTROPIC POROUS FILTER Check the model geometry retrieved from file tut.mdl In the main window, click Cell Plot Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button Click off the edge button Figure T2.6-1
VIEW 0 0 1
Version 3.26 2-71
Tutorial 2.6
EDGE OFF CPLO
Material Properties
In the cell table list, redefine cell type 2 as a porous medium (called POR1 and identified by colour 3 and porosity index 1). In the main window, click the CTAB button Select cell index no. 2 in the Cell Table Editors scroll list Select Fluid from the Cell Type menu Change the value in the Porosity Index box to 1 Type POR1 in the Name box Click Apply and then Close
CTAB 2 FLUID 3 1 CTNAME 2 POR1 CTLI ALL Specify the resistance coefficients in the local cell coordinate system.
2-72
In the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of the STAR GUIde window, click folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Click folder Porosity Click Resistance and Porosity Factor to display the corresponding panel Select option By local coordinate system from the Dene i,j,k menu Enter 11 in the Local Coord. System box (or use the Select button to help locate the required coordinate system number) Type 1.0E5 in the Alphai and Betai boxes
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.6
Type 361.5 in the Alphaj box and 271.5 in the Betaj box Type 1.0E5 in the Alphak and Betak boxes Click Apply
PORO 1 STAN LOCA 1.0E5 1.0E5 361.5 271.5 1.0E5 1.0E5 11 PORL ALL Collect all cells that will take on porous properties into a set via the cursor, by drawing a polygon enclosing the last six r-z cell layers in the elbow region. Assign the selected cells to the currently active cell type and plot. In the main window, select C > New > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the porous region Tools > Cell Tool Highlight cell type number 2 in the Cell Table scroll list Choose Modify Type > Cell Set Click Cell Plot Figure T2.6-2 Close the Cell Tool
CTYPE 2 CSET NEWS ZONE CMOD CSET CPLO
You will see that the colour of the chosen cells is now green (colour 3), confirming the change to porous cell. Finally, select the whole mesh and plot it to confirm visually that the correct cells have become porous.
Version 3.26 2-73
Tutorial 2.6
In the main window, select C > All Set the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Click Cell Plot Figure T2.6-3 Reset the default viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button
CSET ALL VIEW 1 1 1 CPLO VIEW 0 0 1
Final Operations
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR interactively, as described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Accept the default value, 0.0254, shown in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE

2-74 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.6
CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. The solution should converge within the specified maximum number of iterations. Check file tut.info for error messages during the run. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst You are now ready to start the post-processing session Postprocessing Load the velocity components and plot the velocity vectors GETC POPT PLTY EDGE CPLO Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UVW to load all three velocity components In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.6-4 ALL NONE VECT EHID ON
Version 3.26
2-75
Tutorial 2.6
View the velocity vectors in the porous medium by displaying only the porous cells (cell type 2 in this case): In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool Select cell type no. 2 in the Cell Table scroll list at the top of the tool In the main window, select C > New > Type(Current) Click Cell Plot Figure T2.6-5 Close the Cell Tool
CSET NEWS TYPE 2 CPLO
2-76
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.6
It can be seen that the velocity magnitude inside the elbow appears to be a linear function of radius, and that the flow is directed along the angular () direction. This means that a constant pressure drop per unit of will be obtained in the elbow. Verify this by inspecting the cell pressure variation: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.6-6
GETC NONE P POPT CONT PLTY EHID CPLO
Version 3.26
2-77
Tutorial 2.6
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Results Analysis
Results Analysis
In Figure Figure T2.6-6, the pressure range corresponds to the pressure difference between the cell centres in the first and sixth r-z cell layers. Therefore, the total pressure drop in the porous cells should be approximately 6/5 the pressure difference seen in the plot, i.e. about 1,565 Pa. This can be compared with the expected pressure drop at the inner and outer cells of 1,506.6 Pa and 1,510.7 Pa, respectively, based on average inner and outer cell velocities of 11.774 m/s and 8.6374 m/s, respectively. The user can verify these calculations. Similarly, the turbulence parameters can be inspected as follows: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Scalar Data list, select item Turb Kinetic Energy Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T2.6-7 In the Scalar Data list, select item Dissipation Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T2.6-8
GETC NONE TE REPL GETC NONE ED REPL
2-78
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.6
Turbulence kinetic energy and its dissipation rate are fixed in the porous medium by assuming a turbulence intensity of 10% and length scale of 0.01 m. Consequently, the values for TE and ED should be in the range 1.12 2.08 and 19.45 49.27, respectively, based on the inner and outer cell velocities quoted above. Finally, it is necessary to confirm correct use of the porous model by normalising the resistance coefficients. Assuming an average superficial velocity through the
Version 3.26 2-79
Tutorial 2.6
porous medium of 10.0 m/s and average arc length of 0.04 m: L ------ = 12.0 L ------- = 0.901 V Thus, the requirement that the normalised parameters should be >> 1 is more closely satisfied here (in this case the resistance term is one order of magnitude greater than the convective term). Quit the pro-STAR session by choosing: File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT NOSAVE
2-80
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.7
FLOW IN A MEDIUM WITH ISOTROPIC FLOW RESISTANCE
Tutorial 2.7
Physical Problem Description The simple 3-D elbow geometry defined in Tutorial 2.1 is used here to demonstrate the implementation of a flow resistance mechanism (momentum sink) via user coding. In this tutorial, an isotropic porous region of length 1.5 (0.0381m) is introduced into the channel between the elbow and the exit. The block is assumed to be moderately porous and to provide an equal resistance to the flow in all directions. The resultant pressure drop is assumed to depend on the superficial velocity in exactly the same way as in the standard STAR-CD porous media model (see Chapter 8 of the Methodology volume). The user specifies values for the resistance coefficients and . In this example: = = 50.0 The above values do not satisfy the criteria for highly porous media under the flow conditions of this example. Specifically, for L = 0.0381 m, = 1.205 kg/m3, U = 10.0 m/s the normalised resistance coefficients are equal to 1.5809 and 0.158, respectively, indicating that the resistance term is of the same order of magnitude as the convection term in the momentum equations. This simulation thus requires a more rigorous treatment of momentum transport. Modelling Strategy The following steps are required to set up flow with a momentum sink: Dene a unique cell identier for the sink region Select the cells in the sink region Assign these to the cell type dened above Employ user coding to calculate momentum sources Supply a user subroutine to calculate the ow resistance
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut2-7) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 2.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut2-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title:
Version 3.26
Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 2.7 - 3D FLOW IN AN ELBOW WITH AN ISOTROPIC FLOW RESISTANCE in the Title text box Click Apply
2-81
Tutorial 2.7
TITLE TUTORIAL 2.7 - 3D FLOW IN AN ELBOW WITH AN ISOTROPIC FLOW RESISTANCE Check the model geometry retrieved from file tut.mdl In the main window, click Cell Plot Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button Click off the edge button
VIEW 0 0 1 EDGE OFF CPLO Material Properties Redefine cell type no. 2 (identified by colour 3) as a fluid cell representing the sink region. In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool > Edit Types Select cell index no. 2 in the Cell Table Editors scroll list Select Fluid from the Cell Type menu Type Porous_Material in the Name box Click Apply and then Close
CTAB 2 FLUID 3 CTNAME 2 POROUS_MATERIAL CTLI ALL Collect the cells in the sink region into a set and assign the currently active cell type to them. Check that cell type no. 2 is selected in the Cell Table scroll list of the Cell Tool In the pro-STAR I/O window, type command CSET NEWS GRAN 0 4 2.7 4.7 -1 1 Click Cell Plot Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 in the main window Figure T2.7-1 In the Cell Tool, choose Modify Type > Cell Set Click Replot Close the Cell Tool
2-82
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.7
CTYPE 2 CSET NEWS GRAN 0 4 2.7 4.7 -1 1 VIEW 1 1 1 CPLO CMOD CSET REPLOT
Select the whole mesh and plot it to confirm visually that the right cell type (indicated by colour 3 green) has been assigned to the sink region. In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T2.7-2
CSET ALL CPLO
Version 3.26
2-83
Tutorial 2.7
Signal to pro-STAR that momentum source terms will be supplied via user subroutine SORMOM and place a dummy version of this subroutine in subdirectory ufile. In the main window, choose File > System Command Type ules in the text box, click Apply and then Close Open the STAR GUIde window and select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Open sub-folder Sources Select Source Terms to open the corresponding panel and then select the Momentum tab Click On to activate momentum source calculations and then choose User Coding from the Dene Source menu Click Apply and Dene User Coding to write the default (dummy) version of subroutine SORMOM in sub-directory ufile, ready for editing
SYSTEM ufiles RSOU MOMENT,,,USER USUB WRITE SORMOM Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry file and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR interactively, as described in the next section.
2-84
File > Write Geometry File Accept the default value, 0.0254, shown in the Scale Factor text box
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.7
User Subroutine Final Operations
Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE User Subroutine Use pro-STARs built-in editor to edit subroutine SORMOM (in file sormom.f within sub-directory ufile) to introduce the coding needed for the extra source terms, as follows: File > Edit File In the pro-STAR Editor dialog, click File > Open In the File Selection dialog displayed, enter sub-directory ule and select le sormom.f Click OK Edit the contents of the subroutine by adding an extra 11 lines of code after the explanatory section, as shown below Click File > Save In the File Selection dialog, re-specify ule / sormom.f as the save location of the modied subroutine Click File > Quit to exit from the editor
C************************************************************************* SUBROUTINE SORMOM(S1U,S2U,S1V,S2V,S1W,S2W,POROS) C Source-term for momentum C************************************************************************* C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE comdb.inc COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) INCLUDE usrdat.inc DIMENSION SCALAR(50) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT12(001), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(001), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(006), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(007), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(008), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(019), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(001), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(003), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(008), Version 3.26
ICTID ) CON ) G1 ) G2 ) G3 ) VOLP ) CP ) DEN ) ED ) PR ) TE ) 2-85
Tutorial 2.7
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(009), SCALAR(01) ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(059), U ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(060), V ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(061), W ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(062), VISM ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(063), VIST ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(007), T ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(067), X ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(068), Y ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(069), Z ) C------------------------------------------------------------------------C This subroutine enables the user to specify the momentum source C term (per unit volume) in linearised form: C C Source in x direction = S1U-S2U*U, (N/m3) C Source in y direction = S1V-S2V*V, (N/m3) C Source in z direction = S1W-S2W*W, (N/m3) C C in an arbitray manner. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: S1U,S2U,S1V,S2V,S1W,S2W, C POROS C C------------------------------------------------------------------------if (ictid.eq.2) then gvmag = sqrt(u**2+v**2+w**2) galpha = 50.0 gbeta = 50.0 s1u = 0.0 s1v = 0.0 s1w = 0.0 s2u = galpha*gvmag + gbeta s2v = galpha*gvmag + gbeta s2w = galpha*gvmag + gbeta endif C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C RETURN END
CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. The solution should converge within the specified maximum number of iterations. Check file tut.run for error messages. There should be none.
2-86 Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.7
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst You are now ready to start the post-processing session Postprocessing Load the velocity components and plot the velocity vectors GETC POPT PLTY EDGE CPLO Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UVW to load all three velocity components In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.7-3 ALL NONE VECT EHID ON
Version 3.26
2-87
Tutorial 2.7
Inspect the pressure variation throughout the model: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data Select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Static Pressure Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T2.7-4
GETV NONE PSTA POPT CONT PLTY EHID REPL
2-88
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.7
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Results analysis
Results analysis
The pressure drop across the sink region is of comparable magnitude to the pressure variation elsewhere. To calculate the approximate total pressure drop across the porous block, select cells of type 2 and plot cell-centred (non-averaged) pressure contours: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data Select option Cell from the Data Type menu In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Static Pressure Click Get Data In the main window, choose Tools > Cell Tool Select cell type no. 2 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type(Current) Click Cell Plot Figure T2.7-5 Close the Cell Tool
CSET NEWS TYPE 2 GETC NONE PSTA CPLO
Version 3.26
2-89
Tutorial 2.7
The pressure variation observed will be about 2/3 of the total drop across the porous cells. Extrapolated to the full length of the sink region, we would expect the simulated pressure drop to be approximately 209.55 Pa, based on a notional superficial velocity of 10.0 m/s. To inspect the turbulence parameters: GETC CAVE REPL GETC CAVE REPL Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data Select On from the Smooth Option menu In the Scalar Data list, select item Turb Kinetic Energy Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T2.7-6 In the Scalar Data list, select item Dissipation Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T2.7-7 NONE TE ALL NONE ED ALL
Note that averaging the cell-centred values in this way results in vertex-centred distributions that exclude boundary values. Thus, the turbulence distributions displayed can be compared directly with those in Tutorial 2.5 and Tutorial 2.6.
2-90
Version 3.26
Tutorial 2.7
Quit the pro-STAR session File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT NOSAVE
Version 3.26
2-91
Tutorial 3 TURBULENT FLOW OVER A BLUNT OBJECT

Physical Problem Description The problem described in this tutorial, two-dimensional flow over a blunt object, is shown in Figure T3.0-1. Air at standard pressure (1.0 bar) and temperature (293 K) enters the channel shown at a velocity of 20 m/s, corresponding to a Reynolds number of 5.33 106 at the inlet. The incoming air, having passed over a blunt solid object of given dimensions, exits through the outlet. The properties of air are assumed to be constant and have the following values: Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity The tutorial is divided up into two sections: Tutorial 3.1 Basic problem set-up with a coarse mesh Tutorial 3.2 Rened mesh to demonstrate STAR-CDs local mesh renement capability 1.205 1.81 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/m3 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is appropriate: Cartesian and cylindrical coordinate systems with hexahedral cells. The required mesh structure is shown in Figure T3.0-2. Inlet, outlet, symmetry and wall boundary conditions. Incompressible and steady ow options. The standard k- turbulence model to represent the turbulence characteristics of the problem.
4.0 m
45 r = 0.75 m 0.5 m 0.5 m
1.5 m
3.5 m
3.0 m
Figure T3.0-1
Version 3.26
Blunt object geometry

3-1
Modelling Strategy
Figure T3.0-2
Mesh structure for blunt object model
3-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
FLOW USING COARSE MESH
Tutorial 3.1
The method of setting up a model using a combination of Cartesian and cylindrical coordinate systems was demonstrated in Tutorial 2.1. In this tutorial, an alternative method is presented to familiarise users with other utilities that achieve the same end result. The idea of shells and cell generation from a previously defined shell surface is also introduced. At the end of this sub-tutorial, it is expected that users will be able to: Dene a local cylindrical coordinate system (alternative method) Add a new cell type to the cell table Dene a patch Dene splines Generate cells from previously dened shells
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut3-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 3.1 - 2D TURBULENT FLOW OVER A BLUNT OBJECT (COARSE MESH) Click Apply
TITLE
TUTORIAL 3.1 - 2D TURBULENT FLOW OVER A BLUNT OBJECT (COARSE MESH) Mesh Creation The geometry of this problem is more complex than that of earlier tutorials. It is therefore not possible to utilise the fully automatic meshing facilities employed previously. Instead, we will use another, relatively simple method based on the PATCH command. This creates surfaces consisting of shells (dummy, four-node cells). We will then use pro-STARs 2-D mesh creation facilities to extrude the required cells from those shells. The method is semi-automatic and involves the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dividing the domain into patches Dening the corner vertices and edges of the patches Using command PATCH to create shells for each of the patches Using STAR GUIdes Create 2-D Grids panel to extrude a single-layer, 3-D mesh
The domain must be divided into an appropriate number of patches to represent the geometrical features of the model as accurately as possible. The first step is
Version 3.26 3-3
Tutorial 3.1
therefore very important and requires careful planning. The subdivision into patches is shown in Figure T3.1-1. It can be seen that they are of different sizes and shapes, mostly with straight edges. One of them, patch number 3, has a curved edge so as to represent the model geometry accurately. 4.0
5 6 18 24 28 31
2
2.5 2.0
4 3
4
17
7
23
10
27
12
30
6
16
22
9
26 21
1
0.5 0.0
1 2
12
11
8 7
20
5
4.0
8
25 29
19
0.0 0.5
Figure T3.1-1
2.25
Patch arrangement
5.0
6.0
8.0
The next task is to define the corner vertices of each patch. To do this, first ensure that the currently active coordinate system is the global Cartesian system: Open the STAR GUIde window Go to the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) tree and then click folder Create and Import Geometry Click Create Geometric Entities to display the corresponding panel Select the Vertices tab and conrm that the current coordinate system is no. 1 (global Cartesian)
CSYS 1 Now create the corner vertices shown in Figure T3.1-1. Those for patch nos. 1 and 2 are defined first: Click the Vertices button, enter the coordinates of the rst vertex (0., 0., 0.) in the Vertex Location boxes and then click Done Repeat the above for the remaining vertices, entering the following coordinates: Vertex 2 0.5, 0., 0. Vertex 3 0.5, 2.5, 0. Vertex 4 0., 2.5, 0. Vertex 5 0., 4.0, 0.
Version 3.26
3-4
Tutorial 3.1
Vertex 6 0.5, 4.0, 0. V V V V V V 1 2 3 4 5 6 0.0 0.5 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
For patch number 3, the first two vertices are given by: Enter the following coordinates in the appropriate boxes of the Vertices tab : Vertex 7 2.25, 0., 0. Vertex 8 2.25, 0.5, 0.
V 7 2.25 0.0 0.0 V 8 2.25 0.5 0.0 The vertices on the curved part of this patch can be specified in various ways. The most convenient one requires definition of a local cylindrical coordinate system and use of either command VGENERATE or VFILL. Both alternatives are shown here. A new local cylindrical coordinate system, number 11, is created as follows: Click CSYS in the main window Highlight system no. 11 in the Coordinate Systems scroll list Select option Cylindrical in the pop-up menu Type 2.25, 1.25, 0.0, respectively, in the rst three boxes under the scroll list Click New (Local)
LOCA 11 CYLI 2.25 1.25 0.0 CSLI ALL Command VGENERATE may now be used to generate a set of eight new vertices (numbers 9 to 16) distributed uniformly along the length of the semicircle that constitutes the curved part of the patch. This is done by starting from vertex number 8 and incrementing by an angle of 22.5 degrees clockwise. The required command parameters are as follows: VGEN 9 1 8 8 1 0. -22.5 0. 1.0
Version 3.26
3-5
Tutorial 3.1
Alternatively, the following commands can be used to perform the same task: V 1000 2.25 1.25 0.0 V 12 1.5 1.25 0.0 V 16 2.25 2.0 0.0 VLOC 11 CYLI 1000 X 12 Y 16 VFIL 8 12 3 VFIL 12 16 3 Switch back to the Cartesian coordinate system: In the Coordinate Systems dialog, select coordinate system no. 1 Click Set Active Close the Coordinate Systems dialog
CSYS 1 Define the corner vertices for the remaining patches, as done previously. Typing STATUS in the I/O window will show that the maximum vertex number defined so far is 16. Therefore vertex numberings will start at 17. Go to the Create Geometric Entities panel in STAR GUIde Enter the following vertex coordinates in the appropriate boxes of the Vertices tab: Vertex 17 2.25, 2.5, 0.0 Vertex 18 2.25, 4.0, 0.0 Vertex 19 5.0, 0.0, 0.0 Vertex 20 5.0, 0.5, 0.0 Vertex 21 5.0, 1.0, 0.0 Vertex 22 4.0, 2.0, 0.0 Vertex 23 4.0, 2.5, 0.0 Vertex 24 4.0, 4.0, 0.0 Vertex 25 6.0, 0.0, 0.0 Vertex 26 6.0, 1.0, 0.0 Vertex 27 6.0, 2.5, 0.0 Vertex 28 6.0, 4.0, 0.0 Vertex 29 8.0, 0.0, 0.0 Vertex 30 8.0, 2.5, 0.0 Vertex 31 8.0, 4.0, 0.0 V V V V V V
3-6
17 18 19 20 21 22
2.25 2.5 0.0 2.25 4.0 0.0 5.0 0.0 0.0 5.0 0.5 0.0 5.0 1.0 0.0 4.0 2.0 0.0
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
V V V V V V V V V
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
2.5 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.5 4.0 0.0 2.5 4.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Collect the vertices into a set, switch on vertex numbering and plot: In the main pro-STAR window, choose Plot > Number > Vertex Select Cell Plot Display Option Vertex Select V > All Select Plot > Vertex Plot Figure T3.1-2
VSET ALL NUMB VERT ON CDISP ON VERT VSTYLE,3,6,1 VPLO
It can be seen that the vertex numbers on the right-hand side of the plot are not fully visible. Command DISTANCE is now used to make them visible by reducing the
Version 3.26 3-7
Tutorial 3.1
plot scale. The current value of DISTANCE must be increased for this purpose, by entering the following commands: DIST 4.5 REPL Figure T3.1-3
Before creating patches, check the cell table to see if cells of type shell are defined: On the main window, click CTAB
CTLI ALL It is seen that cell type shell is not currently on the list. It is therefore necessary to create it, as follows: In the Table# scroll list, select cell no 5 and then specify its properties Cell Type Shell Material Number 1 Color Table Index 6 Click Apply Close the Cell table Editor
CTAB 5 SHELL 6 0 1 1 CTLI ALL CTYP 5 A dummy cell of type shell is now available. Note that this is also the currently active cell type so all newly-created cells will automatically become shells. The task of creating patches can now begin. It is possible to overlay the generated
3-8 Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
patches on the current vertex plot by Switching on the overlay facility with command OVERLAY Fixing the distance and centre of the previous plot with command PLFIX
Enter the following commands OVER ON PLFI ON in the I/O window and then type the command below to generate the first patch: PATC 1 2 3 4 1 3 This creates a patch with corner vertices 1, 2, 3 and 4 containing one cell in the X-direction and three cells in the Y-direction. Collect the cells into a set and plot: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CSET ALL CPLO The second patch can be created in a similar fashion: PATC 4 3 6 5 1 3 In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CSET ALL CPLO Note that the screen plot also displays vertex numbers belonging to the newlycreated shells but these can be distinguished from the original, geometry-defining vertex set through their different colour. Note that this set will be used for all the patch definition commands that follow. As seen in Figure T3.1-1, the side of patch no. 3 that contains vertices 8 16 inclusive is curved. It is therefore necessary to fit a spline over this side of the patch by one of the spline-fitting operations in STAR GUIde, as follows: Go to the Create Geometric Entities panel and select the Splines tab Click Create Spline and then follow the instructions displayed on the panel. In this case, the required action is to pick vertex nos. 8 to 16 (in that order) and then click Done. The spline created will be plotted in the graphics window
SPL 1 VRAN 8 16 1 SPLS ALL SPLO

Version 3.26 3-9
Tutorial 3.1
The patch now incorporates six corner vertices (8, 7, 2, 3, 17, 16) but requires only four vertices for its definition. It is therefore necessary to eliminate two vertices from the list. This is done by simply fitting a spline through vertices 7, 2, 3 and 17. Moreover, the spline should be discontinuous at the location of vertices 2 and 3: Click Create Spline and then follow the instructions displayed on the panel. The vertices to be selected are 7, 2, 3 and 17 (in that order). Click Done when nished.
The newly created spline is displayed automatically on the screen. It will be seen that the result is a smooth spline rather than a discontinuous one. To create the discontinuity, proceed as follows: Click the Options button In the Spline Tool displayed, click Spline List In the Spline List dialog, select the spline just created (no. 2) Select vertex no. 2, located at the point of discontinuity, and then click Change Signs Highlight vertex no. 3, located at the other point of discontinuity, and then click Change Signs In the main window, click Replot. The display should show the desired discontinuous spline, consisting of a collection of straight lines. Close the Spline List Close the Spline Tool
SPL 2 VLIS 7 -2 -3 17 SPLS ALL SPLO SPLL ALL The third patch can now be created: PATC 7 8 16 17 3 8 In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CSET ALL CPLO The remaining patches can be created in a similar fashion. For simplicity, the required operations are given below in command form: PATC CSET CPLO PATC CSET CPLO
3-10
3 17 18 6 3 3 ALL 7 19 20 8 4 3 ALL
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
PATC 16 22 CSET ALL CPLO PATC 17 23 CSET ALL CPLO PATC 19 25 CSET ALL CPLO SPL 3 VLIS SPLS ALL SPLO PATC 26 21 CSET ALL CPLO PATC 23 27 CSET ALL CPLO PATC 25 29 CSET ALL CPLO PATC 27 30 CSET ALL CPLO
23 17 3 3
24 18 3 3
26 21 3 2
26 -27 -23
22 23 3 6
28 24 3 3
30 27 3 5
31 28 3 3
Switch off overlay plotting and vertex numbering and re-plot the shells: Choose Plot > Display and then deselect the Overlay option Choose Plot > Number and then deselect the Vertex option Deselect the Vertex and Spline Cell Plot Display Options Click Replot Figure T3.1-4
OVER OFF CDISP OFF VERT NUMB VERT OFF REPL
Version 3.26
3-11
Tutorial 3.1
The patch creation process is now complete. The shells (dummy cells) generated thus far can be used as a template to create the desired mesh. We shall use STAR GUIdes facilities to extrude one layer of cells in the Z direction, starting from the current (shell) set: Select Create and Import Grids > Create Grids Click Create 2-D Grids using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel Accept the default coordinate system setting (Cartesian) and then click Generate 3-D Mesh from 2-D Mesh
CTLI ALL 2D3D,CART Collect the cells created and plot them in Hidden Surface mode using a suitable viewing angle: In the main window, select C > All Select Cell Plot Type Hidden Surface Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Click Cell Plot Figure T3.1-5
CSET ALL VIEW 1 1 1 PLTY EHID CPLO
3-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
Note that the mesh generation process has turned the starting shells into fluid cells of type 5 (the original shell type number). The mesh generation process is now complete. However, further checks are necessary to ensure that all cells have been defined properly. To start with, all cells created must be right-handed. Use the built-in checking facilities to verify this, collect any non-conforming cells into a new set and then plot them: Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1), by selecting View > Axis > +Z Select folder Check and Fix Grid and then open the Check Grid panel Select Left-Handed Cells from the Check Option menu Click Apply The Error/Warning Summary window will warn you of an error discovered by this operation. Clicking on the error line will display the Error/Warning Description window which states that non right-handed cells have been found Click Close and then Clear to close both Error/Warning windows In the main window, click Cell Plot to display the offending cells Figure T3.1-6
VIEW 0 0 1 CHEC CSET,,RIGH NEWS CPLO
Version 3.26
3-13
Tutorial 3.1
Cells in this set may also be inspected by listing their details on the screen: Choose Lists > Cells from the main menu to display the Cell List dialog
It will be seen that cell numbers 76 to 93 are the problem cells. These should be changed to right-handed cells and then checked again, as follows: Close the Cell List dialog In the NavCenter tree, open panel Fix Grid Problems Enter the cell range to be xed using the boxes at the bottom of the panel (From : 76, To : 93, Incr. : 1) Select option Flip Right from the Flip Cells menu Go back to the Check Grid panel, conrm that the check option setting is still Left-Handed Cells and then click Apply. It will be seen that, this time, no problem cells are found.
CFLI 76,93,1,RIGH CHEC ALL,,RIGH NEWS Collect cells again and re-plot: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CSET ALL CPLO As the model is made up of several patches, there will be discontinuities (double vertices) at the patch interfaces. These can be viewed by switching on the edge
3-14 Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
plotting facility and re-plotting as before: In the main window, click the Edge button Figure T3.1-7
EDGE ON REPL
A vertex merging operation is now needed to remove the discontinuities, as explained in Tutorial 2.1: In the NavCenter tree, select folder Create and Import Grids and then open the Assemble Grids panel Check that the Vertex Merge tab is displayed and that All Vertices is the current Vertices option Click Merge In the main window, click Replot Figure T3.1-8
VMER ALL C REPL
Version 3.26
3-15
Tutorial 3.1
It is seen that one discontinuity still remains at the interface between patch nos. 5 and 8 (see also Figure T3.1-1) where a fine mesh meets a coarser mesh. The cells on either side of this interface must be coupled using pro-STARs special operation for restoring cell connectivity: In the main window, select C > All In the Assemble Grids panel, select the Create Couple tab and check that the current Choose Cells option is Cell Set The Couple Type box also shows a default type (no. 1). Check its denition by clicking Edit Types to display the Couple Table Editor panel. Select couple type 1 to inspect the couple properties and then click Close In the Assemble Grids panel, click Apply In the main window, click Replot to verify that the last remaining discontinuity has been removed
The I/O window information will confirm that one couple now exists at the desired location. CPTL ALL CPCR CSET 1 REPL Turn off the edge plotting facility and re-plot: In the main window, deselect the Edge button and display the nal mesh Figure T3.1-9
3-16
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Specication
EDGE OFF REPL
Tidy up the current vertex numbers by closing the gaps resulting from the various mesh adjustments and their vertex deletion operations: Tools > Vertex Tool > Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, accept all defaults and click Apply Close the VCompress dialog Close the Vertex Tool
VCOM ALL Y Store all model data generated so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl This will create file tut.mdl to store the model data generated so far. Boundary Boundary locations are now specified graphically, exposing each boundary region Specication in turn and then using the appropriate STAR GUIde facilities and screen cursor:
Version 3.26
Change to viewpoint (-1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Select folder Locate Boundaries and then open the Create Boundaries
3-17
Tutorial 3.1
panel. It will be seen that boundary regions 1 and 2 are already assigned to the two symmetry planes on either side of the current mesh layer. This operation was performed automatically following extrusion of the mesh from its starting shells (see page 3-12). Select region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and designate it as an inlet by choosing option Inlet from the Type menu Click Dene Region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around six cell faces on the left-hand side of the plot
VIEW -1 1 1 CPLO BZON 3 RDEF 3 INLE $ $ Change the view, replot and define the outlet region: Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Select region no. 4 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and designate it as an outlet by selecting option Outlet from the Type menu Click Dene Region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around eight cell faces on the right-hand side of the plot
VIEW 1 1 1 REPL BZON 4 RDEF 4 OUTL $ $ Material Properties Check the default fluid properties: Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel. The displayed properties are the ones required so no adjustment is needed.
PROP STAT Turn on the standard k- turbulence model: Click Turbulence Models to display the corresponding panel Click On to switch on turbulence Select the desired turbulence model, K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the menu Click Apply to save your settings
3-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
TURB KE No explicit initialisation of flow field variables is used in this case. Boundary Conditions Specify boundary conditions for the inlet, using a value of 5% for the turbulence intensity and 0.1 m for the mixing length: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Click Dene Boundary Regions to display the corresponding panel Select region no. 3 in the panels scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 3 INLE 20.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 1.205 RTURB 3,MIXL,0.05,0.1 Check the boundary conditions for the outlet: Select region no. 4 in the scroll list. The displayed setting is appropriate for a single-outlet boundary, so no further adjustment is necessary.
Change the view, switch on the boundary display facility and plot: In the main window, change the viewpoint to (-1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Select B > All Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Cell Plot Figure T3.1-10
VIEW -1 1 1 BDIS ON
Version 3.26 3-19
Tutorial 3.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Solution Variables
BSET ALL CPLO
You will see that the various boundary types in the model are distinguished from each other by different colours. Default wall boundary conditions (no-slip with wall functions, stationary, impermeable, non-conducting, non-radiating) are applied to those boundaries that are not defined explicitly. Turn off the boundary display option and save the model data: Deselect Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Replot File > Save Model
BDIS OFF REPL SAVE tut.mdl Solution Variables Since this model is two-dimensional, there is no need to solve for the W velocity component. Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel In the Equation Status tab, deselect the Solve option button for item W-Mom Click Apply
SOLV LW N
3-20 Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
CFD Analysis (STAR) Run Time Controls
Run Time Controls
Check the status of the run time control parameters: Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display and check the contents of the corresponding panel. Click Analysis (Re)Start to display the corresponding panel. The setting of the Restart File Option menu should be None, conrming that this is a run from initial conditions.
CONT STAT Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem and geometry files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and then click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst:
Version 3.26
Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
3-21
Tutorial 3.1
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing Load the U and V velocity vector components for plotting: Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select Velocity Component UV In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots
GETC U,V,NONE Define a section plane located at constant Z=0.5: In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates (0, 0, 0.5) for the sections Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the x-y plane with a z-value of 0.5, since the Normal x, y values are zero by default. Click Apply Click Plot to Screen
POPT VECT EDGE ON PLTY SECT SPOI 0,0,0.5 SNORM 0,0,1 CPLOT Change the size of the velocity vectors and re-plot: Go to the Vectors tab Type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box and then click Apply Go back to the Section Clipped tab and then click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window to display the nal appearance of the plot Figure T3.1-11
VIEW 0 0 1 VESC 0.5 REPLOT
3-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
Plot the velocity magnitude as a contour plot using the smooth contour option: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select On from the Smooth Option menu Select option Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T3.1-12
GETC NONE VMAG CAVER CSET POPT CONT REPL
Version 3.26
3-23
Tutorial 3.1
Load vertex-based pressures and plot: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Click Plot to Screen Figure T3.1-13
GETV NONE P REPL
3-24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.1
Select the cell-based turbulent viscosity and plot: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell from the Data Type menu Select item Turbulent Viscosity from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Click Plot to Screen Figure T3.1-14
GETC NONE VIS CAVER CSET REPL
Version 3.26
3-25
Tutorial 3.1
The results of the above three plots show quite clearly the effect of the relatively coarse mesh used here on the quality of the solution. A way of improving the results is discussed in the next sub-tutorial. Final Operations QUIT N File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
3-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
FLOW USING FINE MESH
Tutorial 3.2
Tutorial 3.1 introduced the basic concept of using patches to create a mesh. However, the generated mesh was too coarse to provide meaningful results for the problem in hand. In this sub-tutorial, the method of embedded mesh refinement is used to refine the existing mesh, demonstrating the capabilities of this approach and comparing the results with those of Tutorial 3.1. Also, the ability to calculate engineering data at a user-specified boundary is introduced via the creation of a new boundary region around the blunt body. At the end of this sub-tutorial, users should be able to: Rene selected regions of the mesh Produce engineering data output for specied boundaries
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut3-2) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 3.1 (i.e. file tut.mdl in directory tut3-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 3.2 - 2D TURBULENT FLOW OVER A BLUNT OBJECT (FINE MESH) Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 3.2 - 2D TURBULENT FLOW OVER A BLUNT OBJECT (FINE MESH) Boundary In order to generate engineering data for the blunt body alone, the latter must be Specication defined as a separate wall boundary region. The boundary cell faces making up the body outline cannot all be displayed simultaneously, so they must be individually selected with the screen cursor using suitable mesh viewpoints:
Version 3.26
In the main window, click Cell Plot and check that the viewpoint is set to (-1, 1, 1) Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select B > Unselect > Symplane Click Replot Open the STAR GUIde window and select folder Locate Boundaries Click Create Boundaries to open the corresponding panel Select region no. 5 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and designate it as a wall by selecting option Wall from the Type menu Click Dene region
3-27
Tutorial 3.2
Click Pick Cell Faces and then pick all visible cell faces around the perimeter of the body. Click Done when nished. Change the mesh viewpoint by draging with the left-hand mouse button so that more cell faces on the body perimeter are exposed. Select these using the Pick Cell Faces option and repeat the exercise until all faces around the body have been selected (22 boundaries) To reset the viewpoint, click the square Reset button at the bottom right-hand corner of the plot orientation cube and then select View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1. The new display should show the boundary region just created. Check that it has been correctly dened. Figure T3.2-1 Deselect Cell Plot Display Option Bound and Replot
CPLOT CDISP ON BREG BSET DELE SYMPL REPL BCRO ADD 5 RDEF 5 WALL $ $ VIEW -1 1 1 ANGLE 0 REPL CDISP OFF BREG REPL
3-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Renement
Mesh Renement
Refine the entire mesh: Tools > Cell Tool Choose Cell Rene to display the Cell Rene dialog Type 1 in the Number divisions in K direction box Select All for the Cells to Rene option Accept the default settings in the rest of the dialog and click Apply
CREF 2 2 1 ALL The above operation divides all cells into two in both the x- and y- directions, maintaining only one cell in the z- direction (2-D flow). It also merges the newly created vertices automatically. Collect all the cells and plot: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T3.2-2
CSET ALL CPLO
The intention here is to refine further the inner region of the model around the blunt object, comprising all cells in the range 0.4 < x < 6.0, 0.0 < y < 2.6. First select the required mesh sub-region:
Version 3.26
In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > + Z Select C > New > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the required cells
3-29
Tutorial 3.2
Restore the original viewpoint by selecting View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Click Cell Plot to conrm that the sub-region selected is correct Figure T3.2-3
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.4 6.0 -1.0 2.6 CPLO
Use the cell refinement operation a second time to sub-divide the cells in the current set and then plot the resulting mesh: In the Cell Rene dialog, select Cset for the Cells to Rene option Click Apply and then Close In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T3.2-4
CREF 2 2 1 CSET CSET ALL CPLO
3-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
pro-STARs cell matching process can now be used to create cell couples, as in Tutorial 3.1: Select Tools > Couple Tool from the main window menu In the Couple Tool, click Create Couples Accept all default settings in the Create Couples dialog by clicking Apply and then Close Close the Couple Tool
CPCREATE CSET 1 Collect all couples and plot them: In the main window, select C > New > Couples > Both Click Cell Plot Figure T3.2-5
CSET NEWS CPRA ALL,,,BOTH CPLO
Version 3.26
3-31
Tutorial 3.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Check
Tidy up the numbering scheme by eliminating deleted vertex and cell numbers and then collect the remaining ones into a set: Tools > Vertex Tool > Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, accept all defaults and click Apply Close the VCompress dialog Close the Vertex Tool In the Cell Tool, click Cell Compress Close the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > All and V > All
VCOM ALL Y CCOM Y VSET ALL CSET ALL Store all model data generated so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl This saves an updated model file. Boundary Check

3-32
Check the current boundary definitions visually by switching on the boundary display facility, collecting all boundaries into a set and plotting:
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Analysis Controls
In the main window, select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select B > All Click Cell Plot Figure T3.2-6
BOUN STAT BDIS ON BSET ALL CPLO It will be seen that the boundary conditions are identical to those of Tutorial 3.1. Extra wall and symmetry plane boundaries are automatically created by pro-STAR that take account of mesh refinement.
Turn off the boundary display option and re-plot: Turn off the Bound cell plot display option Click Replot
BDIS OFF REPL Analysis Controls Specify that aerodynamic forces acting on the body are to be calculated as part of the analysis and stored in a file (tut.erd):
Version 3.26
Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Output Controls, then sub-folder Monitor Engineering
3-33
Tutorial 3.2
Behavior Open panel Monitor Boundary Behavior Highlight region no. 5 in the Boundary Region scroll list, select the Forces option button and then click Apply
BRMON 5 FORC Run Time Controls Check the status of the run time control parameters: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display and check the contents of the corresponding panel.
CONT STAT Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem and geometry files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and then click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations.
3-34
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Click folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing The post-processing commands of Tutorial 3.1 are used again to examine the results: Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select Velocity Component UV In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates (0, 0, 0.5) for the sections Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the x-y plane with a z-value of 0.5, since the Normal x, y values are zero by default. Click Apply Click Plot to Screen Go to the Vectors tab Type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box and then click Apply Go back to the Section Clipped tab and then click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window to display the nal appearance of the plot Figure T3.2-7
GETC U,V,NONE POPT VECT EDGE ON PLTY SECT SPOI 0,0,0.5 SNORM 0,0,1 CPLOT VIEW 0 0 1 VESC 0.5 REPLOT
Version 3.26
3-35
Tutorial 3.2
Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select On from the Smooth Option menu Select option Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T3.2-8 Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select option Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Click Plot to Screen Figure T3.2-9 Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell from the Data Type menu Select option Turbulent Viscosity from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Click Plot to Screen Figure T3.2-10
GETC NONE VMAG CAVER CSET POPT CONT REPL

3-36 Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
GETV NONE P REPL GETC NONE VIS CAVER CSET REPL
Version 3.26
3-37
Tutorial 3.2
Comparing the results with those of Tutorial 3.1, it is can be seen that further flow details are now visible, with two counter-flow vortices predicted at the trailing edge of the blunt object. File tut.erd contains the shear, pressure and total force acting on the blunt body in the x- and y- directions. Plot a selection of the available data as follows: Select sub-folder Graphs followed by sub-folder Extract/Graph Data Open panel Engineering Data Check that le tut.erd is displayed in the File name box and then click the button.
The Select Entry list will now indicate that data for region no. 5, the boundary previously selected for monitoring, are available. Click on this boundary with the mouse. The Select data to graph scroll list will show the data available for plotting To see the calculated total force in the x-direction, scroll down the list and then select item TXFORCE Conrm your selection by clicking Add data to list Click Create Graph and then answer Yes to the pop-up warning message displayed by pro-STAR Select Draw Frame > Current to display the graph on-screen Figure T3.2-11
EDGRAPH tut.erd TXFORCE 5 GDRAW 1
3-38
Version 3.26
Tutorial 3.2
The result displayed in the above graph corresponds to the calculated drag force on the body. As can be seen from the graph, the solution has converged to a steady-state value. To see a similar display for the total lift force: Go back to the Select data to graph scroll list, click Clear data from list and then click on the previously selected TXFORCE item to deselect it Select item TYFORCE Conrm your selection by clicking Add data to list Click Create Graph and then answer Yes to the pop-up warning message displayed by pro-STAR Select Draw Frame > Current to display the new graph on-screen Figure T3.2-12
EDGRAPH tut.erd TYFORCE 5 GDRAW 1
Version 3.26
3-39
Tutorial 3.2
Final Operations
QUIT N
3-40
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4 FLOW IN A TWO-DIMENSIONAL Y-JUNCTION

Physical Problem Description This tutorial models flow along a bifurcating duct, as shown in Figure T4.0-1. The problem is assumed to be two-dimensional. The tutorial is divided into two sub-tutorials that introduce various pro-STAR features. The physical properties of the fluids at the inlet(s) are given at the beginning of each sub-tutorial. Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is appropriate: Cartesian coordinate system with hexahedral cells and local mesh renement, as shown in Figure T4.0-2. Inlet, outlet, symmetry, pressure and wall boundary conditions. Isothermal or non-isothermal, incompressible and steady ow options. Appropriate physical parameters for the uids. The standard k- turbulence model to represent the turbulence characteristics of the problem.
8 10 10
Upper Outlet 15 10 28 2.5 Lower Inlet Lower Outlet 10
Upper Inlet
All dimensions in cm
Figure T4.0-1
Y-junction geometry
Version 3.26
4-1
Modelling Strategy
Figure T4.0-2
Mesh structure for the Y-junction model
4-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
This sub-tutorial sets up the problem geometry. The initial configuration contains a single inlet (the two inlets shown in Figure T4.0-1 are combined) and two outlets. A stream of air at constant pressure and temperature (pressure of 1 bar, temperature of 293 K) enters the solution domain with a velocity of 10 m/s. The fluid physical properties are assumed to be constant and have the following values: Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity 1.205 1.81 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/m3 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
The flow is symmetrical about the centre line of the junction and the analysis could have been performed by modelling only half the problem geometry. However, the full geometry is considered here so that the whole mesh may be used as a starting point for the next tutorial (where the flow is not symmetrical). The tutorial introduces an important automatic meshing capability, block meshing. Also included is a technique for reflecting a set of vertices about a plane and generating the corresponding cells. At the end of this sub-tutorial it is expected that users will be able to: Generate a Cartesian mesh using the block meshing method Reect a set of vertices about a plane Generate cells from the reected vertices
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut4-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Check that the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option is deselected Check that the Append to Previous .echo File? option is deselected Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 4.1 - SINGLE STREAM FLOW IN A 2D Y- JUNCTION Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 4.1 - SINGLE STREAM FLOW IN A 2D Y-JUNCTION Mesh Creation pro-STARs block-meshing capability is a powerful automatic mesh generation tool for both simple and complex geometries. The blocks external surfaces may be straight or smoothly curving, depending upon the model geometry. Given that this tutorial has a simple geometry that is symmetric about the centre plane of the Y-junction, a single block is utilised to create the mesh for the upper half of the model. The vertices generated for this half are then used to create a second, symmetrical vertex set and thus complete the model, as will be explained later.
4-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
The block-meshing method requires specification of eight corner-vertices of a block that will contain the generated mesh. The external edges of the block are straight but discontinuous (see Figure T4.1-1). In order to define these edges, it is necessary to fix the points lying on the discontinuities (vertices 5 and 6). This is done by fitting discontinuous splines onto the upper and lower edges, as discussed below. 3 4 6
2 1
Figure T4.1-1
5
Starting block for mesh generation
First, make sure that the currently active coordinate system is Cartesian: Open the STAR GUIde window Go to the Navigation Centre (NavCenter) section of this window and select folder Create and Import Geometry Click Create Geometric Entities to display the corresponding panel Click the Vertices tab and conrm that the current coordinate system is no. 1 (global Cartesian)
CSYS 1 Mesh generation starts by creating the vertices at the block corners and at the discontinuity points using the facilities of the Vertices tab. The corner vertices are defined first: Click the Vertices button, enter the coordinates of the rst vertex (0., 0., 0.) in the Vertex Location text boxes and then click Done Repeat the above for the remaining vertices, entering the following coordinates: Vertex 2 28.0, 2.5, 0. Vertex 3 28.0, 10.0, 0. Vertex 4 0., 5.0, 0.
4-4
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
V V V V
1 2 3 4
0.0 0.0 0.0 28.0 2.5 0.0 28.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 5.0 0.0
The vertices at the discontinuity points are defined next: Repeat the procedure given above, entering the following coordinates: Vertex 5 18.0, 0., 0. Vertex 6 8.0, 5.0, 0.
V 5 18.0 0.0 0.0 V 6 8.0 5.0 0.0 Plot the vertices and then save the model description up to this point: In the main window, choose Plot > Number and then select option Vertex Select the Vertex Cell Plot Display Option Plot > Vertex Plot Figure T4.1-2 File > Save Model
VSET ALL NUMB VERT ON CDISP ON VERT VSTYLE 3 6 4 VPLO SAVE tut.mdl
Version 3.26
4-5
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Generate six more vertices in the Z direction (DZ = 1.0), by typing the following in the I/O window: VGEN 2 100 VSET,,,0.0 0.0 1.0 (increment vertices in the set by 100)
Collect the vertices into a set, change the viewpoint, plot and save: In the main window, select V > All Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Plot > Vertex Plot File > Save Model
VSET ALL VIEW 1 1 1 VPLO SAVE tut.mdl The four discontinuous splines are defined next: Go to the Create Geometric Entities panel and select the Splines tab Click Create Spline and then follow the instructions displayed on the panel. The vertices to be selected are 1, 5, 2 (in that order). Click Done when nished. In the main window, select Plot > Spline Plot
The newly created spline is now displayed on the screen. It will be seen that the result is a smooth spline rather than a discontinuous one. To create the discontinuity, proceed as follows:
4-6 Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Click Options In the Spline Tool displayed, click Spline List In the Spline List dialog, highlight the spline just created (no. 1) Highlight vertex no. 5, located at the point of discontinuity, and then click Change Signs In the main window, click Replot. The display should show the desired discontinuous spline
The procedure described above may now be repeated for the remaining three splines, as follows: (Vertices with a negative sign denote the points of discontinuity) Spline 2 Vertices 4, -6, 3 Spline 3 Vertices 101, -105, 102 Spline 4 Vertices 104, -106, 103 SPL 1 VLIS 1 -5 2 SPL 2 VLIS 4 -6 3 SPL 3 VLIS 101 -105 102 SPL 4 VLIS 104 -106 103 At the end of the last REPLOT operation, all splines should be visible on the screen, as shown below: Figure T4.1-3 SPLS ALL SPLOT
Version 3.26
4-7
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Close the Spline List dialog Close the Spline Tool
To define the block itself, proceed as follows: Return to the STAR GUIde window and select the Create and Import Grids folder Select the Create Grids sub-folder Click Create Block Structured Grids to open the corresponding panel Select the Blocks tab and then click Create Block Follow the instructions displayed in the panel. The vertices to be selected are 1, 2, 3, 4, 101, 102, 103, 104 (in that order). Click Done when nished, followed by Block Plot Select plot type option Wire (All). This will display the generated block, shown below. Figure T4.1-4
BLK 1 1 2 3 4 101 102 103 104 BLKS ALL CDISP ON BLOC BLKPLOT PLTY NORM SURF OFF REPL
Note that the defined block is displayed by drawing the correct straight lines or discontinuous splines between its eight corners. The next step is to fill the block with a regular mesh. This can be done by
4-8 Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
specifying appropriate fill factors, which in the simplest case involves defining the number of cells along each coordinate direction. In this case, we can specify that the mesh is to have 14, 5 and 1 cells in the X, Y and Z directions, respectively, as follows: Select the Mesh tab to activate the mesh functions Click Number of Cells and then select any of the block edges that are aligned along the X direction Type the number of cells required, 14 in this case, in the Numeric Parameter text box and click Done Repeat the above operations for the Y- and Z- directions, specifying a mesh spacing of 5 and 1, respectively. The specied mesh spacing will be displayed on your screen.
BLKF 1 14 5 1 The final step in the block meshing process is to create vertices and cells. This is done as follows: Click Generate Mesh
BLKE 1 1 1 Turn off the vertex numbering option, collect the cells, plot in Hidden Surface mode and save: In the main window, choose Plot > Number and then deselect option Vertex Deselect Cell Plot Display Option Vertex Select C > All Choose cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot Figure T4.1-5 File > Save Model
NUMB VERT OFF CDISP OFF VERT CDISP OFF SPLI CDISP OFF BLOC CSET ALL PLTY EHID CPLO SAVE tut.mdl
Version 3.26
4-9
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Refine the rear part of the mesh, as follows: Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Select C > New > Zone Use the cursor to draw a closed polygon from the middle of the third cell column on the left-hand side to the end of the solution domain on the right-hand side Click Cell Plot. A region of 11 by 5 cells in the X and Y directions, respectively, will be displayed Figure T4.1-6
VIEW 0 0 1 REPL CSET NEWS ZONE CPLO
4-10
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Refine the current cell set in the X and Y directions, change the view, plot and save: Tools > Cell Tool In the Cell Tool, select Cell Rene In the Cell Rene dialog, type the following subdivision factors: I direction box 2 J direction box 2 K direction box 1 Accept the rest of the settings and then click Apply Close the Cell Rene dialog Close the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > All and then Cell Plot Change the viewpoint to ( 1, 1, 1 ) by seelcting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Figure T4.1-7 File > Save Model 2 2 1 CSET 1 1 1 ALL tut.mdl
CREF VIEW CSET CPLO SAVE
Version 3.26
4-11
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Half of the mesh is now complete. Use command CGENERATE to generate the other half by collecting the existing vertices into a set and reflecting them about the X plane. In the I/O window, type: VSET ALL CGEN 2 5000 CSET,,,VREFLE,1,2 Note that the vertices in the new cell set are incremented by 5000. This number must be larger than the highest vertex number used so far. Collect the cells created and plot: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T4.1-8
CSET ALL CPLO
4-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Check the model for mesh discontinuities: Choose cell plot type Wire (Surface) Click on the edge plotting button Figure T4.1-9
PLTY NORM EDGE ON REPL
Version 3.26
4-13
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
It can be seen that discontinuities exist along the centreline of the model as well as along the refined region interface. The first group can be eliminated by merging vertices; the second group by coupling of cells on either side of the embedded mesh interface. To remove the discontinuities: Go to the STAR GUIde window and open the Assemble Grids panel In the Vertex Merge tab, check that option All Vertices is selected and then click Merge In the main window, select C > All Open the Create Couple tab on the Assemble Grids panel Check that option Cell Set is selected in the Choose Cells menu and then click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T4.1-10
VMER ALL N CPCREATE CSET 1 CSET ALL CPLO
4-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
The display now shows that all discontinuities have been eliminated. Turn the edge plotting facility off and change back to Hidden Surface mode: Turn off edge plotting by clicking off the edge plotting button Choose cell plot type Hidden Surface
EDGE OFF PLTY EHID Renumber the vertices and cells to eliminate the gaps in the numbering scheme created by the mesh generation and refinement operations, collect them into sets and save the model data: Tools > Vertex Tool In the Vertex Tool, click Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, click Apply and then Close Close the Vertex Tool Tools > Cell Tool In the Cell Tool, click Cell Compress Close the Cell Tool Select V > All Select C > All File > Save Model
VCOM ALL Y CCOM
Version 3.26
4-15
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Y VSET ALL CSET ALL SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Boundary locations are now specified graphically using the STAR GUIde facilities: Specication Select folder Locate Boundaries and then open the Create Boundaries panel BOUN STAT Select a suitable viewpoint and then specify the inlet location: In the main window, click Cell Plot Set the viewpoint to (-1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region an inlet by selecting Inlet from the Type menu and then clicking Define region Click Pick Cell Faces and then pick the faces of the 10 cells to be declared as inlets. Click DONE when finished.
VIEW -1 1 1 CPLO RDEF 1 INLE $ $ BCRO ADD 1 Change the view to display the opposite end of the model and specify the outlet location for the upper leg of the Y-junction: Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Highlight region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region an outlet by selecting Outlet from the Type menu and then clicking Define region Click Pick Cell Faces and then pick the faces of the upper 10 cells to be defined as outlets. Click DONE when finished.
VIEW 1 1 1 REPL RDEF 3 OUTL $ $ BCRO ADD 3 Repeat the above operation for the lower leg of the Y-junction:
4-16
Highlight region no. 4 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region an outlet by selecting Outlet from the Type menu and
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
then clicking Define region Click Pick Cell Faces and then pick the faces of the lower 10 cells to be defined as outlets. Click DONE when finished.
RDEF 4 OUTL $ $ BCRO ADD 4 Collect the boundaries into a set, turn on the boundary display facility and plot. The selected boundary cell faces are marked with different colours, according to the boundary type selected: Click Plot All Click on the edge plotting button Figure T4.1-11
BSET ALL BDIS ON EDGE ON CPLO
Define the symmetry planes as follows:

Version 3.26
In the main window, deselect Cell Plot Display Option Bound Turn off edge plotting by clicking off the edge plotting button In the Create Boundaries panel, highlight region no. 5 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region a symmetry plane by selecting Symmetry from the Type menu and then clicking Define region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick any vertex in the coarse
4-17
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
mesh away from the models edges to generate symmetry boundaries Click Surface Based on Vset and pick any vertex inside the ne mesh to complete the symmetry boundary specication for this side of the model. Flip the model over by selecting View > REVERSE Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick a vertex in the coarse mesh Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex in the ne mesh.
EDGE OFF BDIS OFF REPLOT RDEF 5 SYMP VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 5 VX BFIN 5 VX VIEW REVERSE REPLOT VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 5 VX BFIN 5 VX Material Properties Check the default fluid properties: Click the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel. Conrm that the values shown correspond to those given on page 4-3 of this tutorial.
PROP STAT Turn on the standard k- turbulence model: Click Turbulence Models to display the corresponding panel Click On to switch on turbulence Select the desired turbulence model, K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number, from the drop-down menu Click Apply to save your setting
TURB KE Define the location of the monitoring point:

4-18
Click Monitoring and Reference Data to display the corresponding panel Type 95 in the Monitoring cell number text box Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
MONI 95 Boundary Conditions Define the boundary conditions at the inlet, changing the mode of turbulence parameter specification to turbulence intensity and length scale: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the boundary region scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 1 INLE 10.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 1.205 RTURB 1,MIXL,0.1,0.01 Set boundary conditions for the outlets as follows: RDEF SPLI RDEF SPLI Select region no. 3 Specify a 50-50 ow split at the outlet by typing 0.5 in the Flow Split box Click Apply Select region no. 4 Type 0.5 in the Flow Split box Click Apply 3 OUTL 0.5 4 OUTL 0.5
Confirm the specified boundary conditions visually:

Version 3.26
In the main window, select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select B > All Select B > Unselect > Symplane
4-19
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Solution Variables
BSET BSET BDIS EDGE VIEW CPLO
Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Click the edge plotting button Figure T4.1-12 ALL DELE SYMP ON ON 1 1 1
Solution Variables
Check the solution variables: Click folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel
Since the model is two-dimensional, the solution for the W velocity component can be switched off: In the Equation Status tab, deselect the Solve option button for item W-Mom Click Apply
SOLV LW N Run Time Controls

4-20
Check the status of the run time control parameters:
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display and check the contents of the corresponding panel. Click Analysis (Re)Start to display the corresponding panel. The setting of the Restart File Option menu should be None, conrming that this is a run from initial conditions.
CONT STAT Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry file (scaled by 0.01 to change the dimensions to meters) and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, enter 0.01 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the units in which the model was built are correctly set, i.e. the other option button should be selected and a value of 0.01 displayed in the Scale Factor box. Leave all other settings at their default values. Click Start New Analysis
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst:
Version 3.26
Select folder Post-Processing

4-21
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing Load velocity vector components for plotting: Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select Velocity Component UV In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots
GETC U,V,NONE Define a section plane located at constant Z=0.5: In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates (0, 0, 0.5) for the sections Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the x-y plane with a z-value of 0.5, since the Normal x, y values are zero by default. Click Apply
POPT VECT EDGE ON PLTY SECT SPOI 0,0,0.5 SNORM 0,0,1 Change the size of the vectors and plot: Go to the Vectors tab Type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box and then click Apply Go back to the Section Clipped tab and then click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window to display the nal appearance of the plot Figure T4.1-13
VIEW 0 0 1 VESC 0.5 CPLOT
4-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Collect the cell-based pressure values, change to contour plotting and plot: Click Go To Load Data Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T4.1-14
GETC NONE P POPT CONT REPL Repeat for the vertex-based pressure values: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot Figure T4.1-15
GETV NONE P REPL
Version 3.26
4-23
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Note that although both plots represent the same pressure distribution, the vertex-based one gives much smoother contours as a result of interpolating the pressure values at the mesh vertices. Select the vertex-based turbulence kinetic energy and plot:
4-24
Select item Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
In the main window, click Replot
Figure T4.1-16
GETV NONE TE REPL
View the vertex-based dissipation of turbulence kinetic energy by plotting the distribution along the surface of the model: Select item Dissipation from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Go to the 3-D Surface tab and then choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Figure T4.1-17 NONE ED 1 1 1 EHID OFF
GETV VIEW PLTY PLME CPLO
Version 3.26
4-25
Tutorial 4.1
SINGLE STREAM FLOW
Final Operations
QUIT N
File > Quit, Nosave
4-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
In this tutorial, the two sections of the Y-junction analysed in Tutorial 4.1 are now separated by a solid row of thermally conducting baffles (zero thickness cells). The models single inlet also becomes two separate inlets, as shown in Figure T4.0-1. Fluids of different physical properties enter each inlet at different velocities and temperatures and the two outlet boundaries are changed to pressure boundaries. The physical properties of the two streams are as follows: Lower Stream (liquid): Isobarically varying density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity Upper Stream (gas): Molecular weight Ideal Gas Law density variation Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity 28.9 2.0 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/kmole Pa s J/kg K W/m K reference value 1.0 103 0.001 4181.0 0.597 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
A step-by-step approach is adopted whereby the mesh representing the new model geometry is set up first, followed by a specification of the fluid physical properties in each half of the Y-junction. At the end of this tutorial it is expected that users will be able to: Assign different material properties to each sub-region of the solution domain Dene conducting bafes Modify the current boundary conditions
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut4-2) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 4.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut4-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 4.2 - TWIN STREAM TURBULENT FLOW IN A 2D Y-JUNCTION Click Apply
Version 3.26
4-27
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Bafe Creation
TITLE TUTORIAL 4.2 - TWIN STREAM TURBULENT FLOW IN A 2D Y-JUNCTION Check the model geometry and cell type definitions before making any modifications: In the main window, turn off the Bound Cell Plot Display Option Turn off the edge plotting option Click Cell Plot Figure T4.2-1 Click the CTAB button and check the currently available cell types in the Cell Table Editor scroll list. It will be seen that a fluid cell type (no. 1) as well as a baffle cell type (no. 3) are defined by default Close the Cell Table Editor
BDIS OFF EDGE OFF CPLO CTLI ALL
Bafe Creation
The first task is to define baffle cells separating the two sections of the Y-junction (the technique has already been demonstrated in Tutorial 1). Select the portion of the mesh that needs to be worked on using the screen cursor: Click the plot orientation cubes Reset button to view the mesh side on Select C > New > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the lower
Version 3.26
4-28
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Bafe Creation
part of the model and up to the beginning of the junction, as shown in the Figure below Click Cell Plot Figure T4.2-2
VIEW 0 0 1 CSET NEWS GRAN -1.0 18.001 -12.0 0.001 -1.0 2.0 CPLO
Change view, replot and create the required baffles as follows: Change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +Y Select Tools > Cell Tool Highlight cell no. 3 (Bafe) in the Cell Table scroll list, select Add Bafes > Cursor Select and then click on the visible cell faces one by one with the cursor. Click Done when finished.
VIEW 0 1 0 REPL CCROSS BAFF 3 The baffles just created can be displayed most effectively via a Hidden Line plot:
Version 3.26
In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T4.2-3
4-29
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Stream Creation
VIEW 1 1 1 PLTY QHID CSET ALL CPLO
Inspection of the I/O window shows that the total number of cells is now 485 (470 defined previously + 15 baffle cells). Save the model created so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Stream Creation Check that the Cell Table scroll list in the Cell Tool shows that the active cell type is currently no. 1 MESH STAT CTLI ALL The lower half of the Y-junction is to be made into a different stream by assigning its cells to a new cell type, no. 4. First, select the appropriate mesh region: Click the plot orientation cubes Reset button to view the mesh side on Select C > New > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the lower part of the model, including the lower leg of the junction
Version 3.26
4-30
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Stream Creation
Select cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot Restore the viewpoint back to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1
CSET NEWS GRAN -1.0 100.0 -100.0 0.001 -100.0 100.0 PLTY EHID CPLO Remove the baffle cells from the set: Select C > Unselect > Bafe Click Cell Plot
CSET DELE BAFF CPLO Change the cells in the current set to type 4 and replot: In the Cell Tool, click Edit Types to open the Cell Table Editor Highlight cell no. 4 in the editors scroll list and then type in the following parameters: Material Number 2 (assigns a different set of physical properties to this stream) Color Table Index 5 (differentiates cells in this stream by colour) Click Apply and then Close the Cell Table Editor In the Cell Tool scroll list, select cell no 4 Select Modify Type > Cell Set Click Replot Close the Cell Tool
CTAB 4 FLUI 5 0 2 CTYP 4 CMOD CSET REPL Collect all cells into a new set, plot and save: In the main window, select C > All then Cell Plot Choose File > Save Model from the menu bar
CSET ALL CPLO SAVE tut.mdl The two halves of the Y-junction should now appear in different colours, showing the different cell types now present in the model.
Version 3.26 4-31
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Upper Stream Properties
Upper Stream Properties
Set the physical properties of the fluid in the upper half of the model (material no. 1): Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel Check that the Material # slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 and then type the material name (GAS) in the box at the top of the panel
PMAT 1 FLUID GAS It is seen that the density is constant. Choose the Ideal Gas law for the density variation and then change the molecular viscosity value: Select option Ideal-f(T) from the Density pop-up menu Type 2.0e-5 in the mu box Click Apply
DENS IDEA N 1.205 LVIS CONS 2.0E-5 Given that conduction through the baffles is to be modelled in this tutorial, the temperature equation must be turned on: Open the Thermal Models panel Select Temperature Calculation On Click Apply
TEMP ON Specify the monitoring point and reference pressure locations. The easiest way of doing this is to pick the desired locations on the cell plot using the screen cursor: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Click the mouse icon next to the Monitoring cell number box and pick a cell within the upper leg of the junction (for the purposes of this tutorial we assume it is cell number 180) Click the mouse icon next to the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and pick a cell close to the upper inlet boundary (for the purposes of this tutorial we assume it is cell number 15) Click Apply
MONI 180 PRES 1.0E5 15 Lower Stream Properties

4-32
Set appropriate properties for the lower half of the model (material no.2): Go back to the Molecular Properties panel and use the slider at the bottom of the panel to change the current material number to 2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Lower Stream Properties
Type the material name (LIQUID) in the box at the top of the panel
PMAT 2 FLUID LIQUID Specify an isobaric variation for the density: Select option Isobaric from the Density pop-up menu Type 1000 in the D(ref) (reference density) box and 1.8e-4 in the Beta (thermal expansion coefcient) box
DENS ISOB 1000.0 1.8E-4 Change the molecular viscosity of the fluid: Type 1.0e-3 in the mu box
LVIS CONS 1.0E-3 Assign new values to the specific heat and conductivity: Type 4181 in the Cp box Type 0.597 in the k box Click Apply
SPEC CONS 4181.0 COND CONS 0.597 Turn on the standard k- model for this stream: Open the Turbulence Models panel Click On to switch on turbulence Select the desired turbulence model, K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number, from the drop-down menu Click Apply
TURB KE Turn on the temperature equation: Open the Thermal Models panel Select Temperature Calculation On Click Apply
TEMP ON Finally, specify the monitoring point and reference pressure locations, as with material 1:
Version 3.26
Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Click the mouse icon next to the Monitoring cell number box and pick a
4-33
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
cell within the lower leg of the junction (for the purposes of this tutorial we assume it is cell number 415) Click the mouse icon next to the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and pick a cell close to the lower inlet boundary (for the purposes of this tutorial we assume it is cell number 300) Click Apply
MONI 415 PRES 1.0E5
300
Save the work done so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Check the boundary locations and region definitions: Specication Select folder Locate Boundaries and then open the Create Boundaries panel BOUN STAT RLIS ALL Delete the previously-defined single-inlet boundaries in region 1 (10 boundary faces): Highlight region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Delete All in Region In the main window, select B > Unselect > Symplane Turn on the Bound Cell Plot Display Option Click Replot to conrm visually that the old inlet boundaries have been deleted
BSET NEWS REGI 1 BDEL BSET The wall, outlet and symmetry boundaries still remain. The new dual inlet boundaries will be defined later on a stream-wise basis. The baffles defined previously need to be assigned explicitly to a boundary region, otherwise they will be treated by default as adiabatic walls. Thus, to model heat conduction through them, it is now necessary to assign them to a separate boundary region and then define appropriate (i.e. baffle) boundary conditions. Begin by collecting the baffle cells into a set and plotting them:
4-34
In the main window, select C > New > Bafe Deselect the Bound Cell Plot Display Option Change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +Y
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Click Cell Plot
CSET NEWS BAFF VIEW 0 1 0 CPLO A total of 15 cells will be displayed. Assign them to region no. 6 and define this region as a baffle boundary: Go to the Create Boundaries panel and select region no. 6 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Designate this region as a baffle by selecting Baffle from the Type menu and then clicking Dene region Click Select a Zone and then use the cursor to draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
BZON 6 ALL RDEF 6 BAFF $ $ $ $ $ $ $ The new inlets are defined next. Change view, replot and assign boundaries for the new region 1, redefined as the inlet to the lower stream: In the main window, select C > All Change the viewpoint to (-1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1 Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then type Lower_inlet in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces and then use the cursor to select the ve inlet boundary faces belonging to the lower stream
CSET ALL VIEW -1 1 1 CPLO BZON 1 RNAME 1 Lower_inlet The boundaries for the upper stream can be defined in a similar manner, as follows: Select region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Select Inlet from the Type menu and type Upper_inlet in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces and then use the cursor to select the ve inlet boundary faces belonging to the upper stream
BZON 2
Version 3.26 4-35
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
RDEF 2 INLE $ $ RNAME 2 Upper_inlet Switch the boundary display facility on, collect cells and boundaries into sets (excluding the symmetry boundaries), change view and plot: BDIS BSET BSET VIEW CPLO BDIS In the main window, select the Bound Cell Plot Display Option Select B > All Select B > Unselect > Symplane Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Figure T4.2-4 Deselect the Bound Cell Plot Display Option ON ALL DELE SYMP 1 1 1 OFF
Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions for the lower stream are specified as follows, starting with the inlet boundary: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Click Dene Boundary Regions to display the corresponding panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list and then enter inlet conditions in the
Version 3.26
4-36
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 1 INLE 5.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 473.0 870.0 RTURB 1,MIXL,0.1,0.005 The lower outlet boundary of the previous tutorial is changed to a pressure boundary: Select region no. 4 in the scroll list and option Pressure from the Region Type menu Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Type Lower_pressure in the Region Name box Enter pressure boundary conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 4 PRES PIEZ 0.0 N N N

Version 3.26 4-37
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
RTURB 4,MIXL,0.1,0.005 RTPRES 4,TEMP,473.0 RNAME 4 Lower_pressure Boundary conditions for the upper stream may be specified in a similar manner, as follows: Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu and then enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 2 INLET 10.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 293.0 1.205 RTURB 2 MIXL 0.1 0.005 Select region no. 3 in the scroll list and option Pressure from the Region Type menu Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Type Upper_pressure in the Region Name box Enter pressure boundary conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
4-38
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Click Apply
RDEF 3 PRES PIEZ 0.0 N N N RTURB 3,MIXL,0.1,0.005 RTPRES 3,TEMP,293.0 RNAME 3 Upper_pressure Define region 6 as a conducting baffle boundary of zero effective thermal resistance and specify the same boundary conditions for both sides of the baffle: Select region no. 6 in the scroll list Select option Conduction from the Wall Heat pop-up menu Accept the default values for all other parameters and click Apply Click Apply again to accept the displayed defaults for the second side of the bafe
RDEF 6 BAFF [carriage return] [carriage return] [carriage return] COND 0.0 SAME Default wall boundary conditions (no-slip with wall functions, stationary, impermeable, non-conducting, non-radiating) are applied to the domain boundaries that are defined by default as walls. Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem file and geometry file (scaled by 0.01 to change the dimensions to meters) and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next
4-39
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, enter 0.01 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the units in which the model was built are correctly set, i.e. the other option button should be selected and a value of 0.01 displayed in the Scale Factor box. Leave all other settings at their default values. Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Click folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing A series of operations similar to those of Tutorial 4.1 are used here to examine the velocity vector distribution: Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select Velocity Component UV In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
Version 3.26
4-40
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates (0, 0, 0.5) for the sections Point. This is the point through which the section plane will pass. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the x-y plane with a z-value of 0.5, since the Normal x, y values are zero by default. Click Apply Go to the Vectors tab Type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box and then click Apply Go back to the Section Clipped tab and then click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window to display the nal appearance of the plot Figure T4.2-5 U,V,NONE VECT SECT 0 0 0.5 0 0 1 0 0 1 0.5
GETC POPT PLTY SPOI SNOR VIEW VESC CPLO
For vertex-based contour plots, it is important not to attempt to display flow variables over the entire solution domain in one operation since this will create a smooth (i.e. continuous) variation in variable values across the baffle interface. To display the discontinuity introduced by the baffles properly, it is important to work with averaged cell-centred values for each stream separately (this excludes boundary and hence baffle values) and then superimpose the two distributions on
Version 3.26 4-41
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
the same plot. The recommended procedure is described below. First, read in the entire pressure field and do a preliminary plot to establish the correct scale for the pressure range expected in the problem. Click Go To Load Data Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu In the main window, select Post > Caverage > All Click Plot to Screen
GETC NONE P POPT CONT CAVER ALL CPLOT Fix the scale and the plot view by typing the following commands in the I/O window: CSCALE,,PFIX PLFIX ON Plot the pressure distribution for the upper half of the model and then switch on the plot superposition facility: In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool Select cell type no. 1 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) In the Create Plots panel, click Go To Load Data Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, select Post > Caverage > Cset Click Cell Plot
CSET NEWS TYPE 1 GETC NONE P CAVE CSET CPLOT Calculate and plot the pressure distribution for the lower half of the model to complete the plot for the entire model: In the main window, select Plot > Display > Overlay In the Cell Tool, select cell type no. 4 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) In the Load Data panel, check that item Pressure is selected in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data
Version 3.26
4-42
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
In the main window, select Post > Caverage > Cset Click Cell Plot
Figure T4.2-6
OVER ON CSET NEWS TYPE 4 GETC NONE P CAVE CSET CPLOT
The turbulence kinetic energy distribution can be plotted as follows: First, switch off the overlay facility and instruct pro-STAR to calculate the plot scale automatically: In the main window, choose Plot > Display and then deselect the Overlay option Select C > All In the Load Data panel, select Go To > Create Plots Go to the Options tab In the Color Scale section, check that option Auto is selected in the Range menu Click Apply
OVER OFF CSET ALL CSCALE 14 AUTO Read in the entire k distribution and do a preliminary plot to establish the correct
Version 3.26 4-43
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
scale for the range of values expected in the problem. Then fix the scale: Click Go To Load Data In the Load Data panel, select item Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, choose Post > Caverage > All Select Plot > Legend > All Click Cell Plot In the I/O window, type command CSCALE,,PFIX
GETC NONE TE CAVER ALL CPLOT CSCALE,,PFIX Plot the k distribution, first for the upper half of the model and then for the lower half as before: Select cell type no. 1 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) In the Load Data panel, check that item Turb Kinetic Energy is selected in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, select Post > Caverage > Cset Click Cell Plot Select Plot > Display > Overlay Highlight cell type no. 4 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) In the Load Data panel, check that item Turb Kinetic Energy is selected in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, select Post > Caverage > Cset Click Cell Plot Figure T4.2-7 Choose Plot > Display and then deselect the Overlay option TYPE 1 TE
CSET NEWS GETC NONE CAVE CSET PLFIX ON CPLOT OVER ON CSET NEWS GETC NONE CAVE CSET CPLOT OVER OFF
4-44
TYPE 4 TE
Version 3.26
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
The temperature distribution can be displayed in a similar manner:

Version 3.26
Select C > All In the Load Data panel, click Go To Create Plots Go to the Options tab In the Color Scale section, select option Auto from the Range menu Click Apply Click Go To Load Data In the Load Data panel, select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, choose Post > Caverage > All Select Plot > Legend > All Click Cell Plot In the I/O window, type command CSCALE,,PFIX Select cell type no. 1 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) In the Load Data panel, check that item Temperature is selected in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, select Post > Caverage > Cset Click Cell Plot Plot > Display > Overlay Select cell type no. 4 in the Cell Table scroll list Select New > Type (Current) In the Load Data panel, check that item Temperature is selected in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, select Post > Caverage > Cset Click Cell Plot Figure T4.2-8
4-45
Tutorial 4.2
TWIN STREAM FLOW
CSET ALL CSCALE 14 AUTO GETC NONE T CAVER ALL CPLOT CSCALE,,PFIX CSET NEWS TYPE 1 GETC NONE T CAVE CSET CPLOT OVER ON CSET NEWS TYPE 4 GETC NONE T CAVE CSET CPLOT
Final Operations
QUIT N
File > Quit, Nosave
4-46
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5 3-D TURBULENT FLOW IN A DILUTION PIPE

Physical Problem Description This tutorial deals with the mixing of air and methane gas in a dilution pipe, shown in cross-section in Figure T5.0-1. The problem geometry consists of two concentric pipes, with the inner pipe covering only one quarter of the total distance between inlet and outlet. An orifice plate protrudes from the outer wall half way along the pipe. Air at standard pressure and temperature (1 bar, 293 K), flows in through the outer annulus with a uniform velocity of 5 m/s. Methane gas (molecular weight 16 kg/kmole) at a temperature of 323 K flows in through the inner pipe at a uniform velocity of 10 m/s. The pipe walls (inner and outer) are assumed to be adiabatic and the orifice plate has negligible thermal resistance. The background fluid for this problem is air (constant pressure of 1 bar, temperature of 293 K); its physical properties are as follows: Molecular weight Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity 28.96 1.205 1.81 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/kmole kg/m3 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
The flow is three-dimensional and essentially symmetric, so only half of the problem geometry is considered in building the model. The tutorial is divided into two parts, one dealing with a steady-state and the other with a transient analysis. Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is adopted: Toroidal coordinate system with hexahedral cells, as shown in Figure T5.0-2 Inlet, pressure, symmetry and wall boundary conditions Non-isothermal, incompressible and steady/transient ow options Appropriate physical parameters for air and methane The standard k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics
Version 3.26
5-1
Modelling Strategy
All dimensions in inches 1.5
0.75
Outlet
1.4
1.0
22.5 22.5 Symmetry plane 4.0 Inlet 2 Inlet 1 2.0 Inlet 2
Figure T5.0-1
Dilution pipe geometry
Figure T5.0-2
5-2
Mesh structure for the dilution pipe model (back elevation)

Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
A toroidal coordinate system is employed to set up the mesh for this tutorial. Other techniques introduced include moving vertices to new locations and filling in between vertices. At the end of this tutorial, users should be able to: Generate a mesh in a toroidal coordinate system Move a set of vertices to a new location Fill in additional vertices between two given end vertices Repeat a command automatically Set up a scalar variable
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut5-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 5.1 - 3D TURBULENT FLOW IN A DILUTION PIPE (STEADY) Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 5.1 - 3D TURBULENT FLOW IN A DILUTION PIPE (STEADY)
Mesh Creation
Generate the mesh using pro-STARs STAR GUIde environment as follows: Open the STAR GUIde window and select folder Create and Import Grids Select sub-folder Create Grids Click Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel Click Select a Coordinate System
MESH STAT CSLI ALL Note that the active coordinate system is no. 1 (Cartesian). It is more convenient to create the mesh for this case using a toroidal coordinate system, so this must be added to the list as follows:
Version 3.26
Select system no. 4 in the scroll list Select option Toroidal in the pop-up menu at the bottom left-hand corner
5-3
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
of the Coordinate Systems dialog Enter the length of the major radius, 4.0, in the rightmost box under the scroll list Click New (Local). The newly defined system also becomes the currently active system automatically.
LOCAL 4 TORO 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 STAT
I
In the Create 3-D Grids panel, use the Extent of Domain boxes to enter the mesh dimensions and cell spacing, as shown below. The mesh is plotted automatically upon creation:
Click Generate Mesh Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to approximately (-0.5, 0.5, 1) Figure T5.1-1 0.0 1.0 10 0.0 90.0 20 0.0 180.0 10 ALL EHID -0.5 0.5 1
VC3D CSET PLTY VIEW CPLO
Note that this is the front elevation of the mesh geometry. To display the back elevation: Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to approximately (-0.5, 0.5, -1) Figure T5.1-2
VIEW -0.5 0.5 -1 REPL
5-4
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Save the model data produced so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl The generated mesh is still incomplete. As seen in Figure T5.0-1, the pipe expands
Version 3.26 5-5
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
from half-way up the inlet to the outlet. Therefore, the geometry needs to be modified to take this expansion into account. The strategy adopted here is to move the circumferential vertices at the outlet to their correct position and then use command VFILL to reposition the internal vertices. Collect all vertices on the outlet plane, change view, turn vertex numbering on and plot: Type command VSET NEWS GRAN,,,89 91,,,4 in the I/O window to specify the required vertex range In the main window, select Cell Plot Display Option Vertex Choose Plot > Number and then select option Vertex Change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -X Plot > Vertex Plot Figure T5.1-3
VSET NEWS GRAN,,,89 91,,,4 CDISP,ON,VERT VSTYLE,3,6,4 VIEW -1 0 0 NUMB VERT ON VPLO Vertices on the circumference need to be moved to their correct position. These are first collected into a set and plotted: Type command VSET NEWS VRAN 231 2541 231 in the I/O window to specify the required vertex range Plot > Vertex Plot
Figure T5.1-4
VSET NEWS VRAN 231 2541 231 VPLO
5-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
The vertices must be moved in the r-direction of the toroidal coordinate system by 0.5 units (see Figure 3-17 in the User Guide), using command VGENERATE with a zero offset: VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,0.5 0 0 Collect all vertices on the outlet plane and plot:
Version 3.26 5-7
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Type command VSET NEWS GRAN,,,89 91,,,4 in the I/O window to specify the required vertex range Plot > Vertex Plot
Figure T5.1-5
VSET NEWS GRAN,,,89 91,,,4 VPLO
It is seen that the vertex numbering is unchanged but the circumferential vertices are now moved to their new position, as intended. To achieve a uniformly-spaced mesh, it is now necessary to reposition the internal vertices. Change the active coordinate system back to 1 (Cartesian): In the Coordinate Systems dialog, select system no. 1 and then click Set Active
CSYS 1 Relocate the internal vertices using command VFILL: VFIL 21 231 9 42 21 11 231 This repositions 9 vertices between vertex nos. 21 and 231, starting with vertex no. 42 and incrementing by 21. The process is repeated 11 times to cover the entire plane. Turn the vertex numbering off, plot and save:
5-8
Plot > Number and deselect option Vertex Plot > Vertex Plot File > Save Model
Figure T5.1-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
NUMB VERT OFF VPLO SAVE tut.mdl
Change back to coordinate system no. 4: In the Coordinate Systems dialog, select system no. 4, click Set Active and then Close
CSYS 4 Collect the vertices in the upper half of the model, then collect the corresponding cells into a cell set, change view and plot: Type command VSET NEWS GRAN,,,44 91,,,4 in the I/O window to specify the required vertex range Select C > New > Vertex Set (All) Deselect Cell Plot Display Option Vertex Click Cell Plot Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to approximately (-0.5, 0.5, -1) Figure T5.1-7 File > Save Model
VSET NEWS GRAN,,,44 91,,,4 CSET NEWS VSET ALL VIEW -0.5 0.5 -1
Version 3.26 5-9
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
CDISP,OFF,VERT CPLO SAVE tut.mdl
It is now evident that cells in the upper (expanding) part of the model need to be adjusted. This can be achieved in a similar way to the previous operation, i.e. by employing the VFILL command to reposition the corresponding vertices in between the left- and right-hand cross-sectional planes. To do this, it is very useful to use the Vertex Tool facilities for identifying the vertices that must be included in the next VFILL command. Tools > Vertex Tool Click Identify Vertex and when the cursor appears, mark the vertex at the centre of the left- hand plane. The information displayed in the I/O window will identify this as vertex no. 11 Similarly, click Identify Vertex and when the cursor appears, mark the vertex at the centre of the right- hand plane. The information displayed in the I/O window will identify this as vertex no. 21 Close the Vertex Tool
VLIS VX ,,, 4 VLIS VX ,,, 4 Next, use the VFILL command to fill (reposition) 9 vertices between the left- and right-hand cross-sectional planes. Note that the filling algorithm is sensitive to machine roundoff errors and may give unexpected results on some machines when repositioning the desired vertices. To ensure that command VFILL works in a
5-10 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
consistent manner, define the filling direction explicitly via command CSDIR (see also Vertices, Command-driven facilities, in Chapter 3 of the User Guide). CSDI 180 VFIL 11 21 9 12 1 11 21 The VFILL operation repositions vertices in the radial direction. Command RPnnnn can now be used to repeat the operation 11 times so as to reposition vertices in the circumferential direction: RP11 231 231 0 231 0 Display the resulting mesh: REPL In the main window, click Replot Figure T5.1-8 0 0
Collect all cells into a set, plot and save: Select C > All Click Cell Plot File > Save Model Figure T5.1-9
CSET ALL CPLO SAVE tut.mdl
Version 3.26
5-11
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
The external mesh geometry definition is now complete. The internal geometry, however, requires further input; namely, definition of the internal concentric pipe and the orifice plate. Both of them may be treated as baffles. For this purpose, check that baffle cells are available: In the main window, click button CTAB to display the Cell Table Editor dialog. It can be seen that a default Baffle cell definition already exists (cell type no. 3). Close the Cell Table Editor
CTLI ALL To specify the internal concentric pipe, collect the relevant cells using the geometric range option of the CSET command: CSET NEWS GRAN 0.35 0.55 -1.0 23.0 ,,,4 This selects all cells between r = 0.35 and r = 0.55, = 1 and = 23. Change view and plot: Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to approximately (-0.5, 0.5, 1) Click Cell Plot Figure T5.1-10
VIEW -0.5 0.5 1 CPLO
5-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
To add baffles on the surface of the currently displayed cells, use the Cell Tool facilities as follows: Tools > Cell Tool In the Cell Table scroll list, highlight table no. 3 (Bafe) Click Add Bafes > Surface (New Edge Vertex Set) and when the cursor appears, mark a vertex on the annular surface nearest to you. This results in the creation of 50 baffles.
VSET NEWS EDGE CFIN BAFF,,VX Check the baffles visually by collecting and plotting them using the Quick Hidden Line display option: Select C > All Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Click Cell Plot
Figure T5.1-11
CSET ALL PLTY QHID CPLO
Version 3.26
5-13
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
To define the orifice plate, start by collecting cells within the appropriate geometric range and plot in Hidden Surface mode: Type command CSET NEWS GRAN 0.65 2 -1.0 46.0 ,,,4 in the I/O window to set the required cell range Select cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot
Figure T5.1-12
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.65 2 -1.0 46.0 ,,,4 PLTY EHID CPLO
5-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
As before, use the Cell Tool facilities to define the new set of baffles: In the Cell Tool, click Add Bafes > Surface (New Edge Vertex Set) and when the cursor appears, mark a vertex on the top annular surface. This results in the creation of 30 baffles. Close the Cell Tool
VSET NEWS EDGE CFIN BAFF,,VX Collect all cells into a set and plot in Quick Hidden Line mode to check the result: Select C > All Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Click Cell Plot
Figure T5.1-13
CSET ALL PLTY QHID CPLO
Version 3.26
5-15
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
pro-STARs method of automatic vertex and cell creation is such that double vertices will have been generated along the centreline of the mesh. Use STAR GUIdes facilities to merge these vertices: Go to the Create and Import Grids folder and then open the Assemble Grids panel On the Vertex Merge tab, check that option All Vertices is selected and then click Merge. The system will inform you that a total of 210 vertices were deleted
VMER ALL ,,,,,,,,,HIGH C This completes the mesh specification. Save all model data up to this point: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Boundary locations are specified graphically using the relevant STAR GUIde Specication facilities: Go to the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel
BOUN STAT
5-16
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
First collect the cells into a new set, change the viewing angle and plot: Type command CSET NEWS GRAN -1.0 0.55 -1.0 5.0 ,,,4 in the I/O window to collect the required cell range Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to approximately (-0.5, -0.5, -1) Select cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot Figure T5.1-14
CSET NEWS GRAN -1.0 0.55 -1.0 5.0 ,,,4 VIEW -0.5 -0.5 -1 PLTY EHID CPLO
Define region no. 1 as the part of the inlet boundary lying within the inner pipe, as follows: Select region no. 1 in the scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Designate this region as an inlet by selecting option Inlet from the Type menu Enter Inner_inlet in the Name box and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick a vertex on the lower annular surface displayed on the screen. A total of 50 boundaries will be created. This is also the current boundary sum total, as region 1 is the first region to be defined.
VSET NEWS EDGE

Version 3.26 5-17
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
BFIN 1 VX RDEF 1 INLE $ $ RNAM 1 Inner_inlet To specify the outer annular inlet, collect the cells within the appropriate geometric range into a set and display them: CSET NEWS GRAN 0.45 2.0 -1.0 5.0 ,,,4 CPLO Figure T5.1-15
Define region no. 2 as follows: Select region no. 2 in the scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Designate this region as an inlet by selecting option Inlet from the Type menu Enter Outer_inlet in the Name box and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick a vertex on the lower annular surface displayed on the screen. Another 50 boundaries will be added to the list, raising the total to 100. NEWS EDGE 2 VX 2 INLE $ $ 2 Outer_inlet
VSET BFIN RDEF RNAM
The outflow and symmetry planes are defined in a similar fashion:

5-18
In the main window, select C > All

Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to approximately (-1, 0.5, -1) Click Cell Plot Figure T5.1-16
CSET ALL VIEW -1 0.5 -1 CPLO
Assign the outflow plane to region 3: Select region no. 3 in the scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Designate this region as a pressure boundary by selecting option Pressure from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick a vertex on the outflow plane. 100 boundaries are added to the list (total = 200).
VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 3 VX RDEF 3 PRESS $ $ Assign the symmetry plane to region 4:
Version 3.26
Select region no. 4 in the scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Designate this region as a symmetry plane by selecting option Symmetry from the Type menu Click Dene region Cllick Surface Based on Edges and then pick a vertex on the symmetry
5-19
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
plane. 400 boundaries are added to the list (total = 600). BFIN 4 VX RDEF 4 SYMP Material Properties Check the default fluid properties and then choose the ideal gas law for density variations, making it a function of temperature only (incompressible flow): Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel Choose option Ideal-f(T) from the Density pop-up menu Click Apply
PROP STAT DENS IDEA N Turn on the standard k- turbulence model: Click Turbulence Models to display the corresponding panel Click On to switch on turbulence Select K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the drop-down menu Click Apply
TURB KE Turn on the solution of the temperature equation: Click Thermal Models to display the corresponding panel Click the Temperature Calculation On button Click Apply
TEMP ON Set the monitoring point location: Click Monitoring and Reference Data to display the corresponding panel Type 11 in the Monitoring cell number text box Click Apply
MONI 11 Scalar Properties Physical properties for scalar variables are specified next: Select the Additional Scalars folder and then open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel
SCAL
5-20 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
STAT It is seen that no scalar has been defined yet. The required scalar is methane and its properties can be retrieved from the built-in property database. However, in this tutorial, methane is treated as a user-defined scalar and its properties are supplied manually for the purposes of illustration. Type the following property data in the corresponding dialog boxes: Name CH4 Density 0.669 Molecular Weight 16 Molecular Viscosity 1.175e-5 Specic Heat 2230.0 Conductivity 0.038 Heat of Formation -4.68e6 Temp. of Formation 298.15 Click Apply
SC 1 DEFI ACTI UDEF CH4 16.0 0.669 0.0 2230.0 1.175E-5 0.038 -4.68E+6 298.15 The details of the scalar properties will be displayed in the I/O window as: PROPERTIES FOR SCALAR NO. 1 NAMED CH4 INFLUENCE = ACTIVE SOLVER TURNED ON MOLECULAR WEIGHT = 16.0000 DENSITY = 0.669000 BETAM = 0. SPECIFIC HEAT = 2230.00 LAMINAR VISCOSITY = 0.117500E-04 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY = 0.380000E-01 HEAT OF FORMATION = -4680000. TEMPERATURE OF FORMATION = 298.15 Note that the scalars ACTIVE designation means that its concentration has an influence on the local fluid density. Save the model data entered so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Conditions

Version 3.26
Specify boundary conditions for each region, including turbulence parameters at the two inlets in terms of turbulence intensity and length scale:
5-21
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 1 INLET 0.0 10.0 0.0 1 0.0 323.0 0.669 RTURB 1,MIXL,0.10,0.00254 Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 2 INLET 0.0 5.0 0.0 1 0.0 293.0 1.205 RTURB 2,MIXL,0.10,0.00127
5-22 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Select region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter pressure boundary conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply
RDEF 3 PRESS PIEZ 0.0 N N N RTURB 3,MIXL,0.1,0.007625 RTPRES 3,TEMP,308.0 Specify boundary conditions for the scalar (CH4) mass fraction, ensuring that it is 1.0 at the inner pipe inlet and 0.0 at all other boundaries. Open the Scalar Boundaries panel Select region no. 1 (the inner pipe inlet) in the Boundary Region scroll list. CH4 is selected by default in the Scalar list. Enter the required boundary value, 1.0, in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select region no. 2 (the outer pipe inlet) and then region no. 3 (the outflow boundary) in the list to confirm that the scalar mass fraction at both boundaries is 0.0
RSMOD,1,1,CONC,1.0 Check the boundaries graphically: In the main window, select B > All Select B > Unselect > Symplane Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line
Figure T5.1-17
CSET ALL BSET ALL

Version 3.26 5-23
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Checks
BSET DELE SYMP BDIS ON PLTY QHID CPLO
Checks
Check the model data generated so far: Utility > Count (All)
COUN ALL All parameters are correct. Turn the boundary display off and change the plot mode to Hidden Surface before saving the model data: Deselect Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select cell plot type Hidden Surface File > Save Model
BDIS OFF PLTY EHID SAVE tut.mdl Control Parameters Check the status of the control parameters: Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior
5-24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Run Time Controls
CONT STAT Check the scalar control parameters and then modify some of them Open the Additional Scalars panel Check that CH4 is selected in the Scalar scroll list and then type 0.95 in the Under-Relaxation Factor box Type 1.0e-4 in the Residual Tolerance box Click Apply
SCCL,, ALL SCCONT,1,0.95,100,1.0e-4,N,N SCCL,, ALL Make the residual error tolerances for the temperature and scalar equations the same. This ensures that both equations are solved to the same level of accuracy: Open the Primary Variables panel Select the Solver Parameters tab and type 0.0001 in the Residual Tolerance box corresponding to the temperature (Temp.) equation Click Apply
RESI RST 0.00010 Run Time Controls Check the status of the run time control parameters: Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Click Set Run Time Controls to display the corresponding panel. Enter 200 for the maximum number of iterations Click Apply
ITER 200 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Remember that, for convenience, the model geometry was specified in inch units. This must be changed into meters by applying the appropriate conversion factor before writing data to the geometry file. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section.
Version 3.26
File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, enter 0.0254 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close
5-25
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT,SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the units in which the model was built are correctly selected (option button inches). Leave all other settings at their default values Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing Load velocity vector components for plotting and then display them on your screen using the Quick Hidden Line mode: Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UVW to load all three velocity components In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen In the main window, select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Figure T5.1-18
GETC ALL NONE POPT VECT PLTY QHID

5-26 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
CPLO
Load vertex-based pressure values, select the contour plotting option and plot in Hidden Surface mode: GETV POPT PLTY EDGE REPL Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Vector Data list, check that the default setting is None In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to display the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T5.1-19 NONE P CONT EHID ON
Version 3.26
5-27
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Load vertex-based temperatures and plot: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data In the Scalar Data list, select item Temperature and then click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot Figure T5.1-20
GETV NONE T REPL
5-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
A multi-section plot of a variable can be made using the following procedure: Select Go To > Create Plots Select tab Section Clipped Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Select the Multiple Plane Plot sub-tab The default number (10) of section planes to be plotted in succession is shown in the Increments box. Accept this value. Specify that the direction of the normal to these planes is to be a coordinate system direction, as follows: i) Click the coordinate system selection button to display the Coordinate Systems dialog ii) Select the toroidal coordinate system (no. 4) and then click Close iii) The entry in the Coordinate System box of the tab changes to show that system no. 4 has been selected. A pop-up menu (DIR) also appears, inviting you to choose the desired direction. iv) Select direction no. 2 (the - direction) from this menu and then click Apply Click Sweep to see 10 section plots of temperature plotted in quick succession, starting at one end of the model and nishing at the other
SPOINT LOCAL 4 2 MULTI 10 1 YES Once the sections are defined, they can be re-used to produce plots for any other variable. For example, velocity magnitude plots can be generated as follows:
Version 3.26 5-29
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Click Go To Load Data In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Velocity Magnitude and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Section Clipped tab, choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen to see the velocity magnitude distribution plotted on the model surface Click Sweep to see the same distribution plotted on a series of cross-sections through the model
GETV NONE VMAG PLTY EHID EDGE ON POPT CONT REPL MULTI 10 1 YES To produce the best display of the calculated methane mass fraction distribution, load cell-based values and then average them at the vertex positions: GETC CAVE PLTY EDGE REPL Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell from the Data Type menu Select On from the Smooth Option menu In the Scalar Data list, select item CH4 and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Select the 3-D Surface tab and then choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T5.1-21 NONE CONC 1 CSET EHID ON
5-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.1
STEADY 3-D FLOW
Final Operations
QUIT N
File > Quit, Nosave
Version 3.26
5-31
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
The problem geometry and mesh for this tutorial is the same as Tutorial 5.1. The model also has the same boundaries and boundary region definitions. The only difference is that transient boundary conditions are now imposed at the inlet planes. As shown in Figure T5.2-1, the air inlet velocity increases linearly from 5 m/s to 9 m/s over a period of 2 seconds. At the same time, the methane inlet velocity decreases from 10 m/s to 2 m/s, simulating the gradual shut down of an upstream valve. At the end of this tutorial it is expected that users will be able to: Set up a transient calculation Set up a table that denes the changing boundary conditions Perform some basic post-processing appropriate to transient calculations
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut5-2) and copy the model file generated in Tutorial 5.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut5-1) into it. Since the solution obtained in Tutorial 5.1 will act as the starting point of the present analysis, it is also necessary to copy the solution file (tut.pst) from directory tut5-1 to the current directory. Start up pro-STAR and enter the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 5.2 - 3D TURBULENT FLOW IN A DILUTION PIPE (TRANSIENT) in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 5.2 - 3D TURBULENT FLOW IN A DILUTION PIPE (TRANSIENT) Check the model geometry and region definitions visually: Select C > All Click Cell Plot Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound
CSET ALL CPLO RLIS ALL The modifications needed to change to a transient analysis are as follows: 1. Select the transient solution mode 2. Dene transient boundary conditions
Version 3.26 5-33
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Transient Solution Setting
These tasks are discussed next. Transient Solution Setting Set up the STAR GUIde environment to deal with a transient simulation: Go to the STAR GUIde window and open the Select Analysis Features panel Select Transient from the Time Domain menu and then click Apply
TIME SINGLE Table Denition

Velocity (m/s)
As indicated in the tutorials introduction, the basic requirement of this case is to simulate a time variation in the inlet stream velocities, as shown in Figure T5.2-1 below:
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Time (sec) 1 2 Inner Inlet Outer Inlet
Figure T5.2-1
Velocity changes over a 2 sec. period at the two inlet planes
The above variation may be defined using pro-STAR tables and then applied to the two inlet boundaries. To set up a table for the inner inlet, proceed as follows:
5-34
Click the Table Editor button in the main pro-STAR window to open the Table Editor dialog Enter INNER_INLET in the Table Title box Accept the default coordinate system number as velocities will be specied in the global Cartesian coordinate system Select Extrapolate from the Out of bound value option menu Select the V component of velocity from the Dependent Variables scroll list
Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Table Denition
Select TIME as the independent variable Click Setup Enter two values in the TIME column, 0.0 for the 1st time point and 2.0 for the 2nd time point Click the red FILL button. A warning message pops up asking you to conrm your choice of independent variable, so click Yes Enter two end-point values for the V-velocity, 10.0 and 2.0, corresponding to the two time points specied above Click Save Data to conrm your entries Enter a new name, in1.tbl, in the File Name box at the bottom of the panel Click Write Table to save the table data in the above le Click Graph to display a graph of the inner inlet V-velocity variation, as shown in Figure T5.2-1
TBDEF INNER_INLET 1,EXTRAPOLATE TIME,2 0.0,2.0 1 V 10. 2. TBWR in1.tbl TBGR V Now set up a table for the outer inlet by editing the one currently on display: Enter a new name, OUTER_INLET, in the Table Title box Select Extrapolate from the Out of bound value option menu Enter two end-point values for the V-velocity, 5.0 and 9.0, corresponding to the previously dened time points of 0.0 and 2.0 Click Save Data to conrm your entries Enter a new name, in2.tbl, in the File Name box at the bottom of the panel Click Write Table to save the table data in the above le Click Graph to display a graph of the outer inlet V-velocity variation, as shown in Figure T5.2-1 Close the Table Editor dialog
TBCLEAR TBDEF OUTER_INLET 1,EXTRAPOLATE TIME,2 0.0,2.0

Version 3.26 5-35
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Re-denition
1 V 5. 9. TBWR in2.tbl TBGR V Boundary Apply the time variation in velocity defined above to the inner inlet: Re-denition Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 (Inner_inlet) in the boundary regions scroll list Select Table from the Options menu Open the pro-STAR le browser by clicking the button next to the Table Name box, select le in1.tbl from the le list and click OK. The desired le name will now be displayed inside the Table Name box. Click Apply to instruct pro-STAR to use this table for V-velocity values RDEF 1 INLE TABLE in1.tbl 0.0 10.0 0.0 1 0.0 323.0 0.669 RTURB 1,MIXL,0.10,0.00254 Repeat for the outer inlet: Select region no. 2 (Outer_inlet) in the boundary regions scroll list Select Table from the Options menu Open the pro-STAR le browser by clicking the button next to the Table Name box, select le in2.tbl from the le list and click OK. The desired le name will now be displayed inside the Table Name box. Click Apply to instruct pro-STAR to use this table for V-velocity values
RDEF 2 INLE TABLE in2.tbl 0.0 5.0 0.0 1 0.0 293.0 1.205 RTURB 2,MIXL,0.10,0.00127 Analysis Controls Check the analysis controls status: Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls and then open the Solution Method panel. It will be seen that the PISO algorithm has been selected automatically.
CONT
5-36 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
STAT Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output (Transient) panel Go to the Transient tab Dene an output period starting at time t = 0.0 sec and a data output frequency of 0.5 sec for the transient post le Note that, by default, the Velocity and Pressure variables are already selected for output in the upper scroll list. Choose a number of additional items for output, Turb Kinetic Energy, Dissipation, Turbulent Viscosity, Temperature, Density and scalar variable CH4, by selecting each one in turn and then clicking the Post button. The list display will confirm your choices. Click Apply
WRPO 1,SPEC,0,0.5,U Y P Y TE Y ED Y VIS Y T Y DENS Y WRPO 1,SPEC,0,0.5,SC01 Y Run Time Controls Check the status of the run time controls and then specify the simulated elapsed time and the time step to be used: Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open panel Set Run Time Controls Select option Run for and type 2 in the adjacent input box Click Apply Enter 0.0 in the Period Start Time box and 0.025 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period
RUNT DURAT 2 DELT CONST 0. 0.025 Specify that the analysis is to start from the previously calculated steady-state solution: Open the Analysis (Re)Start panel Select option Standard Restart from the Restart File Option menu Click Apply
RDAT REST Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section.
Version 3.26
File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, enter 0.0254 in the Scale Factor box
5-37
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.0254 PROB tut.prob QUIT,SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the units in which the model was built is correctly selected (option button inches) Click Write New Geometry File Click Restart Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically and will stop after 80 time steps. Bear in mind that transient solutions can involve lengthy computer runs. Therefore, the analysis for this tutorial will take much longer than for Tutorial 5.1. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Open the file containing the transient post data (tut.pstt): In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select le tut.pstt on the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
TRLO tut.pstt Postprocessing The next step in transient post-processing is to identify the point in time at which results are to be manipulated and displayed. This is done as follows: In the Select Time Step list, select the required time (0.5 secs in this case) and then click Store Iter/Time. This loads results calculated after 20 time steps.
STOR TIME 0.5

5-38 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Load velocity vector components, select the cross-sectional plotting option and reduce the size of all vectors: GETC PLTY VESC POPT Go to the Data tab and select item Velocity Components UVW in the Vector Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to tab Section Clipped Accept the default section denition and then click Plot to Screen Go to the Vectors tab and then type 0.7 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply ALL NONE SECT 0.7 VECT
Change the viewpoint and replot: In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z Figure T5.2-2
VIEW 0 0 -1 PLME OFF CPLO
The methane mass fraction can be plotted as follows:

Version 3.26 5-39
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
In the Create Plots panel, click Go To Load Data Select On from the Smooth Option menu Select item CH4 in the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Section Clipped tab, select Contour (lled) from the Option menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T5.2-3
GETC NONE CONC 1 CAVE ALL POPT CONT REPL
The results after 2.0 seconds (80 time steps) are plotted in the same manner: Click Go To Load Data and then select the File(s) tab In the Select Time Step list, highlight the desired time (2.0 secs) and then click Store Iter/Time. This loads results calculated after 80 time steps. Go to the Data tab and select Smooth Option Off In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UVW Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Section Clipped tab, select Option Vector Click Plot to Screen Figure T5.2-4
STOR TIME 2.0

5-40 Version 3.26
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
GETC ALL NONE POPT VECT VESC 0.7 REPL
Click Go To Load Data Select On from the Smooth Option menu Select item CH4 in the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Select Contour (lled) from the Option menu Click Plot to Screen
Figure T5.2-5
GETC NONE CONC 1 CAVE ALL POPT CONT REPL
Version 3.26
5-41
Tutorial 5.2
TRANSIENT 3D FLOW
Final Operations
QUIT N
5-42
Version 3.26
Tutorial 6 MIXING OF TWO SUPERSONIC STREAMS

Physical Problem Description This tutorial models the process of mixing two parallel supersonic streams of an ideal gas. A simple, two-dimensional problem geometry is employed, as shown in Figure T6.0-1. The stream characteristics are given in the following table: Pabsolute (bar) 1 2 u (m/s) 686 686 T (K) 293 293 r (kg/m3) 1.189 2.378 Ttot (K) 526.9 526.9
Stream 1 2
Ma 2 2
As a result of mixing, a shock wave and an expansion fan will be generated at the junction between the two streams. If the streams are confined between parallel walls the waves will be reflected, with the shock wave retaining its thickness and the expansion wave (as its name implies) constantly expanding. On the other hand, if the streams are unconfined (infinite) and the solution domain effectively represents a small representative region within the overall flow field, free stream boundaries can be defined in place of walls and the generated waves will cross them undisturbed, i.e. unreflected. Modelling Strategy The aim of this tutorial is to demonstrate various aspects of STAR-CDs shock handling capability using a very simple two-dimensional Cartesian mesh. The latter is shown in Figure T6.0-2.
Region 4 Stream 1 Region 1 Region 3 Stream 2 Region 2 Region 5 3 Thickness = 0.05 All dimensions in metres 1
Figure T6.0-1
Supersonic stream geometry
Version 3.26
6-1
Modelling Strategy
Figure T6.0-2
Mesh structure for the supersonic stream model
6-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
This sub-tutorial demonstrates one aspect of STAR-CDs shock modelling capabilities, i.e. the capture of a shock wave between two confining slip walls. To perform the analysis it is necessary to: 1. Dene inviscid ow conditions 2. Change the default under-relaxation factor for the pressure equation 3. Dene a slip wall Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut6-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
A title can also be given for further identification of this run. In the pro-STAR menu bar select File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 6.1 - CONFINED SUPERSONIC STREAM MIXING Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 6.1 - CONFINED SUPERSONIC STREAM MIXING Mesh Creation Open the STAR GUIde window and generate the mesh using the available facilities. Go to folder Create and Import Grids and open sub-folder Create Grids Open panel Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes Enter appropriate values in the text boxes under the Extent of Domain section, as shown below, to create a mesh block
Version 3.26
Click Generate Mesh

6-3
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 0 3 80 0 1 40 0 0.05 1 ALL EHID 1 1 1
VC3D CSET PLTY VIEW CPLO Boundary Locations
The next step is to define the boundary locations. Using STAR GUIde, specify two inlet boundaries, one for the upper 20 cell faces (region 1) and one for the lower 20 cell faces (region 2): In the main window, change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -X Select folder Locate Boundaries and then open panel Create Boundaries Select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region an inlet by selecting Inlet from the Type menu, assign a name to it by typing Inlet1 in the Name box and then click Define region Click Pick Cell Faces and then mark each of the upper 20 boundaries displayed on your screen with the cursor. Click DONE when finished. Highlight region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region an inlet too, by selecting Inlet from the Type menu, assign a name to it by typing Inlet2 in the Name box and then click Define region Click Pick Cell Faces and then mark each of the lower 20 boundaries displayed on your screen with the cursor. Click DONE when finished. -1 0 0 1 INLE $ $ 1 INLET1 ADD 1 2 INLE $ $ 2 INLET2 ADD 2
VIEW REPL RDEF RNAM BCRO RDEF RNAM BCRO
Define region 3 as the outlet boundary:

6-4
In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +X Highlight region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region an outlet by selecting Outlet from the Type menu and then clicking Define region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible
Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
mesh VIEW 1 0 0 REPL RDEF 3 OUTL $ $ BZON 3 ALL Define the upper side boundary as a slip wall assigned to region 4: In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +Y Highlight region no. 4 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region a wall by selecting Wall from the Type menu and then clicking Define region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
VIEW 0 1 0 REPL RDEF 4 WALL $ $ BZON 4 ALL Define the lower side boundary as a slip wall assigned to region 5: In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y Highlight region no. 5 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Make this region a wall by selecting Wall from the Type menu and then clicking Define region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
VIEW 0 -1 0 REPL RDEF 5 WALL $ $ BZON 5 ALL Finally, define the two remaining boundary surfaces as symmetry planes and assign them to region no. 0 : Highlight region no. 0 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Select Symmetry from the Type menu, delete the existing default name for the region in the Name box and then click Dene region
RDEF 0 SYMP RNAME 0

Version 3.26 6-5
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
Material Properties
The next step is to specify the flow characteristics using the relevant STAR GUIde panels. Turn on the solution of the temperature equation as follows: Open folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Open sub-folder Liquids and Gases Select the Thermal Models panel and click the Temperature Calculation On button Click Apply
Check the default uid properties (air at standard temperature and pressure) by displaying the Molecular Properties panel. Specify the gas density as varying according to the Ideal Gas law and define the fluid as inviscid: Open the Molecular Properties panel and choose option Ideal-f(T,p) for Density Choose option Inviscid for Molecular Viscosity Accept the default value (28.96) for Molecular Weight Click Apply
TEMP ON DENS IDEAL Y MOLWT 28.96 LVIS INVIS Boundary Conditions Specify appropriate inlet boundary conditions for each stream: Go to the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and open panel Dene Boundary Regions Select region no. 1 in the boundary region scroll list Type the inlet velocity, 686.0, in the U text box Type the inlet density, 1.189, in the Dens. box Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply Select region no. 2 Type the inlet velocity, 686.0, in the U text box Type the inlet density, 2.378, in the Dens. box Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEF 1 INLE 686 0 0 1 0 293 1.189 RDEF 2 INLE 686 0 0 1 0 293 2.378 Check the outlet boundary conditions: Select region no. 3. The displayed settings are correct so no adjustment is necessary
Check the boundary conditions at the walls:

6-6 Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
Select region no. 4 Change the Slip Option menu setting to Slip and click Apply Select region no. 5 Change the Slip Option menu setting to Slip and click Apply
RDEF 4 WALL SLIP [carriage return] RDEF 5 WALL SLIP [carriage return] Verify that all boundary conditions have been specified properly and then set the plotting options that will be needed later for displaying the output results: VIEW BSET BDIS REPL BDIS EDGE Solution Controls In the main window select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select B > All Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) and display the boundaries by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Deselect the Bound option Select the edge plotting option by clicking the Edge button 1 1 1 ALL ON OFF ON
Check that the variables of interest are going to be solved, adjust the under-relaxation factor for pressure and check the differencing schemes used: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behaviour, open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation Status tab Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations (the ow is two-dimensional) Click Apply Go to the Solver Parameters tab Conrm that the Relaxation Factor for Pressure is set to 0.3 Go to the Differencing Schemes tab and conrm that UD is selected for variables U, V, W - Mom and Temp., and CD with a blending factor of 0.01 for Density
SOLV Y Y N
Version 3.26 6-7
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Final Operations
Final Operations
To complete the pre-processing task, specify the maximum number of iterations. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Type 300 in the Number of Iterations box Click Apply
ITER 300 If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files, and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis from the Run Analysis Interactively panel. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and then click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Postprocessing Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Plot the pressure distribution:

6-8
Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected
Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Improvement of Results
VIEW POPT GETC CAVE CPLO
Select On from the Smooth Option menu In the Vector Data list, check that the default setting is None In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, select option Contour (lled) from the Option menu In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Click Plot to Screen Figure T6.1-1 0 0 1 CONT NONE P ALL
The pressure contours of Figure T6.1-1 show the expected wave reflection. However, the shock fronts are not sufficiently sharp. Improvement To improve the quality of the results, either mesh refinement or a higher-order of Results differencing scheme could be used. In this case, we will use the second option. Thus, the MARS differencing scheme will be employed for the solution of the momentum equations, and full CD for density. Solution Parameter Modication
Version 3.26
Activate the desired differencing scheme for the momentum equations: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select the Solution Controls sub-folder
6-9
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Analysis
Select the Equation Behaviour sub-folder and open the Primary Variables panel In the Differencing Schemes tab, select option MARS for the U, V, W variables and change the blending factor for Density to 1 Click Apply
DSCH MARS UVW DSCH CD DENS 1 Restart from the previous solution: Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Analysis (Re)Start panel Select option Standard Restart from the Restart File Option menu Click Apply
RDAT REST If you want to terminate the session at this point, write a new tut.prob file before exiting: File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
PROB tut.prob QUIT N Otherwise, continue with the analysis as follows: Analysis In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Deselect the Write New Geometry File button Leave all other settings at their default values and click the Restart Analysis button
The analysis will start automatically from the previously computed solution. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Postprocessing To view the new results, load tut.pst file again: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Plot the pressure distribution:

6-10 Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.1
CONFINED MIXING
CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Post- processing
VIEW POPT GETC CAVE CPLO
Go to the the Data tab and check that On is selected in the Smooth Option menu Check that item Pressure is selected in the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots and display the 3-D Surface tab Check that option Contour (lled) is selected in the Option menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T6.1-2 0 0 1 CONT P ALL
It can be seen that sharper shock fronts and expansion wavefronts have now been obtained. QUIT N File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
Version 3.26
6-11
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
The aim of this tutorial is to demonstrate another aspect of STAR-CDs shock modelling capabilities, i.e. the passage of a wave through free-stream shock transmissive boundaries. In addition, the user is shown how to: 1. Use a constant stagnation enthalpy (stagnation temperature) algebraic relationship instead of the enthalpy transport equation 2. Change the initialisation procedure in order to aid convergence of the solution algorithm Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut6-2) and copy the .mdl file generated in Tutorial 6.1 (i.e. tut.mdl in directory tut6-1) into it. Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 6.2 - UNCONFINED SUPERSONIC STREAM MIXING Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 6.2 - UNCONFINED SUPERSONIC STREAM MIXING Boundary Conditions Start up the STAR-GUIde environment and use it to change regions 4 and 5 into free stream boundaries and to specify the appropriate upstream parameters: Go to folder Dene Boundary Conditions and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Highlight region 4 in the boundary regions scroll list Select option Free Stream from the Region Type menu Type 686 in the U velocity box Type 293 in the Temperature box Accept the default value (0) in the Pressure box Click Apply Highlight region 5 in the boundary regions scroll list Select option Free Stream from the Region Type menu Type 686 in the U velocity box Type 1.e5 in the Pressure box (note that this is a relative value) Type 293 in the Temperature box Click Apply
Version 3.26
6-13
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
RDEF 4 FREE 686 0 0 1 0 0 293 RDEF 5 FREE 686 0 0 1 0 100000 293 Solution Controls Since the flow is inviscid, we can use a constant total enthalpy (temperature) relationship instead of solving the enthalpy transport equation. This is done as follows: Go to folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Thermal Models panel and click the Show Options button Select option Stagnation Enthalpy from the Conservation menu Type the appropriate temperature value, 526.9, in the Stagnation Temp. box Click Apply
TEMP ON,,CONS 526.9 The initialisation practice also needs to be changed in order to prevent the run from stopping after a couple of iterations. If the run starts using the default settings, negative temperatures and hence negative densities at some mesh locations will occur. The reason for this is the rigidity of the algebraic relationship, which is unable to damp out the effect of high velocities generated during the first few iterations. To remedy this, the code initialisation option will be turned off: In the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder, open the Initialisation panel Display the Flow Conditions tab and choose Manual Initialisation Type 686 in the box labelled U Velocity Click Apply
CINI N N INIT STAN 686 Final Operations In view of the changes to the boundaries and other model parameters, new problem data and geometry files need to be created. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis from the Run Analysis Interactively panel. This process is described in the next section.
6-14
File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and then click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Postprocessing Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open panel Load Data and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Plot the pressure distribution: VIEW POPT GETC CAVE CPLO Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected Select On from the Smooth Option menu In the Vector Data list, check that the default setting is None In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, select option Contour (lled) from the Option menu In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Click Plot to Screen Figure T6.2-1 0 0 1 CONT P ALL
Version 3.26
6-15
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
CFD Analysis and Post-Processing Improvement of Results
The pressure contours of Figure T6.2-1 show that there is no wave reflection whatsoever. However, the shock wave definition could still be improved further. Improvement As in Tutorial 6.1, change to the MARS scheme for the solution of the momentum of Results equations and select full CD for density: Go to Analysis Controls folder and select the Solution Controls sub-folder Select the Equation Behaviour sub-folder and display the Primary Variables panel In the Differencing Schemes tab, select option MARS for the U-, V-, W-Mom variables and change the blending factor for Density to 1 Click Apply
DSCH MARS UVW DSCH CD DENS 1 Restart from the previous solution: Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Analysis (Re)Start panel Select option Standard Restart from the Restart File Option menu Click Apply
RDAT REST If you want to terminate the session at this point, write a new tut.prob file before exiting:
6-16
File > Write Problem File

Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
PROB tut.prob QUIT N

I
Otherwise, continue with the analysis as follows: Analysis In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Deselect the Write New Geometry File button Leave all other settings at their default values and then click the Restart Analysis button
The analysis will start automatically from the previously computed solution. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Postprocessing To view the new results, load tut.pst file again: Select folder Post-Processing Open panel Load Data and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Plot the pressure and Mach number distributions: VIEW POPT GETC CAVE CPLO
Version 3.26
Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected Select On from the Smooth Option menu In the Vector Data list, check that the default setting is None In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, select option Contour (lled) from the Option menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T6.2-2 Click Go To Load Data In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Mach Number Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot Figure T6.2-3 0 0 1 CONT NONE P ALL
6-17
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
GETC NONE MACH CAVE ALL CPLO
It can be seen that sharper shock fronts have now been obtained. A plot of the
6-18 Version 3.26
Tutorial 6.2
UNCONFINED MIXING
V-component of velocity is also useful to show the flow entrainment through the free stream boundaries. Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select item Velocity Component V from the Vector Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots and display the 3-D Surface tab Select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T6.2-4
POPT VECT GETV V NONE CPLO
QUIT N
Version 3.26
6-19
Tutorial 7 FLUID FLOW IN A MIXER

Physical Problem Description This tutorial simulates fluid flow inside a mixer, a typical cross-section of which is shown in Figure T7.0-1. The mixer consists of two concentric cylinders, both mounted with equally-spaced baffles. The fluid is stirred by the inner cylinder and its baffles as they rotate at a speed of 300 rpm. The fluid is water and its physical properties are as follows: Density Molecular viscosity Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is used: Stationary outer mesh coupled to a rotating inner mesh through a sliding interface Incompressible ow Standard k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics 1000 1.0 103 kg/m3 Pa s
all baffles are 4 cm in length
5 cm
15 cm
Figure T7.0-1
Mixer geometry
Version 3.26
7-1
Tutorial 7.1
2-D TRANSIENT FLOW WITH SLIDING MESH
Tutorial 7.1
This tutorial uses a sliding mesh to simulate transient flow in a two-dimensional model of the mixer. The overall methodology of the sliding mesh is explained in the User Guide (see Regular sliding interfaces in Chapter 16), its principal characteristic being that it allows changes in cell connectivity. The basic mesh structure to be used is shown in Figure T7.1-1.
Figure T7.1-1
Mesh structure
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut7-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and identifying title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 7.1 - SIMULATION OF 2D MIXER FLOW USING SLIDING METHOD in the Title text box Click Apply
7-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
TITLE TUTORIAL 7.1 - SIMULATION OF 2D MIXER FLOW USING SLIDING METHOD Mesh Creation Make sure that the STAR-GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If not, activate it by clicking the special Show STAR-GUIde button shown below:
Click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the Time Domain option needs to be Transient but all other settings can remain unchanged. Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu Click Apply
TIME SINGLE It is also convenient to expressed time-related settings (time step magnitude, output frequency, etc.) in terms of angles rather than seconds, as follows: Go to the Time Relationships panel and select option Angle from the drop-down menu Enter 300 in the RPM box and 0 in the Initial Position box Click Apply
TREL THETA 300 0 To implement the sliding mesh method, the mesh must be divided into two parts, one representing the rotating inner cylinder and the other the stationary outer cylinder. It is therefore necessary to have two different fluid cell types identifying each part of the mesh. Check the current entries in the cell table as follows: In the main window, click the CTAB button
CTLI ALL It will be seen that one fluid cell type (no. 1) and one baffle cell type (no. 3) already exist by default. Therefore, a table entry for an extra fluid cell is needed. Select Table# entry no. 4 Specify a different colour for this cell type to make it easily distinguishable from cell type 1, by entering a new value (say 5) in the
7-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
Color Table Index box Click Apply to use default values for all other cell attributes and then Close
CTAB 4 FLUID 5 The STAR GUIde facilities can now be used to create the mesh: Open folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Select Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel Check that the currently active coordinate system is no. 1 (Cartesian)
For this tutorial, it is more convenient to create the mesh using a cylindrical coordinate system. This can be activated as follows: Click Select a Coordinate System to display the Coordinate Systems dialog Select system no. 2 on the scroll list Click Set Active Click Close
CSYS 2 To generate the portion of the mesh representing the inner cylinder: Click Select Cell Type to display the Cell Table Editor dialog Select Table# entry no. 1 (Fluid). The attributes of the material are shown on the table editor panel. Conrm that the values shown are correct, click Apply and then Close
CTYPE 1 Use the text boxes in the Extent of Domain section of the panel to create the mesh. The required values are shown below:
Generate the mesh:

7-4
Click Generate Mesh

Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
VC3D 5. 10. 5 0. 360. 36 0. 1. 1 Generate the portion representing the outer cylinder: Click Select Cell Type Select Table# entry 4 (Fluid). The attributes of the material are displayed in the Cell Table Editor dialog. Conrm that the values shown are correct, click Apply and then Close
CTYPE 4 Type the values shown below in the Extent of Domain section of the panel to create the rest of the mesh:
Generate and display the mesh: Click Generate Mesh In the main window, click the Rotation control Reset button Choose cell plot type Wire (Surface) Select a viewing direction of approximately (0.5, 0.5, 1) by dragging with the left mouse button Figure T7.1-2 10. 15. 5 0. 360. 36 0. 1. 1 ALL NORM 0.5 0.5 1
VC3D CSET PLTY VIEW CPLO
Version 3.26
7-5
Tutorial 7.1
This completes the overall model geometry description. The sliding interface will be located along the cylindrical surface where the two parts of the mesh meet, as shown in Figure T7.1-1. Baffles will now be created. For this purpose, select cells in the vicinity of the first inner-cylinder baffle and plot them with vertex numbering switched on: Select C > New > Type and then click on any inner-cylinder cell Plot > Number > Vertex Click Cell Plot Pick the four cells in the vicinity of the rst inner-cylinder bafe via C > New > Cursor Select, using the Figure below as a guide Choose cell plot type Wire (Surface) Click Cell Plot Figure T7.1-3
CSET NEWS GRAN 4.9, 9.1, 0., 10.1,,,2 PLTY NORM NUMB VERT ON CPLO
7-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
Set the active cell type to Baffle: In the Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes panel, click Select Cell Type Highlight Table# entry 3 (Bafe) Click Apply and then Close
CTYPE 3 Create the first baffle cell using the vertex numbers displayed in the above Figure as a guide and then generate the remaining five at equally-spaced intervals around the inner cylinder. In the pro-STAR I/O window, type: C 1 38 260 223 CGEN 4 37 361 361 1 CGEN 6 6 361 364 1 Now create baffles at the outer cylinder using the same procedure: Select C > All Click Cell Plot Select C > New > Type and then click on any outer-cylinder cell Click Cell Plot Pick the four cells in the vicinity of the rst outer-cylinder bafe via C > New > Cursor Select, using the Figure below as a guide Click Cell Plot Figure T7.1-4
CSET NEWS GRAN 10.9, 15.1, 0.0, 10.1,,,2

Version 3.26 7-7
Tutorial 7.1
CPLO
Four equally-spaced baffles are created next, within the outer cylinder. In the pro-STAR I/O window, type: C 482 519 741 704 CGEN 4 37 385 385 1 CGEN 4 9 385 388 1 The baffle cells can now be viewed on their own: In the main window, select C > New > Bafe Plot > Number and then deselect the Vertex option Click Cell Plot
Figure T7.1-5
CSET NEWS TYPE 3 NUMB VERT OFF CPLO
7-8
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
This completes the mesh creation. Save the model data supplied so far before setting up the material properties: File > Save model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary The next step is to define boundary locations. The most convenient way of Specication specifying boundaries along the sliding interface is to use a combination of BDEFINE and BGENERATE commands since the vertex numbering is regular. Note that the sliding mesh method makes it essential to retain the double vertices already present at the interface. The interface boundary on the inner (rotating) side is defined first. Select a few cells in the vicinity of the interface and turn on vertex numbering: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Select C > New > Type and then click on any inner-cylinder cell Plot > Number > Vertex Click Cell Plot Pick, say, three cells in the vicinity of the sliding boundary via C > New > Cursor Select, using the Figure below as a guide Click Cell Plot Figure T7.1-6
CSET NEWS GRAN 8.9 10.1 0.0 30.1,,,2 NUMB VERT ON CPLO
Version 3.26
7-9
Tutorial 7.1
Define the required boundaries (36 in total) using the vertex numbers displayed in the above Figure as a guide and assign them to region no. 1: BDEF 1 408 186 187 409 BGEN 36 1 1 1 1 Follow the same procedure for the outer (stationary) side of the interface: Select C > All Click Cell Plot Select C > New > Type and then click on any outer-cylinder cell Click Cell Plot Pick, say, three cells in the vicinity of the rst outer-cylinder bafe via C > New > Cursor Select, using the Figure below as a guide Click Cell Plot Figure T7.1-7
CSET NEWS GRAN 9.9 11.1 0.0 30.1,,,2 CPLO Define the remaining 36 boundaries and assign them to region no. 2: BDEF 2 667 445 446 668 BGEN 36 1 37 37 1
7-10
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
Boundaries for the inner cylinder wall need to be defined explicitly in order to assign a rotational speed to them. The same is not necessary for the inner baffles as their motion is normal to the mesh and prescribed by the mesh movement operations described in the Event Settings section. Boundaries for the inner wall may be defined as follows: Select C > All Click Cell Plot Pick, say, two cells adjacent to the wall by typing command CSET NEWS GRAN 5. 6. 0. 30.,,,2 in the I/O window Click Cell Plot Figure T7.1-8
CSET NEWS GRAN 5. 6. 0. 30.,,,2 CPLO Define the wall boundaries (36 in total) using the vertex numbers displayed in Figure Figure T7.1-8 as a guide and assign them to region no. 3: BDEF 3 1 2 224 223 BGEN 36 1 73 73 1
Version 3.26
7-11
Tutorial 7.1
Inspection of Figure T7.1-2 shows that duplicate vertices still exist at = 0 and = 360 which have to be merged together. This is normally done at the end of the mesh creation stage. However, in this particular case, the task has been deferred to this point in order to maintain regular vertex numbering when specifying the sliding interface and moving boundaries. Merging of vertices is done separately for each fluid cell type so that all duplicate vertices at the sliding interface are preserved. Merge vertices for fluid type 1: In the main window, select C > All Plot > Number and then deselect the Vertex option Select cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot Select C > New > Type and then click on any inner-cylinder cell Click Cell Plot Select V > New > Cell Set In the pro-STAR I/O window type: VSET SUBS GRAN 4. 11. -0.001, 0.001,,,1 to select a set that excludes all cells next to the sliding interface Go to the STAR GUIde window and select the Create and Import Grids folder Open the Assemble Grids panel In the Vertex Merge tab, select Vertex Set from the Vertices menu Choose Highest as the Keep option Accept the default settings everywhere else and click Merge
CSET NEWS TYPE 1 VSET NEWS CSET

7-12 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
VSET SUBS GRAN 4. 11. -0.001, 0.001,,,1 VMER VSET,,,,,,,,,HIGH Merge vertices for fluid type 4: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Select C > New > Type and then click on any outer-cylinder cell Click Cell Plot Select V > New > Cell Set In the pro-STAR I/O window type: VSET SUBS GRAN 9. 16. -0.001, 0.001,,,1 to select a set that excludes all cells next to the sliding interface Go back to the Vertex Merge tab in the Assemble Grids panel and click Merge NEWS TYPE 4 NEWS CSET SUBS GRAN 9. 16. -0.001, 0.001,,,1 VSET,,,,,,,,,HIGH
CSET VSET VSET VMER
Since the problem is two dimensional, all cell faces normal to the Z-direction must become part of a symmetry plane (region no.5). To achieve this, you need to view each plane in turn from a suitable direction and then assign it to region no. 5 using the STAR-GUIde boundary location facilities described below. Such an operation automatically applies a boundary condition to every cell face shown in the current plot, including baffle faces. In order to avoid imposing symmetry-plane boundary conditions on baffles, the latter have to be removed from the current cell set. Thus: In the main window, select C > All Remove bafes from the cell set by selecting C > Unselect > Bafe Click Cell Plot Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button In the STAR GUIde window, select the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select region no. 5 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and dene the region type by selecting Summetry from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick any vertex within the inner cylinder. This operation assembles an edge-vertex set (note that pro-STAR regards the interface between inner and outer cylinders as an edge) and then creates the required boundaries on the inner cylinder only Click Surface Based on Vset (the required vertex set is already known and therefore does not need to be re-calculated). Pick any vertex within the outer cylinder to create the remaining boundaries
7-13
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
Set the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick any vertex on the outer cylinder to create boundaries in that region Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick any vertex on the inner cylinder to create the remaining boundaries
PLTY EHID NUMB VERT OFF CSET ALL CSET DELE TYPE 3 VIEW 0 0 1 CPLO RDEF 5 SYMP VSET NEWS EDGE BFIND 5 VX BFIND 5 VX VIEW 0 0 REPL BFIND 5 VX BFIND 5 VX Material Properties -1
To check the current definition of material properties use the STAR GUIde facilities as follows: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Molecular Properties panel Type WATER in the Name box Type 1000. in the density box Type 0.001 in the mu box Click Apply
PROP STAT PMAT,1,FLUID,WATER DENS CONST 1000. LVIS CONST 1.E-3 Check the current turbulence setting: Open the Turbulence Models panel
The turbulence setting in this panel is Off, as expected, so you need to select an option that implements one of the built-in turbulence models. The choice of model,
7-14 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
by and large, is problem-dependent. In the present tutorial, the standard two-equation k- model, which is sufficient for most situations, will be employed. Click On to select turbulence modelling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu Click Apply
TURB KE Note that numerical values for the model coefficients will also be displayed on the STAR-GUIde panel provided the Show Coefficients button in selected. Set the monitoring cell location: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 5 in the Monitoring cell number text box Click Apply
MONI 5 Boundary Conditions Having defined the locations of the boundaries and their associated region numbers, boundary conditions can now be imposed. Boundary regions at the sliding interface must be of type Attach. Two input parameters are needed for such boundaries: 1. A local coordinate system 2. The alternate boundary region number The latter is required in order to maintain some form of boundary condition on the solution domain if the cells on either side of the interface become disconnected; the alternate boundary region must be of wall or inlet type. The alternate boundary region number is not important in this tutorial so the system default (0) can be used. Dene regions 1 and 2 as Attach boundaries: In the STAR GUIde window, select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select Region Type Attach Type 2 in the Coord. Sys. box and click Apply Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select Region Type Attach Type 2 in the Coord. Sys. box and click Apply
RDEF 1 ATTACH 2 RDEF 2 ATTACH 2 The remaining boundary regions (except the symmetry boundaries specified earlier)
Version 3.26 7-15
Tutorial 7.1
are defined below. Note that a spin velocity needs to be explicitly assigned to the rotating inner cylinder wall: Select region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and Region Type Wall Type 2 in the Coord. System box Type 300 in the Omega box Click Apply
RDEF 3 WALL NOSLIP 0. 0. 0. 2 300. Check the boundaries visually using the GUI facilities: Analysis Controls Select the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel Click Plot All In the main window, select B > Unselect > Symplane Click Replot to view all the boundaries of interest Deselect display option Bound Turn off edge plotting by clicking off the edge plotting button
Check the solution variables. Since the flow is two dimensional, it is sensible to switch off the calculation of the W-velocity component: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behaviour, open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation Status tab Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations Click Apply
CONT STAT SOLV LW N Choose velocity components, pressure and turbulence kinetic energy as the flow variables to write to the transient post-processing file. Data output is also required at every time step. In this case, the time step will be chosen so as to give rotational increments of 1/3 of the cell size in the circumferential direction, corresponding to an output step of 3.3334 : Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab Dene an output period starting at a time corresponding to 0 and a frequency of writing data to the transient post data le corresponding to
Version 3.26
7-16
Tutorial 7.1
3.3334 (i.e. at every time step) by entering these values in the corresponding boxes Note that, by default, the Velocity and Pressure variables are already selected for output in the upper scroll list. Select item Turb Kinetic Energy and then click the Post button. The list display will confirm your choice. Click Apply
WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 3.3334 U Y P Y TE Y Run Time Controls It is now necessary to specify the transient elapsed time so that the analysis calculates the flow during one complete revolution of the inner cylinder, i.e 360. As already stated, the time step size is chosen so as to give rotational increments of 1/3 of the cell size in the circumferential direction, resulting in a total of 108 time steps. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open panel Set Run Time Controls Select option Run for and type 360 in the adjacent input box Click Apply Enter 0.0 in the Period Start Time box and 3.3334 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period
RUNT DURAT 360 DELT CONST 0 3.3334 Event Settings Since this tutorial uses a sliding mesh, the moving mesh and event options need to be turned on. In the pro-STAR I/O window type: MVGR,ON,EVENT,PROSTAR Moving mesh operations are grouped under the Events Module and are presently available only in command form. The Events Module status can be checked by typing: EVEN STAT At this point an error will be detected, as the MAXEVE parameter has not been specified. Close the Error/Warning Summary window and issue the MEMORY command to resize pro-STAR for parameter MAXEVE (number of events): Click Clear to close the Error/Warning Summary window In the I/O window, enter the following commands:
MEMORY MAXEVE 100 MEMORY WRITE Moving mesh operations are defined in terms of event steps and these must be stored in a special file. The latter is initialised via command EVFILE (type HELP
Version 3.26 7-17
Tutorial 7.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Event Settings
EVFILE) as follows: EVFI INIT The above sets up a new event history file (.evn file). The sliding mesh method utilises two basic moving mesh operations: 1. Change of mesh geometry 2. Change of cell connectivity Changes in mesh geometry can be specified either by pro-STAR commands (as part of a so-called Change Grid or mesh movement algorithm) or by user coding in subroutine NEWXYZ. This tutorial uses pro-STAR commands to change the mesh geometry. Thus, suppose we want the mesh to move from (a) to (c), as shown in Figure T7.1-9:
Sliding interface
r (a) (b) 300 rpm (c)
Figure T7.1-9
Illustration of sliding movement
The pro-STAR commands needed to change the geometry in this way are included in the box shown overleaf. Create a le called cgrid.cgrd, as shown on page 7-19, using pro-STARs built-in editor or another editor and save it in the current directory before continuing with the tutorial.
Note that any pro-STAR command involved in a Change Grid operation can make use of program-defined as well as user-defined parameters. The programdefined parameters are: ITER current time step number TIME current solution time LSTP current load step number EVEX last executed event number EVNO event number to be executed ETIM time at which the next event is scheduled YPST piston position (special case) An example use of one such parameter (TIME) appears in the cgrid.cgrd file listing.
7-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
cgrid.cgrd !Comments allowed in lines starting with "!" !Moving grid commands for 2D mixer problem *IF TIME GT 0. (No mesh change at TIME = 0) !Spaces must be inserted on either side of all arithmetic operators *SET DPS 300. * 360. / 60. (Convert rotating speed to degrees/sec.) CSYS 2 (Activate cylindrical coordinate system) !Move inner portion of the mesh !Spaces must be inserted on either side of the arithmetic operator *SET TANG TIME * DPS (Total degrees rotated by mesh) *GET TPOS Y 37 (Get coordinate of vertex no. 37) !Spaces must be inserted on either side of the arithmetic operator *SET TOFF TANG - TPOS CSET NEWS GRAN 4.9,9.1,,,,,2 (Collect cells in the inner mesh) VSET NEWS CSET (Collect all vertices belonging to this CSET) VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,0 TOFF (Change VSET vertices by TOFF degrees) !Adjust the mesh at the interface !Spaces must be inserted on either side of the arithmetic operator *SET TNEW EVEX * 10. (The total number of events used to simulate one full mixer revolution will be 36, leading to a 10 slide per event. This command calculates the total number of degrees rotated at any given event step EVEX) *GET TNOW Y 187 (Current coordinate of vertex 187) *SET TOFF TNEW - TNOW (Calculate the angular offset) CSET NEWS GRAN 8.9 10.1,,,,,2 (Collect the interface cell set) VSET NEWS CSET (Collect all vertices belonging to this CSET) VSET SUBS GRAN 9.9 10.1,,,,,2 (Collect only vertices at the interface) VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,0. TOFF (Change VSET vertices by TOFF degrees) CSET ALL *ENDIF The actual mesh-moving operations, and the time at which they are executed, are specified through event steps. These are set up through EVSTEP commands that define event time (type HELP EVSTEP). There are several ways to specify event time. In this example, it is defined as the elapsed time since the beginning of the simulation. Define the first event step as follows: EVST 1 TIME 0. Dene event step 1 occurring at time = 0
The echoed information on your screen will confirm what was specified. In the first event step, two moving mesh operations are prescribed.
Version 3.26
7-19
Tutorial 7.1
The rst operation sets up initial cell connections between the two sides of the sliding interface. This is done by command EAMATCH (this works in a similar way to the cyclic boundary matching command CYMATCH): EAMA 1 2 2 0. 0. Matching boundary regions 1 and 2
The matched boundary pairs can be listed via command EALIST: EALIST ALL C List all attach boundary pairs Continue listing
Alternatively, the cell attachment can be done by EATTACH and EAGENERATE commands. To try this, the existing boundary matching is deleted and the attach list compressed using commands EADELETE and EACOMPRESS: EADE ALL EACOM Y Delete all current attach pairs Compress attach list
A new boundary matching can then be defined as follows: EATT 1 37 EAGE 36 1 1 1 Attach boundary number 1 and 37 Generate 36 attached sets starting with set no. 1
Note that EAGE 36 1 1 1 above can be replaced by RP36 1 1. The second mesh-moving operation for this event is to specify how the mesh geometry will change during the analysis. This has already been done above via the commands stored in file cgrid.cgrd. The commands can therefore be read into the current event step by EGRID (type HELP EGRID): EGRID,READ,cgrid.cgrd C Read in the pro-STAR commands Continue reading
As a consequence of the above, all pro-STAR commands used for changing the mesh geometry will be displayed on your screen. These commands will remain active during the entire run (unless it is necessary to stop or change them, in which case one needs to supply another set of commands at the proper event step). The first event step is now complete and can be saved using command EVSAVE: EVSA 1 During the analysis, the interface cells will change their connectivity at discrete times, in a manner depicted in Figure T7.1-10:
7-20
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Figure T7.1-10
Illustration of cell connectivity changes
The changes in cell connectivity shown above have to be specified through further event steps. Thus, event step no. 2 will establish the cell connectivity shown in (c) which occurs after the mesh has rotated by 5 (note that the magnitude of this rotation is chosen purely for convenience). Therefore, the event time is the angular rotation divided by rotational speed (i.e. 5/(300.*360/60) 0.0027777): EVST 2 TIME 0.0027777 The boundary matching can still be done by command EAMATCH but care has to be exercised. Since pro-STAR only knows the mesh topology as it existed at stage (a), the boundary centroids of region 1 have to be shifted by 10 in order to match those of region 2: EAMA 1 2 2 0. 10. Match regions 1 and 2 in coordinate system 2, shift boundary centroids of region 1 by 10
This completes the description of event step no. 2 which can now be saved: EVSA 2 Since a constant =10 is used repeatedly for re-arranging the mesh at the interface, all other events can be set up by making use of pro-STARs loop facility. From stage (c) onwards, the change of cell connectivity occurs every 10 and the boundary centroids of region 1 have to shifted by an amount given by [(event step number 1) 10 degrees] in order to match those of region 2. Therefore, the events settings can be defined as follows: Set starting event no. to 3 with increment 1 *SET DPS 300. * 360. / 60. Convert rotating speed to degrees/sec. *SET DTIM 10. / DPS Set the increment of event time *SET EVNO 3 1
Version 3.26 7-21
Tutorial 7.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Event Checking
*SET ITIM 15. / DPS *SET ETIM ITIM DTIM *SET TMAT 20. 10. *DEFI EVST EVNO TIME ETIM EAMA 1 2 2 0. TMAT
Event 3 occurs when mesh rotates 15 degrees Starting event time ITIM, increment DTIM Dene loop Match regions 1 and 2 in coordinate system 2, shift region 1 boundary centroids by TMAT degrees Save event step End loop denition Execute the dened loop 34 times
EVSA EVNO *END *LOOP 1 34 1
As noted earlier, spaces must be inserted on either side of all arithmetic operators appearing in the above command sequence. This completes the events specification. Event Checking All events may now be checked in time sequence using command EVPREP: EVPR The status of the mesh geometry and cell connectivity changes at each event step can also be visualised by a set of event-processing commands. First, save all model information up to this point: SAVE tut.mdl Now set various options that determine which events to display and check. This is done by commands EVCHECK and EVFLAG: Choose the pre-processing option for event checking EVFL PREP ON GRID Process change-grid commands EVFL PREP OFF COND NEWXYZ UPARM Do not process conditional events or user subroutines NEWXYZ and UPARM EVCH PREP Verify the above options using the STATUS command: EVEN STAT Command EVLOAD is now used to load all events up to a specified event number. Any grid-changing commands read in by EGRID are also executed during this process. Begin with event step no. 1: EVLO UPTO EVEN 1 Since this step is executed at time = 0, the display will show the original mesh geometry and connectivity. In order to see clearly subsequent changes in cell
7-22 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
connectivity, it is advisable to display only a portion of the cell layers in the circumferential direction plus all the baffles: CSET NONE CSET ADD CRAN 1 9 1 RP10,,,36,36 CSET ADD BAFFLE PLTY QHID VIEW 0.5 0.5 1 CPLO
Figure T7.1-11
Event no. 2 leads up to the first cell connectivity change along the sliding interface. Its effect can be displayed as follows: EVLO UPTO EVEN 2 CSET NONE CSET ADD CRAN 1 9 1 RP10,,,36,36 CSET ADD BAFFLE CPLO
Figure T7.1-12
Version 3.26
7-23
Tutorial 7.1
Similarly, to display the state of the mesh up to event step no. 8: EVLO UPTO EVEN 8 CSET NONE CSET ADD CRAN 1 9 1 RP10,,,36,36 CSET ADD BAFFLE CPLO
Figure T7.1-13
To finish the events replay, restore the mesh geometry and cell set to their status before EVLOAD was used. EVLO RESET CSET ALL
7-24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
Final Operations
Write the geometry and problem files (the events file is automatically saved when writing the geometry): File > Write Geometry File Type 0.01 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom,0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) Start the CFD analysis by typing star in your STAR-CD session window. The analysis will terminate after 108 time steps. It is important to note that a periodic solution will not be obtained at the end of the run. Achieving periodic flow conditions will usually require the calculation of more than eight revolutions. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Start up pro-STAR and then enter the case name, tut, in the text box of the
Version 3.26 7-25
Tutorial 7.1
introductory panel. Accept the rest of the default settings and click Continue. The model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Ensure the STAR GUIde window is open and placed next to the main pro-STAR window. Specify the file containing the transient post data: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select the rst position in the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
EVFI CONN TRLO tut.pstt MVGR C Postprocessing Identify the point in time (or time step number) at which results are to be manipulated and displayed, in this case step number 105: In the Select Time Step list, select step number 105 Click Store Iter/Time
STORE ITER 105 Read in the vertex coordinates and velocity vector components and plot: Go to the Data tab and select item Velocity Component UV in the Vector Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Go to the Vectors tab and type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply Go to the 3-D Surface tab and then choose Option Vector and Edge/Mesh Grid Click Plot to Screen Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button Figure T7.1-14 U V NONE VECT 0.5 0 0 1
GETC POPT VESC VIEW CPLO
7-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
The results at time step nos. 106 and 107 may be plotted in the same manner: Click Go To Load Data and then select the File(s) tab In the Select Time Step list, select time step 106 Click Stor Iter/Time Go to the Data tab, select item Velocity Component UV in the Vector Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T7.1-15
STORE ITER 106 GETC U V NONE REPLOT
Version 3.26
7-27
Tutorial 7.1
Go back to the File(s) tab In the Select Time Step list, select time step 107 Click Stor Iter/Time Go to the Data tab, select item Velocity Component UV in the Vector Data list and then click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T7.1-16
STORE ITER 107 GETC U V NONE REPLOT
7-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.1
Plot vertex-based pressure values at step no. 105: STOR GETV POPT PLTY CPLO Go back to the File(s) tab In the Select Time Step list, select time step 105 Click Store Iter/Time Go to the Data tab and select option Cell&Wall/Bound from the Data Type menu Select option Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, select Option Contour (lled) Click Plot to Screen Figure T7.1-17 ITER 105 NONE P CONT EHID
Version 3.26
7-29
Tutorial 7.1
Final Operations
It is essential not to save file tut.mdl when quitting pro-STAR as the current geometry corresponds to the status of the mesh at time step 105: File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
7-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.2
TRANSIENT FLOW WITH ARBITRARY SLIDING MESH
Tutorial 7.2
In this tutorial, the arbitrary sliding interface (ASI) method will be used to simulate flow in the mixer described in Tutorial 7.1. The overall methodology is given in the User Guide, Chapter 16. Compared to the slide-shear approach used in Tutorial 7.1, the ASI method greatly simplifies the set up of events and grid changing opeartions, by automatically calculating cell connectivities at the sliding interface. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut7-2). The mesh to be used is the same as for Tutorial 7.1. Hence, it is necessary to copy over the model file from that tutorial (tut.mdl in directory tut7-1) into the newly created directory. It is not necessary to copy over the events file (tut.evn) as it will be re-created for this case. Start up pro-STAR in the normal way and supply the case name and identifying title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Delete the previous title and then type TUTORIAL 7.2 SIMULATION OF 2D MIXER FLOW USING ARBITRARY SLIDING METHOD in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 7.2 - SIMULATION OF 2D MIXER FLOW USING ARBITRARY SLIDING METHOD Check the model geometry visually: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T7.2-1
CSET ALL CPLOT
Version 3.26
7-31
Tutorial 7.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Transient Settings
The material properties, solution variables and boundary conditions to be used are the same as for Tutorial 7.1. Note that the ASI method also employs attachment boundaries, as described in the User Guide, Chapter 16. Transient Settings For this case, a different time increment t needs to be chosen. In Tutorial 7.1, which used attach events, the time step choice was dependent upon the manner of cell distortion and re-attachment at every time step and was chosen so as to minimise the mesh distortion. For the ASI method, the choice of time step is flexible. Thus, a different time step will be employed here to show that any reasonable value can be used. In this instance, we shall use a value of 0.001 seconds. The rotational speed is kept the same at 300 rpm, so this is equivalent to a rotation of 1.8. Therefore, for one complete revolution, 200 time steps will be performed. In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Analysis Controls followed by sub-folder Output Controls Open the Analysis Output panel and select the Transient tab Specify the frequency of writing data to the transient post data le as Write data every 9 degrees (equivalent to every 5 time steps) Check the Cell Data list to confirm that the required output data, velocity components, pressure and turbulence kinetic energy are already selected Click Apply Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Enter 1.8 degrees in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period
WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 9 U Y P Y TE Y DELT CONST 0 1.8

7-32 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.2
Event Settings
Before specifying event commands, pro-STAR must be resized using the MEMORY command. Type the following commands in the I/O window: MEMORY MAXEVE 10 MEMORY WRITE Parameter MAXEVE sets the number of events required while option WRITE saves the changes in file param.prp. Check the status of the events module. A new set of events will be set up for this case and stored in file tut.evn. As mentioned in Tutorial 7.1, event processing can at present be performed only by typing commands in pro-STARs I/O window: EVEN STAT EVFILE INIT The ASI method only requires specification of changes in the mesh geometry. Changes in cell connectivity are no longer required. This is illustrated in Figure T7.2-2 below.
(a)
(b) 300 rpm
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Figure T7.2-2
Illustration of arbitrary sliding interface
As in Tutorial 7.1, the grid changing commands must be entered and stored in a separate file called cgrid.cgrd as shown overleaf (using pro-STARs own built-in editor if desired) before proceeding any further. Note that use of the TIME parameter is still required.
Version 3.26
7-33
Tutorial 7.2
cgrid.cgrd ! !Comments allowed in lines starting with "!" ! !Moving grid commands for 2D mixer problem ! *IF TIME GT 0. No mesh change at TIME = 0 ! !Spaces must be inserted on either side of all arithmetic operators ! *SET DPS 300. * 360. / 60. Convert rotating speed to degrees/sec. CSYS 2 Activate cylindrical coordinate system ! !Move mesh attached to the inner cylinder ! *SET TANG TIME * DPS Total degrees rotated by mesh *GET TPOS Y 37 Get coordinate of vertex no. 37 *SET TOFF TANG - TPOS Calculate offset angle in degrees CSET NEWS GRAN 4.9 10.1,,,,,2 Collect all the cells in the inner mesh VSET NEWS CSET VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,0 TOFF Change VSET vertices by angle TOFF degrees CSET ALL *ENDIF To define an ASI rotating problem, it is only necessary to set up two events, the first one defining the arbitrary sliding operation and the second describing the actual event time, as before. The arbitrary sliding event is specified first using command EVSLIDE: EVSLIDE 10 The above defines event no. 10 as the arbitrary sliding event. This will be referenced via command EASI at a later stage by those events that employ time explicitly. pro-STAR then reminds you to specify the master and slave sliding boundary face lists, plus offsets used to match the two sets. The master cells in this case will be those on the surface of the inner ring (region 1), the slave cells being those on the outer ring (region 2). Note that the relative location of master and slave cells is arbitrary; it is equally valid to make the reverse choice. The above definitions are provided via commands EMSLIDE, ESSLIDE and EOSLIDE. Note that all boundaries are of type attach. EMSLIDE ADD REGI 1 The above adds 36 boundaries to the master list. ESSLIDE ADD REGI 2 This adds 36 boundaries to the slave list. The offset needed to match the two sliding
7-34 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.2
regions at the start of the analysis is zero for both coordinate directions in the plane of analysis: EOSLIDE 2 0 0 The event can now be saved: EVSAVE 10 Note that a sliding event does not have a time value associated with it. The grid changing event, and the time at which it is to be executed, can now be specified: EVST 1 TIME 0.0 EGRID READ cgrid.cgrd C Information displayed on your screen should confirm that grid changes will occur for the whole of the inner ring. No specification of connectivity changes is necessary. Before the event is saved, a reference to the arbitrary sliding event which contains the sliding boundary sets needs to be created: EASI 10 ENABLE This will activate ASI event no. 10 automatically. The first (and only) event step is now complete and can be saved: EVSAVE 1 Do a final check of the generated events: EVPREP This completes the setup required for the arbitrary sliding method. Final Operations Write the geometry and problem files, saving the events file in the process: File > Write Geometry File Check that the value in the Scale Factor text box is 0.01 Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) Start the CFD analysis by typing
Version 3.26 7-35
Tutorial 7.2
star in your STAR-CD session window. The analysis will terminate after 200 time steps. It is important to note that a periodic solution will not be obtained at the end of the run. Achieving periodic flow conditions usually requires the calculation of more than eight revolutions. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Start up pro-STAR and then enter the case name, tut, in the text box of the introductory panel. Accept the rest of the default settings and click Continue. The model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Ensure the STAR GUIde window is open and placed next to the main pro-STAR window. Specify the file containing the transient post data: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select the rst position in the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
EVFI CONN TRLO tut.pstt MVGR C Postprocessing Since Tutorial 7.1 generates results for time = 0.194448, it is possible to compare the results of the arbitrary sliding method directly with it. The equivalent results for the present case are stored at time step no. 195: In the Select Time Step list, select step number 195 Click Store Iter/Time
STORE ITER 195 This will access the results closest to the original time value. Read in the vertex coordinates and velocity vector components and plot:
7-36
Go to the Data tab and select item Velocity Component UV in the Vector Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Go to the Vectors tab and type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.2
Go to the 3-D Surface tab and then choose Option Vector and Edge/Mesh Grid Click Plot to Screen Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button Figure T7.2-3 U V NONE VECT 0.5 0 0 1
GETC POPT VESC VIEW CPLO
Plot the corresponding vertex-based pressure values: Click Go To Load Data Select option Cell & Wall/Bound from the Data Type menu Select option Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, select Option Contour (lled) Click Plot to Screen Figure T7.2-4
GETV NONE P POPT CONT PLTY EHID CPLOT

Version 3.26 7-37
Tutorial 7.2
It can be seen that both the velocity and pressure distributions are in close agreement. Final Operations Do not save file tut.mdl when quitting pro-STAR as the current geometry corresponds to the mesh status at time step 195: File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
7-38
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
3D FLOW WITH AUTOMATIC EVENT GENERATION
Tutorial 7.3
This tutorial uses pro-STARs automatic facility for generating arbitrary sliding interface (ASI) events that simulate three-dimensional transient flow within a mixer. Unlike Tutorial 7.1, a 3-D mesh is now constructed to represent the mixer geometry. However, the models cross-section is still as shown in Figure T7.0-1. The overall methodology of the automatic event generation facility, specially developed to facilitate the setup of mixing-vessel simulations, is explained in the User Guide, Chapter 16. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial, say tut7-3. Start up pro-STAR in the normal way and supply the case name and identifying title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 7.3 - SIMULATION OF 3D MIXER FLOW USING ARBITRARY SLIDING METHOD in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 7.3 - SIMULATION OF 3D MIXER FLOW USING ARBITRARY SLIDING METHOD Make sure that the STAR-GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
TIME SINGLE It is also convenient to expressed time-related settings (time step magnitude, output frequency, etc.) in terms of angles rather than seconds, as follows: Go to the Time Relationships panel and select option Angle from the drop-down menu Enter 300 in the RPM box and 0 in the Initial Position box Click Apply
Version 3.26
7-39
Tutorial 7.3
TREL THETA 300 0 To implement the automatic ASI events generation method, the mesh must be divided into two parts, one representing the rotating inner cylinder and the other the stationary outer cylinder. It is therefore necessary to have two different fluid cell types identifying each part of the mesh. Check the current entries in the cell table as follows: In the main window, click the CTAB button
CTLI ALL It will be seen that one fluid cell type (no. 1) and one solid cell type (no. 2) already exist by default. For the purposes of this tutorial, the latter will be changed to a fluid cell type. Each of the two cell types also needs to have a distinct group number as well as a cell type number and name. Here, the cell groups are labelled ROTA (i.e. rotating group 1) and STAT (i.e. stationary group 2): Highlight Table# entry 2 and then choose option Fluid from the Cell Type pop-up menu Enter new cell parameters in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below: Color Table Index box 5 Group Number box 2 Name box STAT Click Apply Highlight Table# entry 1 in the scroll list Enter new cell parameters in the appropriate text box, as shown below: Group Number box 1 Name box ROTA Click Apply and then Close FLUID 5 0 1 1 2 1 2 STAT FLUID 2 0 1 1 1 1 1 ROTA
CTAB 2 CTNAME CTAB 1 CTNAME Mesh Creation
The STAR GUIde environment can now be used to create the mesh. Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Open the Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes panel
Display the available coordinate systems and verify that the currently active one is no. 1 (Cartesian): Click Select a Coordinate System to display the Coordinate Systems dialog
For this tutorial, it is more convenient to create the mesh using a cylindrical
7-40 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
coordinate system. This can be chosen as follows: Select system no. 2 on the scroll list Click Set Active Click Close
CSYS 2 The automatic events generation method requires a starting mesh with regular connectivity, i.e. with no double vertices at the interface of the rotating and stationary parts of the model. Hence, the entire mesh can be generated in one single operation, followed by an assignment of the correct cell types as appropriate. Click Select Cell Type to display the Cell Table Editor dialog Select Table# 1 (Fluid). The cell attributes are shown on the editor panel. Verify that the values shown are correct, click Apply and then Close
CTYPE 1 Use the text boxes in the Extent of Domain section of the panel to create the mesh. The required values are shown below:
Generate the mesh: Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 5. 15. 10 0 360 36 0. 15. 10 The double vertices created by the above operation at = 0 and = 360 should first be eliminated by merging them together: Open the Assemble Grids panel In the Vertex Merge tab, check that option All Vertices is set for the Vertices menu Accept the remaining default settings and click Merge
VSET ALL VMERGE VSET C

Version 3.26 7-41
Tutorial 7.3
The outer, stationary cells can now be distinguished from the rest by changing their cell type to no. 2: In the pro-STAR I/O window type: CSET NEWS GRAN 9.9,15.1,,,0,15.1,2 to select the stationary part of the mesh In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool Select entry no. 2 in the Cell Table scroll list Click Set Active Type Select Modify Type > Cell Set
CSET NEWS GRAN 9.9,15.1,,,0,15.1,2 CTYPE 2 CMOD CSET Collect all cells into a set, alter the Z axis direction and plot in Quick Hidden Line mode: In the main window, select C > All Choose Plot > Up Axis and then select Z Click Cell Plot Choose cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Change the viewpoint to (1,1,1) by selecting View > Isometric>1,1,1
Figure T7.3-1
CSET ALL AXIS Z PLTY QHID VIEW 1 1 1 CPLOT
7-42
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
This completes the overall mesh geometry description. Note that the mesh shown in Figure Figure T7.3-1 will represent only half the solution domain, since a plane of symmetry will be defined later at z = 0.0. The ASI will be located along the cylindrical surface where the two parts of the mesh meet. Baffles will now be created. All baffles can share the same group number (group 3) but, as an aid to identification, baffles for each part of the mesh are set up with unique cell type numbers. Each type is labelled either as IMPL for impeller baffles or STAT for stationary baffles. Go back to panel Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes and click Select Cell Type Seelct Table# entry 3 and check that the cell type is Bafe Enter new cell parameters in the appropriate text box, as shown below: Group Number box 3 Name box IMPL Click Apply Select Table# entry 4 and then choose option Bafe from the Cell Type menu Enter new parameters in the appropriate text box, as shown below: Color Table Index box 4 Group Number box 3 Name box STAT Click Apply and then Close
CTAB 3 BAFFLE 4 0 1 1 3 1 CTNAME 3 IMPL CTAB 4 BAFFLE 4 0 1 1 3 1
Version 3.26
7-43
Tutorial 7.3
CTNAME 4 STAT The impeller baffles will be defined first. Select cells in the vicinity of the first baffle at = 0. In the pro-STAR I/O window, type: CSET NEWS GRAN 4.9,9.1,0.0,10.1,-0.1,3.1,2 Plot the selected cells with vertex numbering switched on: Choose cell plot type Wire (Surface) Select Plot > Number > Vertex Click Cell Plot Select a viewing direction of approximately (1, -1, 0.5) by choosing View>Isometric> 1,-1,1 and then using the orientation cubes slider controls Figure T7.3-2
PLTY NORM NUMB VERT ON VIEW 1 -1 0.5 CPLOT
Set the active cell type to no. 3: In the Cell Tool, select cell type 3 in the Cell Table scroll list Click Set Active Type
CTYPE 3
7-44
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
Generate the first baffle using the vertex numbers displayed in the above Figure as a guide, followed by the remaining five baffles at equally-spaced intervals around the inner cylinder. In the pro-STAR I/O window, type: C 1 38 445 408 CSET NEWS TYPE 3 CGEN 4 37 CSET CSET NEWS TYPE 3 CGEN 2 407 CSET CSET NEWS TYPE 3 CGEN 6 6 CSET The same procedure can be used to generate the four baffles in the outer cylinder. Select cells in the vicinity of the first baffle and plot them by typing CSET NEWS GRAN 10.9,15.1,0.0,10.1,,,2 CPLOT in the pro-STAR I/O window. Figure T7.3-3
Set the active cell type to no. 4: Select cell type no. 4 on the Cell Tool scroll list Click Set Active Type Close the Cell Tool
CTYPE 4 Generate the first baffle using the vertex numbers displayed in the above Figure as a guide, followed by the remaining three baffles at equally-spaced intervals around
Version 3.26 7-45
Tutorial 7.3
the outer cylinder. In the pro-STAR I/O window, type: C 223 260 667 630 CSET NEWS TYPE 4 CGEN 4 37 CSET CSET NEWS TYPE 4 CGEN 10 407 CSET CSET NEWS TYPE 4 CGEN 4 9 CSET The complete set of baffle cells can now be viewed on their own: Select C > New > Bafe Select Plot > Number and then deselect the Vertex option Click Cell Plot Select a viewing direction of approximately (1, 1, 1.5) by dragging with the left mouse button Figure T7.3-4
CSET NEWS BAFF NUMB VERT OFF VIEW 1 1 1.5 DIST 17 CPLOT This completes the mesh creation. Save the model data entered so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl
7-46
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
Boundary Boundary locations can now be specified. Specication No boundaries need to be defined between the rotating inner ring and the stationary outer ring this will be done automatically at the events generation stage. However, boundaries on the inner cylinder wall representing the rotating shaft surface need to be defined explicitly in order to assign a rotational speed to them. For this purpose, select and display the inner-cylinder cells: In the main window, C > All Choose cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Click Cell Plot Select C > New > Group and then pick a cell in the inner ring with the cursor Click Cell Plot
CSET NEWS GROUP 1 DIST 0 PLTY QHID CPLOT Use STAR GUIde to locate the inner wall and define it as boundary region no. 1: In the STAR GUIde window, select the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Dene the region type by selecting Wall from Type menu and then click Dene region
7-47
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick any vertex on the inner wall. All boundaries lying on the wall are now assigned to region no. 1 Figure T7.3-5
RDEF 1 WALL $ $ $ $ VSET NEWS EDGE BFIND 1 VX
Finally, apply a symmetry plane boundary condition at z = 0.0. Since baffle cell edges lie within this plane, it is necessary to remove all baffle cells from the current cell set before imposing this condition: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Set the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Dene the region type by selecting Symmetry from Type menu and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick any vertex on the screen
CSET NEWS FLUID VIEW 0 0 -1 CPLOT RDEF 3 SYMPLANE VSET NEWS EDGE
7-48
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
BFIND 3 VX This completes the necessary boundary location definitions. Material Properties Check the default fluid properties for the current material (no. 1) and then assign water properties to it: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Molecular Properties panel Type WATER in the Name box Type 1000. in the density text box Type 0.001 in the mu text box Click Apply
PROP STAT PMAT 1,,WATER DENS CONST 1000. LVIS CONST 0.001 Turn on the standard k- turbulence model: Open the Turbulence Models panel Click On to switch on turbulence modelling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence Model menu Click Apply
TURB KE Note that numerical values for the model coefficients may also be displayed on the panel by clicking the Show coefficients button. Specify the monitoring cell location: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 931 in the Monitoring cell number box Click Apply
MONI 931 Boundary Conditions Boundary conditions for the rotating regions can now be specified:
Version 3.26
In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the boundary regions scroll list Type 2 in the Coord. Sys. box Type 300 in the Omega text box Click Apply
7-49
Tutorial 7.3
RDEF 1 WALL NOSLIP 0 0 0 2 300. This completes the boundary specifications. Event Settings Before event settings are specified, it is necessary to resize pro-STAR by issuing the folowing commands in the I/O window: MEMORY MAXEVE 2 MEMORY WRITE Automatic event generation under ASI conditions can now be specified. Only a single command within the Events Module, MIXASI, is needed for this purpose. MIXASI alters the current model definition so as to allow mesh movement. It achieves this by creating new vertices, regions and boundaries (of type ATTACH) at the sliding interface. Note that, once created, these new entities cannot be undone automatically. The command also initialises the events file and creates a sliding event defining the arbitrary sliding operation, plus an event describing the event time, as discussed in Tutorial 7.2. EGRID commands to rotate the vertices of the inner ring are also created at the end. The data required by the command are: Events le name: tut.evn Rotating cell group number: 1 Rotational speed (rpm): 300 Rotating coordinate system: 2 Angular extent of the mesh (degrees): 360
Thus, to activate automatic event generation, type: MIXASI tut.evn 1 300 2 360 Y The Y response is necessary because pro-STAR will ask you if you wish to proceed further and change the mesh. Information echoed in the I/O window will confirm the changes as they occur. The set of EGRID commands produced will also be listed near the end. Analysis and Choose velocity components, pressure and turbulence kinetic energy as the flow Run Time variables to write to the transient post-processing file. As discussed in Tutorial 7.2, Controls the choice of time step is flexible when using the ASI method. Here, we shall again use a value of 0.001 seconds (equivalent to a rotation of 1.8) so that the number of time steps required for one complete revolution is 200. In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Analysis Controls followed by sub-folder Output Controls Open the Analysis Output panel and select the Transient tab Dene an output period starting at a time corresponding to 0 and a frequency of writing data to the transient post data le as Write data every
Version 3.26
7-50
Tutorial 7.3
9 degrees (equivalent to every 5 time steps). Enter these values in the corresponding boxes. Note that, by default, the Velocity and Pressure variables are already selected for output in the upper scroll list. Select item Turb Kinetic Energy and then click the Post button. The list display will confirm your choice. Click Apply Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Select option Run for and type 360 in the adjacent input box Click Apply Enter 1.8 degrees in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period
WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 9 U Y P Y TE Y RUNT DURAT 360 DELT CONST 0 1.8 Final Operations Write the geometry and problem files and then quit: File > Write Geometry File Type 0.01 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom,0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) Start the CFD analysis by typing star in your STAR-CD session window. The analysis will terminate after 200 time steps. It is important to note that a periodic solution will not be obtained at the end of the run. Achieving periodic flow conditions will usually require the calculation of more than eight revolutions. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Start up pro-STAR and then enter the case name, tut, in the text box of the introductory panel. Accept the rest of the default settings and click Continue. The model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Specify the file containing the transient post data:
Version 3.26 7-51
Tutorial 7.3
In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select le tut.pstt on the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
EVFI CONN TRLO tut.pstt MVGR C Postprocessing Two typical post-processing plots for this type of analysis are given here, showing velocity vectors at time step no. 200: In the Select Time Step list, select step number 200 Click Store Iter/Time
STORE ITER 200 Read in vertex coordinates and velocity vectors and plot them on a horizontal cross-sectional plane located at z = 1.75: Go to the Data tab and select item Velocity Components UVW from the Vector Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to tab Section Clipped Choose Option Vector and Edge/Mesh Grid Type 1.75 in the Z coordinate box corresponding to POINT Click Apply Go to the Vectors tab Type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply Set the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z in the main window Go back to the Section Clipped tab and then click Plot to Screen Figure T7.3-6 GETC ALL NONE PLTY SECT SNORM 0 0 1 SPOINT,0,0,1.75 VIEW 0 0 -1
7-52 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.3
POPT VECT VESC 0.5 PLTY QHID CPLO
Now plot velocity vectors on a vertical cross-sectional plane passing through the origin: In the main window, click Section Slice Use the cursor to draw a straight line across the model, representing the trace of the cross section on the screen plane. Choose any convenient line passing through the centre of the plot, e.g. one inclined at 45 to the y-axis. Click the mouse at each end of the line to indicate the beginning and end of cursor input. Select View > SNORMAL Figure T7.3-7
SPOINT CURSOR VIEW SNORM PLTY SECT REPLOT
Version 3.26
7-53
Tutorial 7.3
Final Operations
It is essential not to save file tut.mdl when quitting pro-STAR as the current geometry corresponds to the status of the mesh at time step 200: File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
7-54
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
STEADY FLOW WITH IMPLICIT MULTIPLE FRAMES
Tutorial 7.4
This tutorial deals with the use of multiple rotating reference frames (implicit formulation) for simulating flow in a two-dimensional mixer. The problem geometry is similar to that of Tutorial 7.1. The differences are that all baffles have been shortened to 3 cm in length (to create a model for which the rotating reference frame treatment is appropriate) and the number of impeller baffles has been reduced to four (to introduce a degree of symmetry that allows only a sector of the problem to be modelled). The fluid properties remain the same. The implicit formulation for multiple rotating frames is a steady-state computational approach and, in this case, uses two frames of reference. The first rotates at the same speed as the inner cylinder and the second is stationary. Other important characteristics of the problem are: Given the inherent symmetry of the model geometry, repeating or periodic ow will result under steady-state conditions. Therefore, the solution domain can be reduced to a 60 sector bounded by a pair of cyclic boundaries, as shown in Figure T7.4-1. The mesh representing the problem geometry remains stationary. To implement the implicit rotating frame method, one part of the mesh must be assigned to the rotating frame of the inner cylinder and the other to the stationary frame of the outer cylinder. Given that this method gives only an approximation to the true solution, it is important to choose the interface between the two mesh blocks so that the solution error is minimised. Positioning this interface half-way between the inner and outer cylinders (see Figure T7.4-1) achieves this. The mesh structure to be used is shown in Figure T7.4-2. Note that the mesh is ner than that used in Tutorial 7.1.
Version 3.26
7-55
Tutorial 7.4
3 cm r = 15 cm = 0 rpm Spin index = 2
r = 10 cm = 500 rpm 3 cm Cyclic boundary 1 r = 5 cm Cyclic boundary 2 Spin index = 1
Figure T7.4-1
Modied mixer geometry
Figure T7.4-2
Mesh structure for the modied mixer geometry
7-56
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut7-4). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and identifying title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 7.4 - SIMULATION OF 2D MIXER FLOW USING IMPLICIT MULTIPLE FRAMES in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 7.4 - SIMULATION OF 2D MIXER FLOW USING IMPLICIT MULTIPLE FRAMES Mesh Creation Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If it is not, activate it by clicking the special Open STAR GUIde button: Click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only panels essential to your analysis are activated. Select option On from the Rotating Reference Frame Status menu Click Apply
The STAR GUIde environment can now be used to create the mesh. Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Click Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel
In this tutorial, it is convenient to create the mesh in a cylindrical coordinate system. Activate this system as follows: Click Select a Coordinate System to display the Coordinate Systems dialog Select system no. 2 on the scroll list Click Set Active Click Close
CSYS 2 Use the text boxes in the Extent of Domain section of the panel to create the mesh. The required values are shown below:
Version 3.26
7-57
Tutorial 7.4
Generate the mesh Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 5. 15. 20 60. 120. 12 0. 1. 1 Re-plot the mesh using the Quick Hidden Line option: Choose cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Use the slider controls to set a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (0.5, 0.5, 1) Figure T7.4-3
CSET ALL PLTY QHID VIEW 0.5 0.5 1 CPLO
The mesh now needs to be split into two blocks, differentiated from each other by
7-58 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
different cell and spin indices. Check the default cell table and then create two fluid cell types, each with its own spin index: In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool Click Edit Types to display the Cell Table Editor dialog Select Table# entry 1 and inspect the current settings, checking that the correct parameters are set (Material Number: 1, Color Table Index: 2, Spin Index: 1) Highlight Table# entry 2 and then choose option Fluid in the Cell Type pop-up menu Enter new cell table parameters in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below: Color Table Index box 4 Spin Index box 2 Name box Default_Fluid Click Apply and then Close
CTLI ALL CTAB 1 FLUID 2 0 1 1 CTAB 2 FLUID 4 0 1 2 CTNAM 2 Default_Fluid Note that these cell types share the same material property number (no. 1) because both belong to the same fluid stream. Select all cells attached to the outer cylinder and assign them to cell type 2: In the I/O window type: CSET NEWS GRAN 9.9 15.1,,,,,2 In the Cell Tool, select entry no. 2 in the Cell Table scroll list Select Modify Type > Cell Set
CSET NEWS GRAN 9.9 15.1,,,,,2 CTYPE 2 CMOD CSET The inner cylinder cells are already of type 1 by default so no special action is needed there. Confirm that the correct cell type assignments have been made by collecting all cells and replotting: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CSET ALL CPLOT This completes the overall mesh geometry description.
Version 3.26 7-59
Tutorial 7.4
The next stage is to create baffles. For this purpose, select cells in the vicinity of the first baffle by typing the following in the I/O window: CSET NEWS GRAN,,,89.9 95.1,,,2 Plot the selected cells with vertex numbering turned on: Use the orientation cubes slider controls to select a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (0.5, 0.5, 2) Choose cell plot type Wire (Surface) Select Plot > Number > Vertex Click Cell Plot Figure T7.4-4
VIEW 0.5 0.5 2 PLTY NORM NUMB VERT ON CPLO
Choose Baffle as the active cell type: Go to the Cell Tool and select entry no. 3 in the Cell Table scroll list Click Set Active Type Close the Cell Tool
CTYPE 3 Create a baffle at the inner cylinder using the vertex numbers displayed in the above Figure as a guide. In the I/O window, type:
7-60 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
C 7 20 293 280 CGEN 6 13 241 241 1 Now create a baffle at the outer cylinder using the same procedure: C 189 202 475 462 CGEN 6 13 247 247 1 This completes the mesh. View the result as follows: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Select Plot > Number and then deselect the Vertex option Choose cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Use the orientation cubes slider controls to select a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (0.5, 0.5, 1) Figure T7.4-5 ALL QHID VERT OFF 0.5 0.5 1
CSET PLTY NUMB VIEW CPLO
Save the model data entered so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl
Version 3.26 7-61
Tutorial 7.4
Boundary The next step is to define boundary locations. Cyclic boundaries (regions 1 and 2) Specication may be specified using a combination of BDEFINE and BGENERATE commands since regular vertex numbering already exists (the required vertex numbers can be viewed by activating the vertex number display and plotting, as described in the section on Mesh Creation). In the I/O window, type: BDEF BGEN BDEF BGEN 1 1 14 287 274 20 13 1 1 1 2 13 26 299 286 20 13 21 21 1
Create a cyclic pair out of regions 1 and 2 as follows: In the STAR GUIde window, select the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel In the Regions tab, select region no. 1 in the scroll list and then choose option Cyclic from the Type menu Click Dene region Select region no. 2 and then option Cyclic from the Type menu Click Dene region Go to the Cyclics tab Enter parameters in the appropriate boxes so as to create an integrally matched cyclic pair in coordinate system no. 2: Type of Match Accept the Integral default First Region 1 Second Region 2 Coord. System 2 Y Offset 60. Click Match
RDEF 1 CYCLIC 2 RDEF 2 CYCLIC 2 CYMA 1 2 0. 60. The end result of this operation can be viewed as follows: In the main window, select B > New > Cyclic Select cell plot display option Bound Use the orientation cubes slider controls to select a viewing direction corresponding approximately to (0.5, 0.5, 1) Click Replot Deselect option button Bound
BDIS ON BSET NEWS CYCL VIEW 0.5 0.5 1

7-62 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Spin Parameters
REPL BDIS OFF Since the problem is two dimensional, all cell faces normal to the Z-direction must be assigned to a symmetry plane. This is most conveniently done by viewing each boundary surface in turn from a suitable direction and then using the STAR GUIde boundary location facilities described below. Such an operation automatically applies a boundary condition to every cell face shown in the current plot, including baffle faces. In order to avoid imposing symmetry-plane boundary conditions on baffles, the latter have to be excluded from the current cell set. Thus: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Choose cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button In the STAR GUIde window, still showing the Create Boundaries panel, go back to the Regions tab Select region no. 3 in the boundary region scroll list Dene the region as a symmetry plane by choosing option Symmetry from the Region Type menu Click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick any vertex on the mesh plot Set the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick any vertex on the mesh plot
CSET NEWS FLUID PLTY EHID VIEW 0 0 1 CPLO RDEF 3 SYMP VSET NEWSET EDGE BFIND 3 VX VIEW 0 0 -1 REPL BFIND 3 VX Spin Parameters Assign appropriate angular velocities to the spin indices already specified and activate the implicit solution method for multiple rotating frames:
Version 3.26
Select folder Rotating Reference Frames and then open the Rotating Reference Frames panel Select option Multiple Frames - Implicit from the Reference Frame Treatment menu Highlight Spin Index no. 1 in the Spin Parameters scroll list Type values for Omega (500) and Coord. Sys. (2) in the two text boxes
7-63
Tutorial 7.4
located next to the index box at the bottom of the panel Click Apply Highlight Spin Index no. 2 in the scroll list Type values for Omega (0) and Coord. Sys. (2) in the appropriate boxes Click Apply
SPIN 1 500. 2 SPIN 2 0. 2 MFRAME IMPLICIT Material Properties Check the default fluid properties and then specify properties for water: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Molecular Properties panel Type WATER in the Name box Type 1000. in the Density box Type 0.001 in the Molecular Viscosity box Click Apply
PROP STAT PMAT 1 FLUID WATER DENS CONST 1000. LVIS CONST 0.001 Turn on the standard k- turbulence model Open the Turbulence Models panel Click On to switch on turbulence modelling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu Click Apply
TURB KE The monitoring cell location and the reference pressure location can be set as follows: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 5 in the Monitoring cell number box Type 2 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box Click Apply
MONI 5 PRES,,2
7-64
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
Boundary Conditions
As the boundary types in this problem are either wall, symmetry plane or regular cyclic, no special boundary conditions need to be imposed. Open the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and select panel Dene Boundary Regions Scroll through the four regions displayed to conrm that no further input is required here
Analysis Controls
Check the solution variables. Since the flow is two dimensional, it is sensible to switch off the calculation of the W-velocity component: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behaviour, open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation Status tab Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations Click Apply
CONT STAT SOLV LW N Run Time Controls Set the total number of iterations: Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Type 200 in the Number of Iterations box
ITER 200 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis using the available facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Type 0.01 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom,0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT Y

Version 3.26 7-65
Tutorial 7.4
CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the units in which the model was built are correctly set; option button other should be selected with a value of 0.01 in the Scale Factor box. Leave all other settings at their default values. Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Convert all computed velocities to a static reference frame: Go to the Coord System tab and select option Static Click Apply
REFRAME STATIC You are now ready to start the post-processing task. Postprocessing Load and then plot velocity vector components: Go to the Data tab In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UV Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to the Vectors tab Type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box and then click Apply Go to the 3-D Surface tab Choose Vector from the Option menu and Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T7.4-6
GETC U V NONE VESC 0.5 PLTY EHID

7-66 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.4
POPT VECT CPLO
The vertex-based pressure contours can be plotted as follows: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T7.4-7
GETV NONE P POPT CONT CPLO
Version 3.26
7-67
Tutorial 7.4
Final Operations
QUIT, NOSAVE
7-68
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.5
3D FLOW WITH CAVITATION EFFECTS
Tutorial 7.5
This tutorial illustrates pro-STARs capabilities for simulating cavitation phenomena at the impeller blades of a mixer. For convenience, the 3-D mixer problem set up in Tutorial 7.3 is used as the starting point, complete with arbitrary sliding interface events as defined in that tutorial. The main modifications made to the problems conditions are as follows: The cavitation modelling option is turned on and all associated parameters specied (see also the Cavitation section in Chapter 15 of the User Guide). The size of the mixer is articially increased by a factor of 10. This results in a higher Reynolds number and ensures an early onset of cavitation. In this way, the simulation capabilities of the code can be demonstrated while keeping the length of the run reasonable short.
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial, say tut7-5. Since this session continues from the case set up in Tutorial 7.3, copy the save and event files (tut.mdl and tut.evn) in directory tut7-3 to the new directory. Start up pro-STAR in the normal way and supply the case name and identifying title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 7.5 - SIMULATION OF 3D MIXER FLOW WITH CAVITATION EFFECTS in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 7.5 - SIMULATION OF 3D MIXER FLOW WITH CAVITATION EFFECTS To prevent any error messages being displayed, the MEMORY commands used in previous sub-tutorials in this group are also issued here. The events file will be reconnected later, so it is important to ensure pro-STAR is ready for this action (otherwise a message will appear instructing the user to resize with the MEMORY command). Enter the following in the I/O window: MEMORY MAXEVE 2 MEMORY WRITE
Version 3.26
7-69
Tutorial 7.5
Make sure that the STAR-GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. In this tutorial, the Time Domain option is already set to Transient so the only other setting needed is to turn on cavitation modelling. Select option On from the Cavitation menu Click Apply
CAVI ON Check the model geometry before proceeding further: In the main window, select C > All Select a viewing direction of approximately (1, 1, 1.5) by dragging with the left mouse button Click Cell Plot To see the location of the bafes more clearly, turn off mesh plotting by clicking the corresponding button on the main window Figure T7.5-1 Turn mesh plotting back on by clicking the button again Click Replot
CSET ALL VIEW 1 1 1.5 CPLOT PLMESH OFF REPLOT PLMESH ON REPLOT
7-70
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.5
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Material Properties and Models
Material Properties and Models
Check the physical properties of the fluids in your model: Select the Cavitation folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open panel Molecular Properties
In this case, the light fluid is the vapour phase of the heavy fluid (water). Therefore, there is no need for a separate property specication so the panels Light Fluid tab becomes inactive. Check the default property settings in the Heavy Fluid tab For consistency with data used in the other sub-tutorials of this group, enter a slightly different density value, 1000, in the density box and then click Apply
PMAT,2,FLUID DENS,CONS,1000 Check the default settings in the Cavitation panel. It will be seen that the barotropic model is selected and that this model will start being applied after 80 time steps so as not to cause numerical instabilities in the calculations. Make a small adjustment to the saturated water vapour pressure value; enter 2337 in the Saturation Pressure box and then click Apply.
CAVPROP CONST,,,2337 Since fluids with different densities will co-exist in the mixer once cavitation starts, buoyancy effects need to be taken into account by specifying a gravitational body
Version 3.26 7-71
Tutorial 7.5
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Initial Conditions
force acting in the -z direction (its effect will be small in this case). The gravity setting will apply to both light and heavy fluids. Open the Gravity panel and inspect the default settings for the gravity force, which are suitable for this case Click Apply to activate the gravitational effect
ACCEL,0,0,-1,1,9.8066 Check the turbulence setting (this applies to both light and heavy fluids): Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and then the Liquids and Gases sub-folder Open the Turbulence Models panel and set the Material # slider to 1 Conrm that the high Reynolds number k- model is switched on
Specify reference and buoyancy calculation parameters: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Use the mouse icon on the panel to select a reference pressure cell located at the top of the water column (say no. 3568) Click Apply Open the Buoyancy panel and click On Inspect the default settings. The datum location is placed at the previously selected reference pressure point (with mesh coordinates 11.8325, 8.28521, 14.25) which is suitable for this problem Select Specify from the Dene Datum Density menu and then enter 1000 in the Density box Click Apply to conrm the above settings
PMAT,1 PRES,1.e+05,3568 BUOY,ON,11.8325,8.28521,14.25,SPEC,1000. Check the scalar variable settings: Select the Additional Scalars folder and then open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel. Two scalars, created automatically by pro-STAR, will be seen: i) CAV represents the vapour phase and is therefore assigned the physical properties of water vapour ii) VOF auxiliary passive scalar used for calculating the water-vapour interface It will be seen that both scalars are dened correctly. Initial Conditions Specify initial conditions for the fluid mix. In this case, only water is present at the start of the analysis. Therefore, the most convenient initialisation method is to employ the Cell Table Editor to assign all fluid cells to the heavy type.
Version 3.26
7-72
Tutorial 7.5
In the main window, click button CTAB to open the Cell Table Editor Select cell type 1 in the scroll list Select option Heavy from the Initial Free Surface Material menu Click Apply Select cell type 2 Select option Heavy from the Initial Free Surface Material menu Click Apply. Note both uid cell types still remains indexed to material no. 1, i.e. the light uid material. Close the Cell Table Editor
CTAB,1,FLUID,2,0,1,1,1,1,0,OFF,0,HEAVY CTAB,2,FLUID,5,0,1,1,2,1,0,OFF,0,HEAVY Note that this setting will produce the following two results: 1. The VOF variable, used in the code to calculate the free surface separating the liquid and vapour phases, is automatically given an initial distribution that is consistent with the initial uid distribution (i.e. 1.0 everywhere) 2. The code automatically assigns the correct initial hydrostatic pressure distribution inside the ow domain Analysis Controls This case involves calculating the flow for the arbitrary sliding interface events already defined and stored in file tut.evn. As discussed in Tutorial 7.3, the choice of time step is flexible when using the ASI method so it is reasonable to use the same value as before (0.001 seconds, equivalent to a rotation of 1.8). Choose velocity components, pressure and the VOF variable as the flow quantities to write to the transient post file: Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab Dene an output period starting at a time corresponding to 0 and a frequency of writing data to the transient post data le corresponding to 18 (i.e. approximately every 10 time steps) by entering these values in the corresponding boxes Note that the Velocity, Pressure and Turb Kinetic Energy variables are already selected in the upper scroll list as they were previously required for the Tutorial 7.3 output. Deselect item Turb Kinetic Energy and then select item VOF by clicking the Post button as necessary. The list display will confirm your choice. Click Apply
WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 18 U Y P Y TE N SC02 Y Run Time Controls It is now necessary to specify the transient elapsed time so that the analysis calculates the flow during four complete revolutions of the inner cylinder, i.e 1440. As already stated, the time step size is chosen so as to give rotational increments of 1.8. In cavitation problems, the actual time step is controlled by the maximum Courant number constraint mentioned previously. Therefore, the number of time
7-73
Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.5
steps required to cover the same rotor displacement may in fact be greater, but this should not happen in this case. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open panel Set Run Time Controls Select option Run for and type 1440 in the adjacent input box Click Apply Enter 0.0 in the Period Start Time box and 1.8 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period
RUNT DURAT 1440 DELT CONST 0 1.8 Final Operations Before writing the geometry file, the existing events file (tut.evn) needs to be connected to the current pro-STAR session: In the I/O window, type command
EVFI CONN As explained in the introduction to this tutorial, the size of the model must be increased by a factor of 10. Since all dimensions were supplied in centimeters, the easiest way of doing this is to specify a scale factor of 0.1 when writing the geometry file. Also write the problem file and then quit: File > Write Geometry File Type 0.1 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom,0.1 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) Start the CFD analysis by typing star in your STAR-CD session window. The analysis will terminate after 800 time steps. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Start up pro-STAR and then enter the case name, tut, in the text box of the introductory panel. Accept the rest of the default settings and click Continue. The
7-74 Version 3.26
Tutorial 7.5
model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Specify the file containing the transient post data: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select le tut.pstt on the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
EVFI CONN TRLO tut.pstt MVGR C Postprocessing Read in the first set of results containing cavitation calculations and load the VOF values: In the Select Time Step list, select dataset no. 8 (results after 81 time steps) and then click Store Iter/Time. Go to the Data tab and select item VOF from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data
STOR ITER 81 GETC NONE CONC 2 Select a suitable viewpoint and then set up a contour plot for the VOF variable. Note that, despite the blocky character of the displayed results, cell-centred values are more appropriate in this case as the plot will show the correct position of the cavitation bubbles behind the rotor blades (as opposed to a smooth plot that will smear the distribution to points in front of the blades): VIEW PLTY POPT PLME CPLO In the main window, select View > Axis > -Z In the Load Data panel, select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, choose Option Contour (lled) and Edge/Mesh Grid Click Plot to Screen Figure T7.5-2 0 0 -1 EHID CONT ON
Version 3.26
7-75
Tutorial 7.5
Transient results of this kind are best viewed in quick animation mode. Instruct pro-STAR to loop over the results file, starting with the time step number at which cavitation is first switched on (after 80 time steps). This may be done by typing the following commands in the I/O window: *SET ITT 70 10 *DEFI NOEX STOR ITER ITT GETC NONE CONC 2 CAVER CSET PLTB ON REPLOT PLTB OFF *END *LOOP 1 73 Final Operations File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
7-76
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8 AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE

Physical Problem Description The problem considered is steady, two-dimensional airflow over an obstacle mounted at the bottom wall of a two-dimensional channel. The geometry is shown in Figure T8.0-1. This case is based on an experimental investigation conducted by the Danish Maritime Institute and the experimental data are compared with the CFD predictions. In the experiment set-ups, the flow velocity and turbulence characteristics were non-uniform across the inlet section. However, to simplify the modelling procedure, the case presented here is based on a uniform inlet velocity profile with fixed turbulence characteristics. The boundaries consist of an inlet, an outlet, symmetry planes and default no-slip walls for the remaining boundaries. The fluid is air and its physical properties are assumed constant and equal to the STAR-CD default values: Density Molecular viscosity 1.205 1.81 105 kg/m3 Pa s
Air at standard pressure and temperature (1 bar and 293 K) enters the solution domain with a velocity of 1.17 m/s. Based on the height of the obstacle, the Reynolds number is 3,115. The turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation rate at the inlet are 0.024 m2/s2 and 0.07 m2/s3, respectively, these values having been derived from experimental data. All fluid mass entering the solution domain exits through the outlet. The flow is isothermal, incompressible and turbulent and the standard k- equations are chosen as the turbulence model.
Wall
300 Inlet
Outlet
40 320 10 All units in mm
Wall 800
Figure T8.0-1
Problem geometry
Modelling Strategy The following modelling features are used:

Version 3.26
Incompressible and steady ow options k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics Automatic mesh generation with embedded mesh renement in the regions
8-1
Modelling Strategy
surrounding the obstacle and near the walls. This is shown in Figure T8.0-2 as Mesh 1. Various strategies for further mesh renement, followed by restarting the analysis from the converged solution obtained for Mesh 1 Matching of cell faces at the coarse and ne mesh interfaces Displaying simulation results using various built-in graph plotting facilities
Figure T8.0-2
Mesh 1, generated in the global Cartesian coordinate system
8-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up a grid that includes embedded mesh refinement. The refinement is applied to the region surrounding the obstacle and along the opposite wall. In addition, the post-processing section discusses various pro-STAR facilities for extracting data from the solution domain and displaying them in graphical form. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut8-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title as follows: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 8.1 - AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (MESH 1) Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 8.1 - AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (MESH 1) Mesh Creation Make sure that the STAR-GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If not, activate it by clicking the special Show STAR-GUIde button shown below:
Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Click Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes to open the corresponding panel
The geometry is divided into three sections, the first covering the region between the inlet and the obstacles upstream face, the second the region between the upstream and downstream obstacle faces and the third the region between the downstream face and the outlet. Use the Extent of Domain text boxes to create the mesh for each section in turn, as shown below. Enter mesh parameters for the first section:
Version 3.26
8-3
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Click Generate Mesh
Enter mesh parameters for the second section
Click Generate Mesh
Enter mesh parameters for the third section
Click Generate Mesh 0.0 300.0 10 0.0 300.0 10 0.0 300.0 10 0.0 10.0 1 0.0 10.0 1 0.0 10.0 1
VC3D 0.0 320.0 8 VC3D 320.0 330.0 1 VC3D 330.0 1130.0 20
8-4
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Join up the three sections created so far by deleting all coincident vertices at the interfaces between the three sections. This creates a new, renumbered mesh spanning the entire model. In the main window, select Tools > Vertex Tool > Vertex Merge In the VMerge dialog, type All in the Vertex Search Start box Accept the default settings everywhere else, click Apply and then Close In the Vertex Tool, select Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, click Apply and then Close Close the Vertex Tool
VMER ALL C VCOM ALL Y Collect all cells and plot In the main window, select C > All Check that cell plot type Hidden Surface is selected Click Cell Plot
Figure T8.1-1
CSET ALL VIEW 0 0 1 PLTY EHID CPLO
Version 3.26
8-5
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
As seen in Figure Figure T8.1-1, the mesh generated so far is too coarse to capture the detailed flow pattern in the regions of interest, e.g. around the flow obstruction located at 320 < x < 330, 0 < y < 40. Local mesh refinement is needed near the walls (0 < x < 1130, 0 < y < 60 and 0 < x < 1130, 270 < y < 300) and around the obstacle (240 < x < 890, 0 < y < 150). To do this, you must first collect the cells to be refined (except those in the region immediately above the obstacle) into a set. This can be done by drawing polygons around successive cell subsets with the cursor, using Figure Figure T8.1-2 as a guide. The CSET commands shown in the box below may be used as an alternative: Start off the cell set by choosing C > New > Zone and then select the cell layer next to the top wall C > Add > Zone and then select the two cell layers next to the bottom wall C > Add > Zone and then select a region that is 4 cell layers thick and encompasses 2 cell layers upstream and 14 layers downstream of the obstacle (see Figure Figure T8.1-2) C > Unselect > Zone and then select the entire cell column situated at the obstacle location Click Cell Plot to display the required cell set Figure T8.1-2
CSET NEWS GRAN -1.0 1131.0 -1.0 61.0 CSET ADD GRAN -1.0 1131.0 269.0 301.0 CSET ADD GRAN 239.0 891.0 -1.0 151.0 CSET DELE GRAN 319.0 331.0 -1.0 301.0 CPLOT
8-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Create a refined mesh in the region specified above by sub-dividing the current cell set by factors of 2 and 3 in the x- and y-directions, respectively. pro-STARs automatic cell coupling option will be used in this process: Select Tools > Cell Tool > Cell Rene In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 2 Number divisions in J direction box 3 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Couple Option pop-up Couple Accept the default settings in the rest of the dialog and click Apply
CREF 2 3 1 CSET,,,MERGE,COUP Now generate extra cells immediately above the obstacle to match the mesh in the rest of the fine-mesh region. In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Create a new cell set by choosing C > New > Zone and then selecting the cells located at the lower gap of Figure Figure T8.1-2 C > Add > Zone and then select the cells at the upper gap of Figure Figure T8.1-2 In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 1 Number divisions in J direction box 3 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Couple Option pop-up Couple Accept the default settings in the rest of the dialog, click Apply and then Close In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T8.1-3 NEWS GRAN 319.0 331.0 -1.0 151.0 ADD GRAN 319.0 331.0 269.0 301.0 1 3 1 CSET,,,MERGE,COUP ALL
CSET CSET CREF CSET CPLO
Version 3.26
8-7
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
The next step is to create the flow obstruction. This is done by selecting and deleting all cells within the geometric range 320 < x < 330 and 0 < y < 40: Create a new cell set by choosing C > New > Zone and then selecting the cells located within the above range (or use the CSET command in the box below as an alternative) In the Cell Tool, click Cell Plot Select Delete Cells > Cell Set In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T8.1-4
CSET NEWS GRAN 319.0 331.0 -1.0 41.0 CDEL CSET CSET ALL CPLO
8-8
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
The mesh generation is now complete. The next step is to delete all redundant vertices and cells from the model and to create a new, renumbered mesh. In the Cell Tool, click Cell Compress Select Tools > Vertex Tool > Vertex Merge In the VMerge dialog, check that All appears in the Vertex Search Start box Accept the default settings everywhere else, click Apply and then Close In the Vertex Tool, click Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, click Apply and then Close Close the Vertex Tool Close the Cell Tool
CCOM Y VMER ALL C VCOM ALL Y Plot all existing coupled cells to confirm visually that cell coupling in the refined regions has been done correctly: In the main window, select C > New > Couples > Both Click Cell Plot Figure T8.1-5
CSET NEWS CPRA ALL

Version 3.26 8-9
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
CPLO
Save all model data generated so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Check the status of boundary definitions: Specication In STAR GUIde, select the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel Check the current boundary denitions; the boundary scroll list should be empty, apart from the default wall boundary. BOUN STAT Boundary locations can now be specified. Before defining the inlet and outlet boundaries, the relevant cell faces need to be displayed. Thus, for region 1 (inlet boundary):
8-10
In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Set the (-1, 0, 0) viewpoint by selecting View > Axis > -X Go to the Create Boundaries panel and highlight region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Designate this region as an inlet by selecting Inlet from the Type menu
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
and then click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark each of the 16 boundaries displayed on your screen with the cursor and then click Done NEWS GRAN -1.0 41.0 -1.0 301.0 -1 0 0 1 ALL 1 INLE $ $
CSET VIEW CPLO BZON RDEF
The above assigns all the displayed cell faces to boundary region no. 1. Similarly, for region 2 (the outlet boundary): Set the (1, 0, 0) viewpoint by selecting View > Axis > +X Highlight region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Designate this region as an outlet by selecting Outlet from the Type menu and then click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark each of the 16 boundaries displayed on your screen with the cursor and click Done NEWS GRAN 1089.0 1131.0 -1.0 301.0 1 0 0 2 ALL 2 OUTL $ $
CSET VIEW CPLO BZON RDEF
Next, the two symmetry planes are designated as region no. 3. For the first plane: Set the (0, 0, 1) viewpoint by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button in the main window Highlight region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Designate this region as a symmetry plane by selecting Symmetry from the Type menu and then click Dene region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh using the screen cursor
CSET ALL VIEW 0 0 1 CPLO BZON 3 ALL For the second plane: Set the (0, 0, -1) viewpoint by selecting View > REVERSE Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh using the screen cursor
8-11
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
VIEW 0 0 -1 CPLO BZON 3 ALL RDEF 3 SYMP Boundaries not covered by the above region definitions are assigned automatically to region 0 which is a wall by default. Material Properties Check the default fluid properties. The only property data needed for an isothermal and incompressible flow are fluid density and molecular viscosity. Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Click Molecular Properties to display the corresponding panel
Given that the default property values are those of air at standard temperature and pressure, no change is necessary. Turn on the standard k- turbulence model: Click Turbulence Models to display the corresponding panel Click On to select turbulence modelling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu Click Apply
PROP STAT TURB KE Choose a cell just above the obstacle (say cell no. 341) as the monitoring location. Click Monitoring and Reference Data to display the corresponding panel Type 341 in the Monitoring cell number text box Click Apply
MONI 341 The precise position of this cell can be selected most easily by clicking the mouse button next to the text box and then picking the desired cell on the cell plot with the cursor. Boundary Conditions Having defined the locations of the boundaries and their associated region numbers, boundary conditions are imposed as follows: For region 1:
8-12
Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the region scroll list Type the inlet velocity, 1.17, in the U text box Select option k/Epsilon from the Turb. Switch menu
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Type inlet values for the turbulence parameters; 0.024 in the K box and 0.07 in the Epsilon box. Click Apply
RDEF 1 INLE 1.170 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 1.205 RTURB 1,KEPS,0.024,0.07 Check the conditions for region 2: Select region no. 2 in the scroll list No change is needed for the displayed defaults (i.e. no ow split)
Region 0 is a wall boundary with standard conditions (i.e. no-slip with wall functions, stationary, impermeable, non-conducting and non-radiating): Select 0 in the Boundary Regions scroll list. It can be seen that the default properties satisfy the above conditions so no further input is necessary
All boundaries can now be collected into a set and checked graphically by switching on the boundary display. Note that the symmetry planes are excluded from the plot for clarity. In the main window, select C > All and B > All Select B > Unselect > Symplane Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Cell Plot Use the mouse button and/or slider controls to set an approximate viewpoint of (-1, 0.5, 1) Figure T8.1-6 ALL ALL DELE SYMP ON -1 0.5 1
CSET BSET BSET BDIS VIEW CPLO
Version 3.26
8-13
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Turn off the boundary display option and re-plot the mesh: In the main window, deselect the Bound option Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the orientation cubes Reset button
BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 REPLO Check the model by displaying some key parameters in the I/O window (number of cells and cell types, boundary regions, etc.) and then save the model data Utility > Count > All File > Save Model
COUNT ALL SAVE tut.mdl Analysis Controls Set up the analysis control parameters as follows: Click folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior
Since the flow is two-dimensional, the calculation of the W-velocity component is redundant and can be switched off:
8-14
Open the Primary Variables panel In the Equation Status tab, deselect the Solve option button for item
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
W-Mom Click Apply
SOLV LW N Set the frequency of outputing data into the solution (post-processing) file and specify that wall data (shear force coefficients and y+ values) are to be stored in it: Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output panel In the Solution File Setup section, type 10 in the Output Frequency box Go to the Additional Output Data section and select item Shear Force in the Wall Data scroll list Click option button Post Repeat the above process for item Yplus Click Show selected to display a summary of the chosen items Click Apply
WDAT REST 10 POWA SPEC SHEA Y POWA SPEC YPLU Y Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data for Mesh 1, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Type 0.001 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 1.E-3 PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:
Version 3.26
File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the units in which the model was built are correctly selected
8-15
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
(option button millimeters). Leave all other settings at their default values. Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Basic Plots Select the cell-based velocity vectors for plotting. Also scale down the vector size and switch off the mesh display: GETC POPT PLTY PLME EDGE VESC CPLO Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UV In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Go to the Vectors tab and then type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply Go back to the 3-D Surface tab and click Plot to Screen Figure T8.1-7 U V NONE VECT QHID OFF ON 0.5
8-16
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
It can be seen that in order to obtain better flow resolution in the recirculation region, greater mesh refinement is needed near the obstruction. The operations necessary for mesh refinement and for restarting the run from the solution shown above are described in Tutorial 8.2. Select the vertex-based pressure and replot: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to display the Create Plots panel Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T8.1-8
GETV NONE P PLTY EHID POPT CONT REPL
Version 3.26
8-17
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Plot the vertex-based turbulence kinetic energy and dissipation rate: Click Go To Load Data Select item Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T8.1-9 Select item Dissipation from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T8.1-10
8-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Analysis of Results
In Tutorial 8.2, the effect on the solution of using a two-layer turbulence model at near-wall regions will be explored. Before refining the mesh for that purpose, it is important to check the distribution of y+ values at the wall boundaries in order to estimate the additional number of cell layers required for a more accurate solution. In the Load Data panel, select option Wall from the Data Type menu
8-19
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Graph Plotting
Select item YPLUS from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data
GETW YPLUS Since wall data are stored in specially created shells at the wall surfaces (cell type no. 5), it is necessary to assemble a new cell set that contains only these shells: In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool Select cell type 5 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) Use the slider controls to change the viewpoint to approximately (-1, 0.5, 1) Deselect edge plotting by clicking the Edge button Select Plot > Wall Plot Figure T8.1-11
CSET NEWS TYPE 5 VIEW -1 0.5 1 EDGE OFF WPLO
As shown in this plot, the y+ values range from 12 to 43. As far as the wall boundary layer is concerned, the y+ values around the top of the obstacle are about 25, indicating that no further cell refinement in this region is advisable unless one changes to a two-layer model. Graph Plotting
8-20
It is sometimes useful to display the results of the analysis as x-y graphs, bar charts or pie charts. When combined with various data manipulation functions (e.g.
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Simple Graphs
OPERATE or ROPERATE), such pro-STAR facilities constitute powerful tools for display and analysis. Some of the codes x-y graph plotting capabilities are demonstrated in this part of the tutorial. The following operations are normally necessary for producing an x-y graph: Extract and prepare the data to be plotted Store the data in graph registers Create graphs by plotting the contents of any register against those of another register Combine several graphs into pro-STARs basic graph entity, called a frame Dene essential information for each frame, such as axis scaling, legends and graph labels Display the frame
One does not need to follow the entire procedure outlined above. Default settings can often be used, as shown in the examples below. Simple Graphs The required graph data are extracted from the solution domain by interpolation of either cell-based or vertex-based values. If the latter option is chosen, the location of the relevant vertices can be picked up from the grid or specified by the user, as discussed later in this section. The first requirement is to assemble a set of velocity magnitude values (essentially the U velocity component) at all cell centres that lie on a horizontal plane located at y = 165 mm. The data to be plotted are the cell centre x- coordinates (the abscissa) against the velocity magnitude (the ordinate). All data are already available in pro-STAR. To do this, first collect all relevant cells into a set, i.e. all cells between the inlet and the outlet that lie within the range 150 < y < 180: CSET NEWS GRAN -1. 1131. 149. 181.
Check your set by displaying the selected cells on the screen: In the Cell Tool, select cell type 1 from the Cell Table scroll list Close the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > Subset > Type (Current) Select plot option Geometry Plot Click Cell Plot
CSET SUBS TYPE 1 POPT GEOM PLME ON CPLO To produce a default graph of the type specified above, proceed as follows:
Version 3.26
In the STAR GUIde window, select sub-folder Graphs followed by sub-folder Extract Open the Field Data panel Select option Entire Cell Set from the menu at the top of the Dene
8-21
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Locations section In the Data Type tab, choose Post 4 as the post register number in which to load eld data and then click Go To Load Data In the Load Data panel, select option Cell from the Data Type menu Select item Velocity Component U from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Field Data. The Field Data panel display will conrm that the U velocity component (SU) is now loaded in post register no. 4 In the Graph Data section, accept the default setting (the X-axis) as the abscissa for the graph Click CreateGraph toseeadefaultgraphofthedatarequiredFigure T8.1-12
GETC NONE SU GPOST CSET,,,NEXT FRAME,1,XREG,INIT,3 FRAME,1,XTITLE,4.3,1.5 X LOCATION FRAME,1,YREG,INIT,9 FRAME,1,YTITLE,0.5,5.5 SU GDRAW,1
Now modify some of the graph characteristics to produce a plot that is more suitable for presentation purposes:
8-22
Click Go To Customize Graph

Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
In the Customize Graphs panel, go to the X-Axis Parameters sub-tab Change the axis end-points by entering 0 and 1200 in the Xmin, Xmax boxes, respectively Change the axis annotations by entering 120, the required segment length for major tick marks, in the Xmajor box and 1, the number of minor ticks marks per segment, in the #ticks box Type a new title for the axis, Cell x-coordinate (mm), in the Title box Click Apply Go to the Y-Axis Parameters sub-tab Change the axis end-points by entering 1.1 and 1.6 in the Ymin, Ymax boxes, respectively Change the axis annotations by entering 0.05, the required segment length for major tick marks, in the Ymajor box and 1, the number of minor ticks marks per segment, in the #ticks box Type a new title for the axis, U Velocity (m/s), in the Title box Adjust the axis Title Location by entering coordinates (0.6, 8.0) in the Xs and Ys boxes Click Apply Go to the Options sub-tab In the Additional Graph Labels section, select label no. 1 in the scroll list and then enter the desired label, Axial velocity prole, in the text box underneath. Specify the labels location by entering coordinates (4.0, 9.0) in the Sx and Sy boxes Click Apply In the main window, click Redraw to see the revised graphFigure T8.1-13
FRAM 1 XRAN 0.0 1200. FRAM 1 XTICK 120 1 FRAM 1 XTIT 4.3 1.5 Cell x-coordinate (mm) FRAM 1 YRAN 1.1 1.6 FRAM 1 YTICK 0.05 1 FRAM 1 YTIT 0.6 8.0 U Velocity (m/s) GRLAB 1 1 ON,,,4.0 9.0 Axial velocity profile GREDRAW
Version 3.26
8-23
Tutorial 8.1
BASE CASE (MESH 1)
Final Operations
QUIT N
File > Quit, Nosave
8-24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
MESH REFINEMENT WITH 2-LAYER MODEL (MESH 2)
Tutorial 8.2
This sub-tutorial is based on the solution obtained in Tutorial 8.1. Following the procedures described there, the boundary layer is refined by adding more cell layers, to an extent that allows a two-layer turbulence model to be applied. The resulting mesh is called Mesh 2. Results from Mesh 1 are then mapped onto Mesh 2 so that the analysis for the new mesh can utilise the existing solution. The following modelling features are used: Embedded renement near walls The Norris-Reynolds formulation for a two-layer turbulence model Redenition of wall boundary characteristics Restarting the analysis from an existing converged solution Comparison of predicted results with experimental data in graphical form
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut8-2). Copy the model file created in Tutorial 8.1 (tut.mdl in directory tut8-1) to file tut-mesh1.mdl in the new directory. Also copy the solution data file, tut.pst, to file tut-mesh1.pst in this directory. In the previous tutorial, values used in the graphical presentation were saved in a data file, mesh1.grf. This file must also be copied to the new directory for comparison. Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Load the model data corresponding to Mesh 1: In the main window, select File > Resume From In the Resume From dialog, click the le browser button to display the existing .mdl les in your current working directory Select le tut-mesh1.mdl in the Files list and click OK Check that tut-mesh1.mdl appears in the File Name box, click Apply and then Close
RESU tut-mesh1.mdl On reading file tut-mesh1.mdl, details of the model will be displayed on the screen. Choose a new title for this sub-tutorial: TITLE
Version 3.26 8-25
File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 8.2 - AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (MESH 2) Click Apply
Tutorial 8.2
TUTORIAL 8.2 - AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (MESH 2) Check the mesh details and then plot the mesh: Utility > Count > All In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
COUNT ALL CSET ALL CPLO Mesh Renement As shown in Figure T8.1-11, calculating y+ from standard wall functions results in a range of values from 12 to 43. To apply the two-layer model, the maximum y+ value (at the near-wall cells) has to be reduced to approximately 5. This means that the thickness of the near-wall cells has to be reduced to approximately one-eighth of its original value. Note that the refinement should also be graduated to avoid sudden changes in cell density between adjacent layers. In this tutorial, the mesh refinement is performed in two stages. In the first stage, cells next to the top and bottom walls of the channel are collected and successively refined by a factor of two. In the second stage, cells surrounding the obstacle are collected and refined to the same degree as the near-wall cells. Collect cells in the regions next to the bottom and top walls: CSET NEWS GRAN -1. 1131. 279. 301.0 CSET ADD GRAN -1. 321. -1. 21. CSET ADD GRAN 329. 1131. -1. 21. Refine the selected mesh region by sub-dividing its cells by 2 in the y-direction. Follow this by a fresh mesh plot to check that the refinement has been done correctly. In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool > Cell Rene In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 1 Number divisions in J direction box 2 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Accept the default settings in the rest of the dialog. Note that automatic merging will be performed for new vertices that are generated as a result of creating additional cells and which are coincident with existing vertices. Click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 1 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO

8-26 Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
Repeat the above procedure three times, but each time only select and refine the two cell layers next to the walls: CSET NEWS GRAN -1. 1131. 289. 301. CSET ADD GRAN -1. 321. -1. 11. CSET ADD GRAN 329. 1131. -1. 11. In the Cell Rene dialog, click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 1 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO CSET NEWS GRAN -1. 1131. 294. 301. CSET ADD GRAN -1. 321. -1. 6. CSET ADD GRAN 329. 1131. -1. 6. In the Cell Rene dialog, click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 1 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO CSET NEWS GRAN -1. 1131. 297. 301. CSET ADD GRAN -1. 321. -1. 3. CSET ADD GRAN 329. 1131. -1. 3. In the Cell Rene dialog, click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 1 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO The next stage is to refine the areas surrounding the obstacle. The regions adjacent to both the vertical and horizontal faces of the obstacle are considered in turn and the refinement strategy used for the walls is also applied here. This results in a cell pattern that is conformant with the rest of the mesh structure. CSET NEWS GRAN 279. 371. -1. 81. CSET DELE GRAN 319. 331. -1. 81.
Version 3.26
In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 2
8-27
Tutorial 8.2
Number divisions in J direction box 1 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 2 1 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO CSET NEWS GRAN 299. 351. 19. 61. In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 1 Number divisions in J direction box 2 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 1 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO CSET NEWS GRAN 299. 351. -1. 61. In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 2 Number divisions in J direction box 1 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
Version 3.26

8-28
Tutorial 8.2
CREF 2 1 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO
Version 3.26
8-29
Tutorial 8.2
CSET NEWS GRAN 317. 333. 2. 43. In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 1 Number divisions in J direction box 2 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Click Apply In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 1 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO CSET NEWS GRAN 317. 333. -1. 43. In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 2 Number divisions in J direction box 1 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Click Apply and then Close In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CREF 2 1 1 CSET,,,MERGE CSET ALL CPLO Cell refinement is now complete. In the above operations, all new vertices generated as a result of creating additional cells were merged automatically. However, there are still redundant cell and vertex numbers that may be eliminated from the total count at this stage: In the Cell Tool, click Cell Compress In the main window, select Tools > Vertex Tool In the Vertex Tool, click Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, click Apply and then Close Close the Vertex Tool Close the Cell Tool
CCOM ALL Y VCOM ALL Y The above operations have created Mesh 2. Display the new mesh by collecting and plotting all cells:
8-30 Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
Figure T8.2-1
CSET ALL CPLO
Before coupling the cells in this mesh, all coupled cell definitions created in Tutorial 8.1 (and therefore carried over into this tutorial) are removed, as follows: In the main window, select Cp > All to select all existing couples Select Tools > Couple Tool In the Couple Tool, select Delete Couples > Cpset to delete existing couples Click Create Couples Check the couple type (1) displayed in the Couple Type box Accept all default values in the Create Couples dialog, click Apply and then Close Close the Couple Tool
CPSET ALL CPDEL CPSET CPCREATE CSET 1 Plot only the coupled cells to confirm visually that the coupling has been done correctly:
Version 3.26
In the main window, select C > New > Couples > Both Click Cell Plot
Figure T8.2-2
8-31
Tutorial 8.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Turbulence Model
CSET NEWS CPRA ALL CPLOT
Turbulence Model
Switch on the two-layer near-wall treatment and select the default variant, based on the Norris-Reynolds formulation of the equations. This model will be applied to cell layers lying up to 0.05 m away from the walls. Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Turbulence Models panel Select the Near-Wall Treatment tab and then click On in the Standard Two-Layer section Go to the section labelled Near-Wall Layer Thickness and then type 0.05 in the Distance text box Accept the default setting for the other parameters and click Apply
TWOL ON 0.05 Choose a new monitoring cell (no. 1814) near the obstacle: Click Monitoring and Reference Data to display the corresponding panel Type 1814 in the Monitoring cell number text box Click Apply
MONI 1814
8-32
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
Boundary Conditions
Since a different near-wall turbulence treatment is to be used, wall boundary conditions need to be redefined as follows: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 0 (Wall) in the boundary regions scroll list Choose option Active in the Two-Layer pop-up menu Click Apply
RMOD 0 NOSL Y U U U U U U U U U Now examine the extra boundaries created by the mesh refinement to make sure they are all properly defined: In the main window, select C > All and B > All Select B > Unselect > Symplane Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Cell Plot Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set the viewpoint to (-1., 0.5, 1) Figure T8.2-3 ALL ALL DELE SYMP ON -1 0.5 1
CSET BSET BSET BDIS VIEW CPLO
Version 3.26
8-33
Tutorial 8.2
In the main window, deselect the Bound option Select viewing direction (0, 0, 1) by clicking the plot orientation cubes Reset button
BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 REPL Run Time Controls Signal to STAR that the CFD analysis should begin from a special restart file (.smap file), created as follows: Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Analysis (Re)Start panel Select option Initial Field Restart from the Restart File Option menu In the Initial Field Restart section, select option Restart (Smapped) from the pop-up menu Click Apply
RDAT INIT C tut.smap Save all model data and write geometry and problem files for Mesh 2:
8-34
File > Write Geometry File Check that the Scale Factor box has a value of 0.001 Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Save Model
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Post Data Mapping
GEOM tut.geom 1.E-3 PROB tut.prob SAVE tut.mdl Post Data Mapping Start the data mapping operation by restoring the model corresponding to Mesh 1 and loading its model and solution files (i.e. files tut-mesh1.mdl and tut-mesh1.pst, respectively): In the main window, select File > Resume From In the Resume From dialog, click the le browser button to display the existing .mdl les in your current working directory Select le tut-mesh1.mdl in the Files list and click OK Check that tut-mesh1.mdl appears in the File Name box, click Apply and then Close In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing and then open the Load Data panel Click the le browser button at the top of the panel to display the existing .pst les in your current working directory Select le tut-mesh1.pst in the Files list and click OK Check that tut-mesh1.pst appears in the Steady State Post File box and then click Open Post File
RESU tut-mesh1.mdl LOAD tut-mesh1.pst Use pro-STARs solution mapping utility to map solution data from Mesh 1 to Mesh 2 and then save the results in file tut.smap. In the main window, select C > All Select Utility > Solution mapping Check that le tut.mdl is displayed in the Model File box and le tut.smap is in the Output File box Accept the defaults settings in the rest of the dialog and click Apply Close the Smap dialog
CSET ALL SMAP tut.mdl tut.smap DEFA Restore the model for Mesh2 in order to complete the pre-processing task. In the main window, select File > Resume From In the Resume From dialog, click the le browser button to display the existing .mdl les in your current working directory Select le tut.mdl in the Files list and click OK Check that tut.mdl appears in the File Name box, click Apply and then Close
Version 3.26
8-35
Tutorial 8.2
RESU tut.mdl CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel In this panel, check that the millimeters option button is selected. Leave all other settings at their default values Click Restart Analysis
The analysis will then restart from the solution obtained in Tutorial 8.1, as mapped into the new mesh created in this tutorial. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing First check the solution obtained by inspecting the field plot for velocity: CSET GETC PLTY POPT PLME EDGE VESC Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Component UV In the Scalar Data list, check that the default setting is None Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel Select the Vectors tab and then type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply Go to the 3-D Surface tab and choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T8.2-4 ALL U V NONE QHID VECT OFF ON 0.5
8-36
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
CPLO
Use the same plotting setup to check the pressure distribution in the flow field. Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to display the Create Plots panel Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T8.2-5
GETV NONE P PLTY EHID POPT CONT REPL
Version 3.26
8-37
Tutorial 8.2
Plot the turbulence kinetic energy, k, and dissipation rate, . Click Go To Load Data Select item Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T8.2-6 Select item Dissipation from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot Figure T8.2-7
8-38
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.2
In the pre-processing stage, the distance from the wall over which the two-layer model may be applied was specified using STAR GUIdes Turbulence Models panel. Incorrect results may be produced if this distance turns out to be too small. It is therefore good practice to check whether the boundary layer cells lie entirely within the specified distance.
Version 3.26
In the Data tab, select Cell from the Data Type menu
8-39
Tutorial 8.2
Select item Two Layer from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main window, click Replot
Figure T8.2-8
GETC NONE TWOL REPL If required, a plot of y+ could also be produced at this point; it should show a maximum value of 5.257 which is an acceptable figure.
Final Operations
QUIT, NOSAVE
8-40
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.3
SOLUTION-ADAPTED MESH REFINEMENT (MESH 3)
Tutorial 8.3
Tutorial 8.2 describes a method for improving an existing solution, that obtained in Tutorial 8.1, using a coarse mesh designated as Mesh 1. The method is based on adding more cell layers into the solution domain, to an extent that allows a two-layer turbulence model to be employed. The present sub-tutorial describes an alternative method, also requiring mesh refinement, whereby mesh changes are made using the solution of Tutorial 8.1 as a guide. This approach is called a solution-adapted mesh change (see Solution-Adapted Mesh Changes in Chapter 8 of the User Guide). The resulting mesh is called Mesh 3. As in Tutorial 8.2, results from Mesh 1 are mapped onto Mesh 3 so that the CFD analysis for the new mesh can utilise an existing solution as a first approximation. The following modelling features are illustrated: Embedded renement in user-selected regions Restarting the analysis from a previous, converged solution Graphical comparison of the results obtained from the two meshes
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut8-3). Copy the save file created in Tutorial 8.1 (tut.mdl in directory tut8-1) to file tut-mesh1.mdl in the new directory. Also copy the solution data file, tut.pst, to file tut-mesh1.pst in the new directory. In Tutorial 8.2, values representing the experimental data were saved in file exp.grf . This file must also be copied to the new directory for comparison. Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Load the model data corresponding to Mesh 1: In the main window, select File > Resume From In the Resume From dialog, click the le browser button to display the existing .mdl les in your current working directory Select le tut-mesh1.mdl in the Files list and click OK Check that tut-mesh1.mdl appears in the File Name box, click Apply and then Close
RESU tut-mesh1.mdl On reading file tut-mesh1.mdl, details of the model will be displayed on the screen. A new title is chosen for this sub-tutorial:
Version 3.26
File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 8.3-AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (MESH 3) Click Apply
8-41
Tutorial 8.3
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Find Renement Regions
TITLE TUTORIAL 8.3 - AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (MESH 3) Confirm that the correct mesh has been read in by plotting Mesh1: In the main pro-STAR window, select C > All Click Cell Plot
CSET ALL CPLO Three steps are involved in refining a mesh using the existing solution as a guide: 1. Finding regions where renement is needed 2. Creating a cell set that corresponds to these regions 3. Rening the chosen cell set These steps are described below. Find Renement Regions To find the regions needing refinement, first choose one or more criteria on which to base your selection. Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Adaptive Renement panel
Since this is a shear flow case, regions of high velocity gradient are suitable candidates for refinement. Therefore, the Gradient tab displayed by default is the right place to make appropriate selections. First, load the solution obtained in Tutorial 8.1: Click the le browser button at the top of the Gradient tab to display the existing solution les in your current working directory Select le tut-mesh1.pst in the Files list and click OK. tut-mesh1.pst will now appear inside the Solution File box
LOAD tut-mesh1.pst Now choose the variable whose gradient will be used as the refinement criterion: Select Vel Magnitude in the Variable to Apply Criteria section Accept the default setting of 10 Percent of Cells in the Criteria for Set Selection section. This will instruct pro-STAR to select all cells whose velocity gradient is within the top 10% of the range found in the model. Click New Set
GETC NONE VMAG CAVE ALL OPER GRAD N

8-42 Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.3
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Renement Set Selection
CSET NEWS PPER 4 0.1 Note that the above operation loads and then averages cell-centred values of the calculated velocity magnitude. This ensures that boundary values are excluded from the calculation of vertex-based velocities as they would otherwise distort the resulting plot (the effect of the boundaries has already been accounted for via wall functions). Renement Consider whether to apply any additonal restrictions to the cell set assembled by the Set Selection above criterion: Select the Set Modications tab In the Near Wall Cell Options section, select Rene All Directions. This instructs pro-STAR that, when it comes to renement, the near-wall cells should be treated in the same way as all other cells in the set. Go to the Modify Set section and click Apply
SETD,tut_adapt.set,ALL SETW,tut_adapt.set,current_set,CURR BSET,NEWS,WALL BSET,INVERT CSET,NEWS,FLUID VSET,NEWS,SURF VSET,DELE,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ANY SETW,tut_adapt.set,SURFACE,CURR CSET,NONE SETR,tut_adapt.set,1,CELL,ADD Plot the selected cell set: In the Plot Set to be Rened section, choose option Fluid Cells to superimpose an outline of the entire mesh on top of the selected cell set Click Plot Set Figure T8.3-1
CSET,NEWS,FLUID EDGE,ON CPLOT EDGE,OFF OVER,ON PLFIX,ON CSET,NONE SETR,tut_adapt.set,1,CELL,ADD CPLOT

Version 3.26 8-43
Tutorial 8.3
OVER,OFF PLFIX,OFF
It will be seen that the selected cell set covers the shear layer quite adequately. Display the velocity gradient values in the set: In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot Click Replot Figure T8.3-2
POPT CONT REPLOT
8-44
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.3
It can be seen that the velocity gradients of the isolated group of cells near the outlet are at the bottom end of the displayed range and may therefore be excluded from the cell set, as follows: In the main window, select C > Unselect > Zone and then use the screen cursor to draw a closed polygon around the cells to be excluded Click Cell Plot to conrm the result Figure T8.3-3 Go back to the Adaptive Renement panel Save the new set by clicking Apply in the Modify Set section
CSET DELE ZONE CPLOT SETD,tut_adapt.set,ALL SETW,tut_adapt.set,current_set,CURR BSET,NEWS,WALL BSET,INVERT CSET,NEWS,FLUID VSET,NEWS,SURF VSET,DELE,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ANY SETW,tut_adapt.set,SURFACE,CURR CSET,NONE SETR,tut_adapt.set,1,CELL,ADD
Version 3.26
8-45
Tutorial 8.3
Display the set finally selected for refinement: In the main window, select plot option Geometry Plot Return to the Adaptive Renement panel, go to the Plot Set to be Rened section and click Plot Set Figure T8.3-4
POPT GEOM CSET,NEWS,FLUID EDGE,ON CPLOT EDGE,OFF OVER,ON PLFIX,ON CSET,NONE SETR,tut_adapt.set,1,CELL,ADD CPLOT OVER,OFF PLFIX,OFF
8-46
Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.3
Mesh Renement
Refine the collected cells by sub-dividing them by 2 in the x- and y-directions. Follow this by a fresh mesh plot to check that the refinement has been done correctly and to display the new mesh (Mesh 3). In the Adaptive Renement panel, go to the Rene tab Click the le browser button at the top of the tab to display the existing solution les in your current working directory Select le tut-mesh1.pst in the Files list and click OK. tut-mesh1.pst will now appear inside the Select Solution File box Change the New Casename to tut Click Rene/Update Model In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T8.3-5
LOAD,tut-mesh1.pst CASE,tut RDATA,INIT,C,tut.smap WDATA,REST,10,0,tut.pst CMREF,CSET,,,,,MAP,tut.smap CSET ALL CPLO
Version 3.26
8-47
Tutorial 8.3
Note that as a result of the automatic cell refinement operation performed above, the following events occur: 1. Cell connectivity between the coarse and ne grids is established correctly 2. File tut.smap is created so that the analysis can restart from the coarse-grid solution 3. The monitoring cell location is changed to cell no. 1031 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data for Mesh 3, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Type 0.001 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom 1.E-3 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:
8-48 Version 3.26
Tutorial 8.3
In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel In the panel displayed, check that the millimeters option button is selected. Leave all other settings at their default values Click Restart Analysis
The analysis will then restart from the solution obtained in Tutorial 8.1, as mapped into the new mesh created in this tutorial. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing First check the solution obtained by inspecting the field plot for velocity magnitude: CSET GETC CAVE POPT CPLO Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected Select On from the Smooth Option pop-up menu Select item Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T8.3-6 ALL NONE VMAG CSET CONT
Version 3.26
8-49
Tutorial 8.3
In Tutorial 8.1, the predicted U velocity components at a location 200 mm behind the front face of the obstacle were extracted and saved in a data file. In the following steps, solution data for Mesh 3 will be extracted and compared with those for Mesh 1 and with experimental data. Final Operations File > Quit, Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
8-50
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9 IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR SIMULATION

Physical Problem Description A model of an idealised CAN type gas turbine combustion chamber is chosen to familiarise users with STAR-CDs combustion modelling capabilities and introduce various recommended practices for computing combusting flows. The combustion chamber, whose dimensions are shown in Figure T9.0-1, has three sets of air inlets placed circumferentially at the combustor head to promote maximum mixing and flame stabilisation. Swirling air enters the primary combustion zone through the two sets of inlets nearest to the axis of symmetry. Non-swirling air enters the upper inlet and thence the primary, secondary and dilution zones via five injection holes on the liner. This liner, separating the cooling passage from the main combustion area, is represented in the model by baffle cells. Air is assumed to be composed of 23.2% oxygen and 76.8% nitrogen, by mass, and to be at a pressure of 1 bar and temperature of 293 K throughout this tutorial. Only a sixty-degree sector of the combustor is simulated (see Figure T9.0-2). This is achieved by using STAR-CDs cyclic boundary option which allows the transmission of information across boundaries of this type. To demonstrate the full combustion capabilities of STAR-CD, both gaseous (Tutorial 9.2, Tutorial 9.3, Tutorial 9.4) and liquid fuels (Tutorial 9.5, Tutorial 9.6) are simulated. Gaseous fuel is supplied through an inlet at the combustor head (see Figure T9.0-1) whilst liquid fuel is injected as droplets from a single injector located on the axis. The physical properties of air and fuel and details of the individual simulations are presented in the corresponding sub-tutorials. Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is used: Cylindrical coordinate system with hexahedral cells, as shown in Figure T9.0-2 Inlet, outlet, cyclic and wall boundary conditions Steady, compressible and non-isothermal ow options The standard k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics Fixed wall temperature for radiation simulation Adiabatic walls for non-radiating conditions Eddy break-up, adiabatic PPDF and non-adiabatic PPDF combustion models Two-phase Lagrangian model for liquid droplets
Version 3.26
9-1
Modelling Strategy
Primary zone 20
Secondary zone 25
Dilution zone 25 15
5 Air 2.5 7.5 2.5 7.5 2.5 Fuel 100 All units in cm Axis 5 5 5
20
Figure T9.0-1
Combustion chamber geometry
Figure T9.0-2
Mesh structure for the combustion chamber model
9-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
This sub-tutorial presents the base model set-up. The various steps needed to create the mesh for the idealised combustor are described, including the creation of baffle cells. The specification of boundary locations and conditions, material properties and control parameters are fully explained. Where possible, use is made of the available GUI facilities. The physical properties of air are assumed to be as follows: Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut9-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 9.1 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (BASE CASE) in the Title text box Click Apply Ideal gas with pressure dependence Pa s 1.81 105 1006 J/kg K 2 2.637 10 W/m K
TITLE TUTORIAL 9.1 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (BASE CASE) First, specify the key feature of this case, i.e. chemically reacting flow. For this purpose, make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If not, activate it by clicking the special Open STAR GUIde panel button shown below:
Open the STAR GUIde window and go to panel Select Analysis Features Select option Chemical Reaction from the Reacting Flow menu Click Apply Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and note that an extra sub-folder called Reacting Flow now appears in the STAR GUIde tree. This will be used in all subsequent sub-tutorials to supply the chemical reaction definitions.
9-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
CHEREAC ON Mesh Creation Begin the mesh creation process as follows: Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Open panel Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes
Change the active coordinate system to cylindrical, as follows: Click Select a Coordinate System to display the Coordinate Systems dialog Select system no. 2 (Cylindrical) in the scroll list Click Set Active. Note that an asterisk (*) appears on the left hand side of the scroll list as conrmation. Close the Coordinate Systems dialog
CSYS 2 Check the attributes of the currently active cell type (no. 1): Click Select Cell Type to open the Cell Table Editor dialog The active cell type is entry no. 1 in the Table# scroll list. Select this entry with the mouse to display the cell type attributes. Conrm that the values shown are correct and then Close
CTYPE 1 Using the input boxes in the panels Extent of Domain section, specify a mesh representing a 60 sector of the combustor, of radius 0.25 m and length 1 m. The required values are shown below:
Generate the mesh Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0. 0.25 10 -30. 30. 9 0. 1. 20 CSET ALL
9-4
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
CPLOT To view the mesh from a more suitable angle, specify the initial orientation of the X-axis (and hence of the mesh itself relative to the screen) and then re-display the cells created using viewpoint (1,1,-1): In the main pro-STAR window, select Plot > Up Axis followed by X Select View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 Figure T9.1-1
PLTY EHID AXIS X VIEW 1 1 -1 CPLO
To define baffles at a radius of 0.2 m, first collect and display all cells within that radius: In the pro-STAR I/O window, type command CSET NEWS GRAN -0.1 0.21,,,,,2 A total of 1,440 cells will be selected Click Cell Plot in the pro-STAR main window
CSET NEWS GRAN -0.1 0.21,,,,,2 CPLO Collect the edge vertices of the displayed cells into a set and plot them:
Version 3.26 9-5
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
In the main window, select V > New > Cell Set Edge Choose option Vertex from the Cell Plot Display Option group Click Replot
Use the screen cursor to attach baffles to the appropriate cells: Select Tools > Cell Tool from the main menu Working from the Cell Tool, select cell type 3 (bafe) in the scroll list and click Set Active Type Choose Add Bafes > Surface (Current Vertex Set) and pick a vertex on the top surface of the mesh (but not one that lies on an edge). This action should create a total of 180 bafes. In the main window, select C > Add > Type(Current) and then click Cell Plot to conrm that the bafes were created correctly Deselect the Vertex display option Select C > All and then Cell Plot In the main window, select option Quick Hidden Line from the cell plot type menu to display the bafes within the context of the overall mesh structure Figure T9.1-2
VSET NEWS EDGE CDISP ON VERT CPLO CDISP OFF VERT CFIN BAFF 3 VX CSET ALL PLTY QHID CPLO
9-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
The baffle holes can now be created as follows: In the Cell Tool, make sure that cell type 3 is still highlighted and then select C > New > Type (Current) from the main window Click Cell Plot In the main window, change the viewpoint to View > Axis > +X Select option Hidden Surface from the cell plot type menu In the Cell Tool, select Delete Cells > Cursor Select and then mark the following cells with the screen cursor (if necessary, use Figure T9.1-3 as a guide to the location of the bafe holes): 4th row from top 3rd cell from both edges 10th row from top 5th cell (middle) 16th row from top 3rd cell from both edges Click Done to complete the operation Close the Cell Tool In the main window, click Replot to verify that the holes have been placed correctly Select a new cell set C > All and then click Cell Plot Change the cell plot type option to Quick Hidden Line Select View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 to display the mesh created by the operations described so far Figure T9.1-3
CSET NEWS BAFF CPLO VIEW 1 0 0 PLTY EHID REPL

Version 3.26 9-7
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
CSET CPLO CDEL CSET CPLO CSET VIEW PLTY CPLO
NEWS CCRS CSET NEWS BAFF ALL 1 1 -1 QHID
Save the model data entered up to this point: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl
Boundary Locations
Specify the location and properties of the boundaries. First, check the boundary condition status and then display only the fluid cells in the model: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Locate Boundaries and then open the Create Boundaries panel. Check the current boundary denitions; the boundary scroll list should be empty, apart from the default wall boundary. In the main window, select a new cell set via C > New > Fluid Change the cell plot type option to Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot
Version 3.26
9-8
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
BOUND STAT CSET NEWS FLUI PLTY EHID CPLO Collect the edge vertices of the displayed cells into a set and then use the screen cursor to specify boundaries at appropriate locations: In the main window, select V > New > Cell Set Edge Select Cell Plot Display Option Vertex Click Cell Plot
VSET NEWS EDGE VPLOT CPLO Side 1 (first cyclic region) Region 1 In the main window, change the viewpoint to View > Axis > +Y In the Regions tab, select region no. 1 in the scroll list and then choose option Cyclic from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Surface based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the exposed side surface
VIEW 1 3 -1 REPL BFIN 1 VX RDEF 1 CYCL $ $ Side 2 (second cyclic region) Region 2 In the main window, choose View > REVERSE to display the surface of the second cyclic region In the Regions tab, select region no. 2 and then option Cyclic from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Surface based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the exposed side surface
VIEW 1 -3 -1 REPL BFIN 2 VX RDEF 2 CYCL $ $

Version 3.26 9-9
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
Match the members of the cyclic pair to each other: Go to the Cyclics tab Enter parameters in the appropriate boxes so as to create an integrally matched cyclic pair in coordinate system no. 2: Type of Match Accept the Integral default First Region 1 Second Region 2 Coord. System 2 Y Offset -60. Click Match. This operation creates 200 cyclic boundary pairs and the number may be veried from the Output window display.
RDEF 1 CYCL 2 RDEF 2 CYCL 2 CYMA 1 2 0.0 -60.0 0.0 Top wall Region 12 In the main window, change the viewpoint to View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Go back to the Regions tab, select region no. 12 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (Top_wall) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Surface based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the top surface of the mesh
VIEW 1 1 1 REPL BFIN 12 VX RDEF 12 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 12 Top_wall Fuel inlet Region 3
9-10
Switch on cell numbering by selecting Plot > Number > Cell from the main menu Change the viewpoint to View > Axis > -Z Click Zoom In, draw a rectangle around the cells nearest to the axis of symmetry with the screen cursor and then click Yes In the Regions tab, select region no. 3 in the scroll list, and then choose option Inlet from the Type menu Enter a region name (Fuel_inlet) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cells 1 to 9 with the screen cursor and click
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
Done. In the main window, click Zoom Back
VIEW 0 0 -1 NUMB CELL ON REPL CSET NEWS CRAN 1 9 1 CPLO BCRO ADD 3 RDEF 3 INLE $ $ RNAME 3 Fuel_inlet Air inlets Regions 4, 5 and 6 In the Regions tab, select region no. 4 in the scroll list, and then choose option Inlet from the Type menu Enter a region name (Air_inlet1) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cells 29, 31, 33 and 35 and then click Done (zoom in if necessary to see the cell numbers clearly) Select region no. 5 in the scroll list, and then choose option Inlet from the Type menu Enter a region name (Air_inlet2) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cells 57 and 61 and then click Done Select region no. 6 in the Boundary Regions scroll list, and then choose option Inlet from the Type menu Enter a region name (Air_inlet3) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cells 73 to 90 (you should select 18 cells in total) and click Done Figure T9.1-4 Click Plot All for a visual conrmation of the boundaries created so far
CSET NEWS CRAN 29 35 2 CPLO BCRO ADD 4 RDEF 4 INLE $ $ RNAME 4 Air_inlet1 CSET NEWS CLIS 57 61 CPLO BCRO ADD 5 RDEF 5 INLE $ $ RNAME 5 Air_inlet2 CSET NEWS CRAN 73 90 1
Version 3.26 9-11
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
CPLO BCRO ADD 6 RDEF 6 INLE $ $ RNAME 6 Air_inlet3 CSET ALL CPLO BSET NEWS REGI 3 BSET ADD REGI 4 BSET ADD REGI 5 BSET ADD REGI 6 BDIS ON REPL
Inlet side wall Regions 7 to 11 To prepare the model for the radiation calculations performed in a later sub-tutorial, the remaining wall boundary faces on the inlet side are assigned to separate wall regions, as follows:
9-12
Deselect the Bound display option Click Replot Select region no. 7 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (In_wall1) in the Name box Click Dene region
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the 2nd and 3rd row of cell faces (counting row numbers from the axis of symmetry) Select region no. 8 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (In_wall2) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cell nos. 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 and then click Done Select region no. 9 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (In_wall3) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the 5th and 6th row of cell faces Select region no. 10 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (In_wall4) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cell nos. 55 to 56, 58 to 60, 62 to 63 on the 7th row and then click Done Select region no. 11 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (In_wall5) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark cell nos. 64 to 72 on the 8th row and then click Done
CSET NEWS ZONE CPLOT VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 7 VX RDEF 7 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 7 In_wall1 CSET ALL CPLOT BCRO ADD 8 RDEF 8 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 8 In_wall2 CSET NEWS ZONE CPLOT VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 9 VX
Version 3.26 9-13
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
RDEF 9 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 9 In_wall3 CSET ALL CPLOT BCRO ADD 10 RDEF 10 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 10 In_wall4 BDIS OFF CSET NEWS CRAN 64 72 1 CPLO BCRO ADD 11 RDEF 11 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 11 In_wall5 Outlet side wall Region 13 Similarly, the strip of wall boundary faces on the outlet side is assigned to region no. 13: Change the viewpoint to View > Axis > +Z Select region no. 13 in the scroll list, and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (Out_wall) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Pick Cell Faces, mark all cells in the two outermost rows (cells 1783 to 1800) and then click Done
CSET ALL VIEW 0 0 1 CPLO CSET NEWS CRAN 1783 1800 1 CPLO BCRO ADD 13 RDEF 13 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 13 Out_wall Outlet Region 14 To define the outlet boundaries, collect and display the relevant cells as follows: Assemble a new cell set by selecting C > New > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around all the unmarked cells in the plot In the main window, click Cell Plot
Collect the edge vertices of the displayed cells into a set and then use the screen cursor to specify the outlet boundaries:
9-14 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
CSET CPLO VSET BFIN RDEF
In the main window, select V > New > Cell Set Edge Click Replot Select region no. 14 in the scroll list, and then choose option Outlet from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Surface based on Vset and mark any vertex on the outlet surface NEWS CRAN 1711 1782 1 NEWS EDGE 14 VX 14 OUTL $ $
Finally, switch off cell numbering and vertex display, collect baffles and assign them to region no. 15: CSET VIEW NUMB CPLO VSET BFIN RDEF CSET VIEW CPLO In the main window, choose Plot > Number and then deselect the Cell option Deselect the Vertex display option Assemble a new cell set by selecting C > New > Bafe and then click Cell Plot Change the viewpoint to View > Axis > +X Select region no. 15 in the scroll list, and then choose option Bafe from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around all the displayed cells with the screen cursor Dene a new cell set by C > All Change the viewpoint to View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 and click Cell Plot NEWS BAFF 1 0 0 CELL OFF NEWS EDGE 15 VX 15 BAFF $ $ $ $ $ ALL 1 1 -1
Store the model information entered so far

Version 3.26
File > Save Model

9-15
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
SAVE tut.mdl Material Properties Set up the material properties and a thermofluid model using the appropriate STAR GUIde panels. The required actions are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the Ideal Gas Law density variation (with pressure dependence) Select the standard k- turbulence model Turn on the temperature solver Set the initial temperature distribution Choose the monitoring cell location Choose the reference pressure and its location In the STAR GUIde window, click the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Molecular Properties panel Select option Ideal-f(T,P) from the Density menu Click Apply Open the Turbulence Models panel Click On to switch on turbulence modeling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the model menu Click Apply Open the Thermal Models panel Turn on the solution of the energy equation by clicking Temperature Calculation On Click Apply Open the Initialization panel Conrm that the value 293.0 is displayed in the Temperature text box. By default, STARs built-in initialisation process will be used for the other ow variables. Click Monitoring and Reference Data to display the corresponding panel Choose a monitoring cell location (say, half way between the axis and the outer casing and towards the outlet). This may be done by entering a cell number in the text box or by clicking the mouse icon and then selecting the required cell from the mesh plot with the screen cursor. In this case, we assume that the chosen cell no. is 1760 Make the reference pressure location the same as the monitoring cell location by entering 1760 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box. Conrm that 1.0e+5 appears in the Pressure box. Click Apply
PROP PMAT 1 STAT DENS IDEA Y MOLWT 28.96 TURB KE

9-16 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
TEMP ON PRES 1.0E+05 1760 MONI 1760 Boundary Conditions Check the current boundary condition definitions and specify boundary condition values where appropriate. Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel
Specify boundary conditions for the inlet boundaries, choosing the Mixing Length option for turbulence parameter input. Note that all fluid streams except the one flowing through the cooling passage have swirl velocity components on entry into the combustor: Select region 3 In the boundary regions scroll list Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate boxes as shown below, assuming that in this case the incoming uid is hot air:
Click Apply Select region 4 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
Version 3.26
9-17
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
Click Apply Highlight region 5 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply Highlight region 6 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
9-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
Click Apply
RDEF 3 INLET -28.0 -60.0 100.0 2 0.0 586.0 0.6 RINLET 3 MASS N RTURB 3 MIXL 0.1 0.01 RDEF 4 INLET -11.0 -24.0 42.0 2 0.0 293.0 1.19 RINLET 4 MASS N RTURB 4 MIXL 0.1 0.01 RDEF 5 INLET -11.0 -24.0 42.0 2 0.0 293.0 1.19 RINLET 5 MASS N RTURB 5 MIXL 0.1 0.01 RDEF 6 INLET 0.0 0.0 15.0 2 0.0 293.0 1.19 RINLET 6 MASS N RTURB 6 MIXL 0.1 0.01 Check the wall boundary conditions for the first inlet-side wall (region 7) Highlight region 7 in the scroll list. The default settings are acceptable, so no further action is required
This is also true of the wall boundary conditions assigned to regions 8 to 13. Check region 14 (the outlet) and region 15 (the baffle boundaries):
Version 3.26
Highlight region 14 in the scroll list. The default settings are acceptable, so no further action is required Highlight region 15 in the scroll list. The default settings for side no. 1 are acceptable, so no further action is required. The settings for side no. 2 are
9-19
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
automatically made the same as side no. 1 Perform a visual check of the specified boundaries, having first excluded the cyclic surfaces and then the walls and baffles: RLIS BSET BDIS REPL BSET REPL BSET REPL BSET REPL BDIS In the main window, create a boundary set by B > All Select B > Unselect > Cyclic to exclude the cyclic boundaries from the current set Select the Bound cell plot display option and then click Replot Select B > Unselect > Wall and click Replot Select B > Unselect > Bafe and click Replot Figure T9.1-5 Deselect Bound and click Replot again ALL ALL ON DELE CYCL DELE WALL DELE BAFFLE OFF
Do a final check on the geometry:

9-20 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
CFD Analysis Run Time Controls
Utility > Count (All) Check the values displayed in I/O window and then type C to complete the operation
UTIL STAT COUN ALL C Run Time Controls Check the status of the run time control parameters: Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Enter 500 for the maximum number of iterations and then click Apply. Click Analysis (Re)Start to display the corresponding panel. The setting of the Restart File Option menu should be None, conrming that this is a run from initial conditions.
CONT STAT ITER 500 Final Operations Write all files needed to run STAR (files tut.geom and tut.prob): In the main window, choose File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Save Model
This introductory tutorial is intended purely as a starting point for subsequent sub-tutorials which model combustion to various degrees of approximation and under different conditions. Since its function is to set up the basic simulation parameters, no CFD analysis or post-processing of results is necessary and none is described here. However, if you so wish, you may run the model to a steady-state solution by following the instructions given in the next section. File > Quit > Nosave
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis To run the model to a steady-state solution, perform the following operations
Version 3.26 9-21
Tutorial 9.1
BASE CASE
instead of exiting from pro-STAR: In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel The information displayed in this panel shows that the desired STAR run parameter, Single Precision, is already selected by default. Deselect the Write New Geometry File option and then click Start New Analysis to start the simulation automatically.
Convergence should be achieved in about 100 iterations.
9-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF)
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries
Tutorial 9.2
In this tutorial, a propane combustion case is set up using the Presumed Probability Density Function (PPDF) reaction model for unpremixed flames. The model assumes adiabatic conditions (no heat loss). The mesh created in Tutorial 9.1 is used here with modifications to the boundary conditions so that they are appropriate for combustion modelling. The main aim is to familiarise users with pro-STARs built-in PPDF database files and how to use them. The composition and physical properties of air are assumed to be the same as for Tutorial 9.1. For adiabatic PPDF, the physical properties of the fuel (pure propane in this case) are not utilised as no additional transport equations requiring these properties are solved. Temperature, density and species mass fractions are evaluated using the function formulation outlined in the Methodology volume (see Presumed-PDF (PPDF) Model for Unpremixed Turbulent Reaction in Chapter 10). Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for the tutorial (say tut9-2). Since this session continues from the case set up in Tutorial 9.1, copy file tut.mdl in directory tut9-1 to the new directory before running pro-STAR. Start up pro-STAR and respond as follows: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Supply a case title and plot the mesh to confirm the data read in: In the main pro-STAR window choose File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 9.2 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (ADIABATIC PPDF) in the Title text box Click Apply Click Cell Plot
TITLE TUTORIAL 9.2 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (ADIABATIC PPDF) CPLOT Combustion Model Use the facilities of STAR GUIdes Reacting Flow folder to set up the combustion model as follows:
Version 3.26
Open the STAR GUIde window and select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Reacting Flow followed by Chemical Reactions Open the Scheme Denition panel Select option Unpremixed/Diffusion from the Reaction Type menu
9-23
Tutorial 9.2
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Combustion Model
Select option PPDF Single Fuel from the Reaction Model menu Note that scheme no. 1 is selected by default in the Chemical Scheme # slider at the bottom of the panel Accept the Chemical Equilibrium setting in the Option menu and click Apply. A message will appear at the bottom of the panel conrming your selections. UNPRE,PPDS,CHEMI PPDF ADIA 1 PSPPDF 1
CRM2 1 CRMO 1 SBREAC CRTYPE
Specify the basic model parameters: Open the Reaction System panel Select option Database from the Input/Control menu In the Parameter Denition tab, select item C3H8 PROPANE in the PPDF Database scroll list and note that all items in the PPDF Dependent Variables list are initially agged as Undened Click Apply Go to the Heat Option tab and check that the menu setting is Adiabatic
PPDF DBASE,, C3H8 CRSC MAP 1 DBASE The above operations instruct pro-STAR to load polynomial coefficients for density, temperature and chemical species from its built-in database and display them in the STAR GUIde panel. These coefficients were derived using an equilibrium calculation for a mixture of pure propane and air at a temperature of 293 K and pressure of 1 bar. However, it should be noted that the initial, derived profiles (for which these polynomial coefficients represent the best fit) are not unique. Depending upon the species included in the equilibrium computation, a different set of profiles (and hence polynomial coefficients) will be obtained. Such coefficients can be viewed graphically by clicking Graph Data. pro-STAR also automatically maps appropriate scalar variables to the constituents of the reaction scheme and defines their initial conditions and properties. Check the scalar properties set up as a result of the automatic mapping as follows: Select sub-folder Additional Scalars and then open the three panels under it in turn In the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel, use the Scalar # scroll bar to inspect the available scalars.
SCLI FULL ALL It will be seen that a total of 8 scalars are present and that, in addition to the species
9-24 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Conditions
from the PPDF database (C3H8, O2, CO, CO2, H2O and N2), scalar nos. 1 and 2 (for mixture fraction and variance) have also been created automatically. The latter needed to be solved for as well, as can be seen in the formulation of the PPDF model in Chapter 10 of the Methodology volume. It will also be seen that the Inuence menu setting is Passive in all cases and that the properties of scalars 3 to 8 are those of air. For an adiabatic PPDF model, correct specification of scalar properties is unimportant because the enthalpy and species transport equations are not solved (they are evaluated instead by the model). Density is also calculated in the same way, so whether the species are defined as Active or Passive will not make any difference to the computation. The combustion model just defined (scheme no. 1) is not assigned to any material (stream) and is therefore currently inactive. Assign it to material no. 1 as follows: Go back to the Reacting Flow sub-folder and then open the Scheme Association panel Click option button Chemical Scheme Number and then type 1 in the adjacent box Click Apply Go to the Liquids and Gases sub-folder and open the Molecular Properties panel. Note that as a result of the chemical scheme definition, the setting of the Density menu has changed automatically to PPDF.
CHSC 1 1 Boundary Conditions Modify the fuel inlet boundary values (region no. 3), including scalar boundary values, as follows: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open panel Dene Boundary Regions Select region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list and type 293.0 for Temperature and 1.8 for Density Click Apply Open the Scalar Boundaries panel Highlight region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list Select MIXTURE FRACTION in the Scalar scroll list, type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select C3H8 in the Scalar scroll list, type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply
RLIS 3 RMOD 3 U U U U U 293.0 1.80 RSMO 3 1 CONC 1.0 RSMO 3 3 CONC 1.0 Modify the air inlet boundary values (regions 4, 5 and 6) for the O2 and N2 scalars as follows:
Version 3.26 9-25
Tutorial 9.2
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Control Parameters
Select region no. 4 in the boundary regions scroll list Select O2 in the Scalar scroll list, type 0.21 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply Select N2 in the Scalar scroll list, type 0.79 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply
Repeat the above sequence of steps for regions 5 and 6. RLIS RSMO RSMO RLIS RSMO RSMO RLIS RSMO RSMO Control Parameters 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
4 CONC 0.232 8 CONC 0.768 4 CONC 0.232 8 CONC 0.768 4 CONC 0.232 8 CONC 0.768
Check the solution control parameters and then change the under-relaxation factor and residual tolerance for mixture fraction and variance: SCCM SCCM SCCM SCCM Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls and then Equation Behavior Open the Additional Scalars panel Select MIXTURE FRACTION in the Scalar scroll list Type 0.7 in the Under-Relaxation Factor box Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance box Click Apply Select VARIANCE in the Scalar scroll list Type 0.7 in the Under-Relaxation Factor text box Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance text box Click Apply 1 1 2 2 RELA RESI RELA RESI 0.7 0.001 0.7 0.001
Final Operations
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save the model file, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section: In the main window, choose File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close
Version 3.26
9-26
Tutorial 9.2
File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT,SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) For flows involving chemical reactions, it is recommended that STAR is run in double precision mode, as follows: File > Save Model Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Select the Double Precision option button. Leave all other settings at their default values Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot
CSET,NEWS,FLUID CPLOT This tutorial employs two user-defined panels, Pgetc and Pgetv, that are specially designed to facilitate post-processing operations. These may already be available to you, ready-to-use, in a local or global panel sub-directory (see Panels in Chapter 20 of the User Guide). If the panels are not available, or if you want to practice creating panels, see Panel Definition on page -32 for a general discussion of the subject and for specific instructions on how to create these particular panels. Use the panels to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution: Click Panels in pro-STARs menu bar to display the available panels and then select Pgetc. Note that the name of the menu item may be L Pgetc or G Pgetc, depending on whether a local or global panel sub-directory is being used. If no items appear in the menu, either the required panel does not exist or it is necessary to specify the name and location of the above sub-directories. In either case, you will need to refer to the section on Panel Definition in this tutorial for further instructions. Select option Load St. from the Pgetc panels Load menu
9-27
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
LOAD POPT GETC EDGE REPL EDGE
In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot and plot type Hidden Surface In the Pgetc panel, click VM In the main window, click the Edge plotting button Figure T9.2-1 tut.pst CONT U V W VMAG ON OFF
Close the Pgetc panel: File > Close In the main window, click Edge Plotting again to deselect it
Define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of symmetry: In the main window, select View > Axis > +X Click Section Slice and then use the screen cursor to draw a vertical line that bisects the visible mesh (mark the end points of the line using the screen cursor). This represents the trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and passing through the axis. Select a viewpoint at right angles to the section by choosing View > SNORMAL Select cell plot type Section (Surface)
Version 3.26

9-28
Tutorial 9.2
Open panel Pgetv and plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the section, plus mass fraction profiles for the fuel and one of the combustion products (CO2): SNOR SPOI VIEW PLTY GETV REPL GETV REPL GETV REPL Panels > Pgetv On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature distribution Figure T9.2-2 Click button Conc3 to display the propane distribution Figure T9.2-3 Click button Conc6 to display the carbon dioxide distributionFigure T9.2-4 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0 1 0 SECT U V W T ABSO U V W CONC 3 U V W CONC 6
Version 3.26
9-29
Tutorial 9.2
Post-Processing Analysis of Results
Analysis of Results
The predicted maximum temperature in the model is lower than would normally be expected from this type of combustor. It is therefore instructive to consider the likely accuracy of the temperature distribution obtained here. A good quality measure to use for this purpose is the ratio
9-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
Post-Processing Analysis of Results
2 gf f ----------= --------f f
where f is the mean mixture fraction (calculated as scalar no. 1) and gf its variance (scalar no. 2). To display the distribution of the above variable over the combustion region (encompassing approximately the first six cell layers in the radial direction) proceed as follows: Change the plot option setting to Geometry Plot Change the cell plot type to Section (All) Select C > New > Zone and then draw a closed rectangle encompassing the entire mesh in the z-direction and the rst six cell layers in the x-direction, starting from the axis
CSET NEWS GRAN 0., 0.151 Load the variance in post register no. 1 and take its square root: In the main window, select Post > Operate In the Post Register Operations dialog, go to the Function pop-up menu and select option Load Cell Data > Scalar Concentration Accept the default Register 1 as the destination register for the data and type 2 in the Scalar # text box Click Apply In the Function pop-up menu, select option Single-Register > Sqrt( ) Click Apply
OPER GETC CONC 1 2 OPER SQRT 1 1 Load the mixture fraction in post register no. 2: In the Post Register Operations dialog, go to the Function pop-up menu and select option Load Cell Data > Scalar Concentration Select Register 2 as the destination register and type 1 in the Scalar # text box Click Apply
OPER GETC CONC 2 1 Calculate the required ratio by dividing the contents of register 1 by those of register 2 and putting the results in register 4 (reserved for scalar data). Go to the Function pop-up menu and select option Multi-Register > Divide Choose appropriate register numbers in the register pop-up menus so that the end result is Register 4 = Register 1/Register 2 Click Apply and then Close
Version 3.26
9-31
Tutorial 9.2
Panel Denition Analysis of Results
OPER DIVI 1 2 4 Now plot the distribution: CPLOT Change the plot option setting to Contour Plot Turn off mesh plotting Click Cell Plot
Figure T9.2-5
It will be seen that the value of the ratio is generally rather high, implying that the predicted maximum temperature is considerably lower than the adiabatic flame temperature. In a realistic modelling exercise, a considerably finer mesh would be needed to increase confidence in the calculated temperatures. Terminate the run File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT NOSAVE Panel Denition Panel Pgetc is designed as an aid to post-processing cell-centre based data. To set up the panel, shown below, proceed as follows:
9-32
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
Panels > Dene Panel Click on the text box at the bottom of the dialog and type Pgetc, the panels name Click New. This adds a new panel with that name in the scroll list. Note that the full stop (.) in front of the name signies that the panel denition is placed by default in the present working directory, in a le called Pgetc.PNL With the panel name still highlighted, click Open to display the new (blank) panel
Specify the basic panel appearance via the panel menu options, as follows: File > Layout In the Dene Panel Layout dialog box, type 7 in the Number of Buttons Horizontally text box Type 4 in the Number of Buttons Vertically text box Type 260 in the Panel Height text box Type 550 in the Panel Width text box Click Apply and then move the panel to the screen location where you want it to appear every time you enter pro-STAR
Proceed with the definition of panel buttons. The latter are numbered in column order, so that buttons nos. 0-3 appear on the left-hand side of the panel and nos. 24-27 on the right-hand side. To create the first column:
Version 3.26
Click on button no. 0 Type SU in the Button Name text box Click on the Denition sub-window and type: getc u v w su$repl Click File > Save Click on button no. 1 Type SV in the Button Name text box Click on the Denition sub-window and type: getc u v w sv$repl Click File > Save Click on button no. 2 Type SW in the Button Name text box Click on the Denition sub-window and type: getc u v w sw$repl Click File > Save
9-33
Tutorial 9.2
Click on button no. 3 Type VM in the Button Name text box Click on the Denition sub-window and type: getc u v w vmag$repl Click File > Save
The remaining columns are created in a similar manner, according to the definitions given below: ID= 4 Label= P Command= getc u v w p$repl ID= 5 Label= PA Command= getc u v w p abso$repl ID= 6 Label= Pstat Command= getc u v w pstat$repl ID= 7 Label= PstatA Command= getc u v w pstat abso$repl ID= 8 Label= Ptot Command= getc u v w ptot$repl ID= 9 Label= PtotA Command= getc u v w ptot abso$repl ID= 10 Label= T Command= getc u v w t rela$repl ID= 11 Label= TA Command= getc u v w t abso$repl ID= 12 Label= Ttot
9-34 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
Command= getc u v w ttot rela$repl ID= 13 Label= TtotA Command= getc u v w ttot abso$repl ID= 14 Label= K Command= getc u v w te$repl ID= 15 Label= E Command= getc u v w ed$repl ID= 16 Label= Visc Command= getc u v w vis$repl ID= 17 Label= Dens Command= getc u v w dens$repl ID= 18 Label= Conc1 Command= getc u v w conc 1$repl ID= 19 Label= Conc2 Command= getc u v w conc 2$repl ID= 20 Label= Conc3 Command= getc u v w conc 3$repl ID= 21 Label= Conc4 Command= getc u v w conc 4$repl ID= 22 Label= Conc5 Command=
Version 3.26 9-35
Tutorial 9.2
getc u v w conc 5$repl ID= 23 Label= Conc6 Command= getc u v w conc 6$repl ID= 24 Label= Conc7 Command= getc u v w conc 7$repl ID= 25 Label= Conc8 Command= getc u v w conc 8$repl ID= 26 Label= Conc9 Command= getc u v w conc 9$repl ID= 27 Label= Conc10 Command= getc u v w conc 10$repl The panel also provides additional facilities for executing common data loading operations, in the form of a local, user-defined menu (see Panels in Chapter 20 of the User Guide). The definition of this special menu is as follows: Menu Load MENU_ITEM 0 Load St. load tut.pst MENU_ITEM 1 Event evfi conn MENU_ITEM 2 Load Tr. trload tut.pstt Complete the panel definition as follows: File > Layout Type 160 in the Panel Height text box and then click Apply Close the Dene Panel dialog
Note that, in going through this process, you have the choice of leaving the panel in your present working directory, where it will be available only to the case you are working on at the moment, or copying/moving it to a local or global panel directory. You might do the latter if you want the panel to be available for use by other members of your team (global) or by yourself in all your case directories (local). If the panel is moved or copied to a local or global directory, you need to make
9-36 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
sure that pro-STAR knows the latters name and location. This information may be available already in the form of environment variable definitions in your operating system set-up. In such a case, next time you enter pro-STAR you will see the panel name displayed (preceded by L or G, as appropriate) when you click Panels in the main menu bar. If environment variables are not set, it is still possible to supply the required information as part of the current session, as follows: Panels > Environment Type the full lename path in the PANEL_GLOBAL or PANEL_LOCAL text box, depending on the location of the panel denition le Click Apply
SETENV PANEL LOCAL Panels > Dene Panel > Re-Scan The above operation causes the View panel name to be displayed in the list, preceded by L or G, as appropriate Click Close Choose Panels from the main menu bar to conrm that Pgetc is included as a menu option
Note that, if you are working with a local or global directory, any new panels you create can be placed directly in that directory simply by prefixing the new panel name with an L or G, as appropriate.
Panel Pgetv is essentially identical to Pgetc apart from the fact that it performs vertex based post-processing operations. The appearance and button definitions for this panel is given below:
ID= 0 Label= SU Command= getv u v w su$repl ID= 1 Label= SV Command= getv u v w sv$repl ID= 2 Label= SW
Version 3.26 9-37
Tutorial 9.2
Command= getv u v w sw$repl ID= 3 Label= VM Command= getv u v w vmag$repl ID= 4 Label= P Command= getv u v w p$repl ID= 5 Label= PA Command= getv u v w p abso$repl ID= 6 Label= Pstat Command= getv u v w pstat$repl ID= 7 Label= PstatA Command= getv u v w pstat abso$repl ID= 8 Label= Ptot Command= getv u v w ptot$repl ID= 9 Label= PtotA Command= getv u v w ptot abso$repl ID= 10 Label= T Command= getv u v w t rela$repl ID= 11 Label= TA Command= getv u v w t abso$repl ID= 12 Label= Ttot Command=
9-38 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.2
getv u v w ttot rela$repl ID= 13 Label= TtotA Command= getv u v w ttot abso$repl ID= 14 Label= K Command= getv u v w te$repl ID= 15 Label= E Command= getv u v w ed$repl ID= 16 Label= Visc Command= getv u v w vis$repl ID= 17 Label= Dens Command= getv u v w dens$repl ID= 18 Label= Conc1 Command= getv u v w conc 1$repl ID= 19 Label= Conc2 Command= getv u v w conc 2$repl ID= 20 Label= Conc3 Command= getv u v w conc 3$repl ID= 21 Label= Conc4 Command= getv u v w conc 4$repl ID= 22 Label= Conc5 Command= getv u v w conc 5$repl
Version 3.26 9-39
Tutorial 9.2
ID= 23 Label= Conc6 Command= getv u v w conc 6$repl ID= 24 Label= Conc7 Command= getv u v w conc 7$repl ID= 25 Label= Conc8 Command= getv u v w conc 8$repl ID= 26 Label= Conc9 Command= getv u v w conc 9$repl ID= 27 Label= Conc10 Command= getv u v w conc 10$repl
9-40
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR)
Combustion Modelling Strategy
Tutorial 9.3
The simulation performed in Tutorial 9.2 is repeated here using a three-step reaction of the following form: C 3 H 8 + 1.5O 2 3CO + 4H 2 CO + 0.5O 2 CO 2 H 2 + 0.5O 2 H 2 O The mesh set up in Tutorial 9.1 is again utilised with some boundary condition modifications to allow for combustion modelling. The main aim of this tutorial is to familiarise users with the process of setting up a combustion simulation, using multiple chemical reaction steps to describe fuel pyrolysis and the subsequent oxidation into combustion products. The physical properties of air (23.2% oxygen and 76.8% nitrogen, by mass), leading reactants (C3H8, CO, H2) and products (CO2, H2O) are assumed to be as follows: Air Molecular weights 28.96 Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity C3H8 44.0 CO 28.0 H2 2.0 CO2 44.0 H2O 18.0 Ideal gas 1.81 105 Pa s (constant) Polynomial function of temperature 2.637 102 W/m K
It is assumed that both air and fuel enter the combustion chamber at a pressure of 1 bar and temperature of 293 K. Combustion Modelling Strategy Transport equations are solved for the leading reactants and their mixture fractions. (Mixture fraction = Unburnt fuel mass fraction + Burnt fuel mass fraction.) The oxygen mass fraction may be obtained from its xed fraction in the inlet air stream and the amount of fuel burnt. Thus, an internal linear equation is employed to compute this quantity. The nitrogen mass fraction is obtained from its xed fraction in the inlet air stream. The mass fraction of products (carbon dioxide and water vapour) is obtained from the amount of burnt fuel and is therefore also computed from a linear equation. Using linear equations for oxygen and product mass fractions implies that the molecular diffusivities of all species are taken to be identical. It is assumed that the combustion rate is controlled by turbulent mixing of fuel and air and is calculated via the eddy break-up model.
9-41

Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Numerical Considerations Preliminaries
The mixtures specic heat is assumed to be dependent on component specic heats, i.e. Cp =
C pi Y i
i i
where Yi is the species mass fraction and C p C p( T )

i
for all i
It is necessary to initiate combustion by an ignition mechanism. A region of the ow domain lying downstream of the inlets is chosen for this purpose. Ignition comprises an articial reduction of the fuel mass fraction used to determine the combustion rate and is performed over a pre-dened number of iterations. It is expected that the nal solution is independent of the choice of ignition cells, the fuel mass fraction reduction mentioned above and the duration of the ignition process.
Numerical Considerations The combustion source term in the leading reactant transport equations is large; therefore, the fuel mass fraction requires under-relaxation. Using the chemico-thermal option for enthalpy, the enthalpy and mixture fraction variables must develop numerically at the same rate as the fuel fraction. Therefore, the under-relaxation factors for enthalpy and transported species must be identical. Small errors in calculating the fuel mass fraction can strongly inuence the computed temperature. Therefore, it is necessary to solve the transport equations for species and enthalpy to a tight solver tolerance.
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut9-3) and copy file tut.mdl from directory tut9-1 to the new directory before starting up pro-STAR. Begin the pro-STAR session as shown below, remembering that this tutorial is a continuation of Tutorial 9.1: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 9.3 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (3-STEP, EDBR) in the Title text box Click Apply
9-42
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Ignition Region
TITLE TUTORIAL 9.3 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (3-STEP, EDBR) Ignition Region As explained in the section on Combustion Modelling Strategy, an ignition region needs to be specified for this model. To do this, collect the cells to be designated as ignition cells as follows: In the I/O window, type command CSET NEWS GRAN 0.049 0.0751,,,-0.1 0.51 2 A total of 90 cells will be selected. Now assign a separate cell type with a different colour to them so that you can distinguish them easily from the rest of this models cells: In the main window, check that cell plot type Hidden Surface is selected Check that viewpoint (1,1,-1) is set (choose View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 if it is not) Click Cell Plot Select Tools > Cell Tool Select Table # 4 in the Cell Table scroll list Click Edit Types to display the Cell Table Editor Enter 5 in the Color Table Index box Enter Ignition_cells in the Name box Click Apply and then Close In the Cell Tool, select Modify Type > Cell Set Click Replot and notice the change of cell colour in the ignition region Close the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > All and then Cell Plot to see all the cells in the model
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.049 0.0751,,,-0.1 0.51 2 CPLO VIEW 1 1 -1 REPL CTAB 4 FLUID 5 CTNAM 4 Ignition_cells CTYP 4 CMOD CSET REPL CSET ALL CPLO Material Properties
Version 3.26
Check the properties of the material in the fluid stream and make the necessary adjustments as follows:
9-43
Tutorial 9.3
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Material Properties
1. Since this is a high-temperature combustion case, assign a polynomial variation to the specic heat of the background uid (air) as a function of temperature 2. Turn on the chemico-thermal enthalpy equation solver Open the STAR GUIde window and then select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases and then open the Molecular Properties panel. The displayed values for Material # 1 are the currently assigned properties of air.
Assume that the specic heat polynomial for air is virtually identical to that for N2 : Select option Polynomial in the Specic Heat menu. Note that pro-STAR displays an additional Molecular Weight box whose default value, 28.96, is appropriate for air. Click Apply. A pop-up panel will appear, warning you that pro-STAR was not able to nd the background material name (AIR) in its built-in database and suggesting an alternative action. Click OK to close the panel and then click Dene/Edit Polynomial to open the Polynomial Function Denition dialog Find a substance called N2 in the scroll list on the left-hand side of this dialog, select it, and then click Apply Database Substance. pro-STAR will retrieve the corresponding polynomial coefcients and assign them to material no. 1, i.e. the background material. Click Graph Data to display a graph of specic heat .vs. temperature, together with corresponding graphs for normalised enthalpy and entropy Click Close to exit from the dialog
SPEC POLY MOLWT 28.96 POPC CHEMKIN N2 POPC GSTO GDRA 1 3 Turn on the chemico-thermal enthalpy equation solver: Open the Thermal Models panel and click Show Options Select option Chemico-Thermal from the Enthalpy menu Click Apply
TEMP ON CHEM STAT It is good practice to define one of the ignition cells as the monitoring point. This makes checking for the onset of ignition easier, as temperature and product mass fractions build-up rapidly at that point once ignition begins.
9-44
Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel

Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Type 114 in the Monitoring cell number box Click Apply
MONI 114 Combustion Model Use the facilities of STAR GUIdes Reacting Flow folder to set up the combustion model as follows: Select sub-folder Reacting Flow followed by Chemical Reactions Open the Scheme Denition panel Select option Unpremixed/Diffusion from the Reaction Type menu Accept the default EBU Standard option from the Reaction Model menu Note that scheme no. 1 is selected by default in the Chemical Scheme # slider at the bottom of the panel Click Apply. A message will appear at the bottom of the panel conrming your selections.
CRM2 1 UNPRE EBUST CRMO 1 LSOU,,DIFL Specify the combustion reaction equations and other basic model parameters: Open the Reaction System panel. Note that reaction no. 1 is selected by default in the Reaction scroll box. Type the rst reaction denition, C3H8 + 1.5O2 -> 3CO + 4H2, in the box Accept the default settings on the Status, Tscale and Rate Equation menus and then click Update Reaction 1. pro-STAR will ll in default values for parameters Amix, Bmix, conrm the chemical names entered above and enter them in the appropriate list (Leading Reactants, Products and Reactant parameters) at the bottom of the panel Increment the scroll box setting to 2 and type the second reaction denition, CO + 0.5O2 -> CO2, in the box Click Update Reaction 2. pro-STAR will update the various lists as appropriate. Increment the scroll box setting to 3 and type the third reaction denition, H2 + 0.5O2 -> H2O in the box Click Update Reaction 3. pro-STAR will update the various lists as appropriate.
LREA 3 C3H8 CO H2 CRPR 2 CO2 H2O

Version 3.26 9-45
Tutorial 9.3
REAC 1.0 1.5 3.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RRAT REAC 1.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 RRAT REAC 1.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 1.0 RRAT
1 EDBR HOMO LOCAL STAN 2
2 EDBR HOMO LOCAL STAN 3
3 EDBR HOMO LOCAL STAN
Check the treatment to be applied to the ordinary reactant (oxygen): In the Reactant Parameters list, select reactant no. 1 Check that option Fixed-Fraction is shown in the drop-down menu underneath Check that the (xed) oxygen mass fraction in the incoming air stream is 0.233
CRRE 1 FIXE 0.233 O2 This completes the specification of leading reactants and combustion products. pro-STAR will automatically map scalar variables to the constituents of the reaction scheme, define their initial conditions and assign physical properties using its built-in database (props.dbs). CRSC MAP 1 DBASE
9-46 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Scalar Properties
If a chemical species cannot be mapped to a scalar variable, a warning will be displayed in the I/O window and a new scalar of that name (but with default, i.e. air, properties) is created and added to the scalars list. A stoichiometric check under this condition will fail, indicating that the assigned properties (molecular weights, in particular) are not appropriate. It is therefore advisable to check the I/O window to confirm that the model and chemical species have been correctly set up. Finally, specify the ignition parameters as follows: Open the Ignition panel Accept the default setting (Numerical) in the Model/Treatment panel Type 4 in the Cell Type box Type 0.05 in the Fraction Burnt box Select option Time Step/Iteration in the When? menu Type 50 and 150 in the Start and End boxes, respectively Click Apply
IGNI 4,,0.05 ITER 50 150 Assign the chemical reaction scheme just defined to the fluid stream Open the Scheme Association panel Click option button Chemical Scheme Number and then type 1 in the adjacent box Click Apply
CHSC 1 1 Scalar Properties Check the properties of the scalar variables set up as a result of the scalar mapping described earlier: Select the Additional Scalars folder and then open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel
SCLI FULL ALL Scrolling through the available scalars with the Scalar # scroll bar, it will be seen that a total of 10 scalars have been created, including three passive scalars representing the mixture fractions of the leading reactants. Note that a solution for this group of scalars is required by the EDBR formulation (see Chapter 10 of the Methodology volume). Inspect each of the other scalars in turn to verify that they have been set as active so that their influence on the flow field will be taken into account through the density calculation. As a result of the Polynomial setting for the background fluid, you need to assign a polynomial specific heat function to the scalar variables representing the chemical reaction species and display this graphically for verification purposes. Select scalar no. 1 (C3H8) with the Scalar # slider Clicking Apply causes pro-STAR to search for the coefcients of this substance in its internal database. In this case, they are found and a message to that effect appears in the I/O window.
9-47
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Click the Dene/Edit Polynomials button for specic heat to open the Polynomial Function Denition dialog. This will display the coefcients just retrieved. Click Graph Data to display a graph of specic heat .vs. temperature, together with corresponding graphs for normalised enthalpy and entropy Click Close to exit from the dialog In the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel, retrieve polynomial coefcients for the remaining species (i.e. scalar nos. 2, 3 and 7-10) by selecting them in turn with the Scalar # slider and then following the same procedure as for scalar no. 1 1 STAN 1 GSTO 1 3 2 STAN 2 GSTO 1 3 3 STAN 3 GSTO 1 3 7 STAN 7 GSTO 1 3 8 STAN 8 GSTO 1 3 9 STAN 9 GSTO 1 3 10 STAN 10 GSTO 1 3
POSC C3H8 POSC GDRA POSC CO POSC GDRA POSC H2 POSC GDRA POSC O2 POSC GDRA POSC CO2 POSC GDRA POSC H2O POSC GDRA POSC N2 POSC GDRA
9-48
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Boundary Conditions
Modify the fuel inlet boundary values (region no. 3), including scalar boundary values, as follows: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open panel Dene Boundary Regions Select region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list and type 293.0 for Temperature and 1.8 for Density Click Apply Open the Scalar Boundaries panel Highlight region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list Select MIX_FRAC-FUEL_1 in the Scalar scroll list, type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select C3H8 in the Scalar scroll list, type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply
RMOD 3 U U U U U 293.0 1.80 RSMO 3 4 CONC 1.0 RSMO 3 1 CONC 1.0 Modify scalar boundary values at the air inlet streams (region 4, 5 and 6) as follows: Highlight region no. 4 in the boundary regions scroll list Select O2 in the Scalar scroll list, type 0.232 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select N2 in the Scalar scroll list, type 0.768 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply
Repeat the above sequence of steps for regions 5 and 6. RLIS RSMO RSMO RLIS RSMO RSMO RLIS RSMO RSMO Control Parameters 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
7 CONC 0.232 10 CONC 0.768 7 CONC 0.232 10 CONC 0.768 7 CONC 0.232 10 CONC 0.768
Check the solution control parameter settings and specify new values for under-relaxation factors and tolerances where appropriate: Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls and then Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and then select the Solver Parameters tab
9-49
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Type 0.7 in the Relaxation Factor box for Temperature Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance box for Temperature Type 0.8 in the Relaxation Factor box for Density Click Apply Open the Additional Scalars panel Select all scalars in the scroll list one-by-one and check the under-relaxation factor and the residual tolerance settings. It will be seen that they are the same as those for temperature. This is because, when option Chemico-Thermal is selected for enthalpy, pro-STAR changes these values automatically to match those for temperature. This ensures that enthalpy and all transported scalars are developed numerically at the same rate.
RELA RLT 0.7 RESI RST 0.001 RELA RLDEN 0.8 Run Time Controls Check the status of the run time control parameters: Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Enter 0.0001 for the maximum residual tolerance and then click Apply
ITER,500,0.0001 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. In the main window, choose File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) As in Tutorial 9.2, a double precision STAR executable needs to be employed, as follows:
9-50
File > Save Model Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Run Analysis
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.3
Interactively panel Select the Double Precision option button. Leave all other settings at their default values Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:. In the main pro-STAR window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot
CSET,NEWS,FLUID CPLOT Activate user-defined panels Pgetc and Pgetv as described in Tutorial 9.2 and use them to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution: LOAD POPT GETC EDGE REPL EDGE Select Panels > Pgetc > Load Select option Load St. from the panels Load menu In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot In the Pgetc panel, click VM In the main window, click the Edge plotting button tut.pst CONT U,V,W,VMAG ON OFF
Figure T9.3-1
Version 3.26
9-51
Tutorial 9.3
Close the Pgetc panel File > Close In the main window, click the Edge Plotting button again to deactivate it Define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of symmetry: In the main window, select View > Axis > +X Click Section Slice and then use the screen cursor to draw a vertical line that bisects the visible mesh (click the end points of the line). This represents the trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and passing through the axis. Select a viewpoint at right angles to the section by choosing View > SNORMAL Select cell plot type Section (Surface)
Open panel Pgetv and plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the section: Select Panels > Pgetv On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature distribution Figure T9.3-2 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0 1 0 SECT U,V,W,T
Version 3.26
SNOR SPOI VIEW PLTY GETV

9-52
Tutorial 9.3
REPL
Repeat for the mass fraction profiles of the fuel and one of the combustion products (CO2). This time use panel Pgetc to read in the cell-based values and then obtain the vertex-based values by averaging: Select Panels > Pgetc Click Conc1 Select Post > Caverage > Cset Inthemainwindow,clickReplottodisplaythepropanedistributionFigure T9.3-3 Click Conc8 Select Post > Caverage > Cset In the main window, click Replot to display the carbon dioxide distribution Figure T9.3-4
GETC CAVE REPL GETV CAVE REPL
CONC 1 CSET CONC 8 CSET
Version 3.26
9-53
Tutorial 9.3
Terminate the run File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT NOSAVE
9-54
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.4
TOLUENE COMBUSTION (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF)
Tutorial 9.4
In Tutorial 9.2, the Presumed Probability Density Function (PPDF) reaction model for unpremixed flames was used to simulate propane combustion under adiabatic (no heat loss) conditions. This sub-tutorial provides an example of setting up the PPDF model under non-adiabatic conditions. This model differs from the adiabatic case in two respects: 1. Temperature is calculated by solving an appropriate chemico-thermal enthalpy equation 2. Density is calculated from the ideal gas law Note that, under the adiabatic assumption, both these quantities were evaluated algebraically from appropriate relationships. The model set up in Tutorial 9.1 is again employed here, with modifications to the boundary conditions needed to model combustion and the use of toluene as a fuel. The main aim is to familiarise users with the non-adiabatic PPDF model setup and its utilisation, using locally calculated polynomial coefficients. The composition and physical properties of air are assumed to be the same as in Tutorial 9.1. Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut9-4). Since this session continues from Tutorial 9.1, copy file tut.mdl in directory tut9-1 to the new directory before starting up pro-STAR. Begin the pro-STAR session as shown below: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Supply the case title and plot the mesh to confirm the data read in: File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 9.4 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF) in the Title text box Click Apply In the main pro-STAR window, click Cell Plot
TITLE TUTORIAL 9.4 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF) CPLOT Material Properties Since temperature is now a solution variable, define a polynomial function for the background fluid specific heat as follows:
Version 3.26
Open the Molecular Properties panel

9-55
Tutorial 9.4
Select option Polynomial in the Specic Heat menu. Note that pro-STAR now displays an additional Molecular Weight box whose default value, 28.96, is appropriate for air. Click Apply. A pop-up panel will appear, warning you that pro-STAR was not able to nd the background material name (AIR) in its built-in database and suggesting an alternative action. Click OK to close the panel and then click Dene/Edit Polynomial to open the Polynomial Function Denition dialog Find a substance called N2 in the scroll list on the left-hand side of this dialog, select it, and then click Apply Database Substance. pro-STAR will retrieve the corresponding polynomial coefcients and assign them to material no. 1, i.e. the background material. Click Graph Data to display a graph of specic heat .vs. temperature, together with corresponding graphs for normalised enthalpy and entropy Click Close to exit from the dialog
SPEC POLY MOLWT 28.96 POPC STAN N2 POPC GSTO GDRA 1 3 Combustion Model Use the facilities of STAR GUIdes Reacting Flow folder to set up the combustion model as follows: Open the STAR GUIde window and select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Reacting Flow followed by Chemical Reactions Open the Scheme Denition panel Select option Unpremixed/Diffusion from the Reaction Type menu Select option PPDF Single Fuel from the Reaction Model menu Note that scheme no. 1 is selected by default in the Chemical Scheme # slider at the bottom of the panel Accept the Chemical Equilibrium setting in the Option menu and click Apply. A message will appear at the bottom of the panel conrming your selections.
CRM2 1 UNPRE,PPDS,CHEMI Continue by using the CEA package to specify the fuel (C7H8) and its combustion products. In a non-adiabatic PPDF model, only chemical species polynomial coefficients are required. These are derived separately using an equilibrium calculation for a mixture of pure toluene and air at a temperature of 600 K and pressure of 1 bar. To read these values into pro-STAR, proceed as follows:
9-56
Open the Reaction System panel In the Parameter Denition tab, check that option CEA is selected in the
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.4
Input/Control menu Supply the names of all chemical substances involved plus relevant reaction parameters, as shown below: Pressure 1.0e+5 Select Stream to Dene -> Stream1 (Fuel) and then enter the following data in the boxes underneath: Species Name 1 C7H8 Mass Fraction 1 1 Temperature 600 Click Dene Stream Select Stream to Dene -> Stream2 (Oxidizer) and then enter the following data in the boxes underneath: Species Name 1 O2 Mass Fraction 1 0.232 Species Name 2 N2 Mass Fraction 2 0.768 Temperature 600 Click Dene Stream Go to the All Species scroll list and enter the following data by selecting each species line in turn: 1 C7H8 2 O2 3 N2 4 CO 5 CO2 6 H2 7 H2O Click Apply
Note that all chemical names, such as C7H8, should be entered exactly as they appear in the material names file (material.list) supplied under the STAR-CD installation directory. Define the basic character of the reaction: Go to the Heat Option tab Select Non-Adiabatic from the Heat Option menu Click Apply
CRMO 1 PPDF NONA Start up the CEA application: Go to the Integration Control tab Select option Polynomial from the Integration Method menu Click Apply
SBREAC 1 PSPPDF PPDF UDEF,,7

Version 3.26 9-57
Tutorial 9.4
CO CO2 C7H8 H2 H2O N2 O2 POLY,O2,19

[Enter 19 polynomial coefficients]
POLY,N2,19
POLY,H2O,19
POLY,H2,19
POLY,C7H8,19
POLY,CO2,19
POLY,CO,19
POLY,DENSITY,19
POLY,TEMPERATURE,19
CRSC,MAP,1,DBASE PMAT,1,FLUI CHSC,1,1 Updated contents will now appear on the PPDF Dependent Variables scroll list. Selecting each item in turn will display the corresponding coefficients in the PPDF Polynomial Coefcients scroll list. Confirm that there are 20 coefficients each for temperature, density and all chemical species involved (C7H8, CO, CO2, H2, H2O, N2, O2). To check these coefficients graphically: Click Graph Data to generate plots of the available data automaticallyFigure T9.4-1
CRTY,1 PPDF GSTO GDRAW,1,3
9-58
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.4
Reset the graph registers before proceeding further In the main pro-STAR window, select Graph > Greset Click OK to conrm your action
GRESET Y The CEA output is passed to pro-STAR which in turn generates suitable scalar variables and maps them automatically to the constituents of the reaction scheme. The reaction scheme is also assigned automatically to the current stream (material no. 1). To check the results of this operation: Open the Scheme Association panel. Note that chemical scheme no. 1 (the non-adiabatic PPDF defined above) is assigned to material no. 1 (the background fluid in the current stream) Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases in the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Thermal Models panel and click Show Options. Note that, for non-adiabatic PPDF, the Chemico-Thermal option is automatically selected in the Enthalpy menu
Scalar Properties
Check the properties of the scalar variables that were automatically set up by the combustion models mapping process described earlier: Select the Additional Scalars folder and then open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel
Version 3.26
9-59
Tutorial 9.4
SCLI FULL ALL Scrolling through the available scalars with the Scalar # scroll bar shows that, in addition to chemical species, scalars for Mixture Fraction and Variance were also created automatically. Confirm that the Inuence pop-up menu setting for these two is Passive. Check the property values retrieved for each of the remaining scalars. As a result of the Polynomial setting for the background fluid, you will need to assign a polynomial specific heat function to all chemical species scalars as follows: Use the scroll bar to select the rst active scalar (no. 3, CO) Clicking Apply causes pro-STAR to search for the coefcients of this substance in its internal database. In this case, they are found and a message to that effect appears in the I/O window. Click the Dene/Edit Polynomials button for specic heat to open the Polynomial Function Denition dialog. This will display the coefcients just retrieved. Click Close to exit from the dialog and go back to the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel Repeat the above process for each of the remaining scalars (nos. 4 to 9) to complete the polynomial coefcient denition 3 STAN 4 STAN 5 STAN 6 STAN 7 STAN 8 STAN 9 STAN
POSC CO POSC CO2 POSC C7H8 POSC H2 POSC H2O POSC N2 POSC O2 Boundary Conditions
Modify the fuel inlet boundary values (region no. 3), including scalar boundary values, as follows: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open panel Dene Boundary Regions Select region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list and type 600.0 for Temperature (toluene is still a vapour at that temperature) and 1.843 for Density
Version 3.26
9-60
Tutorial 9.4
Click Apply Open the Scalar Boundaries panel Highlight region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list Select MIXTURE FRACTION in the Scalar scroll list, type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select C7H8 in the Scalar scroll list, type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply
RLIS 3 RMOD 3 U U U U U 600.0 1.843 RSMO 3 1 CONC 1.0 RSMO 3 5 CONC 1.0 Modify the air inlet boundary values (regions 4, 5 and 6), including scalar boundary values, as follows: Go back to panel Dene Boundary Regions Select region no. 4 in the boundary regions scroll list and type 600.0 for Temperature and 0.578 for Density Click Apply Open the Scalar Boundaries panel Highlight region no. 4 in the boundary regions scroll list Select N2 in the Scalar scroll list, type 0.768 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply Select O2 in the Scalar scroll list, type 0.232 in the Mass Fraction box and click Apply
Repeat the above process for regions 5 and 6. RLIS 4 RMOD 4 U U U U U 600.0 0.578 RSMO 4 8 CONC 0.768 RSMO 4 9 CONC 0.232 RLIS 5 RMOD 5 U U U U U 600.0 0.578 RSMO 5 8 CONC 0.768 RSMO 5 9 CONC 0.232 RLIS 6 RMOD 6 U U U U U 600.0 0.578 RSMO 6 8 CONC 0.768
Version 3.26 9-61
Tutorial 9.4
CFD Analysis (STAR) Control Parameters
RSMO 6 9 CONC 0.232 Control Parameters Check the solution control parameters and then change the under-relaxation factor for temperature and density and the residual tolerance for temperature: Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls and then Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and then select the Solver Parameters tab Type 0.7 in the Relaxation Factor box for Temperature Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance box for Temperature Type 0.8 in the Relaxation Factor box for Density Click Apply Open the Additional Scalars panel Select each scalar in turn and check that the Under-Relaxation Factor and Residual Tolerance values are set to 0.7 and 0.001, respectively
RELA RLT 0.7 RESI RST 0.001 RELA RLDEN 0.8 SCCL,,ALL Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. In the main window, choose File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT, SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) It is recommended that flows involving chemical reactions should be run in double precision mode, as follows:
9-62
File > Save Model Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Select the Double Precision option button. Leave all other settings at their default values
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.4
Click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:. In the main pro-STAR window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot
CSET,NEWS,FLUID CPLOT Activate the user-defined panels Pgetc and Pgetv as described in Tutorial 9.2 and use them to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution: LOAD POPT GETC EDGE Select Panels > Pgetc > Load Select option Load St. from the panels Load menu In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot In the Pgetc panel, click VM In the main window, click the Edge plotting button tut.pst CONT U,V,W,VMAG ON
Figure T9.4-2
REPL EDGE OFF
Version 3.26
9-63
Tutorial 9.4
Close the Pgetc panel File > Close In the main window, click the Edge Plotting button again to deactivate it
Define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of symmetry: In the main window, select plot option Geometry Plot and then click Cell Plot Select View > Axis > +X Click Section Slice and then use the screen cursor to draw a vertical line that bisects the visible mesh (click the end points of the line). This represents the trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and passing through the axis. Select a viewpoint at right angles to the section by choosing View > SNORMAL Select cell plot type Section (Surface)
SNOR 0 1 0 SPOI 0. 0. 0. VIEW 0 1 0 PLTY SECT Open panel Pgetv and plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the section, plus mass fraction profiles for the fuel and two combustion products (CO and CO2):
9-64
In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot

Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.4
GETV REPL GETV REPL GETV REPL GETV REPL
Select Panels > Pgetv On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature distribution Figure T9.4-3 Click button Conc5 to display the toluene distribution Figure T9.4-4 Click button Conc3 to display the CO distribution Figure T9.4-5 Figure T9.4-6 Click button Conc4 to display the CO2 distribution U,V,W,T U,V,W,CONC 5 U,V,W,CONC 3 U,V,W,CONC 4
Version 3.26
9-65
Tutorial 9.4
9-66
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.4
QUIT NOSAVE
Version 3.26
9-67
Tutorial 9.5
C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF)
Tutorial 9.5
In Tutorial 9.4, a non-adiabatic PPDF model was used to simulate toluene vapour combustion. This sub-tutorial provides an elaboration of that case, by assuming that the fuel is injected into the combustor in the form of droplets that subsequently evaporate into the combustible vapour. Note that, given the special characteristics of the PPDF formulation, this approach is valid only under the current assumption of a single evaporation product that also constitutes the fuel. Multiple evaporation products require solution of multiple scalar transport equations and therefore the use of a different combusiton model, as will be demonstrated in the next sub-tutorial. The model geometry set up in Tutorial 9.1 is again employed here, with modifications to the boundary conditions needed to represent the combustion conditions and droplet injection. The main aim is to familiarise users with pro-STARs facilities for simulating fuel droplet evaporation, using an externally supplied subroutine to model the physical process involved. The composition and physical properties of air are assumed to be the same as in Tutorial 9.1. Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut9-5). Since this session continues from Tutorial 9.4, copy file tut.mdl in directory tut9-4 to the new directory before starting up pro-STAR. Begin the pro-STAR session as shown below: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Supply the case title and plot the mesh to confirm the data read in: File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 9.5 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF WITH DROPLETS) in the Title text box Click Apply In the main pro-STAR window, click Cell Plot
TITLE TUTORIAL 9.5 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (NON-ADIABATIC PPDF WITH DROPLETS) CPLOT Begin by specifying the key feature of this case, i.e. the presence of droplets: Go to the STAR GUIde window and open the Select Analysis Features panel
9-69
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Flow Field Initialisation
Select option Lagrangian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu and then click Apply. An additional folder called Lagrangian Multi-phase will appear in the NavCenter tree.
TPHL ON Flow Field Initialisation Set up a uniform initial temperature distribution in the solution domain: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and then sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Initialization panel and choose option Manual Initialization from the Mode menu Type 500.0 in the Temperature box Click Apply
PROP CINI N N INIT STAN 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 0.0 KEPS 0.0 0.0 500.0 Droplet Properties Check the basic control settings for droplets and then re-define the maximum size of the droplet track file (in Mb), taking into account droplet trajectories and the maximum tracking times: Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase and open the Droplet Controls panel Check that option Coupled is set in the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations menu Type 100 in the Droplet Trajectory Max File Size box Accept the default value (100) for Maximum Tracking Time Select option Explicitly dened parcel injection Accept all other default settings on the panel and click Apply A panel will appear warning you that the current injection denitions will be overwritten. Since no denitions have been supplied yet, it is OK to continue by clicking Yes.
DRPO 100 100 DRPMO EXPLICIT Activate the turbulent dispersion model and define transport mechanisms and physical properties for the droplets on the basis of: 1. Standard STAR-CD procedures for the calculation of momentum transfer between the continuous and dispersed phases 2. Standard methodology for heat and mass transfer between the dispersed and continuous phases 3. STARs default model for droplet break-up 4. Droplets bouncing off solid obstacles in the event of a collision The above parameters are set as follows:
9-70 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Droplet Properties
Open the Droplet Physical Models and Properties panel Select the Global Physical Models tab Turn On the Turbulent Dispersion option and then click Apply
DRTU ON Select the Droplet Physical Models tab and check that the Droplet Type # slider is set to 1 For Momentum Transfer, select option Standard and accept the default Mass Coef. and Slip Factor values For Mass Transfer select option Standard For Heat Transfer select option Standard For Droplet Breakup select option Reitz and accept the default values for We(Bag), We(Strip), Te(Bag), Te(Strip) For Droplet-Wall Interaction select option Rebound Click Apply
DRTY 1 DRMO DRHE DRMA DRBR DRWA STANDARD ON STAN ON STAN REITZ REBOUN
Specify droplet physical properties corresponding to liquid toluene. The heat of vaporisation and saturation pressure is to be defined by user coding in subroutine DROPRO, as discussed in section User Subroutines of this tutorial: Select the Droplet Properties tab Click Select from Database to open the Droplet Properties Database dialog Scroll down the database material list to locate item TOLUENE, highlight it and then click Select Material Close the Droplet Properties Database dialog Check the contents of the Droplet Properties tab. All property values retrieved from the database are now displayed in the appropriate boxes. Since these are valid for a lower (room) temperature, adjust the values for the actual droplet injection temperature (350 K) as follows: Density 725 Surface Tension Coef. 0.0262 Viscosity 0.00035 Specic Heat 2107.86 Select the Subroutine Usage option button for both the Heat of Vaporisation and Saturation Pressure properties Click the Evaporates to Scalar Select button Define scalar no. 1 as representing the product of evaporation by selecting it in the Scalars list. This is in fact the mean mixture fraction f of
9-71

Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Droplet Creation
the PPDF combustion model currently in use. Nevertheless, for the purposes of STARs droplet calculations, it is legitimate to treat it as if it represents the fuel vapour scalar. Click Close. The chosen scalar number (1) will now appear in the Evaporates to Scalar box Click Apply
DRTY 1 TOLUENE(L) DRPR DENS STAN 725 DRPR STCO STAN 0.0262 DRPR VISC STAN 0.00035 DRPR CP STAN 2107.86 DRPR HOVA USER DRPR POSA USER DRCM 1 1 1.0 2107.86 4.12277e+05 3801.22 Note that the effect of toluene vapour on the mixture density will still be taken into account by virtue of the fact that the scalar variable representing toluene (no. 5) is still designated as an active scalar. Make a local copy of user subroutine DROPRO and put it in a sub-directory called ufile under your current working directory, as described in Chapter 18 of the User Guide. In the main window, select File > System Command Type ules in the text box, click Apply and then Close Go back to the Droplet Properties tab and click Dene User Coding
SYSTEM ufiles USUB WRITE DROPRO Once you have exited from pro-STAR at the end of this session, this subroutine should be edited to the form shown in section User Subroutines of this tutorial. Note that DROPRO in turn calls two auxiliary subroutines, CALHVP and CALSVP, that supply values for the heat of evaporation and saturation pressure, respectively. These should also be created and included in the ufile directory. All subroutines will be included automatically as part of the STAR executable before the model is run. Droplet Creation Create the required number of parcels (each parcel is represented by a typical droplet) and specify their initial conditions. The parcels are to be injected into the combustor via an annular slit of radius 5 mm, centred around the axis of symmetry and projecting 2 cm into the combustion chamber. It is therefore convenient to use a cylindrical coordinate system (no. 2) when specifying initial parcel positions and velocities. All parcels in this model are to be included in a single injection group. Define the
Version 3.26
9-72
Tutorial 9.5
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Droplet Creation
groups injection characteristics, including the initial diameter, velocity magnitude and temperature of a typical droplet: Open the Injection Denition panel Specify injection data as indicated below: Diameter 250.0e-6 Velocity Magnitude 4.4721 (based on initial velocity components Unit, Vinit, Winit of 2, 0, 4 in coordinate system no. 2) Temperature 350 Mass Flowrate applies to Each Injection Point Mass Flowrate 4.152e-4 (based on an injection rate of 7.0e+4 droplets per parcel per second) Select option No. of Parcels/injection point 1 Click Apply
DRGR 1 DRDI CONS 250.0e-6 DRIN 1 EXPL 4.4721,2,0,350,POINT,FIXED,4.152e-4,,,1 Specify the injection location for 21 parcels, uniformly distributed over an arc of 50 around the injector ring so that the interval between them is 2.5. All parcels are to have identical injection directions given by (0.4472, 0, 0.8944) in coordinate system no. 2: Open the Injection Points panel Select option Line from the Set Type menu Enter 2 in the Coordinate System box Enter 21 in the Number of Points box Select option Specify for Point 1 (the rst end-point of the circular arc) and enter its coordinates (0.005, -25.0, 0.02) in the X, Y, Z boxes Enter coordinates (0.005, 25.0, 0.02) for Point 2 (the second end-point of the arc) in the other set of X, Y, Z boxes Specify the entrance velocity direction in terms of unit vector components by entering (0.4472, 0, 0.8944) in the DX, DY, DZ boxes Click Add New Set. The injection points list at the top of the panel will conrm that a group of 21 injection points has been created.
DRCR,ADD,COOR,LINE,21,2,0.005,-25.0,0.02,0.005,25.0, 0.02,CONS,0.4472,0,0.8944,2 For a visual check of particle initial conditions: Select the parcel group (set no. 1) in the Injection Points list Click Plot points in set
GETD INIT DSET ALL

Version 3.26 9-73
Tutorial 9.5
DPLOT Make the droplet size and colour dependent on particle diameter. Select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks Open panel Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks and then select the Droplets tab Select option Diameter in the Droplet Radius menu and type in 1. and 0.025 in the Size and Ref. Value boxes, respectively Select option Diameter in the Fill Color menu Click Apply Click Droplet Plot Close the Droplet Plot Options dialog AFTER HIDDEN CPLOT DIAM 1 0.025 DIAM
DOPT EDGE DOPT RADI DOPT RADM DOPT FILL DPLOT Boundary Conditions
In view of the fact that fuel is now injected a short distance into the combustion chamber, it is necessary to close off the previously defined fuel stream inlet. This is done by modifying the boundary conditions of region 3 from type Inlet to type Wall: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open panel Dene Boundary Regions In the boundary regions scroll list, select region 3 Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Click Apply
RDEF 3 WALL STAN NOSL STAN 9.0 0 0 0 1 0 ADIA Analysis Controls For some Lagrangian multi-phase cases, such as this one, convergence may be achieved more rapidly if the source terms in the carrier fluid equations accounting for the presence of droplets are ensemble-averaged over a set of iterations (see Chapter 12, Steady-state SIMPLE and SIMPISO in the Methodology volume). The parameter to be changed for this purpose is pro-STAR Constant 24. To set the value of this parameter:
9-74
Select the Analysis Controls folder followed by the Output Controls sub-folder Open the Switches and Real Constants panel Select the Real Constants tab Enter 100 in the box labelled C24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
Click Apply
RCON 24 100 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. In the main window, choose File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT, SAVE User Subroutines As explained previously, sub-directory ufile should contain a file called dropro.f, corresponding to subroutine DROPRO. Use pro-STARs built-in editor to edit this subroutine and introduce the required code, as follows: File > Edit File In the pro-STAR Editor dialog, click File > Open In the File Selection dialog displayed, choose sub-directory ufile and then le dropro.f Click OK Edit the contents of the subroutine so that it looks exactly as shown below Click File > Save to save the new version of the subroutine
C*********************************************************************** SUBROUTINE DROPRO(DENDR,CPDR,HV,PS,SFTC,DRVIS,DRCOND) C Droplet properties C*********************************************************************** C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE comdb.inc COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) INCLUDE usrdat.inc INTEGER IFTYPE,RON COMMON /FULTYP/ IFTYPE,RON DIMENSION DRMAFR(50) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT08(001), DRMAFR(01) ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT07(001), DRM ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), PR ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(001), IDR ) Version 3.26 9-75
Tutorial 9.5
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(002), IDRT ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(004), TD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(009), XD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(010), YD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(011), ZD ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(004), ICO ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(005), NDRCO ) C----------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to calculate the droplet C physical properties. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: DENDR, CPDR, HV, PS, SFTC, C DRVIS and DRCOND C C----------------------------------------------------------------------C C..... Droplet heat of evaporation CALL CALHVP(NDRCO,ICO,TD,HV) C..... Droplet saturation pressure CALL CALSVP(NDRCO,ICO,TD,PS) C c WRITE(76,(A19,2I6,1P3E16.5)) IP,ICO,TD,HV,PS : , c + IP,ICO,TD,HV,PS C C----------------------------------------------------------------------RETURN END C***********************************************************************
Note that this subroutine calls two auxiliary routines, CALHVP and CALSVP. These routines are fuel-specific and should therefore not be used for other chemical species. Two additional files called calhvp.f and calsvp.f containing the necessary code should now be created, as shown below: In the pro-STAR Editor dialog, click File > Open In the File Selection dialog displayed, and under sub-directory ufile, enter a new le name called calhvp.f Click OK Input the contents of the new subroutine exactly as shown below Click File > Save to save the subroutine contents Repeat the above steps for the second subroutine, calsvp.f Click File > Quit to exit from the editor
C*********************************************************************** SUBROUTINE CALHVP(NDRCO,ICO,TDRP,HV) C Droplet heat of evaporation C See Reid pg 228 eqt 7-12.1 C*********************************************************************** INCLUDE comdb.inc C PARAMETER (NDRCL=1) DIMENSION WTMOL(NDRCL),TBOIL(NDRCL),TCRIT(NDRCL),PCRIT(NDRCL), + OMEGA(NDRCL) C.... Properties of C7H8 droplet vapour components 9-76 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA
WTMOL/ 92.1410 / TBOIL/ 383.8000 / TCRIT/ 591.8000 / PCRIT/ 41.0000 / OMEGA/ 0.2630 /
C C.... Other required data PARAMETER (RCONS=8.3143) DIMENSION TREFL(NDRCL) DATA TREFL/ 450.0 / C C------------------------------------------------------------------------C IF(NDRCO.GT.NDRCL) THEN WRITE(6,*) SUBROUTINE CALHVP: NDRCO.GT.NDRCL WRITE(6,*) NDRCO=, NDRCO WRITE(6,*) NDRCL=, NDRCL STOP ENDIF C IF(TDRP.LT.TCRIT(ICO)) THEN TRED1=TREFL(ICO)/TCRIT(ICO) THAW1=1.0-TRED1 TERM1=7.08*(THAW1)**0.354 TERM2=10.95*OMEGA(ICO)*(THAW1)**0.456 HV1=(RCONS*TCRIT(ICO)*(TERM1+TERM2))*(1.0E+3/WTMOL(ICO)) C TRATIO=TBOIL(ICO)/TCRIT(ICO) TTE=(LOG(PCRIT(ICO))-1.013)/(0.93-TRATIO) DELHVB=1.093*RCONS*TCRIT(ICO)*TRATIO*TTE C TERM=0.00264*(DELHVB/(RCONS*TBOIL(ICO))) PN=(TERM+0.8794)**10 TRED2=TDRP/TCRIT(ICO) THAW2=1.0-TRED2 HV=HV1*(THAW2/THAW1)**PN ELSE HV=0.0 ENDIF C C------------------------------------------------------------------------RETURN END
C*********************************************************************** SUBROUTINE CALSVP(NDRCO,ICO,TDRP,PS) C Droplet saturation pressure C See Reid pg 212 eqt 7-5.2 C*********************************************************************** INCLUDE comdb.inc C C------------------------------------------------------------------------C C.... Constants for the reference fluids C 1=PROPANE ; 2=OCTANE ; 3=Benzene ; 4=Pentafluorotolnene PARAMETER (NRFL=4) Version 3.26 9-77
Tutorial 9.5
DIMENSION ARFL(NRFL),BRFL(NRFL),CRFL(NRFL),DRFL(NRFL),ORFL(NRFL) DATA ARFL/ -6.72219,-7.91211,-6.98273,-8.05688 / DATA BRFL/ 1.33236, 1.38007, 1.33213, 1.46673 / DATA CRFL/ -2.13868,-3.80435,-2.62863,-3.82439 / DATA DRFL/ -1.38551,-4.50132,-3.33399,-2.78727 / DATA ORFL/ 0.15300, 0.39800, 0.21200, 0.41500 / C PARAMETER (NDRCL=1) DIMENSION TBOIL(NDRCL),TCRIT(NDRCL),PCRIT(NDRCL), OMEGA(NDRCL) C.... Properties of C7H8 droplet vapour components DATA TBOIL/ 383.8000 / DATA TCRIT/ 591.8000 / DATA PCRIT/ 41.0000 / DATA OMEGA/ 0.2630 / C C.... Calculated data DIMENSION PVPR(NRFL) C C------------------------------------------------------------------------C IF(NDRCO.GT.NDRCL) THEN WRITE(6,*) SUBROUTINE CALSVP: NDRCO.GT.NDRCL WRITE(6,*) NDRCO=, NDRCO WRITE(6,*) NDRCL=, NDRCL STOP ENDIF C IF(TDRP.LT.TCRIT(ICO)) THEN TRED=TDRP/TCRIT(ICO) THAW=1.0-TRED DO 200 JR=3,NRFL T1NU=ARFL(JR)*THAW T2NU=BRFL(JR)*THAW**1.5 T3NU=CRFL(JR)*THAW**3.0 T4NU=DRFL(JR)*THAW**6.0 PVPR(JR)=(T1NU+T2NU+T3NU+T4NU)/TRED 200 CONTINUE OTERM=(OMEGA(ICO)-ORFL(3))/(ORFL(4)-ORFL(3)) PVPRC=PVPR(3)+(PVPR(4)-PVPR(3))*OTERM PS=EXP(PVPRC)*PCRIT(ICO)*1.0E+05 ELSE PS=PCRIT(ICO)*1.0E+05 ENDIF C C------------------------------------------------------------------------RETURN END
CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel
Version 3.26
9-78
Tutorial 9.5
Select option Double Precision in the Star Executable Precision section Click Start New Analysis
When the analysis is complete, inspect the information in file tut.run and file tut.info to confirm that no error messages were produced during the run. Post-Processing Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:. In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot
CSET,NEWS,FLUID CPLOT Activate the user-defined panels Pgetc and Pgetv as described in Tutorial 9.2 and use them to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution: Select Panels > Pgetc > Load Select option Load St. from the panels Load menu In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot In the Pgetc panel, click VM In the main window, click the Edge plotting button
Figure T9.5-1
LOAD,tut.pst POPT CONT GETC U,V,W,VMAG EDGE ON REPL EDGE OFF
Version 3.26
9-79
Tutorial 9.5
Close the Pgetc panel: File > Close In the main window, click the Edge Plotting button again to deactivate it
Plot the steady-state droplet distribution by choosing plot options such that droplet colour and radius depend on temperature and calculated diameter, respectively. The droplet velocity is not displayed. In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks Open panel Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks and then select the Droplets tab In the Load Droplet Data section, select option Track File from the Load From menu and then click the le browser button underneath Select le tut.trk from the Files list and then click OK. The contents of the File Name box will be updated to conrm your choise. Accept the default option (Particles) in the Plot Option menu and then click Load Data In the Droplet Options section, select After, Unhidden and Cplot from the Edge Plot Options menus Select Diameter in the Droplet Radius menu and set the Size value to 1 and the Ref. Value to 0.05 Select Temperature in the Fill Color menu Select None in the Vectors menu Click Apply In the main window, select D > All In the Plot Droplets panel, click Droplet Plot Figure T9.5-2
9-80
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
GETD TRACK tut.trk PARTICLE DOPT EDGE AFTER NOHIDDEN CPLOT DOPT RADI DIAM 1. DOPT RADM 0.05 DOPT FILL TEMP DOPT VECT NONE DSET ALL DPLOT
Now make the droplet colour dependent on droplet mass and replot In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Mass in the Fill Color menu Click Apply and then Droplet Plot Figure T9.5-3
DOPT FILL MASS DPLOT
Version 3.26
9-81
Tutorial 9.5
The above plot confirms that the droplets have essentially evaporated well before they reach the combustor outlet. To view the fuel and combustion product distribution, first define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of symmetry: In the main window, select D > None Select plot option Geometry Plot and then click Cell Plot View > Axis > +X Click Section Slice and then use the screen cursor to draw a vertical line that bisects the visible mesh (click the end points of the line). This represents the trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and passing through the axis. Select a viewpoint at right angles to the section by choosing View > SNORMAL Select cell plot type Section (Surface) NONE 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0 1 0 SECT
DSET SNOR SPOI VIEW PLTY
Open panel Pgetv and plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the section, plus mass fraction profiles for the fuel and two combustion products (CO and CO2):
9-82
In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot Select Panels > Pgetv
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature distribution Figure T9.5-4 Click button Conc5 to display the toluene distribution Figure T9.5-5 Click button Conc3 to display the CO distribution Figure T9.5-6 Figure T9.5-7 Click button Conc4 to display the CO2 distribution Select File > Close to close the Pgetv panel
GETV U,V,W,T CPLOT GETV U,V,W,CONC 5 REPL GETV U,V,W,CONC 3 REPL GETV U,V,W,CONC 4 REPL
Version 3.26
9-83
Tutorial 9.5
9-84
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.5
QUIT NOSAVE
Version 3.26
9-85
Tutorial 9.6
C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION)
Tutorial 9.6
The main aim of this tutorial is to familiarise users with the mechanics of producing a fresh solution to a previously run combustion case, by changing to a different chemical reaction model while utilising all relevant model parameter definitions already available. The simulation described in Tutorial 9.5 is repeated here using a single-step eddy breakup reaction of the following form: C 7 H 8 + 9O 2 7CO 2 + 4H 2 O The combustion modelling strategy and numerical considerations for this type of simulation are as described in the introduction to Tutorial 9. Another change relative to Tutorial 9.5 is the introduction of radiation effects. Some preparatory work for this feature, in the form of extra boundary region definitions, was already done in Tutorial 9.1. This sub-tutorial makes use of those definitions and also introduces participating media radiation (due to the gases within the combustor) in addition to radiative heat transfer between the various boundary surfaces. Some boundary condition modifications are also included to allow for combustion modelling and surface radiation properties. The physical properties of oxygen, leading reactant (C7H8) and products (CO2, H2O) are assumed to be as follows: Molecular weights Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a new directory for this tutorial (say tut9-6) and copy (a) le tut.mdl (b) sub-directory ufile containing previously dened user subroutines for droplet properties from directory tut9-5 to the new directory before starting up pro-STAR. Begin the pro-STAR session as shown below, remembering that this tutorial is a continuation of Tutorial 9.5 as far as the model parameters are concerned:
Version 3.26
O2 32.0
C7H8 92.0
CO2 44.0
H2O 18.0
Ideal gas (pressure dependent) 1.81 105 Pa s (constant) Polynomial function of temperature 2.637 102 W/m K
Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 9.6 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE
9-87
Tutorial 9.6
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Ignition Region
COMBUSTOR (1-STEP EDBR, DROPLETS, RADIATION) in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 9.6 - IDEALISED GAS TURBINE COMBUSTOR (1-STEP EDBR, DROPLETS, RADIATION) Ignition Region Given that an eddy breakup model is to be used here, an ignition region needs to be specified for this model as described in Tutorial 9.3. To do this, collect together the cells to be designated as ignition cells as follows: In the I/O window, type command
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.074 0.101 ,,, -0.1 0.51 2 A total of 90 cells will be selected. Now assign a separate cell type with a different colour to them so that you can distinguish them easily from the rest of this models cells: In the main window, check that cell plot type Hidden Surface is selected Check that viewpoint (1,1,-1) is set (choose View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 if it is not) Click Cell Plot Select Tools > Cell Tool Select Table # 4 in the Cell Table scroll list Click Edit Types to open the Cell Table Editor Enter 5 in the Color Table Index box Select On from the Radiation menu. This is a necessary setting for performing radiation calculations, as explained below Type Ignition_cells in the Name box Click Apply In the Cell Tool, select Modify Type > Cell Set Click Replot and notice the change of cell colour in the ignition region Close the Cell Tool
CPLO VIEW 1 1 -1 REPL CTAB 4 FLUID 5,,,,,,,ON CTNAM 4 Ignition_cells CTYP 4 CMOD CSET REPL Thermal Options
9-88
The radiation model in this tutorial includes the effects of the intervening gas, using default gaseous radiation properties, as well as surface-to-surface radiation. This requires the use of beams that can be tracked only through cell types that are
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Radiation Patches
explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat transfer. Since ignition cells have already been prepared for this type of analysis, we need to re-set fluid cells in the rest of the stream for this purpose: Go to the Cell Table Editor and select Table# 1 in its scroll list Select On from the Radiation menu Click Apply Close the Cell Table Editor
CTAB 1,,,,,,,,,ON Turn radiation on, choosing the Discrete Transfer analysis method in conjunction with the internal view factor and participating media calculation options: Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and open the Thermal Options panel In the Radiation section of the panel, select option Discrete Transfer Internal VF Calc Enter 100 in the Beams per patch box Select option Participating to include gaseous radiation effects in the calculations Accept the remaining default settings and click Apply
RADI DTRM,100,ON,1,0.3 Check the radiative properties assigned to the gas: Select the Liquids and Gases folder and then open the Thermal Models panel. Click the Show Options button. Note that the panel now includes a section labelled Participating Media. Check that the Radiative Properties setting is Constant, the Absoption coefcient 0.1 and the Scattering coefcient 0.0
RADP CONS,0.1,0. Radiation Patches To use the discrete transfer radiation model, it is necessary to subdivide all regions defined in Tutorial 9.1 (except for cyclic boundaries) into so-called patches. These are used both during view factor calculations and for evaluating the radiative heat transfer. Assign a unique patch to every boundary in every relevant region. This can be done most conveniently by means of a pro-STAR command loop, shown below, typed into the I/O window: BSET NONE *SET NREG 3 1 *DEFINE BPATCH NREG,,BYFA BSET ADD REGI NREG *END *LOOP 1 12
Version 3.26 9-89
Tutorial 9.6
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Other Settings
The above loop will create 535 patches. Display the patches to confirm that the operation has been carried out correctly: In the main window, select the Patch plot display option Click Cell Plot Deselect the Patch plot display option Click Replot
BDIS PATCH CPLO BDIS OFF REPL Other Settings It is good practice to define one of the ignition cells as the monitoring point. This makes checking for the onset of ignition easier, as temperature and product concentrations build-up rapidly at that point once ignition begins. Begin by inspecting the cell numbers in the region of interest: In the main window, select Plot > Number > Cell Click Replot
NUMB CELL ON REPL Zoom in on the mesh shown on-screen to have a closer look at the displayed numbers and then define cell no. 482 as the monitoring cell: Go back to the STAR GUIde window and then open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 482 in the Monitoring cell number box Click Apply
Turn off the zoom function and then plot the whole mesh: MONI NUMB CSET ZOOM CPLO In the main window, choose Plot > Number and then deselect option Cell Select C > All Click Zoom Off Click Cell Plot 482 CELL OFF ALL OFF
9-90
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
Combustion Model
To change the combustion model currently in use, first add a new chemical scheme definition for an eddy breakup type of reaction: In the STAR GUIde window, select sub-folder Reacting Flow followed by Chemical Reactions Open the Scheme Denition panel Select Chemical Scheme # 2 using the slider at the bottom of the panel Select option Unpremixed/Diffusion from the Reaction Type menu Accept the default EBU Standard option from the Reaction Model menu Click Apply. A message will appear at the bottom of the panel conrming your selections.
CRM2 2 UNPRE EBUST CRMO 2 LSOU,,DIFL CRTY 2 Specify the reaction equations for this scheme and other basic model parameters: Open the Reaction System panel Select Chemical Scheme # 2 using the slider at the bottom of the panel Type the required reaction denition, C7H8 + 9O2 -> 7CO2 + 4H2O, in the Reaction 1 box Accept the default settings on the Status, Tscale and Rate Equation menus and then click Update Reaction 1. pro-STAR will ll in default values for parameters Amix, Bmix, conrm the chemical names entered above and enter them in the appropriate list (Leading Reactants, Products and Reactant parameters) at the bottom of the panel 1 2
LREA C7H8 CRPR CO2 H2O REAC 1.0 9.0 0.0 7.0 4.0 RRAT
1 EDBR HOMO LOCAL STAN
Check the treatment to be applied to the ordinary reactant (oxygen):

Version 3.26
In the Reactant Parameters list, select reactant no. 1 Check that option Fixed-Fraction is shown in the drop-down menu underneath
9-91
Tutorial 9.6
Check that the (xed) oxygen mass fraction in the incoming air stream is 0.233
CRRE 1 FIXED 0.232 O2 This completes the specification of leading reactants and combustion products. pro-STAR will automatically map any required scalar variables to the constituents of the reaction scheme. Note that appropriate scalar variables already exist for all the chemical species constituents, so no additional scalar definitions for them are necessary. CRSC MAP 2 DBASE Specify the ignition parameters as follows: Open the Ignition panel Select Chemical Scheme # 2 using the slider at the bottom of the panel Accept the default setting (Numerical) in the Model/Treatment panel Type 4 in the Cell Type box Type 0.05 in the Fraction Burnt box Select option Time Step/Iteration in the When? menu Type 20 and 120 in the Start and End boxes, respectively Click Apply
IGNI 4,,0.050 ITER 20 120 Assign the chemical reaction scheme defined earlier (no. 2) to the fluid stream. Open the Scheme Association panel Type 2 in the Chemical Scheme Number box to assign chemical scheme no. 2 to material no. 1 (the background fluid in the current stream) Click Apply
CHSC 1 2 Check the properties of the scalar variables set up as a result of the scalar mapping described earlier: Select sub-folder Additional Scalars Open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel and scroll through the available scalars using the Scalar # scroll bar at the bottom of the panel
SCLI FULL ALL It will be seen that a total of ten scalars are currently defined, including an additional passive scalar (no. 10) representing the mixture fraction of the leading reactant. Note that a solution for this scalar is required by the EDBR formulation (see Chapter 10 of the Methodology volume).
9-92 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Droplet and Vapour Properties
Droplet and Vapour Properties
Use the STAR GUIde facilities to redefine the scalar that represents the evaporated fuel. This is scalar no. 5, i.e. toluene vapour, in this case. Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase Open panel Droplet Physical Models and Properties and go to the Droplet Properties tab Click the Evaporates to Scalar Select button Define scalar no. 5 as representing the product of evaporation by selecting it in the Scalars list. Click Close. The chosen scalar number (5) will now appear in the Evaporates to Scalar box Click Apply
DRCM 1 5 1.0 2107.86 4.12277e+05 Boundary Conditions Provide surface radiative data, such as emissivity and reflectivity, for all relevant boundary regions as follows: Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel
Supply radiation temperature and emissivity values for the air streams (region 4, 5 and 6) and for the outlet (region 14): Select region 4 in the scroll list Type 600.0 in the T Radiation box, 1.0 in the Emissivity box and click Apply
Repeat the above sequence for regions 5 and 6. For region 14: Select region 14 in the scroll list Type 900.0 in the T Radiation box, 1.0 in the Emissivity box and click Apply
RLIS 4 RMOD 4 U U U U U U U 600.0 1.0 RLIS 5 RMOD 5 U U U U U U U 600.0 1.0 RLIS 6 RMOD 6 U U U U U U U 600.0 1.0
Version 3.26 9-93
Tutorial 9.6
RLIS 14 RMOD 14 U U 900.0 1.0 Specify radiation conditions for the walls (regions 7 to 13) via a pro-STAR command loop. Walls are defined as thermally conducting with emissivity and reflectivity of 0.8 and 0.2, respectively: *SET NREG 7 1 *DEFINE RMOD NREG U U U U U U U U FIXE 600.0 0.8 0.8 0.2 0.0 *END *LOOP 1 6 Region no. 3, which in this sub-tutorial is also a wall boundary, can now be modified Select region 3 in the boundary regions scroll list Choose option Fixed in the Wall Heat pop-up menu Enter surface temperature and radiation property data in the appropriate boxes as shown below: Temp. 600.0 Resis. 0.8 Emissivity 0.8 Reectivity 0.2 Transmissivity 0.0 Click Apply
RMOD 3 U U U U U U U U FIXE 600.0 0.8 0.8 0.2 0.0 Finally, define the baffles as thermally conducting boundaries with the same radiation properties as the walls.
9-94
Select region no. 15 in the Boundary Regions scroll list

Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
Pre-processing (pro-STAR) Control Parameters
Choose option Conduction in the Wall Heat pop-up menu Type 0.8 in the Resistance box Enter radiation property data in the appropriate dialog text boxes as shown below: Emissivity box 0.8 Reectivity box 0.2 Transmissivity box 0.0 Click Apply Enter radiation property data for the reverse side of the bafe in the appropriate dialog text boxes, as shown below: Emissivity box 0.8 Reectivity box 0.2 Click Apply again to apply the boundary conditions to this side of the bafe
RMOD 15 U U U U U U U U U U U COND 0.8 0.8 0.2 0.0 U U U U U U U U 0.8 0.2 Control Parameters Check the solution control parameter settings and specify new values for under-relaxation factors where appropriate: Select folder Analysis Controls Select sub-folder Solution Controls and then Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and then select the Solver Parameters tab Type 0.8 in the Relaxation Factor box for Temperature Click Apply Open the Additional Scalars panel Type 0.8 in the Under-Relaxation Factor box Click Apply
RELA RLT 0.8 SCCONT,,0.8 Run Time Controls

Version 3.26
Check the status of the run time control parameters:

9-95
Tutorial 9.6
Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Enter 0.0001 for the maximum residual tolerance and then click Apply
ITER,500,0.0001 Final Operations The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit, saving all model data in file tut.mdl, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR interactively, as described in the next section. In the main window, choose File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively proceed as follows: File > Save Model Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Select option Double Precision in the Star Executable Precision section Click Start New Analysis
The run should converge within the specified maximum number of iterations. Post-Processing Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:. In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot
CSET,NEWS,FLUID CPLOT Activate the user-defined panels Pgetc and Pgetv as described in Tutorial 9.2 and use them to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution:
9-96
Select Panels > Pgetc > Load Select option Load St. from the panels Load menu In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot
Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
In the Pgetc panel, click VM In the main window, click the Edge plotting button
Figure T9.6-1
LOAD,tut.pst POPT CONT GETC U,V,W,VMAG EDGE ON REPL EDGE OFF
Close the Pgetc panel: File > Close In the main window, click the Edge Plotting button again to deactivate it
Plot the steady-state droplet distribution by choosing plot options such that droplet colour and radius depend on temperature and calculated diameter, respectively. The droplet velocity is not displayed.
Version 3.26
In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks Open panel Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks and then select the Droplets tab In the Load Droplet Data section, select option Track File from the Load From menu and then click the le browser button underneath Select le tut.trk from the Files list and then click OK. The contents of the File Name box will be updated to conrm your choise. Accept the default option (Particles) in the Plot Option menu and then
9-97
Tutorial 9.6
GETD DOPT DOPT DOPT DOPT DOPT
click Load Data In the Droplet Options section, select After, Unhidden and Cplot from the Edge Plot Options menus Select Diameter in the Droplet Radius menu and enter 1. and 0.025 in the Size and Ref. Value boxes, respectively Select Temperature in the Fill Color menu Select None in the Vectors menu Click Apply In the main window, select D > All In the Plot Droplets panel, click Droplet Plot Figure T9.6-2 TRACK tut.trk PARTICLE EDGE AFTER NOHIDDEN CPLOT RADI DIAM 1. RADM 0.025 FILL TEMP VECT NONE
DSET ALL DPLOT
Now make the droplet colour dependent on droplet mass and replot: In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Mass in the Fill Color menu Click Apply and then Droplet Plot Figure T9.6-3
DOPT FILL MASS

9-98 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
DPLOT
The above plot shows that the droplets have essentially evaporated well before they reach the combustor outlet. To view the fuel and combustion product distribution, first define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of symmetry: In the main window, select D > None Select plot option Geometry Plot and then click Cell Plot View > Axis > +X Click Section Slice and then use the screen cursor to draw a vertical line that bisects the visible mesh (click the end points of the line). This represents the trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and passing through the axis. Select a viewpoint at right angles to the section by choosing View > SNORMAL Select cell plot type Section (Surface) NONE 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0 1 0 SECT
DSET SNOR SPOI VIEW PLTY
Open panel Pgetv and use it to plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the section:
Version 3.26 9-99
Tutorial 9.6
In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot Select Panels > Pgetv On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature distribution Figure T9.6-4
Repeat for the concentration profiles of fuel and carbon dioxide. This time use panel Pgetc to read in the cell-based values and then obtain the vertex-based values by averaging: Select Panels > Pgetc Click Conc5 Post > Caverage > Cset Inthemainwindow,clickReplottodisplaythetoluenedistributionFigure T9.6-5 Click Conc4 Post > Caverage > Cset In the main window, click Replot to display the carbon dioxide distribution Figure T9.6-6
PLTY SECT POPT CONT GETV U,V,W,T CPLOT GETC U,V,W,CONC 5 CAVE CSET REPL GETC U,V,W,CONC 4
9-100 Version 3.26
Tutorial 9.6
CAVE CSET REPL
Terminate the run

Version 3.26 9-101
Tutorial 9.6
QUIT NOSAVE
9-102
Version 3.26
Introduction
Tutorial 10 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN

Introduction This tutorial is aimed at familiarising the user with various STAR-CD facilities for simulating a heat transfer problem involving natural convection, conduction, conjugate heat transfer and radiation. The example used in the tutorial consists of a heated aluminium alloy fin placed within a rectangular box filled with air (see Figure T10.0-1).
T = 293 K
T = 293 K
1 10
2 T = 343 K
Figure T10.0-1
Heated n geometry (all dimensions in cms)
The problem is simulated in two dimensions for ease of mesh generation and speed of numerical calculation. The mesh employed is shown in Figure T10.0-2.
Version 3.26
10-1
Material Properties
Figure T10.0-2
Mesh structure for the heated n model
Material Properties The analysis is split into two sections, with different modes of heat transfer considered in each. Material properties for the solid fin and the surrounding air are as follows: Aluminium alloy fin: Density () = 2800 kg/m3 Specic heat (Cp) = 880 J/kg K Thermal conductivity () = 180 W/m K Surrounding air (incompressible, turbulent): Density () = variable, based on Ideal Gas Law for molecular weight 28.96 Specic heat (Cp) = 1006 J/kg K Thermal conductivity () = 0.0264 W/m K Molecular viscosity () = 1.81E5 Pa s
10-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN
Tutorial 10.1
This sub-tutorial uses automatic mesh generation facilities to create a simple and uniform two-dimensional mesh. The mesh is then used to model the shape and size of the solid fin, followed by cell indexing and specification of material properties for the fin and surrounding fluid. Heating of the fin is achieved by fixing the temperature at the base to 343 K. The sides of the surrounding box are set to a fixed temperature of 293 K and the remaining wall boundaries are considered to be either conducting (at solid/fluid interfaces) or adiabatic (at the top and bottom walls of the box), as shown in Figure T10.0-1. The heat transfer modes are: Conduction in the solid n Conduction and natural convection in the surrounding air (i.e. buoyancydriven ow around the heated n)
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut10-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 10.1 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 10.1 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW ROUND A HEATED FIN Mesh Creation Create a two-dimensional 50 50 mesh extending 10 cm in the X- and Y-directions. The thickness of the mesh is set to 0.1 cm but this will have no effect on the calculations, given the two-dimensional nature of the simulation. Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Select the Create and Import Grids folder followed by Create Grids. Open the Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes panel In the Extent of Domain section, enter numerical values as shown below to create the required mesh
Version 3.26
10-3
Tutorial 10.1
Click Generate Mesh In the main window, choose option Wire (Surface) from the cell plot type menu Select a viewing direction of approximately (0.4, 0.5, 1) by dragging with the left mouse button Figure T10.1-1
VC3D 0 10 50 0 10 50 0 .1 1 PLTY NORM SURF ON CSET ALL VIEW 0.4 0.5 1 CPLOT
Collect all cells representing the solid fin by typing the following commands in the I/O window. Verify that the overall shape of the cell set matches that for the fin by
10-4 Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
displaying the set on your screen: CSET NEWS GRAN 1.95 6.05 -1 1.05 -100 100 CSET ADD GRAN 2.95 4.05 -1 5.05 -100 100 CPLOT Figure T10.1-2
Change all cells in the set to cell type no. 2 and display the result: Select Tools > Cell Tool In the Cell Table scroll list, select the predened entry for solid cells (cell type no. 2) Select Modify Type > Cell Set In the main window, choose option Hidden Surface from the cell plot type menu Select C > All Click Cell Plot Figure T10.1-3
CTYPE 2 CMOD CSET CSET ALL PLTY EHID CPLOT
Version 3.26
10-5
Tutorial 10.1
Note that because of the difference in cell type, fluid and solid cells are displayed in different colours. Boundary Locations Specify the locations of the boundary regions; boundary conditions will be defined later. First, locate the container side walls: Select folder Locate Boundaries in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +X In the Regions tab, select region no. 1 from the scroll list and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (Side_walls) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh with the screen cursor In the main window, change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -X Again, click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
VIEW 1 0 0 CPLOT BZONE 1 ALL VIEW -1 0 0 REPL BZONE 1 ALL

10-6 Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
RDEF 1 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 1 Side_walls Locate the boundaries at the base of the fin: In the main window, select C > New > Solid Change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 2 from the scroll list and then choose option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (Base) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
CSET NEWS SOLI VIEW 0 -1 0 CPLOT BZONE 2 ALL RDEF 2 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 2 Base Locate the symmetry plane boundaries on cell faces in the Z-direction: In the main window, select C > All Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 3 in the scroll list and then choose option Symmetry from the Type menu Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z Again, click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
CSET ALL VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT BZONE 3 ALL VIEW 0 0 -1 REPL BZONE 3 ALL RDEF 3 SYMP All other boundary surfaces are automatically assigned to the default wall boundary region (region 0) and will take on the default wall boundary conditions, to be
Version 3.26 10-7
Tutorial 10.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Cell Type Properties
confirmed later. Cell Type Properties Check and if necessary specify appropriate material property indices, colours and names for cell types 2 and 1, representing the solid fin and its surrounding fluid, respectively: In the Cell Tool, click Edit Types In the Cell Table Editor, select Table# 1 in the scroll list Type AIR in the Name box Accept the defaults for all other parameters and click Apply Select Table# 2 and change the following parameters: Material Number 2 (the solid properties index) Color Table Index 4 Name AL Click Apply and then Close Click Replot to conrm the change (the solid cell colour will change) 1 AIR 2 SOLID 4 0 2 2 AL ALL
CTNA CTAB CTNA CTLI REPL Thermal and Gravity Options
Switch on conjugate heat transfer. Note that this also has the effect of switching on the temperature solver inside the solid fin: In the STAR GUIde window, select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and then the Thermal Options panel Choose Heat Transfer On in the Conjugate Heat Transfer section Click Apply
CONJ ON In order to take buoyancy effects into account, the model needs the gravitational force in the global Cartesian y-direction. Check the current setting: Open the Gravity panel Type 9.81 in the Acceleration box to specify the gravitational acceleration value to be used in this case Specify the correct direction of gravity in this model by typing -1 in the Y box and 0 in the Z box Click Apply
ACCE 0 -1 0 1 9.81 Fluid Properties Check the material properties of the models fluid substance: In the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder, select the Liquids and Gases folder
Version 3.26
10-8
Tutorial 10.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Fluid Properties
Open the Molecular Properties panel and check that the material number in the Material # scroll bar is set to 1. It can be seen that material no. 1 is, by default, a uid whose properties are those of air. This is what is required in this case.
PMAT 1 FLUID AIR The density variation is assumed to follow the Ideal Gas Law. However, the fluid itself is incompressible since the pressure effect on density variations is deemed negligible. Select option Ideal-f(T) in the Density pop-up menu and click Apply.
DENS IDEA N Default values are accepted for the remaining properties. Assuming the flow is turbulent, select the k- model: Open the Turbulence Models panel Select the On button and then choose K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number in the Turbulence menu Click Apply
TURB KE Switch on the temperature equation solver: Go to the Thermal Models panel Select option Temperature Calculation On and click Apply
TEMP ON Choose cell number 927 as the monitoring location for the fluid cells: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 927 in the Monitoring cell number box Click Apply
MONI 927 Specify a datum location and density for calculating buoyancy effects: Open the Buoyancy panel Click On to turn on the buoyancy calculations Select option Enter Coordinates from the Dene Datum Location menu Enter coordinates 0, 0, 0 in the X, Y, Z boxes Select option Specify from the Dene Datum Density menu Type 1.27588115 in the Density box as the required datum density. As noted in the STAR GUIde on-line Help (Useful Points), it is important to calculate body forces as accurately as possible; hence the high degree
10-9
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Solid Properties
of precision for the density value. Click Apply
BUOY ON 0 0 0 SPEC 1.27588115 STAT Solid Properties Define the properties of the solid cells making up the fin (i.e. material property reference no. 2): Select the Solids sub-folder within the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Material Properties panel and select material no. 2 using the Material # scroll bar. This will display properties for the default solid material (Carbon Steel). Change the property values to those for aluminium as follows: Name AL Density 2800 Conductivity 180 Specic Heat 880 PMAT DENS SPEC COND MONI STAT Boundary Conditions Click Apply after the last entry to conrm the settings Select the Monitoring and Reference Data panel and choose a monitoring location within the solid by typing 924 in the Monitoring cell number box Click Apply 2 SOLI AL CONS 2800 CONS 880 CONS 180 924
You can now impose the required thermal boundary conditions. Define fixed temperature boundaries at 293 K for the containers side walls, as follows: Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select option Fixed in the Wall Heat pop-up menu Type the required xed wall temperature, 293, in the Temperature box Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEF 1 WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] FIXED 293

10-10 Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
Define a fixed temperature boundary at 343 K for the base of the fin: Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option Fixed in the Wall Heat pop-up menu Type the required xed wall temperature, 343, in the Temperature box Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEF 2 WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] FIXED 343 All other boundary surfaces are allocated to region 0 which defaults to adiabatic walls (at free surfaces) or conducting walls (at solid/fluid interfaces). Checks Check the boundaries by listing their properties and then displaying them graphically: In the main window, choose Utility > Count > Boundaries and then check the information displayed in the I/O window, i.e. number and type of regions and number of boundaries in each region Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Select B -> All and then B > Unselect > Symplane to exclude the symmetry planes from the boundary plot that is about to be produced Click Replot Use the orientation cubes slider controls to set a viewpoint of approximately (0.4, 0.5, 1) Figure T10.1-4 BOUN ALL ON BREG ALL 0.4 0.5 1.0 DELE SYMP
COUN RLIS CDIS BSET VIEW REPL BSET REPL
Version 3.26
10-11
Tutorial 10.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Control Parameters
Control Parameters
In buoyancy-driven flow calculations there is very strong coupling between the temperature and flow fields. It is therefore advisable to use the PISO algorithm (see the STAR GUIde on-line Help, Useful Points) which is more suitable for this type of problem: Select the Analysis Controls folder, followed by the Solution Controls sub-folder Open the Solution Method panel and choose option PISO from the Solution Algorithm menu Click Apply
ALGO PISO As the model is two-dimensional, we need not solve the W-momentum equation: Select the Equation Behavior folder and open the Primary Variables panel On the Equation Status tab, deselect the Solve button for W-Mom Click Apply
SOLV LW N Given the strong effect of temperature and density variations on flow development, it is important to ensure that some under-relaxation is applied to these variables. This helps in avoiding potential numerical stability problems.
10-12
Open the Solver Parameters tab Type a new under-relaxation factor, 0.95, in the Density box under the
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
Relaxation Factor column (note that this value must equal that for temperature, to ensure that the calculated magnitudes for the two variables are in step) Click Apply
RELA 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.95 1.0 0.95 Choose the MARS differencing scheme for all variables solved. This gives the optimum combination of stability and accuracy. Open the Differencing Schemes tab Choose option MARS in all the menus under the Differencing Scheme column, with the exception of Turb. KE and Turb. Diss which should be left to the default setting (UD). Accept the default value of 0.5 for the blending factor. Click Apply
DSCH MARS UVW DSCH MARS T DSCH MARS DENS Choose the type of data output and dumping frequency. For post-processing purposes, it is generally useful to generate additional flow and thermal wall data (in this case heat transfer coefficients at the walls): Select the Output Controls sub-folder and open the Analysis Output panel Accept the default option (On) for Write solution (restart) le and type 20 in the Output frequency box Go to the Additional Output Data section and then select item Heat Transfer Coef. from the Wall Data scroll list Click option button Post Repeat the above for item Heat Flux Click Apply
WDAT REST 20 POWALL SPEC HTRA Y HFLU Y Run Time Controls Set the maximum number of iterations to 500: Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and then open the Set Run Time Controls panel Type 500 in the Number of Iterations box Click Apply
ITER 500 Final Operations

Version 3.26
If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry file, making sure that the scaling factor for the problem units (centimetres) is specified. Then write the problem file and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown
10-13
Tutorial 10.1
below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Type 0.01 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom .01 PROB tut.prob QUIT Y CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder in the STAR GUIde window and open panel Run Analysis Interactively Check that option other has been selected for the model units; 0.01 should appear inside the Scale Factor box
For simulations involving natural buoyancy, it is usually advisable to run STAR in Double Precision mode. This prevents relatively small buoyancy source terms which dominate the flow from being discarded as round-off error. Select option Double Precision Leave all other settings at their default values and then click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. The run should produce a converged solution within the specified maximum iteration limit. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Launch pro-STAR (if the analysis was run outside pro-STAR). Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: In the STAR GUIde window select the Post-Processing folder Open the Load Data panel Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst
10-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
Postprocessing
First look at the velocity field in the fluid surrounding the fin: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot Deselect the Bound Cell Plot Display Option button Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z In the Load Data panel, go to the Data tab Select item Velocity Components UV option for Vector Data list and then click Get Data to load the velocity eld Select Go To > Create Plots, where the plot style will be dened In the 3-D Surface tab, check that Option Vector is selected and then choose Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T10.1-5
CSET NEWS FLUID CDIS OFF BREG VIEW 0 0 1 TERM,,,VECT EDGE ON GETC U V NONE POPT VECT CPLOT
Now view the stream lines:

Version 3.26
Click Go To Load Data

10-15
Tutorial 10.1
Select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select option Stream Function from the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, select Option Contour (line) Click Plot to Screen Figure T10.1-6
GETV NONE STREAM POPT CONT THIN 0 REPL
Examine the temperature profiles, first in the surrounding fluid and then in the solid fin:
10-16
Click Go To Load Data Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data and then select Go to > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, choose Option Contour (lled) Click Plot to Screen Figure T10.1-7 In the main window, select C > New > Solid In the Create Plots panel, click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Data Type Cell Select item Temperature in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data To plot a smooth distribution ignoring boundary values, the cell data are averaged by selecting Post > Caverage > Cset in the main window Click Cell Plot Figure T10.1-8
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
TERM,,,RAST THIN 1 GETV NONE T REPLOT CSET NEWS SOLI GETC NONE T CAVE CSET CPLOT
Version 3.26
10-17
Tutorial 10.1
Heat flux data at the walls can be plotted as follows: In the Data tab, select Data Type Wall Select item Heat Flux from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data
GETW HFLU Collect the shells created by pro-STAR at the walls (i.e. cells of type 5) and plot: Tools > Cell Tool Select cell type 5 in the Cell Table scroll list In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) Set the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Switch off the edge plotting facility by clicking the edge button Plot > Wall Plot Figure T10.1-9
CTLI ALL CSET NEWS TYPE 5 EDGE OFF VIEW 1 1 1 WPLOT
10-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.1
Final Operations
Terminate the run QUIT N File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
Version 3.26
10-19
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Introduction Preliminaries
Tutorial 10.2
Introduction
RADIATION EFFECTS
This sub-tutorial examines the effect of surface-to-surface radiation on heat transfer and temperature distribution. The boundary conditions remain the same as in Tutorial 10.1, except that radiative surface properties such as emissivity and reflectivity are now added. A surface-to-surface mode of radiative heat transfer is assumed. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut10-2). Before starting the analysis, copy file tut.mdl in directory tut10-1 to the new directory so that it can act as a starting point for the revised model that introduces radiation to the heat transfer calculations. Since the calculation will start from the non-radiating solution, also copy file tut.pst in directory tut10-1 to your current directory. Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 10.2 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN WITH RADIATION Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 10.2 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN WITH RADIATION Boundary Location In cases where surface-to-surface radiation is being modelled, it is necessary to provide radiative boundary information, such as emissivity and reflectivity, for all wall surfaces including solid-fluid interfaces. Solid-uid interface This region is currently assigned to the default wall region (no. 0). You therefore need to define a new boundary region for it, extending round the entire fin perimeter. In the main window, deselect the Bound Cell Plot Display Option Select C > New > Solid Click Cell Plot In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Locate Boundaries and then open the Create Boundaries panel In the Regions tab, select region no. 4 in the scroll list, and then select option Wall from the Type menu
10-21
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Location
Enter a region name (S-F_interface) in the Name box Click Dene region Change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +X Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh In the main window, change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -X Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > +Y Again, click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
CSET NEWS SOLI CDIS OFF BREG CPLOT VIEW 1 0 0 REPL BZONE 4 ALL VIEW -1 0 0 REPL BZONE 4 ALL VIEW 0 1 0 REPL BZONE 4 ALL RDEF 4 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 4 S-F_interface Top wall The top and bottom walls, while adiabatic, still need to be assigned explicitly to a separate region, no. 5. This is necessary because radiation patches (to be defined below) cannot be applied to boundaries assigned to the default wall region 0. In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot In the Regions tab, select region no. 5 in the scroll list, and then select option Wall from the Type menu Enter a region name (T-B_wall) in the Name box Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
CSET ALL CPLOT BZONE 5 ALL
10-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Thermal Options
Bottom wall Change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y Select C > Unselect > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the (blue) cells belonging to the n Click Cell Plot to display only cell faces belonging to the bottom wall In the Regions tab, click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
VIEW 0 -1 0 CSET DELE GRAN 1.95 6.05 CPLOT BZONE 5 ALL RDEF 5 WALL $ $ $ $ RNAME 5 T-B_wall Thermal Options Switch radiation on, choosing the Discrete Transfer analysis method in conjunction with the internal view factor calculation option. For this case, use the default number of beams per patch (100) and neglect radiative effects from the intervening gas: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and then open the Thermal Options panel In the Radiation section of the panel, select option Discrete Transfer Internal VF Calc Enter 100 in the Beams per patch box Accept the displayed default settings in the rest of the panel and click Apply
RADI DTRM,100,OFF,,0.3 For the chosen calculation method, surface-to-surface radiation can be tracked only through cell types that are explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat transfer. In this case, we assume that the fin is opaque and hence we need only track radiation through the fluid: Open the Cell Table Editor using the CTAB button on the main window Select Table# 1 in the scroll list For cell type 1, select On from the Radiation pop-up menu Click Apply Close the Cell Table Editor
CTAB 1,,,,,,,,,ON Boundary Conditions We must revisit the boundary conditions for all wall regions participating in radiative heat transfer in order to define their emissivity and reflectivity. In this case, we have not chosen to track radiation through the solid so we can ignore region 2, the fin base. However, boundary conditions for the side walls need to be updated.
10-23
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list Specify the required radiation properties by entering the following data: Emissivity box 0.5 Reectivity box 0.5 Accept the current values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RMOD 1 U [carriage return] U U U FIXED 293.0 .5 .5 0.0 The boundary conditions for the solid-fluid interface should correspond to a conducting wall with emissivity and reflectivity of 0.2 and 0.8, respectively. Select region no. 4 in the scroll list Select option Conduct. in the Wall Heat pop-up menu Specify the required radiation properties: Emissivity box 0.2 Reectivity box 0.8 Accept the current values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEF 4 WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] COND .2 .8 0.0 Similarly, the top and bottom walls will be adiabatic radiative walls with emissivity and reflectivity of 0.5: Select region no. 5 in the scroll list Specify the required radiation properties: Emissivity box 0.5 Reectivity box 0.5 Accept the current values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEF 5 WALL [carriage return] [carriage return]

10-24 Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Patch Specication
ADIA .5 .5 0.0 Patch All non-symmetry boundary regions need to be divided into radiation patches; these Specication are used both during view factor calculations and for simulating radiative heat transfer. The number of patches per region can be anything between a minimum of one patch covering the entire region to a maximum of one patch per boundary face. The accuracy of radiation calculations is directly proportional to the number of patches per region. Given the two-dimensional character of the problem, it is computationally reasonable to use the maximum number of patches. Patches will be defined for all wall boundaries, with the exception of the fin base; no patches are needed there as this surface does not participate in radiative heat transfer. In the main window, select the Bound Cell Plot Display Option Click Replot. The n base boundaries should now be visible, lying in between the two sections of the bottom wall boundaries. Select B > New > Wall Select B > Unselect > Region (Cursor Select) and then click on any boundary belonging to the n base. This removes all base boundaries from the current set. Select folder Locate Boundaries and open the Create Boundaries panel Go to the Patches tab to create patches using one of the Automatic options Check that option Current Boundary Set is selected in the Boundaries to Patch menu Select By Individual Boundary from the Patch Option menu Click Apply
BSET NEWS WALL BSET DELE REGI 2 BPAT BSET,,BYFA Checks Check the boundaries by listing their properties and then displaying them graphically: In the main window, choose Utility > Count > Boundaries and then check the information displayed in the I/O window, i.e. number and type of regions and number of boundaries in each region. You will need to type c in the I/O window to scroll to the end of the list of boundary patches. Select B > New > Wall Select C > All In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Switch on the edge plotting facility by clicking the edge button and then click Cell Plot Figure T10.2-1
COUN BOUN
Version 3.26
10-25
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
C RLIS ALL CDIS ON BREG BSET NEWS WALL CSET ALL VIEW 1 1 1 EDGE ON CPLOT
Check the patch distribution. Select Cell Plot Display Option Patch Click Replot Figure T10.2-2
CDIS ON BPAT REPL
10-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Final Operations
It is possible to restart the analysis from the previous non-radiating solution, but since new boundaries have been added we need to use the initial field restart option. In the STAR GUIde window, select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Analysis (Re)Start panel Choose Restart File Option Initial Field Restart Check that the Initial Field Restart pop-up menu is set to Restart (New Boundary Types) Click Apply
RDAT INIT The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Ensure that the Scale Factor is 0.01 Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom .01 PROB tut.prob

Version 3.26 10-27
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
QUIT, SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder in the STAR GUIde window and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Accept the default Scale Factor of 0.01 Select the Double Precision option Click Write New Geometry File Click the Restart Analysis button
Note that the starting iteration number is shown as no. 1 despite the fact that this is a restart run. This is because we have chosen the initial field restart option. The analysis will start with the calculation of view factors which are then stored in file tut.vfs. These can be used again in future runs as long as the boundaries and patch definitions have not changed. If, however, such changes have been made, you can instruct STAR to re-calculate the view factors through the -noskip option. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Before starting the post-processing session, copy the file containing the results of the no-radiation case to a local file so that it can be used for comparison with the radiation results (i.e. copy file tut.pst in directory tut10-1 to file norad.pst in your current directory). Postprocessing First look at the temperature distribution in the fluid: In the STAR GUIde window, select the Post-Processing folder and open the Load Data panel In the File(s) tab, click Open Post File Deselect the Patch Cell Plot Display Option in the main window Click Cell Plot Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Select C > New > Fluid In the Load Data panel, go to the Data tab Choose Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) as the Data Type Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data and then select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, choose plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T10.2-3
LOAD tut.pst CDIS OFF BPAT VIEW 0 0 1
10-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
CSET NEWS FLUID GETV NONE T POPT CONT EDGE ON CPLOT
To compare the temperatures of the radiation and no-radiation cases, first load the no-radiation solution file: Click Go To Load Data In the Load Data panel, select the File(s) tab Use the built-in browser to select le norad.pst, whose name should appear inside the Steady State Post File box Click Open Post File
LOAD norad.pst To examine the temperature differences, you will need to use pro-STARs OPERATE utility as follows: In the main window, select Post > Operate In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Function > Load Cell Data > Temperature Select Load Cell Temperature into Register 2 using Absolute Values Click Apply
OPER GETC T 2
Version 3.26 10-29
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Re-load the results of the radiation case by reading the calculated cell temperatures stored in file tut.pst and then store them in post register 1: In the File(s) tab, use the built-in browser to select le tut.pst, whose name should appear inside the Steady State Post File box Click Open Post File In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Register 1 from the registers pop-up menu Click Apply
LOAD tut.pst OPER GETC T 1 Calculate the required differences by subtracting the no-radiation from the radiation temperatures and putting the results in register 4 (the one normally used for scalar data contour plots). In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Function > Multi-Register > Subtract In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Register 4 = Register 1 Register 2 Click Apply Close the Post Register Operations dialog
OPER SUBT 1 2 4 Now plot the differences: In the main window, click Replot Figure T10.2-4
HEADING TEMP. DIFFERENCE KELVIN REPL
10-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
To view the temperature differences in the solid fin: Select C > New > Solid Click Cell Plot Figure T10.2-5
CSET NEWS SOLI HEADING TEMPERATURE KELVIN CPLOT
Version 3.26
10-31
Tutorial 10.2
RADIATION EFFECTS
Final Operations
Terminate the run. File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
10-32
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.3
RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID
Tutorial 10.3
This sub-tutorial examines the effect of replacing the aluminium fin present in the previous two tutorials of this set by an identically-shaped fin made from a transparent material (Pyrex glass). As in Tutorial 10.2, the analysis includes the effects of surface-to-surface radiation on heat transfer and temperature distribution. This time, however, the effect of thermal radiation passing through and being absorbed by the intervening media (air and transparent solid) is also investigated. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut10-3). Before starting the analysis, copy file tut.mdl in directory tut10-2 to the new directory so that it can act as a starting point for a revised model that includes the transparent solid. Since the calculation will start from the opaque solid solution, also copy file tut.pst in directory tut10-2 to your current directory. Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 10.3 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED TRANSPARENT FIN Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 10.3 - BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED TRANSPARENT FIN Radiative and As mentioned in Tutorial 10.2, radiation can be tracked only through cell types that Thermal are explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat transfer. Fluid cells have Properties already been given this property so we now need to perform a similar operation for the solid, i.e. to re-define it as transparent: Open the Cell Table Editor using the CTAB button on the main window Select Table# 1 (the Fluid cell type) in the scroll list and check that the setting of the Radiation menu is On Highlight Table# 2 (the Solid cell type) in the scroll list Select On from the Radiation menu Type Pyrex in the Name box Click Apply Close the Cell Table Editor
CTAB 2,SOLID,4,,2,,,,,ON CTNA 2 Pyrex
Version 3.26
10-33
Tutorial 10.3
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Radiative and Thermal Properties
Specify that both fluid and solid regions will participate in the radiative heat exchange: Go to the STAR GUIde window and select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Thermal Options panel. It will be seen that options Discrete Transfer - Internal VF Calc and (Conjugate) Heat Transfer On are already selected In the Radiation section, select option Participating to turn on the radiation absorption and scattering model (in both solid and uid regions) Click Apply
RADI DTRM,100,ON,1,0.3 Define relevant material properties: Select the Liquids and Gases folder Open the Thermal Models panel and then click Show Options Check the default values for the absoption and scattering coefcients (0.1 and 0, respectively). These are reasonable for air. Click Apply
PMAT 1 RADP,CONST,0.1,0 Select the Solids folder Open the Material Properties panel and select Material # 2 using the slider at the bottom of the panel Type the transparent solid name (Pyrex) in the Name box Specify appropriate thermal properties for the solid material as follows: Density 2230 Conductivity 1.35 Specic Heat 837.4 Click Apply
PMAT,2,SOLID,Pyrex DENS,CONS,2.23e3 COND,CONS,1.35 SPEC,CONS,837.4 Open the Radiative Properties panel Enter 0 for both the absorption and scattering coefcients of the solid material Click Apply
RADP,CONST,0,0
10-34
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.3
Boundary Conditions
Revisit the boundary conditions for the wall regions. These should remain the same as in Tutorial 10.2 except for the following regions: Region 2 (the n base) This was bypassed in the previous tutorial because the presence of the opaque solid meant that it did not participate in radiative heat transfer. In the present tutorial, this is no longer the case; therefore, the boundary surface emissivity and reflectivity need to be defined. In addition, its temperature is changed to 593 K to compensate for the lower thermal conductivity of the glass: Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Specify the required temperature and radiation properties: Temperature box 593 Emissivity box 0.5 Reectivity box 0.5 Accept the current values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RMOD 2 U U U U U U U U U FIXED 593 .5 .5 0.0 Region 4 (the uid-solid interface) Here, the interfaces radiative properties have to be re-defined to allow for the change in solid material: Select region no. 4 in the scroll list Specify appropriate radiation properties: Emissivity box 0.3 Reectivity box 0.0 Transmissivity box 1.0 , i.e. the interface is totally transparent Accept the current values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RMOD 4 U U U U U U U U U U U U .3 0. 1.0 Note that the above values imply that the absorptivity of the interface (1 Version 3.26 10-35
Tutorial 10.3
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Patch Specication
transmissivity - reflectivity = 0) is consistent with the absorptivity defined earlier for the new solid material. Patch Define additional radiation patches corresponding to the fin base, using the same Specication patching density as for the other boundaries: In the main window, select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Replot Select B > New > Region (Cursor Select) and then pick any boundary on n base with the cursor. This will collect all n base boundaries into a set Select folder Locate Boundaries and open the Create Boundaries panel Go to the Patches tab to create patches using an Automatic option Check that option Current Boundary Set is selected in the Boundaries to Patch menu Select By Individual Boundary from the Patch Option menu Click Apply
BSET NEWS REGI 2 BPAT BSET,,BYFA Checks Check the new patch distribution: In the main window, select Cell Plot Display Option Patch Select B > New > Wall Click Replot Figure T10.3-1
CDIS ON BPAT BSET NEWS WALL CSET ALL VIEW 1 1 1 EDGE ON CPLOT
10-36
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.3
Check the restart option: Final Operations In the STAR GUIde window, select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder and open the Analysis (Re)Start panel Check that the Restart File Option is set to Initial Field Restart and the Initial Field Restart menu is set to Restart (New Boundary Types)
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Ensure that the Scale Factor is 0.01 Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom .01 PROB tut.prob QUIT, SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:
Version 3.26
File > Save Model

10-37
Tutorial 10.3
Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder in the STAR GUIde window and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Ensure that the Scale Factor is 0.01 Select the Double Precision option Click Write New Geometry File Click the Restart Analysis button
Note that the starting iteration number is shown as no. 1 despite the fact that this is a restart run. This is because we have chosen the initial field restart option. The analysis will start with the calculation of view factors which are then stored in file tut.vfs. These can be used again in future runs as long as the boundaries and patch definitions have not changed. If, however, such changes have been made, you can instruct STAR to re-calculate the view factors through the -noskip option. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: In the STAR GUIde window select the Post-Processing folder Open the Load Data panel Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing First look at the velocity field in the fluid surrounding the fin: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot Deselect the Patch Cell Plot Display Option button Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z In the Load Data panel, go to the Data tab Select item Velocity Components UV option for Vector Data list and then click Get Data to load the velocity eld Select Go To > Create Plots, where the plot style will be dened In the 3-D Surface tab, check that Option Vector is selected and then choose Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T10.3-2
CSET NEWS FLUID CDIS OFF BPAT VIEW 0 0 1 PLTY QHID EDGE ON GETC U V NONE POPT VECT CPLOT
10-38
Version 3.26
Tutorial 10.3
Examine the temperature profiles, both in the surrounding fluid and in the solid fin: Click Go To Load Data Select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data and then select Go to > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, choose Option Contour (lled) Click Plot to Screen Figure T10.3-3 In the main window, select C > New > Solid In the Create Plots panel, click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Data Type Cell Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data To plot a smooth distribution ignoring boundary values, the cell data are averaged via Post > Caverage > Cset in the main window Click Cell Plot Figure T10.3-4
PLTY EHID GETV NONE T POPT CONT REPLOT CSET NEWS SOLI GETC NONE T CAVE CSET CPLOT
Version 3.26
10-39
Tutorial 10.3
Final Operations
Terminate the run. File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
10-40
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11 2-D FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS

Physical Problem Description This tutorial simulates flow caused by two identical blunt objects passing each other in a tunnel. The problem geometry is shown in Figure T11.0-1. The two objects travel at 30 m/s in opposite directions. The fluid within the solution domain is air (at atmospheric pressure of 1 bar and temperature of 293 K) and has the following physical properties: Density Molecular viscosity Specic heat Thermal conductivity Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is adopted: Moving mesh Arbitrary sliding mesh, with two sliding interfaces Dynamic cell removal and addition Transient ow options Standard k- turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics 1.205 1.81 105 1006.0 2.637 102 kg/m3 Pa s J/kg K W/m K
5 30 m/s 30 27 7 30
201 All units in cm (not to scale)
Figure T11.0-1
Geometry outline of passing objects problem
To simulate the flow, the mesh is divided into three blocks (see Figure T11.0-2) as follows:
Version 3.26
Mesh block 1 is attached to object A and moves with A Mesh block 2 is attached to object B and moves with B Mesh block 3 is stationary
11-1
Modelling Strategy
As objects A and B move, cell layers have to be removed from one end of both blocks 1 and 2 and added to the opposite end in order to keep the width of the computational domain constant. The latter is necessary in order to be able to impose a pressure boundary condition at both ends. Stationary block 3 is optional and is used in this tutorial to demonstrate STAR-CDs capabilities in handling multiple sliding interfaces.
remove cell layers mesh block 2 add cell layers B Pressure Boundary
interface II Pressure Boundary A add cell layers mesh block 3 interface I mesh block 1
remove cell layers
Figure T11.0-2
Block meshing strategy
11-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
TRANSIENT FLOW SIMULATION
Tutorial 11.1
The simulation uses STARs arbitrary sliding interface (ASI) mesh and dynamic cell-layer removal/addition features. The general methodology of these facilities is explained in the User Guide, Chapter 16. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut11-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and identifying title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 11.1 - ARBITRARY SLIDING SIMULATION OF TWO OBJECTS PASSING EACH OTHER in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 11.1 - ARBITRARY SLIDING SIMULATION OF TWO OBJECTS PASSING EACH OTHER Make sure that the STAR-GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. If it is not, activate it by clicking the special Show STAR-GUIde button shown below:
Click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel
TIME SINGLE Mesh Creation To simulate the flow, the computational domain is divided into three mesh blocks, separated by two sliding interfaces as shown in Figure T11.1-1 below. Part (a) depicts the basic shape of the computational domain; this needs to remain approximately unchanged at all times. Part (b) shows how the mesh moves and the manner in which cell layers have to be removed and added in the vicinity of the vertical pressure boundaries to keep the computational domain width constant.
11-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
Since the fundamental rule for cell layer addition is that all added layers must already exist, ghost layers have to be created in advance at appropriate regions of the mesh, as shown in Part (c). These layers are removed prior to the start of the simulation (i.e. at time t 0) and then added to the solution domain in successive layers, as indicated in Part (b). During the simulation, each object needs to travel 129 cm in order to reach a position 15 cm away from the opposite pressure boundary. If the mesh in the direction of motion is chosen to be uniform and with a spacing of 3 cm, then 43 (= 129/3) ghost cell layers have to be created for each mesh block and attached at the locations indicated in Figure T11.1-1, Part (c).
mesh block 2 interface II mesh block 3 A interface I mesh block 1 (a) B
remove cell layers mesh block 2 interface II mesh block 3 A add cell layers (b)
add cell layers B
interface I mesh block 1 remove cell layers
mesh block 2 interface II mesh block 3 A initial extra (ghost) cells (c)
initial extra (ghost) cells B
interface I mesh block 1
Figure T11.1-1
Auxiliary cell layer creation and removal strategy
The STAR GUIde facilities can be used to create the mesh, as follows:
11-4 Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Click Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes to display the corresponding panel
For this problem, it is convenient to identify each cell block by a different cell type and colour. Thus, to generate cells in block 1 attached to object A: Click Select Cell Type to display the Cell Table Editor dialog Select entry no. 1 in the scroll list and conrm that this is the currently active cell type Conrm that the colour number in the Color Table Index text box is 2 Enter appropriate values in the text boxes of the Extent of Domain section of the STAR GUIde panel, as shown below, to create the mesh block
Click Generate Mesh
CTYPE 1 CTAB 1 FLUID 2 0 1 CTNAM 1 VC3D -129. 201. 110 0. 14. 14 0. 1. 1 To generate stationary cells in the middle (block 3): Select entry no. 2 in the Cell Table Editor scroll list Choose option Fluid in the Cell Type pop-up menu Conrm that the colour number in the Color Table Index text box is 3 Delete the default cell type name in the Name text box Click Apply to change the active cell type to 2 Enter appropriate values in the text boxes of the Extent of Domain section of the STAR GUIde panel, as shown below, to create the second mesh block
Version 3.26
11-5
Tutorial 11.1
Click Generate Mesh
CTYPE 2 CTAB 2 FLUID 3 0 1 CTNAM 2 VC3D 0. 201. 67 14. 16. 2 0. 1. 1 To generate cells in mesh block 2 attached to object B: Select entry no. 3 in the Cell Table Editor scroll list Choose option Fluid in the Cell Type pop-up menu Conrm that the colour number in the Color Table Index text box is 4 Delete the default cell type name in the Name text box Click Apply to change the active cell type to 3 Close the Cell Table Editor Enter appropriate values in the text boxes of the Extent of Domain section of the STAR GUIde panel, as shown below, to create the third mesh block
Click Generate Mesh
CTYPE 3 CTAB 3 FLUID 4 0 1 CTNAM 3 VC3D 0. 330. 110 16. 30. 14 0. 1. 1

11-6 Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
This completes the overall mesh generation. The two objects are now created by simply selecting and deleting appropriate portions of the mesh, as follows: Collect cells occupied by object A by typing the following command in the I/O window: CSET NEWS GRAN 26.9 57.1 4.9 12.1 Collect cells occupied by object B by typing the following command in the I/O window: CSET ADD GRAN 143.9 174.1 17.9 25.1 Delete these cells In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool In the Cell Tool, select Delete Cells > Cell Set
CDEL CSET The deleted cells are now removed from the model and the mesh renumbered: CCOM Y The arbitrary sliding interfaces and the location of the objects can be viewed by turning on the edge plotting facility, collecting the remaining cells and plotting: In the main window, select C > All Click Cell Plot Change the cell plot type to Quick Hidden Line and then click the edge button to turn on edge plotting Figure T11.1-2 Click Cell Compress
EDGE ON CSET ALL PLTY QHID CPLO Note that double vertices at the sliding interfaces, created by the mesh generation process described earlier, have to be retained as this is essential for the ASI method.
Version 3.26
11-7
Tutorial 11.1
This completes the mesh operations. Turn off edge plotting and save all model data created so far: Click the edge button again to deselect the edge plotting option File > Save model
EDGE OFF SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Locations The next step is to define boundary locations via the STAR GUIde panels: In the STAR GUIde window, select the Locate Boundaries folder and then open the Create Boundaries panel
BOUN STAT Boundary locations are specified graphically, by displaying the mesh regions of interest one at a time and then using the cursor to assign region numbers to them. Appropriate boundary types and conditions will be assigned to them later on, as discussed in the section on Boundary Conditions. The sliding interface on the side of object A is defined first. To do this, select cells in the vicinity of the interface as follows: CSET NEWS GRAN ,,,12.9,14.1 Change the viewpoint, plot and then assign all visible cell faces to boundary region no. 1:
11-8 Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > + Y Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Select a Zone Draw a closed polygon around the entire mesh
VIEW 0 1 0 CPLO BZON 1 ALL The remaining interface boundaries can be defined in a similar manner. Thus, for stationary mesh block 3: CSET VIEW CPLO BZON VIEW REPL BZON In the Cell Tool, highlight cell type no. 2 in the scroll list and click Set Active Type Close the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > New > Type (Current) Change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > - Y Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, highlight region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Select a Zone Draw a closed polygon around the entire mesh In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > + Y In the Create Boundaries panel, highlight region no. 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Select a Zone Draw a closed polygon around the entire mesh NEWS TYPE 2 0 -1 0 2 ALL 0 1 0 3 ALL
Finally, define the sliding interface for mesh block 2 attached to object B: CSET NEWS GRAN,,,15.9 17.1
Version 3.26
In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > - Y Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, highlight region no. 4 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Select a Zone Draw a closed polygon around the entire mesh
11-9
Tutorial 11.1
VIEW 0 -1 0 CPLO BZON 4 ALL This completes the boundary location specification for the sliding interfaces. The pressure boundaries (region no. 5) are now specified, using the same procedure: In the main window, select C > All Change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > - X Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, highlight region no. 5 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Pick Cell Faces Select all the visible cell faces one by one using the screen cursor and click DONE when nished Change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > REVERSE Click Pick Cell Faces, select all the visible cell faces one by one using the screen cursor and click DONE when nished NEWS GRAN -130. 4. -1 0 0 5 ALL NEWS GRAN 197. 331. 1 0 0 5 ALL
CSET VIEW CPLO BZON CSET VIEW CPLO BZON
Some wall boundaries representing the moving objects need to be defined explicitly in order to be able to assign an appropriate velocity to them. In general, such explicit boundary assignments need to be made for all walls. However, walls whose velocity is normal to the mesh have a negligible effect on the solution, since this wall effect is represented by the motion of the mesh itself. Therefore, only walls aligned parallel to the direction of motion, i.e. whose velocity vector lies in the plane of the wall, need be considered. For the sake of brevity, the required operations are given below only in command form. To define object A walls as region no. 6: CSET VIEW CPLO BZON CSET VIEW CPLO BZON
11-10
NEWS GRAN 26.9 57.1 3.9 5.1 0 1 0 6 ALL NEWS GRAN 26.9 57.1 11.9 13.1 0 -1 0 6 ALL
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
Similarly, to define object B walls as region no. 7: CSET VIEW CPLO BZON CSET VIEW CPLO BZON NEWS GRAN 143.9 174.1 16.9 18.1 0 1 0 7 ALL NEWS GRAN 143.9 174.1 24.9 26.1 0 -1 0 7 ALL
Since the problem is two dimensional, all cell faces normal to the Z-direction must be defined as symmetry planes. Again, this is done by viewing each boundary surface in turn from a suitable direction and then assigning the displayed faces to region no. 8 (the symmetry plane): CSET VIEW CPLO BZON VIEW REPL BZON Material Properties In the main window, select C > All Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > - Z Click Cell Plot In the Create Boundaries panel, highlight region no. 8 in the Boundary Regions scroll list and then click Surface Based on Edges Pick any vertex in block 1 with the screen cursor to create boundaries for this block Repeat for blocks 3 and 2 (do a Replot before picking each vertex) Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > REVERSE Pick any vertex in block 1 with the screen cursor to create boundaries for this block Repeat for blocks 3 and 2 ALL 0 0 -1 8 ALL 0 0 1 8 ALL
Check the current definition of material properties using the STAR GUIde facilities: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Molecular Properties panel
The default material properties are those for air and therefore do not need to be changed PROP
Version 3.26
11-11
Tutorial 11.1
STAT Check the current turbulence settings: Open the Turbulence Models panel
It is seen that the setting in this panel is Off, as expected. Therefore, you need to select an option that switches on one of the turbulence models supplied by the code. For this tutorial, the standard k- model will be used. Click On to select turbulence modelling Select option k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu Click Apply
TURB KE Set the reference pressure and monitoring cell locations: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 710 in the Monitoring cell number box Type 680 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box Click Apply
MONI 710 PRES,,680 Boundary Conditions Having defined boundary locations and their associated region numbers, boundary conditions can now be imposed. Boundary regions at the sliding interface must be defined as attachment boundaries. For such boundaries, one has to supply two parameters: 1. The local coordinate system 2. An alternate boundary region number The purpose of the latter is to provide a boundary condition if cells on either side of the interface become disconnected; the alternate boundary region must be of wall or inlet type. In this tutorial, the alternate boundary region number is not important so the system default may be used. In the STAR GUIde window, select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Attach in the Region Type menu Click Apply Select region no. 2 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Attach in the Region Type menu Click Apply Select region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Attach in the Region Type menu
Version 3.26
11-12
Tutorial 11.1
RDEF 1 RDEF 1 RDEF 1 RDEF 1
Click Apply Select region no. 4 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Attach in the Region Type menu Click Apply 1 ATTACH 2 ATTACH 3 ATTACH 4 ATTACH
The other boundary conditions are defined below. Note that, for the pressure boundary, the turbulence intensity is taken as 1% of the object speed, and the mixing length as one-tenth of the tunnel width. Select region no. 5 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Pressure in the Region Type menu Select Static in the Option menu Select TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Type 0.3 in the Turb. Intensity box Type 0.03 in the Length box Click Apply Select region no. 6 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Wall in the Region Type menu Set the walls U-velocity component to 30 m/s by typing 30 in the Wall U box Click Apply Select region no. 7 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Wall in the Region Type menu Set the walls U-velocity component to - 30 m/s by typing -30 in the Wall U box Click Apply Select region no. 8 in the boundary regions scroll list and option Symmetry in the Region Type menu Click Apply File > Save Model
RDEF 5 PRESS STAT 0.0 N N N RTURB 5 MIXL 0.3 0.03 RDEF 6 WALL NOSLIP
Version 3.26
11-13
Tutorial 11.1
30. RDEF 7 WALL NOSLIP -30. RDEF 8 SYMP SAVE tut.mdl Analysis Controls Check the solution variables. Since the flow is two dimensional, it is sensible to switch off the calculation of the W-velocity component: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behaviour, open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation Status tab Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations Click Apply
CONT STAT SOLV LW N Choose the U and V velocity components, pressure and turbulence kinetic energy as the flow variables to write to the transient post-processing file: Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab Specify the frequency of writing data to the transient post le by typing 0.001 in the Write data every box. As discussed below, this is equivalent to output at every fourth time step. As can be seen in the scroll list, velocity and pressure are already selected by default. Select Turb Kinetic Energy and click the Post button to include this item as well in the list of data to be output. Click Apply
WRPOS 1 SPEC 0 0.001 U Y P Y TE Y Run Time Controls In this tutorial, the mesh is made to slide in an arbitrary manner. Therefore, the time step chosen can be any reasonable value, independent of the mesh geometry. Here, we shall use a value of t = 0.00025, so that four time steps are needed to move the mesh by a (relative) distance of 3 cm, i.e. equal to the cell length in the x-direction. This movement is illustrated in Figure T11.1-3. By the end of the analysis, the objects will move for a total of 0.04 seconds which is equivalent to a distance of 120 cm.
11-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
3 cm Stationary mesh Interface Mesh attached to object A (a) (b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Figure T11.1-3
Illustration of relative mesh movement
Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Type 0.04 in the Run for box Click Apply Type 0.00025 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set period
RUNT DURAT 0.04 DELT CONST 0.0 0.00025 Event Settings Since this tutorial uses a sliding mesh, the moving mesh and event options need to be turned on. In the pro-STAR I/O window type: MVGR,ON,EVENT,PROSTAR Moving mesh operations are grouped under the Events Module and are presently available only in command form. The Events Module status can be checked by typing: EVEN STAT
Version 3.26 11-15
Tutorial 11.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Manipulation Events
Before specifying events, it is necessary to resize pro-STAR by issuing the following commands in the I/O window: MEMORY MAXEVE 200 MEMORY WRITE Moving mesh operations are defined in terms of event steps that are stored in a special file. This file is initialised via command EVFILE as follows: EVFILE INIT The above initialises a new event history file (.evn file). The actual mesh-moving operations, and the time at which they are executed, will now be specified through the event steps. Mesh Let us first set up events that remove all the extra cells created initially, i.e. those Manipulation cells that will be restored progressively during the solution. As discussed in Chapter Events 16 of the User Guide, the main features of the cell removal and addition operations are: 1. A cell is removed by collapsing intervening faces between two opposite cell sides in a given direction. The user needs to ensure that the rest of the mesh geometry is re-arranged so as to take up the space vacated by the removed cells. 2. Entire layers of cells are removed or added. This is necessary in this tutorial but does not represent a fundamental restriction of STAR-CD. 3. Two neighbouring cell layers cannot be removed or added at the same time. However, it is permissible to remove or add any number of cell layers provided none of them are neighbours. 4. Cell addition is achieved by restoring removed cells. This means that cells to be added must have been previously removed. 5. Cell layers must be restored in the reverse order in which they were removed (i.e. the rst cell layer added must be the last cell layer removed). 6. Cell layers can be removed at time t < 0 so that they can be restored during the solution. An event is set up through command EVSTEP which defines event time. There are several ways of specifying event time here it will be defined as the elapsed time. The extra cell layers are removed using negative event times whose exact time values are of no importance. So, for the first cell removal event step, type: EVSTEP 1 TIME -50.0 Dene event step 1 occurring at time t = 50 seconds
The information echoed on your screen will confirm this. The direction for the cell removal is now specified using command EDDIR. Here, a local coordinate system is used: EDDIR LOCAL 1 1 Local coordinate system no. 1, in the x-direction
11-16
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
In this first event step two cell layers are removed, one from the upper and the other from the lower mesh block, as illustrated in the diagram below. Note that it is permissible for the layers to be located in different places. Also note that the first cell layer in each block will also be the last layer to be added back to the solution domain.
43 (last) 2 1 (first)
(first) 1 2
43 (last)
Figure T11.1-4
Order of cell layer removal
Cell layer removal is performed using command EDCELL. The target cell layer set can be specified by cell range, cell type or cell group. In this tutorial, it is convenient to use the cell range option since the initial mesh creation operation has generated regular cell numbering. The range can be examined by turning on cell numbering (command NUMBER) and zooming in on the relevant cell layers (command ZOOM). Following that, remove the cells by: EDCE ADD CRAN 1 14 1 EDCE ADD CRAN 3061 3074 1 The removed cells can be listed using command ECLIST: ECLIST DEACT ALL Y Note that it is possible to modify the list of cells to be removed by using options CLEAR (clear all cells marked for removal) or DELETE (delete the selected cells from the removals list) in command EDCELL. The first event step is now complete and can be saved via command EVSAVE: EVSAVE 1 The remaining 42 initial cell removal events can be set up by making use of pro-STARs loop facility: *SET EVNU 2 1 *SET ETIM -49.0 1.0 *SET IC1 15 14 *SET IC2 28 14 *SET IC3 3047 -14 *SET IC4 3060 -14 *DEFI
Version 3.26
Include all cells within the range in the deletion list
Start with event no. 2 Set starting event time to 49 Set starting cell no. for block 1 Set starting cell no. for block 2 Dene the event loop
11-17
Tutorial 11.1
EVSTEP EVNU TIME ETIM EDDI LOCAL 1 1 EDCELL ADD CRAN IC1 IC2 1 EDCELL ADD CRAN IC3 IC4 1 EVSA EVNU *END *LOOP 1 41 1 Execute the loop 41 times With the ASI method, it is necessary to specify only changes in the mesh geometry changes in cell connectivity are accounted for automatically. The mesh geometry changes can be performed either by pro-STAR commands (i.e. using Change Grid operations) or by user coding in subroutine NEWXYZ. This tutorial employs the pro-STAR commands option. It does, however, also make use of subroutine UPARM as part of its mesh moving operation. More details of this are given later. Suppose we want the mesh to move in the way illustrated by Figure T11.1-3. The pro-STAR commands needed to change the mesh geometry in this way are included in the box shown overleaf. Create a le called cgrid.cgrd, as shown on page 11-19, using pro-STARs built-in editor or another editor and save it in the current directory before continuing with the tutorial.
Note that any pro-STAR command used in a Change Grid operation can make use of program-defined as well as user-defined parameters. The program-defined parameters are: ITER current time step number TIME current solution time LSTP current load step number EVEX last event number executed EVNO next event number to be executed ETIM time at which the next event is scheduled YPST piston position (special case) An example use of one such parameter (TIME) appears in the cgrid.cgrd file listing.
11-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
cgrid.cgrd ! ! pro-STAR commands to change mesh geometry ! ! Comments allowed in lines starting with a ! ! ! Spaces must inserted either side of arithmetic operators ! ! Parameters A and I are passed from the user code UPARM: ! ! A000 = delta t, time increment ! I000 = total number of cell layers added to mesh block 1 ! I001 = total number of cell layers added to mesh block 2 ! *IF TIME EQ 0. *SET DXD 0. *SET IADL 0 *SET IADU 0 *ELSE *SET DXD A000 * 30. * 100. *SET IADL I000 - 1 * 15 *SET IADU I001 - 1 * 15 *ENDIF CSET NEWS TYPE 1 VSET NEWS CSET VSET SUBS GRAN 0.01 200.99 VSET ADD VRAN,660 - IADL, 660, 15 RP15,,,-1 -1 VSET ADD VRAN,2325 - IADL, 2325, 15 RP15,,,-1 -1 VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,DXD CSET NEWS TYPE 3 VSET NEWS CSET VSET SUBS GRAN 0.01 200.99 VSET ADD VRAN,4744,4744 + IADU,15 RP15,,,1 1 VSET ADD VRAN,6409,6409 + IADU,15 RP15,,,1 1 VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,-1 * DXD VSET,NEWS,GRAN,-130.,-1. VMOD,VSET,0.,F,F VSET,NEWS,GRAN,202.,332. VMOD,VSET,201.,F,F CSET ALL As seen above, some commands in cgrid.cgrd make use of parameters A and I, which are supplied by user subroutine UPARM. A local copy of this subroutine
Version 3.26 11-19
Tutorial 11.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Sliding Events
must be placed in a subdirectory called ufile under your current working directory, as explained in Chapter 18 of the User Guide. This is done as follows: SYSTEM ufiles USUB WRITE UPARM Once you have exited from pro-STAR at the end of the current session, this subroutine should be edited so that it contains the code given in section User Subroutine on page 11-23. The edited subroutine will be included as part of the STAR executable at the compilation and linking stage. Sliding Events To set up an ASI case for this problem, two separate sliding events have to be defined, one each for objects A and B, together with the normal events required for moving mesh operations. The sliding events will be considered first. They are set up using command EVSLIDE: EVSLIDE 198 This defines event no. 198 as the first sliding event; it will be referenced later by those events that employ time explicitly. pro-STAR then reminds you to specify the master and slave sliding boundary face lists, plus offsets used to match the two sets. In this model, and for interface I (see Figure T11.0-2 on page 11-2), the master cells are chosen to be those in block 1 (region 1) and the slave cells in block 3 (region 2). The necessary definitions are provided via commands EOSLIDE, EMSLIDE and ESSLIDE, as follows: EMSLIDE ADD REGI 1 A total of 110 boundaries will be added to the master list. ESSLIDE ADD REGI 2 This adds 67 boundaries to the slave list. The next command, EOSLIDE, specifies that the boundaries on either side of the sliding interface are to be matched in the global Cartesian coordinate system (no. 1). The command also specifies that the offset required to match the two sliding regions at the start of the analysis is zero for both the x- and y-directions: EOSLIDE 1 0 0 The event can now be saved: EVSAVE 198 The sliding event for interface II can be set up in a similar way: EVSLIDE 199 EMSLIDE ADD REGI 3 ESSLIDE ADD REGI 4 EOSLIDE 1 0 0 EVSAVE 199
11-20
Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Grid-change Events
Again, this event will be referenced at a later stage by those events that employ time explicitly. This completes the ASI events required for the case. Grid-change Events The grid changing events can now be set up. The first 43 events defined earlier were concerned with mesh layer removal prior to the actual start of the simulation, i.e. they occurred at t < 0. The next event, number 44, is now set up for t = 0 as follows: EVST 44 TIME 0.0 The grid-changing commands for the analysis, previously entered in file cgrid.cgrd, are now read into this event using command EGRID: EGRID READ cgrid.cgrd C pro-STAR will respond by displaying all commands that change the mesh geometry on the screen. These commands will remain active for the entire run, i.e. for t 0. If it is necessary to stop or change them, another set of commands needs to be supplied at the appropriate event step. Before event no. 44 is saved, a reference to the arbitrary sliding events (nos. 198 and 199) defined earlier needs to be created, since these contain all information on the sliding boundary sets: EASI 198 ENABLE EASI 199 ENABLE Event no. 44 is now complete and can be saved: EVSAVE 44 The initial set up is now complete. Layer Removal /Addition Events During the analysis, two mesh transformation operations will be required at regular intervals and for each sliding block, namely: 1. Addition of a cell layer. 2. Removal of a cell layer. Referring to Figure T11.1-3 on page 11-15, it can be seen that both these operations should have occured by the time the mesh slides from position (a) to position (e). However, given that this motion takes place over four time steps, it is clear that a judgement needs to be made on the precise instant when the layer addition/removal takes place. The strategy adopted here is to: 1. Add a layer at position (b). 2. Remove a layer from the opposite end of the block at position (e). Starting from the beginning of the simulation, this means that the first layer addition should occur at t = 0.00025 and the first layer removal at time t = 0.001. Thus, the next event in the series (no. 45) is defined as follows: EVST 45 TIME 0.00025 In this event, two cell layers need to be added as shown in Figure T11.1-5 below.
Version 3.26 11-21
Tutorial 11.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Layer Removal /Addition Events
This is done by command EACELL, which also specifies the cell range involved: EACE ADD CRAN 589 602 1 EACE ADD CRAN 2473 2486 1 Event no. 45 can now be saved: EVSA 45
remove add
add
remove
Figure T11.1-5
Cell layers to be added and removed in events 45 and 46 respectively
In the next event (no. 46), two cell layers need to be removed. This can only be done when the mesh reaches position (e), i.e. at time t = 0.001. Therefore: EVST 46 TIME 0.001 The direction for cell removal is specified through command EDDIR. Use the local coordinate system: EDDI LOCAL 1 1 Cell layer removal is done in the same way as for events 1 to 43: EDCE ADD CRAN 1457 1470 1 EDCE ADD CRAN 1605 1618 1 The event can now be saved: EVSAVE 46 Definition of further events must continue in a similar fashion, alternating between a cell addition event and a cell removal event. The most convenient way of doing this is by using pro-STARs loop facility. Thus, for cell addition events starting at no. 47: *SET EVNU 47 2 *SET ETIM 0.00125 0.001 *SET IA1 575 -14 *SET IA2 588 -14 *SET IA3 2487 14 *SET IA4 2500 14 *DEFI EVSTEP EVNU TIME ETIM
11-22 Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
EACELL ADD CRAN IA1 IA2 1 EACELL ADD CRAN IA3 IA4 1 EVSAVE EVNU *END *LOOP 1 41 1 Similarly, for cell removal events starting at no. 48: *SET EVNU 48 2 *SET ETIM 0.0020 0.001 *SET ID1 1443 -14 *SET ID2 1456 -14 *SET ID3 1619 14 *SET ID4 1632 14 *DEFI EVSTEP EVNU TIME ETIM EDDI LOCAL 1 1 EDCE ADD CRAN ID1 ID2 1 EDCE ADD CRAN ID3 ID4 1 EVSA EVNU *END *LOOP 1 41 1 This completes the events specification for the model. Final Operations Write the geometry and problem files (the events file will be automatically saved when writing the geometry file) and exit: File > Write Geometry File Type 0.01 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom,0.01 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE User Subroutine As explained earlier, sub-directory ufile includes a file called uparm.f that contains source code for subroutine UPARM. Replace the default contents of le uparm.f with the code shown below, using pro-STARs built-in editor or any other editor. Note that subroutine UPARM calls an internal STAR-CD subroutine called LIVCLL:
Version 3.26
11-23
Tutorial 11.1
C*********************************************************************** SUBROUTINE UPARM(VCORN,A,I) C User-coded EGRID parameters C*********************************************************************** C----------------------------------------------------------------------C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 C----------------------------------------------------------------------INCLUDE 'comdb.inc' COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) DIMENSION A(0:999),I(0:999) DIMENSION VCORN(3,NDMAXU) INCLUDE 'usrdat.inc' C----------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to generate parameters to be used C by pro-STAR when it is called during the execution of "egrid" C in a moving mesh transient solution. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: A,I C C----------------------------------------------------------------------NDOM=0 C C Mesh block 1 attached to object A: C C Pre-removed cells at time dt < 0 C DO 10 IC=14,602,14 C C STAR routine used to check the status of a cell with pro-STAR cell C number IC: C CISTAT= 0 => DELETED CISTAT= -1 => MARKED FOR DELETION CISTAT= -2 => NO SUCH FLUID CELL (MAY BE SOLID, BAFFLE, SHELL ETC) CISTAT= 1 => LIVE CELL C CALL LIVCLL(IC,ISTAT) C IF(ISTAT.EQ.1) NDOM=NDOM+1 10 CONTINUE C I(0)=NDOM NUP=0 C C Mesh block 2 attached to object B: C DO 20 IC=2473,3061,14 CALL LIVCLL(IC,ISTAT) IF(ISTAT.EQ.1) NUP=NUP+1 20 CONTINUE I(1)=NUP C C pass dt back to STAR C A(0)=DT RETURN 11-24 Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
END
CFD Analysis (STAR) Start the CFD analysis by typing star in your STAR-CD session window. The analysis will terminate after 160 time steps. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Start up pro-STAR and then enter the case name, tut, in the text box of the introductory panel. Accept the rest of the default settings and click Continue. The model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Ensure the STAR GUIde window is open and placed next to the main pro-STAR window. Specify the file containing the transient post data: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select the rst list position again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
EVFI CONN TRLO tut.pstt MVGR C Postprocessing Identify the point in time (or time step number) at which results are to be displayed, in this case step number 120: In the Select Time Step list, select step number 120 Click Store Iter/Time
STORE ITER 120 Since the mesh changes with time, the vertex coordinates and the velocity vector components have to be read in before plotting:
Version 3.26
Go to the Data tab, select item Velocity Components UV from the Vector Data list and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Go to the Vectors tab and type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box Click Apply
11-25
Tutorial 11.1
Go to the Options tab Select option User from the Range menu and then enter 0. and 30. as the end values of the range Click Apply Go to the Section Clipped tab and then choose Option Vector and Edge/Mesh None In the Single Plane Plot tab, type 0.5 in the Z coordinate box for item POINT Click Apply Click Plot to Screen Figure T11.1-6
GETC U V NONE POPT VECT PLME OFF PLTY SECT SPOINT 0. 0. 0.5 SNORM 0 0 1 VESC 0.5 CSCA 14 USER 0. 30. CPLO
The following command loop will display velocity vectors for all time steps saved on the transient post data file: *SET ITT 4 4 *DEFI
11-26 Version 3.26
Tutorial 11.1
STORE ITER ITT GETC U V NONE CPLOT *END *LOOP 1 39 The vertex-based pressure values may be plotted as follows: STOR GETV POPT CSCA CPLOT In the STAR GUIde window, click Go To Load Data Go to the File(s) tab Select step number 120 in the Select Time Step list and then click Store Iter/Time Go to the Data tab Select Cell&Wall/Bound from the Data Type menu Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Go to the the Options tab Select option Local from the Range menu Click Apply Go to the Section Clipped tab and choose Option Contour (lled) Click Plot to Screen Figure T11.1-7 ITER 120 NONE P CONT 14 LOCAL
Version 3.26
11-27
Tutorial 11.1
Final Operations
It is essential not to save the file tut.mdl when quitting pro-STAR as the current geometry corresponds to the status of the mesh at time step 120: File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
QUIT, NOSAVE
11-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12 THERMAL RADIATION IN AN ENCLOSURE

Physical Problem Description In this tutorial, STAR-CDs analytical procedures for thermal radiation problems are applied to the radiant heat exchange between the surfaces of an enclosure filled with a non-participating medium. The model is a simplified representation of the rear portion of an automobile engine compartment. The primary radiation source is a catalytic converter and the main area affected is the rear bulkhead. The radiation exchange between the catalyst and the enclosure boundaries is partially obstructed by a steering rack, represented here by a simple cylinder. Heat transfer takes place between six regions: the catalyst, the steering rack, the rear bulkhead, the side walls and hood, the engine, and finally an escape boundary at the bottom of the engine compartment representing a non-reflecting surface at ambient conditions. The enclosure geometry and the various boundaries mentioned above are shown in Figure T12.0-1 and Figure T12.0-2. The steering rack is assigned different thermal properties in turn and the corresponding effect on the surrounding boundaries is analysed in separate sub-tutorials. Thus, the rack is treated as an adiabatic surface in Tutorial 12.1 and as a conducting bar in Tutorial 12.2. Default material properties are assumed for the fluid within the enclosure, except that convective heat transfer through it is made negligible for the sake of simplicity. Modelling Strategy The following modelling strategy is chosen: No uid ow. Only the temperature equation is solved A mix of xed temperature and adiabatic wall boundary conditions A pressure boundary at ambient conditions through which heat is lost to the surrounding air A mesh density high enough to model the various boundary surface shapes adequately and to capture thermal gradients along them with reasonable accuracy
Version 3.26
12-1
Modelling Strategy
Hood
Engine
0.4631 m
Space occupied by catalyst
Steering rack 0.12 m diameter
0.47
17 m
Side wall
0.6 m
Figure T12.0-1
Thermal radiation enclosure front view
Side wall
Steering rack
Rear bulkhead
Escape boundary (ambient conditions)
Figure T12.0-2
12-2
Thermal radiation enclosure rear view

Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
ADIABATIC STEERING RACK
Tutorial 12.1
In the first sub-tutorial, the analysis is performed on the assumption that the steering rack surface is an adiabatic wall. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a directory for the tutorial (say tut12-1). For this problem, the mesh geometry is supplied in advance, i.e. cell and vertex definitions are included ready-to-use in files tut.cel and tut.vrt. Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure that the supplied files are copied into your current directory. Begin the modelling task by specifying the case name and problem title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 12.1 - THERMAL RADIATION IN AN ENCLOSURE (ADIABATIC STEERING RACK) Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 12.1 - THERMAL RADIATION IN AN ENCLOSURE (ADIABATIC STEERING RACK) Mesh Creation Read in the predefined cells and vertices: Tools > Cell Tool Select Cell Read to display the Cell Read dialog Accept the default settings, click Apply and then Close Close the Cell Tool Tools > Vertex Tool Select Vertex Read to display the Vertex Read dialog Accept the default settings, click Apply and then Close Close the Vertex Tool
CREAD,tut.cel VREAD,tut.vrt Verify that the input data are correct by selecting all cells and vertices and plotting the mesh in Hidden Surface mode
Version 3.26
In the main window, select C > All. The I/O window display shows that 5,562 cells were read in. Select V > All. The I/O window display shows that 6,616 vertices were read in. Check that Hidden Surface is the default cell plot type
12-3
Tutorial 12.1
Click Cell Plot Change the viewpoint to approximately (1, 0.5, 1) using the orientation cubes slider controls Figure T12.1-1
CSET,ALL VSET,ALL PLTYPE,EHID VIEW,1,0.5,1 CPLOT
The red cells shown in the above plot correspond to fluid cells of type 1. The green cells (representing the steering rack) correspond to solid cells of type 2. Boundary Define boundary locations graphically on a plot of the mesh geometry. In most Specication cases, default boundary conditions and a region name would also be defined at this stage. However, to demonstrate pro-STARs flexibility in handling such information, the boundary locations in this tutorial are defined first and the region names and types are left for a later stage of the model setup. First collect all fluid cells and plot with the boundary display on: In the main window, select C > New > Fluid Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Cell Plot
CSET,NEWS,FLUID BDIS ON CPLOT

12-4 Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
The STAR GUIde facilities may now be used to pick a vertex on each boundary surface and assign a region number to it, changing the mesh view as necessary. Start by marking the bottom and curved surfaces of the catalyst: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Locate Boundaries and then open the Create Boundaries panel In the Regions tab, select region no. 1 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Edges and then pick a vertex on the bottom surface of the catalyst, shown overleaf Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the curved surface of the catalyst
VSET,NEWS,EDGE BFIND,1,VX BFIND,1,VX Change the view and then mark the top surface of the catalyst Change the viewpoint to approximately (1, -0.5, 1) using the orientation cubes slider controls Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the top surface of the catalyst, shown overleaf Figure T12.1-2
VIEW,1,-0.5,1 BSET ALL REPLOT BFIND,1,VX BSET ALL REPLOT Check that the whole catalyst surface has been properly defined. There should now be 168 boundaries in total.
Version 3.26
12-5
Tutorial 12.1
Specify the steering rack boundaries and check the result (432 additional boundaries) In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 2 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the steering rack surface, shown overleaf Click Plot Region Select the edge plotting option by clicking the edge button. This gives you a clear view of the region just created Figure T12.1-3 Deselect the edge plotting option by clicking the edge button again
BFIND,2,VX BSET NEWS REGI 2 EDGE ON REPLOT EDGE OFF
12-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
Change the view and specify the bulkhead boundaries (324 additional boundaries) Change the viewpoint to approximately (-1, 0.5, 1) using the orientation cubes slider controls In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 3 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the bulkhead surface, shown overleaf Click Plot Region Click the edge button to display an edge plot and then check the region boundaries just created Figure T12.1-4 Deselect the edge plotting option by clicking the edge button again
VIEW,-1,0.5,1 BSET ALL REPLOT BFIND,3,VX BSET NEWS REGI 3 EDGE ON REPLOT EDGE OFF REPLOT
Version 3.26
12-7
Tutorial 12.1
Specify one side of the compartment (252 additional boundaries) In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 4 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the compartment surface nearest to you
BFIND,4,VX Specify the top of the compartment (300 additional boundaries) Select region no. 5 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the top compartment surface, shown overleaf
BFIND,5,VX Change the view and specify the other side (252 additional boundaries) Change the viewpoint to approximately (-1, 0.5, -1) using the orientation cubes slider controls In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 6 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the compartment surface nearest to you Figure T12.1-5
VIEW,-1,0.5,-1 BSET NEWS REGI 4 BSET ADD REGI 5 REPLOT

12-8 Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
BFIND,6,VX BSET ADD REGI 6 REPLOT
Change the view and specify the bottom of the compartment, i.e. the escape boundary (300 additional boundaries) Change the viewpoint to approximately (1, -0.5, 1) using the orientation cubes slider controls In the main window, select B > None and then Replot In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 7 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the bottom compartment surface, shown overleaf Click Plot Region Click the edge button to display an edge plot and then check the region boundaries just created Figure T12.1-6 Deselect the edge plotting option by clicking the edge button again
VIEW,1,-0.5,1 REPLOT BFIND,7,VX BSET NEWS REGI 7 EDGE ON REPLOT EDGE OFF
Version 3.26
12-9
Tutorial 12.1
REPLOT
Specify the engine surface boundaries (288 additional boundaries) In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 8 from the scroll list Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the engine surface, shown overleaf Click Plot Region Click the edge button to display an edge plot and then check the region boundaries just created Figure T12.1-7 Deselect the edge plotting option by clicking the edge button again
BFIND,8,VX BSET NEWS REGI 8 EDGE ON REPLOT
12-10
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Material Assignment and Thermal Options
The I/O window printout should show that there is now a total of 2,316 boundary definitions. Restore the normal mesh view: In the main window, deselect Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Replot
EDGE OFF BDIS OFF REPL Material Assignment and Thermal Options All fluid cells within the enclosure should already be assigned to material no. 1 by default. Check this via the Cell Table Editor: In the main window, click CTAB to display the Cell Table Editor Select cell type no. 1 and verify that the Material Number value is 1
Surface-to-surface radiation can be tracked only through cells that are explicitly allowed to participate in radiative heat transfer. In this case, we will assume that the steering rack is opaque and hence we only track radiation through the fluid: Select option On from the Radiation menu Click Apply
CTAB 1,,,,,,,,,ON Assign material no. 2 to the solid cells making up the steering rack:
Version 3.26
Select cell type no. 2 and then enter 2 in the Material Number box Click Apply
12-11
Tutorial 12.1
Close the Cell Table Editor
CTAB,2,SOLID,,,2 In this tutorial radiative effects from the fluid are neglected, i.e. this is a non-participating media analysis involving simply a surface radiative heat exchange. This type of problem can be handled most efficiently using STAR-CDs external view factor calculation method (FASTRAC). Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and open the Thermal Options panel In the Radiation section of the panel, select option Discrete Transfer FASTRAC VF Calc Enter a value of 293 in the Surrounding environment temperature box Click Apply
RADIATION VFNP,293,0.3 Material Properties Check that the properties of material 1 are those of air (i.e. the pro-STAR default fluid properties): In the STAR GUIde window, select the Liquids and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel and check that the material number in the Material # scroll bar is set to 1 It can be seen that material no. 1 is, by default, a uid whose properties are those of air
PMAT,1,FLUID Reset the thermal conductivity to a very small value in order to make conductive heat transfer through the fluid negligible: Type 0.1e-6 in the k text box and click Apply
CONDUC,CONSTANT,0.1E-6 The remaining properties are unimportant since no fluid flow takes place and there is no heat transfer through the steering rack (due to the adiabatic wall boundary condition to be specified later). Turn on the solution of the energy equation: Open the Thermal Models panel Select Temperature Calculation On and then click Apply
TEMP ON Check the monitoring cell location:

12-12
Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Check that the Monitoring cell number entry is 1
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
MONIT,1 Boundary Conditions Set the necessary fixed wall temperatures and define all adiabatic walls. Also specify values for surface emissivity and reflectivity. Catalyst surface Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the region scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Catalyst in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu Fixed Temperature box 773 Emissivity box 0.8 Ther. Reectivity box 0.2 Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEFINE,1,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] FIXED,773 0.8,0.2 0.0 RNAME 1 Catalyst Steering rack surface Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Rack in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu check that the setting is Adiabatic Emissivity box 0.2 Ther. Reectivity box 0.8 Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEFINE,2,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] ADIABAT 0.2,0.8 0.0
Version 3.26
12-13
Tutorial 12.1
RNAME 2 Rack Rear bulkhead Select region no. 3 in the scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Bulkhead in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu check that the setting is Adiabatic Emissivity box 0.95 Ther. Reectivity box 0.05 Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEFINE,3,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] ADIABAT 0.95,0.05 0.0 RNAME 3 Bulkhead Hood and side walls Select region no. 4 in the scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Side_wall_1 in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu check that the setting is Adiabatic Emissivity box 0.2 Ther. Reectivity box 0.8 Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply Select region no. 5 in the scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Hood in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu check that the setting is Adiabatic Emissivity box 0.2 Ther. Reectivity box 0.8 Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply Select region no. 6 in the scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Side_wall_2 in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu check that the setting is Adiabatic Emissivity box 0.2 Ther. Reectivity box 0.8
Version 3.26
12-14
Tutorial 12.1
Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEFINE,4,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] ADIABAT 0.2,0.8 0.0 RNAME 4 Side_wall_1 RDEFINE,5,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] ADIABAT 0.2,0.8 0.0 RNAME 5 Hood RDEFINE,6,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] ADIABAT 0.2,0.8 0.0 RNAME 6 Side_wall_2 Escape boundary This region needs to be made transparent to radiation so the boundary emissivity must be set to 0.0. Environmental radiation entering into the solution domain through this boundary will be calculated on the basis of the environment temperature specified in the Thermal Options panel. Select region no. 7 in the scroll list Select option Pressure from the from the Region Type menu Type Ambient in the Region Name box Enter 0.0 in the Emissivity box Accept the default settings for all parameters and click Apply
RDEFINE,7,PRESSURE [carriage return] 293,0.0 RNAME 7 Ambient
Version 3.26
12-15
Tutorial 12.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Radiation Patch Specication
Engine surface Select region no. 8 in the scroll list Select option Wall from the Region Type menu Type Engine in the Region Name box Specify the following thermal characteristics for the boundary: Wall Heat menu Fixed Temperature box 373 Accept the default settings for the remaining parameters and click Apply
RDEFINE,8,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] FIXED,373 1.0,0.0 0.0 RNAME 8 Engine Radiation pro-STARs patching utility is used successively in each wall region to designate Patch sub-groups of boundaries as radiation patches. In regions 1, 2 and 3, each boundary Specication face is to become a single radiation patch. In regions 4, 5, 6 and 8, the number of patches created for the whole region will be approximately 50. Select folder Locate Boundaries and open the Create Boundaries panel Go to the Regions tab and select region no. 1 Go to the Patches tab and select option Set number of patches as % ... from the Patch Denition menu Enter 100 in the Enter Percentage Value box and then click Set Slider. The Approximate Number of Patches box will indicate that the number of patches will be equal to the number of boundaries shown in the Total Number of Boundaries box, as intended Click Apply Patch Properties Repeat the above process for region nos. 2 and 3 Continue by selecting region no. 4 in the Regions tab Go to the Patches tab and select option Specify typical number of patches ... from the Patch Denition menu Enter 50 in the Typical Number of Patches box Click Apply Patch Properties Repeat the above for region nos. 5, 6 and 8
bpatch,1,0,byper,1.0 bpatch,2,0,byper,1.0 bpatch,3,0,byper,1.0 bpatch,4,0,bynum,50 bpatch,5,0,bynum,50 bpatch,6,0,bynum,50

12-16 Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
bpatch,8,0,bynum,50 The patches created can now be displayed graphically for each region: Change the viewpoint to approximately (1, 0.5, 1) using the orientation cubes slider controls In the Create Boundaries panel, open the Regions tab and then select region no. 1 in the scroll list Click Plot Region In the main window, select Cell Plot Display Option Patch Click Replot to display the patches for region no. 1 Repeat for region nos. 2, 3, 8 (displayed individually) and 4, 5, 6 (displayed together) Deselect the Patch Cell Plot Display Option
BDISPLAY,PATCH VIEW,1,0.5,1 BSET,NEWS,REGI,1 REPLOT BSET,NEWS,REGI,2 REPLOT BSET,NEWS,REGI,3 REPLOT BSET,NEWS,REGI,4 BSET,ADD,REGI,5 BSET,ADD,REGI,6 REPLOT BSET,NEWS,REGI,8 REPLOT BDISPLAY,OFF Analysis Controls Turn off the solution of all equations except temperature Select the Analysis Controls folder, followed by the Solution Controls sub-folder Select sub-folder Equation Behavior and then open the Primary Variables panel On the Equation Status tab, deselect the Solve button for all variables except Temperature Click Apply
SOLVE,N,N,N,N,N,N,Y Request a printout of input data and heat balance checks:
Version 3.26
12-17
Tutorial 12.1
Numerical Analysis Run Time Controls
Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Monitor Numeric Behavior panel Select options Echo Input Data and Print Iteration Residuals and Conservation Checks Click Apply
PRCHECK,ECHO,,CONV Save heat transfer data at the walls in the solution file: Open the Analysis Output panel Go to the Additional Output Data section and then select item Heat Transfer Coef. from the Wall Data scroll list Click option button Post Repeat the above two steps for items Wall Temperature, Incident Radiation and Radiosity Click Apply
POWALL SPEC HTRA Y TEMP Y TIRA Y TRAD Y Run Time Controls In this tutorial, the aim is to achieve an accurate temperature distribution along the adiabatic boundary surfaces. Therefore, STAR must be made to perform a sufficiently large number of iterations (50) to allow the surface temperature algorithm to converge to a self-consistent solution. This can be done by setting the maximum iteration number to 50 and reducing the residual error tolerance to an artificially low value. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Type 50 in the Number of Iterations box and 0.1e-8 in the Max. Residual Tolerance box Click Apply
ITER,50,0.1E-8 Numerical Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder in the STAR GUIde window and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the Select Surface Location setting is Volume Surface Leave all other settings at their default values and then click Calculate View Factors Once the view factor calculation is complete, click Start New Analysis
VFCALC,VOLUME,INTE GEOM,tut.geom PROB,tut.prob

12-18 Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
The analysis will then start automatically. The system will calculate the view factors and save them in file tut.nvfs. After the run has finished: Open the Run History of Previous Analysis panel Click Browse Additional Output File
Check the contents of file tut.info to verify that the steady state heat transfer rates are balanced; the ratio HDIFF/QROUT should be of order 1010 in the final iteration (see Heat balance checks in Chapter 19 of the User Guide for an explanation of these quantities). Save the model data: In the main window, select File > Save Model
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing Begin by storing wall temperatures: Go to the Data tab Select Wall from the Data Type menu Select item Wall Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data
The information in the I/O window shows that boundary surface shells are automatically created for this plot and that the wall shells are of cell type 5. Collect these shells and plot: In the main window, select Tools > Cell Tool Select cell type 5 in the Cell Table scroll list Close the Cell Tool In the main window, select C > New > Type(Current) Select plot type Contour Plot Plot > Wall Plot
Figure T12.1-8
GETWALL,TEMP POPT CONT PLTYPE EHID CSET,NEWS,TYPE,5 WPLOT
Version 3.26
12-19
Tutorial 12.1
Add the reference temperature value to the wall shell values to get the absolute temperature in degrees Kelvin: Select Post > Change to display the Change Post Data dialog Make appropriate selections and enter the required values as shown below:
Click Apply and then Close
CHANGE,CSET,,,1,273 The next plot combines several wall temperature distributions on a single plot frame using a common temperature scale. Thus, the distributions can be compared easily with each other. First, select the surfaces of the catalyst, steering rack and bulkhead:
12-20
Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Locate Boundaries Open the Create Boundaries panel
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
Select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions list In the main window, select B > New > Region (Current) Add regions 2 and 3 to the set, by rst selecting each one in the Boundary Regions list and then selecting B > Add > Region (Current) In the main window, select V > New > Boundary Set Select C > New > Vertex Set (All)
BSET,NEWS,REGI,1 BSET,ADD,REGI,2 BSET,ADD,REGI,3 VSET,NEWS,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL Specify the exact size and shape of the sub-window in which to plot temperatures for the above surfaces. Also supply an appropriate label for the plot heading and units via command HEADING: WINDOW 1.0 5.0 9.0 11.0 HEADING WALL TEMPERATURE KELVIN Plot the temperatures: Select Plot > Legend > Box to turn off the border around the plot Plot > Wall Plot
PLDI OFF BOX WPLOT Now select the top and sides of the enclosure and superimpose their temperature distributions on the existing plot to complete the picture: Plot > Display > Overlay In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 4 in the Boundary Regions list In the main window, select B > New > Region (Current) Add regions 5 and 6 to the set, by rst selecting each of them and then selecting B > Add > Region (Current) In the main window, select V > New > Boundary Set Select C > New > Vertex Set (All)
OVER ON BSET,NEWS,REGI,4 BSET ADD REGI 5 BSET ADD REGI 6 VSET,NEWS,BSET

Version 3.26 12-21
Tutorial 12.1
CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL Specify the size and shape of the second sub-window in which the temperature for the above surfaces is to be plotted and fix the scale to that of the plot already displayed on your screen: WINDOW 3.0 1.0 11.0 6.0 CSCA 14 PFIX Plot the second part of the overall display: WPLOT Plot > Wall Plot Figure T12.1-9
Restore the normal plot settings: Select Plot > Display and then deselect the Overlay option Select Plot > Legend > Box Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Post-Processing Open the Create Plots panel and then go to tab Options In the Color Scale section, select option Auto from the Range menu Click Apply and then Close In the main window, select Plot > Window > Default
OVER OFF PLDI ON BOX CSCA

12-22 Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
[carriage return] WIND DEFAULT Select the surface of the steering rack and plot its temperature in the normal style Go to the Create Boundaries panel and select region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions list In the main window, select B > New > Region (Current) Select V > New > Boundary Set Select C > New > Vertex Set (All) Plot > Wall Plot Figure T12.1-10
BSET,NEWS,REGI,2 VSET,NEWS,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL WPLOT
Store the radiosity (TRAD) and irradiation (TIRA) values. Calculate the heat flux (net thermal radiation leaving the surface) for each wall by subtracting TIRA from TRAD. Store the heat flux in register 4.
Version 3.26
Post > Operate In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Function > Load Wall Data > Thermal Radiosity Select Register 5 as the destination for the data from the second pop-up menu Click Apply
12-23
Tutorial 12.1
Select Function > Load Wall Data > Thermal Inc. Rad. Select Register 6 as the destination for the data from the second pop-up menu Click Apply Select Function > Multi-Register > Subtract Select appropriate register settings from the pop-up menus displayed, as shown below:
Click Apply
OPER,GETW,TRAD,5 OPER,GETW,TIRA,6 OPER,SUBT,5,6,4 Select the fixed temperature boundaries: Go to the Create Boundaries panel and select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions list In the main window, select B > New > Region (Current) Add region 8 to the set, by rst highlighting it and then selecting B > Add > Region (Current) In the main window, select V > New > Boundary Set Select C > New > Vertex Set (All) Change the viewpoint to approximately (-1, 0.5, 1) using the orientation cubes slider controls
BSET,NEWS,REGI,1 BSET,ADD,REGI,8 VSET,NEWS,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL VIEW,-1,0.5,1 Supply labels for the plot heading and units explicitly via command HEADING because heat flux is a locally calculated quantity: HEADING Heat Flux W/m**2 Plot the heat flux:
12-24
Plot > Wall Plot
Figure T12.1-11
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
WPLOT
Store the boundary areas and then calculate and store the boundary heat rates in register 4. In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Function > Single-Register > Copy Copy the data from register 4 to register 5 by selecting appropriate register settings from the pop-up menus displayed, as shown below:
Click Apply Select Function > Load Wall Data > Area Select Register 1 as the destination for the data from the second pop-up menu Click Apply Select Function > Multi-Register > Multiply Select appropriate register settings from the pop-up menus displayed, as shown below:
Version 3.26
12-25
Tutorial 12.1
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Macro Denition
Click Apply and then Close
OPER,COPY,4,5 OPER,GETW,AREA,1 OPER,MULT,1,5,4 Sum the boundary heat rates for each of the fixed temperature regions. This may be done by selecting each region in turn and then looking at the value calculated by command SUMMARIZE over that region, based on the values already stored in register 4. The required operations (in command form) are given below, along with the result obtained for each region: Catalyst (+1863 Watts): BSET,NEWS,REGI,1 VSET,NEWS,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL SUMM,CSET Engine (1255 Watts): BSET,NEWS,REGI,8 VSET,NEWS,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL SUMM,CSET Macro Denition The post-processing operations described above will be repeated in the next sub-tutorial (Tutorial 12.2). It is therefore advisable to save the relevant commands for the most complex operations as STAR-CD macros, so as to simplify and shorten the process of generating plots in the next sub-tutorial. The macros may already be available to you, ready-to-use, in a local or global macro sub-directory (see Macros in Chapter 20 of the User Guide). If the macros are not available, or if you want to practice creating macros, follow the instructions below: Panels > Dene Macro Click on the text box at the bottom of the Dene Macro dialog and type Multisurf, This will be the name of the macro to generate a plot of the type shown in Figure Figure T12.1-9 Click New. This adds a new macro with that name in the scroll list. Note that the full stop (.) in front of the name signies that the macro denition is placed by default in the present working directory, in a le called Multisurf.MAC With the macro name still highlighted, click Open to display the new (blank) macro
Version 3.26
12-26
Tutorial 12.1
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Macro Denition
Specify the contents of the macro by typing in the following commands (an easier way of doing this is to copy and paste commands from the I/O window or from the echo le tut.echo)
VIEW 1.0 0.5 1.0 GETWALL TEMP POPT CONT PLTY EHID CSET NEWS TYPE 5 CHANGE CSET,,,1,273 BSET NEWS REGI 1 BSET ADD REGI 2 BSET ADD REGI 3 VSET NEWS BSET CSET NEWS VSET ALL WINDOW 1.0 5.0 9.0 11.0 HEADING WALL TEMPERATURE KELVIN PLDI OFF BOX WPLOT OVER ON BSET NEWS REGI 4 BSET ADD REGI 5 BSET ADD REGI 6 VSET NEWS BSET CSET NEWS VSET ALL WINDOW 3.0 1.0 11.0 6.0 CSCA 14 PFIX WPLOT OVER OFF PLDI ON BOX CSCA WIND DEFAULT In the macro editor menu bar, choose File > Save followed by File > Quit Click on the text box at the bottom of the Dene Macro dialog and type Radiasum, the name of the macro to generate a wall plot of the type shown in Figure Figure T12.1-11. The macro will also perform the calculation of boundary heat rates that follow that plot. Click New. This adds a new macro with that name in the scroll list. Note that the full stop (.) in front of the name signies that the macro denition is placed by default in the present working directory, in a le called Radiasum.MAC With the macro name still highlighted, click Open to display the new (blank) macro Specify the contents of the macro by typing in the following commands (alternatively, copy and paste commands from the I/O window or from
12-27
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.1
the echo le tut.echo) OPER GETW TRAD 5 OPER GETW TIRA 6 OPER SUBT 5 6 4 BSET NEWS REGI 1 BSET ADD REGI 8 VSET NEWS BSET CSET NEWS VSET ALL VIEW -1 0.5 1 HEADING Heat Flux W/m**2 WPLOT OPER COPY 4,5 OPER GETW AREA 1 OPER MULT 1 5 4 BSET NEWS REGI 1 VSET NEWS BSET CSET NEWS VSET ALL SUMM CSET BSET NEWS REGI 8 VSET NEWS BSET CSET NEWS VSET ALL SUMM CSET In the macro editor menu bar, choose File > Save followed by File > Quit Close the Dene Macro dialog
The most convenient way of re-using these macros in Tutorial 12.2 is to copy them in a local or global macro sub-directory. Final Operations File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
QUIT,NOSAVE
12-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.2
CONDUCTING STEERING RACK
Tutorial 12.2
The model employed here is the same as in Tutorial 12.1, except that STAR-CDs conjugate heat transfer facility is used to calculate heat flow within the steering rack. To this effect, the boundary condition for the steering rack surface is changed from adiabatic wall to conducting wall. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut12-2). Before running pro-STAR, copy file tut.mdl in directory tut12-1 to the new directory to make the previous model definition the starting point for the new model. Start the pre-processing task by specifying the case name and problem title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 12.2 - THERMAL RADIATION IN AN ENCLOSURE (CONDUCTING STEERING RACK) Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 12.2 - THERMAL RADIATION IN AN ENCLOSURE (CONDUCTING STEERING RACK) Thermal Options Turn on conjugate heat transfer: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and then open the Thermal Options panel Select option Heat Transfer On from the Conjugate Heat Transfer section of the panel Click Apply
CONJUGATE,ON Material Properties Define the thermal properties of the steering rack material (material no. 2): Select the Solids folder and then open the Material Properties panel Use the Material # scroll bar at the bottom of the panel to select material number 2 Type STEEL in the Name box Type 1.0e4 in the Density box Type 37.4 in the Conductivity box Type 486 in the Specic Heat box Click Apply
Version 3.26
12-29
Tutorial 12.2
PMAT,2,SOLID,STEEL DENS,CONST,1.0e4 CONDUC,CONSTANT,37.4 SPECIF,CONST,486. Specify the monitoring cell location: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 4483 in the Monitoring Cell Number box Click Apply
MONI,4483 Boundary Conditions Change boundary region 2 (the steering rack surface) from an adiabatic wall to a conducting wall with no thermal resistance at the fluid-solid interface. Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option Conduct. from the Wall Heat menu Click Apply
RDEFINE,2,WALL [carriage return] [carriage return] CONDUCT,0.0 0.2,0.8 0.0 Run Time Controls Modify the under-relaxation factor used for the enthalpy equation and set a new limit on the maximum iteration number to ensure convergence: Select folder Analysis Controls, followed by Solution Controls, followed by Equation Behavior Open panel Primary Variables and go to the Solver Parameters tab Enter a Relaxation Factor of 0.75 for variable Temp. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and open the Set Run Time Controls panel Change the entry in the Number of Iterations box to 500 Click Apply
RELAX RLT 0.75 ITER,500,0.1E-8
12-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.2
Numerical Analysis Preliminaries
Numerical Analysis To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: Go to the Analysis Preparation/Running folder in the STAR GUIde window and open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Check that the Select Surface Location setting is Volume Surface Click Calculate View Factors Select the Double Precision option Leave all other settings at their default values and then click Start New Analysis
VFCALC,VOLUME,INTE GEOM,tut.geom PROB,tut.prob STAR will now recalculate the view factors and store them in file tut.nvfs. Note that because boundary region no. 2 has been changed, file tut.nvfs from Tutorial 12.1 cannot be reused for this tutorial. After the run has finished: Open the Run History of Previous Analysis panel Click Browse Additional Output File
Examine the contents of file tut.info to verify that the ratio HDIFF(in the solid)/QROUT has been reduced to a small value; it should be of order 1012. Save the model data: In the main window, select File > Save Model
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing As in Tutorial 12.1, combine the wall temperature distributions for several different surfaces on a single plot frame using a common temperature scale. To do this, use the first macro defined in that tutorial. Select Panels > Dene Macro from pro-STARs main menu bar to display a list of the available macros, one of which should be .Multisurf. Note that the name displayed may also be L Multisurf or G Multisurf, depending on whether a local or global macro sub-directory is being used. If no names appear in the menu, you will need to copy the macro les created in Tutorial 12.1 to your current working directory and then click
12-31
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.2
Re-Scan Highlight Multisurf and then click Execute
Figure T12.2-1
*MACRO EXEC Multisurf
Select the surface of the steering rack and plot the temperature in the normal style: Go to the STAR GUIde window and select folder Locate Boundaries Open the Create Boundaries panel Select region no. 2 in the Boundary Regions list In the main window, select B > New > Region (Current) Select V > New > Boundary Set Select C > New > Vertex Set (All) Select Plot > Wall Plot Figure T12.2-2
BSET,NEWS,REGI,2 VSET,NEWS,BSET CSET,NEWS,VSET,ALL WPLOT
12-32
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.2
Now select the solid cells within the steering rack and plot their temperature: Select C > New > Solid In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing and then open the Load Data panel Go to the Data tab and choose Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) as the Data Type Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data and then select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, choose plot options Contour (lled) and Grid Click Plot to Screen Figure T12.2-3
CSET,NEWS,SOLID GETV NONE T CPLOT
Version 3.26
12-33
Tutorial 12.2
As in Tutorial 12.1, store the radiosity and irradiation values, calculate the heat flux (net thermal radiation leaving the surface) and plot. To do this, use the second macro defined in that tutorial. In the Dene Macro dialog, highlight macro name Radiasum and then click Execute Figure T12.2-4 Close the Dene Macro dialog
*MACRO EXEC Radiasum
12-34
Version 3.26
Tutorial 12.2
The boundary heat rates calculated for each of the fixed temperature regions and displayed in the I/O window are as follows: Catalyst (+1877 Watts): Engine (1244 Watts): Final Operations QUIT N File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
Version 3.26
12-35
Tutorial 13 FLOW IN AN ENGINE CYLINDER

Physical Problem Description This tutorial illustrates some of the transient, dynamic-mesh features of STAR-CD (namely event handling, moving grids and cell attachment/detachment) by setting up and solving a simple port-valve and piston-cylinder problem. The problem is two-dimensional and represents a simplified four-stroke engine, as illustrated in Figure T13.0-1. The fluid within the cylinder is assumed to be air, initially at room temperature and pressure. The simulation commences at bottom dead centre (BDC) and continues for a time interval corresponding to 360 of crank revolution. Inert scalars with the physical properties of air are used to track the intake and exhaust streams through the exhaust and induction strokes. The flow is assumed to be turbulent and driven entirely by the motion of the piston and valves. The port boundary pressures are held constant (at ambient conditions) throughout the simulation. Modelling Strategy Mesh design in problems with a moving mesh and changing cell connectivity is dominated by the need to keep the dynamic parts of the grid simple so that they can be easily changed during the transient run. The formulation of mesh motion in such problems is divided into two conceptual steps. The first deals with connectivity changes cell removal, addition, reconnection, etc. which are defined by pro-STAR events. The second step is to specify the grid vertex positions as a function of time by supplying a set of pro-STAR grid-manipulation commands to be executed at each time step. Other considerations include: 1. The initial mesh must contain all cells to be used in the analysis. Thus, it will be seen that the initial grid construction contains overlapping cells in the vicinity of the valves. These cells are rearranged according to the valve position at time = 0.0, i.e. at the start of the calculations. 2. When cells are added (activated), they are still deemed to be connected to the neighbours they had at the time of their removal (deactivation). This imposes sequencing constraints on the activation and deactivation processes. 3. If any part of the solution domain becomes separated from the rest of the ow eld during a transient run (e.g. the intake port after the intake valve has closed) the cell material type in that domain must be changed. All material types used must have been dened in the initial setup. The fluid in the cylinder is assumed to be air, behaving as an ideal gas. Constant, zero-pressure boundary conditions are assigned at the intake and exhaust port ends. The fluid originally in the intake port is assumed to be a different species called INTAKE and has the properties of air. Similarly, the exhaust port is filled with another fluid species called EXHAUST. The boundary mass fraction values for the two species are also set appropriately. By tracking the mass fraction of these species, the fresh charge and exhaust gas distributions can be deduced and global parameters such as volumetric efficiency, etc. can be computed. (It should be noted
Version 3.26 13-1
Modelling Strategy
that the model used in this tutorial is too coarse for any realistic computation of these values!) The valve lifts follow the curves shown in Figure T13.0-2. The exhaust valve opens within the first 20, stays open until 160, and closes linearly by 180. The intake valve begins to open at 180, stays open from 200 to 340, and closes by 360. Although this is a very simplistic profile, the technique used here to define valve lift is quite general and can be used for any lift profile. The piston motion is prescribed by setting the standard kinematic parameters for the connecting rod length, the crank radius and the top dead centre position.
Intake port
Exhaust port
Intake valve
Exhaust valve
Cylinder
Piston surface
Figure T13.0-1
Cylinder with intake and exhaust valves
13-2
Version 3.26
Modelling Strategy
Figure T13.0-2
Valve lift prole
Version 3.26
13-3
Tutorial 13.1
EXHAUST AND INTAKE STROKE SIMULATION
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Preliminaries
Tutorial 13.1
This tutorial models the engine operation during the exhaust and intake strokes. The simulation is made up of three parts, as follows: 1. pro-STAR pre-processing, including: (a) problem setup (b) grid-changing commands (c) event verication 2. STAR CFD analysis 3. pro-STAR post-processing, including: (a) visualisation of the ow eld at pre-dened times during the analysis (b) animated display of the ow eld transients Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for the tutorial (say tut13-1). All commands necessary for defining the basic grid have been omitted from this tutorial so as to concentrate on the steps needed for the actual moving mesh set-up. Therefore, the cell and vertex data are supplied in ready-to-use files tut.cel and tut.vrt which should be copied into your current sub-directory. The boundary definitions are supplied in data file tut.bnd. Please note that all commands listed below are contained in file prep.inp which is also supplied with this tutorial. Start the pre-processing task by entering pro-STAR and supplying the case name and problem title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title Type TUTORIAL 13.1 - CYLINDER WITH INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES in the Title text box Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 13.1 - CYLINDER WITH INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES Set the basic features of your model to ensure that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is open and then click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel
For this tutorial, the Time Domain option needs to be Transient but all other settings can remain unchanged.
13-4
Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu

Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Mesh Denition
Click Apply
TIME SINGLE It is also convenient to expressed time-related settings (time step magnitude, output frequency, etc.) in terms of crank angles rather than seconds, as follows: Go to the Time Relationships panel and select option Angle from the drop-down menu Enter 1000 in the RPM box and 0 in the Initial Position box Click Apply
TREL THETA 1000 0 Mesh Denition The various cell types used in the analysis are now defined. Click the CTAB button on the left hand side of the main window to open the Cell Table Editor dialog. Define the seven fluid cell types required, use the Name field for additional identification and note the following: 1. The Cylinder (CYLI), Intake Valve Bottom (IVB) and Exhaust Valve Bottom (EVB) cells are dened as material type 1. 2. The Intake Valve Top (IVT) and Intake Port (IPRT) cells are dened as material type 2. These regions will be isolated when the inlet valve closes. 3. The Exhaust Valve Top (EVT) and the Exhaust Port (EPRT) cells are dened as material type 3. These regions will be isolated when the exhaust valve closes. CTAB 1 CTNAME CTAB 2 CTNAME CTAB 3 CTNAME CTAB 4 CTNAME CTAB 5 CTNAME CTAB 6 CTNAME CTAB 7 CTNAME FLUI 2 1 CYLI FLUI 3 2 IVT FLUI 4 3 EVT FLUI 2 4 IVB FLUI 2 5 EVB FLUI 3 6 IPRT FLUI 4 7 EPRT 0 1 1 1 1 0 2 1 2 1 0 3 1 3 1 0 1 1 2 1 0 1 1 3 1 0 2 1 2 1 0 3 1 3 1
The predefined geometry is now be read in from the cell and vertex files: In the main window, choose Tools > Vertex Tool and then select Vertex Read
13-5
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Mesh Denition
In the Vertex Read dialog, use the pro-STAR browser (if necessary) to locate le tut.vrt and leave all other settings at their default values Cllick Apply and then Close. Close the Vertex Tool Similarly, choose Tools > Cell Tool and then select Cell Read to read cell denitions from the corresponding external le (tut.cel) Accept the default settings, click Apply and then Close Close the Cell Tool
VREA tut.vrt CREA tut.cel Mesh plots may be made at this point to see the relative location of the various cell types: In the main window, select C > All Choose cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Click Cell Plot
Figure T13.1-1
CSET ALL PLTYPE QHIDDEN CPLOT
It should be noted that cell types IVB and IVT (and also EVB and EVT) overlap in space. As the run progresses, these cells are selectively activated, deactivated and reordered such that no overlap occurs at any time during the solution. It should also be noted that the sides of these blocks of cells are not connected to the cylinder (CYLI) cells. These connections are made dynamically during the run by using
13-6 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Boundary Locations
moving mesh commands. Boundary Locations The boundary locations are read in from the external file tut.bnd. In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Locate Boundaries and then open panel Import Boundaries Use the pro-STAR browser (if necessary) to locate le tut.bnd Change the Boundary Option setting to Modify and accept the default settings for all other parameters Click Apply
BREA tut.bnd,,,,MODI Material Properties Define the attributes of the various cell types (assuming they all have the properties of air). For all materials: 1. Specify that the density varies according to the Ideal Gas Law 2. Switch on turbulence modelling (k- model) 3. Switch on the temperature calculation
Version 3.26
In the STAR GUIde window, select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and then the Liquids and Gases sub-folder Open the Molecular Properties panel and check that the Material # slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 Enter the material name, Cylinder_Fluid, in the Name box Select Ideal-f(T,P) as the Density option and click Apply Use the slider to select Material # 2 and enter the material name, Inl_Duct_Fluid, in the Name box Select Ideal-f(T,P) as the Density option and click Apply Use the slider to select Material # 3 and enter the material name, Exh_Duct_Fluid, in the Name box Select Ideal-f(T,P) as the Density option and click Apply Open the Turbulence Models panel and switch on turbulence by selecting the On button Choose k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu and click Apply Repeat the above selection for Material # 2 and # 1, using the slider to select the required material Open the Thermal Models panel and select Temperature Calculation On Click Show Options and choose option Chemico-Thermal from the Enthalpy menu. Click Apply Repeat the above selection for Material # 2 and # 3, using the slider to select the required material Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel and use the slider to select Material # 1 Enter 395 in the Monitoring cell number box and 403 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box Click Apply
13-7
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Scalar Denition
Use the slider to select Material # 2 Enter 485 in both the Monitoring cell number and Reference Pressure Cell Number boxes Click Apply Use the slider to select Material # 3 Enter 505 in both the Monitoring cell number and Reference Pressure Cell Number boxes Click Apply
PMAT 1 FLUID Cylinder_Fluid DENS,IDEAL MOLWT,28.96 TURB,KE,,STAN TEMP ON CHEM STAT PRES,,403 MONITOR,395 PMAT 2 FLUID Inl_Duct_Fluid DENS,IDEAL MOLWT,28.96 TURB,KE,,STAN TEMP ON CHEM STAT PRES,,485 MONITOR,485 PMAT 3 FLUID Exh_Duct_Fluid DENS,IDEAL MOLWT,28.96 TURB,KE,,STAN TEMP ON CHEM STAT PRES,,505 MONITOR,505 Scalar Denition A scalar variable needs to be set up to track the distribution of the inlet charge in the cylinder. The properties of the inlet scalar are those of air. Another scalar is also needed for the exhaust charge, to determine if any back flow occurs from the exhaust port into the cylinder when the valve opens. As pro-STAR permits naming of scalars, it is convenient to call them Intake and Exhaust, respectively. The required scalars are defined as follows:
13-8
In the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder, select the Additional Scalars sub-folder Open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel and check that the Scalar # slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 Type Intake in the Name box, choose Passive from the Inuence menu
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Boundary Conditions
and click Apply Use the slider to select Scalar # 2 Type Exhaust in the Name box, choose Passive from the Inuence menu and click Apply
SC 1 DEFI PASS UDEF $ Intake SC 2 DEFI PASS UDEF $ Exhaust For each cell type, assign the following initial conditions to the two scalars defined above: INTAKE mass fraction 1.0 in material 2, 0.0 elsewhere. EXHAUST mass fraction 1.0 in material 3, 0.0 elsewhere. In the Additional Scalars folder, open panel Initialization Select scalar no. 1 (INTAKE) in the Scalar scroll list at the top of the panel and material no 2 in the Material # scroll bar at the bottom of the panel Type 1.0 in the Initial Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select scalar no. 2 (EXHAUST) in the Scalar scroll list and material no 3 in the Material # scroll bar Type 1.0 in the Initial Mass Fraction box and then click Apply
PMAT 2 INISC,1,STAN,1.0 PMAT 3 INISC,2,STAN,1.0 Boundary Conditions Boundary conditions for the various boundary regions may now be defined. Regions 1, 2 and 3 are defined as attachment boundary types. This is important for boundary surfaces that will be attached to each other dynamically during the course of the analysis, i.e. the vertical edges of the IVT, IVB, EVT and EVB domains and the corresponding boundary cell faces in the CYLI domain. Figure T13.1-2 shows an exploded view of the grid near the intake valve, with the boundary regions marked clearly. The parameters needed for the region definition are the coordinate system number and the alternate region number to be used if the boundary faces in question are not attached to anything. Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and open the Dene Boundary Regions panel In the boundary regions scroll list, select region no. 1 and then option Attach from the Region Type menu Click Apply Repeat the above denition for boundary regions 2 and 3
RDEF 1 ATTACH 1 0 RDEF 2 ATTACH

Version 3.26 13-9
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Boundary Conditions
1 0 RDEF 3 ATTACH 1 0
Figure T13.1-2
Exploded view of grid near the intake valve
Region 4 is a symmetry plane used for the top and bottom faces of the twodimensional section. Select region no. 4 and then option Symmetry from the Region Type menu Click Apply
RDEF 4 SYMP Regions 5 and 6 are constant pressure boundaries located at the intake and exhaust port ends. Scalar mass fraction values need to be defined at the pressure boundaries also, in case of inflow at those locations.
13-10
Select region no. 5 and then option Pressure from the Region Type menu Select option TI/Length from the Turb. Switch menu Type 0.05 in the box for Turb. Intensity and 0.01 for Length Click Apply In the same way, dene region no. 6 as Pressure using the same values
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Analysis Controls
for turbulence intensity and length scale Open the Scalar Boundaries panel Select region no. 5 (Pressure) in the Boundary Regions scroll list and scalar no. 2 (Exhaust) in the Scalar scroll list Type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply Select region no. 6 (Pressure) in the Boundary Regions scroll list and scalar no. 1 (Intake) in the Scalar scroll list Type 1.0 in the Mass Fraction box and then click Apply
RDEF 5 PRES PIEZO 0.0 N N N RTURB 5 MIXL 0.05 0.01 RDEF 6 PRES PIEZO 0.0 N N N RTURB 6 MIXL 0.05 0.01 RSMO 5 2 CONC 1.0 RSMO 6 1 CONC 1.0 Analysis Controls Since the flow is two-dimensional, switch off the W-velocity calculation. Also, set the analysis control parameters for the two scalars: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behavior, open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation Status tab Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations Click Apply Open the Additional Scalars panel Select scalar no. 1 (Intake) and check that the Solve for Scalar button is on, the Under-Relaxation Factor value is 1.0 and the Max. Sweeps value is 100 Type 0.01 in the Residual Tolerance box and then click Apply Repeat the above process for scalar no. 2 (Exhaust)
SOLV LW N SCCO 1 1.0 100 0.01 SCCO 2 1.0 100 0.01 Choose velocity, pressure, turbulence parameters, temperature, density, viscosity and specific heat as the flow variables to write to the transient post-processing file. Also, write cell values for the defined scalars: Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab Dene an output period starting at a time corresponding to crank angle 0 and a frequency of writing data to the transient post data le corresponding to 5 (i.e. at every fth time step) by entering these values
13-11
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Run Time Controls
in the corresponding boxes Note that, by default, the Velocity and Pressure variables are already selected for output in the upper scroll list. Select item Turb Kinetic Energy and then click the Post button Repeat the above selection for variables Dissipation, Turbulent Viscosity, Temperature, Density and also for the passive scalars Intake and Exhaust. The list display will confirm your choice. Click Apply
WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 5 U Y P Y TE Y ED Y VIS Y T Y DENS Y WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 5 SC01 Y SC02 Y Run Time Controls Specify the duration and time step of the simulation. This consists of 360 time steps, one step per degree of crank revolution. The boundary region definitions are fixed for the duration of the analysis. Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open panel Set Run Time Controls Select option Run for and type 360 in the adjacent box Click Apply Enter 0.0 in the Period Start Time box and 1 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period
RUNT DURAT 360 DELT CONST 0 1 Preliminary Events Since this tutorial uses a moving mesh, the moving mesh and event options need to be turned on. In the pro-STAR I/O window type: MVGR,ON,EVENT,PROSTAR Before specifying events, it is necessary to resize pro-STAR by issuing the following commands in the I/O window: MEMORY MAXEVE 100 MEMORY WRITE The various moving-mesh operations can now be defined in terms of distinct events. An event has a time and a number of different elementary mesh operations associated with it. These may be cell removals, additions, re-attachments, changes of material type, or conditional event enabling/disabling. The event is executed when the solution time matches the event time. Events are stored in a direct access file (.evn) which must first be initialised. EVFIL,INIT,tut.evn Events may be defined in any order; in fact they may even be defined in stages. This feature is utilised in the piston events where the intake valve and the exhaust valve events are defined separately.
13-12 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup)
Use event number 40 to define the grid connectivity at time t = 0. EVSTEP 40,TIME,0.0 A special event called the EGRID event sets up a series of pro-STAR grid-changing commands that are then executed at every time step. For this purpose, command EGRID is used to read them in from a separate file called cgrid.cgrd created outside the pro-STAR environment. These commands will be discussed in a separate section of the tutorial. Cell deactivations, type changes and attachments/detachments will be defined later on in this section in their logical sequence. EGRID,READ,cgrid.cgrd EVSAVE 40 The kinematic parameters for the piston motion and the events at the piston are defined as follows: EVPARM, PISTON, 1000, 34.95, 105, 0, COMPRESS, 69.9 This command sets the r.p.m. value to 1000, the crank radius to 34.95, the connecting rod length to 105, the initial piston position to 0.0 and the top dead centre position to 69.9. Note that all distances are specified in pro-STAR units (mm in this case). The advantage of specifying these parameters is twofold: 1. The piston event times can be specied in terms of its position rather than the equivalent time (e.g. cell layer 1 should be removed when the piston reaches a position of 2.5 mm) 2. These parameters are used by STAR to set the built-in parameter YPST, used by the EGRID commands to simplify the description of mesh motion Piston Events There are 13 cell layers in the cylinder region. The piston events will be defined so that one layer is deactivated at every event between no. 1 and no. 13, corresponding to the piston movement between BDC and TDC. Conversely, the layers are re-activated between event nos. 16 to 28, corresponding to the piston movement between TDC and BDC. Each event occurs when the piston crosses the mid-point of a layer. The most efficient way of defining the 13 deactivation events is to use the pro-STAR loop facility as follows. Set up the loop variables EVNO, YP, IC1 and IC2: *SET EVNO 1,1 *SET YP 2.5,5.0 *SET IC1 1,18 *SET IC2 18,18 *DEFINE Define events based on piston position during the exhaust stroke: EVSTEP,EVNO,PCOMP,YP Set the deactivation direction to be direction no. 2 of coordinate system 1 (i.e. along the y-coordinate axis):
Version 3.26 13-13
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Intake Valve Events
EDDIR,LOCAL,1,2 Collect together and deactivate the appropriate cells: EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 Save the event, end the loop and then execute it: EVSAVE EVNO *END *LOOP,1,12 Similarly, define the events for re-activating the 13 cell layers using events 16 to 28. These are based on piston position during the intake stroke: *SET EVNO 16,1 *SET YP,65.0,-5.0 *SET IC1,217,-18 *SET IC2,234,-18 *DEFINE EVSTEP,EVNO,PEXP,YP EACELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 EVSAVE,EVNO *END *LOOP,1,12 Intake Valve Events In defining the intake valve events, the natural choice for specifying the occurrence of these events would be the crank angle using command EVPARM. The reason EVPARM is re-specified is because it allows you to use a convenient initial angle which does not have to match the initial position of the piston. EVPARM, DEGREES, 1000, 0.0 The mesh at the intake valve at time t = 0 must first be rearranged, i.e. the extra, overlapping cells in that region must be deactivated. Seven cell layers above the valve must be deactivated before the solution starts (the valve is initially closed). This must be done in the correct sequence. For this reason, negative event times are used to establish the sequence of deactivation events that occur before the flow field computation begins. *SET EVNO 30,1 *SET TIME -10,1 *SET IC1 271,18 *SET IC2 275,18 *DEFINE EVSTEP,EVNO,TIME,TIME EDDIR,LOCAL,1,2 EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 EVSAVE,EVNO *END *LOOP 1,6
13-14 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
At time t = 0, the side faces of the surviving cells below the valve must be connected together. This is done with an attachment event at time t = 0. Since event times must be unique, we have to reuse event no. 40 which is already set to occur at this time. EVGET 40 The cell faces to be attached are found automatically using the EAMATCH command. For this, we need to group the faces to be matched into two regions. The attachment boundaries belonging to the cylinder have already been assigned to region no. 1; the attachment boundaries belonging to the valve that need to be matched to the cylinder boundaries must be collected and temporarily assigned to region no. 3. CSET CSET VSET BSET BSET BMOD NEWS CRAN 513,573,10 ADD CRAN,517,577,10 NEWS CSET NEWS VSET ALL DELE SYMP BSET 3
Note that the boundary sets to be matched are nominally unequal because of the presence of deactivated cell layers. Nevertheless, the operation is physically valid and also avoids the trouble of picking out the right faces. EAMATCH will generate warning messages which should be ignored. EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 EVSAVE 40 Y No further intake valve events occur until the crank angle is 180. At this time, the layer above the valve should be connected to the cylinder. This also means that the cells in the inlet port must be changed to the material type of the cylinder, as they are now physically connected to it. EVSTEP 41 DEGREE 180.0 CSET NEWS CLIST 397,401 VSET NEWS CSET BSET NEWS VSET ALL BSET DELE SYMP BMOD BSET,3 EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 EFLUID,1,ADD,CTYPE,2 EFLUID,1,ADD,CTYPE,6 EVSAVE 41 The valve lift profile, as discussed before, varies linearly with the crank angle. In this tutorial, we will use a profile definition technique that is also suitable for more realistic valve lift profiles. Accordingly, command SPL is employed to define the lift profile from a given table of values and command VSPMOVE to interpolate
Version 3.26 13-15
Tutorial 13.1
intermediate points. The same technique is also used in the EGRID commands to set the valve position. Define a spline using vertices 1991 to 1997 and use vertex no. 1998 for interpolation. For each vertex, the x-coordinate will be interpreted as an angle, the y-coordinate as the inlet valve lift and the z-coordinate as the exhaust valve lift. Negative arguments are used in the SPL command to allow kinks in the spline. CSYS 1 V,1991,0.00,0.1,0.1 V,1992,20.0,0.1,8.1 V,1993,160.,0.1,8.1 V,1994,180.,0.1,0.1 V,1995,200.,8.1,0.1 V,1996,340.,8.1,0.1 V,1997,360.,0.1,0.1 SPL,1,VLIST,1991,-1992,-1993,-1994,-1995,-1996,1997 As the valve opens between 180 and 200, seven cell layers are deactivated below the valve and corresponding cell layers activated above the valve. The side connections between cell layers are also altered to match the new configuration. *SET *SET *SET *SET *SET EVNO 42,1 IC1 379,-18 IC2 383,-18 IC3,573,-10 IC4,577,-10
The corresponding events are then set to occur at valve lifts of 1.5, 2.5, , 7.5. *SET VLFT 1.5,1 *DEFI Find the crank angle corresponding to this valve lift by interpolating the spline; note that vertex no. 1998 is given an x-coordinate value of 190 as an initial guess. CSYS 1 V,1998,190.0,VLFT,0.0 VSPM,1,1998,1,V,F,V *GET THET X 1998 Define the events: EVSTEP,EVNO,DEGREE,THET EDDIR LOCAL 1,2 EACELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC3,IC4 CSET NEWS CRAN IC1,IC2 VSET NEWS CSET BSET NEWS VSET ALL BSET DELE SYMP BMOD BSET 3
13-16 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) Exhaust Valve Events
EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 EVSAVE EVNO *END *LOOP,1,6 The reverse of these events occurs as the valve closes. *SET EVNO 51,1 *SET IC1 271,18 *SET IC2 275,18 *SET IC3,513,10 *SET IC4,517,10 *SET VLFT 7.5,-1.0 *DEFI CSYS 1 V,1998,350.0,VLFT,0.0 VSPM,1,1998,1,V,F,V *GET THET X 1998 EVSTEP,EVNO,DEGREE,THET EDDIR LOCAL 1,2 EACELL,ADD,CRAN,IC3,IC4 EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 CSET NEWS CRAN IC3,IC4 VSET NEWS CSET BSET NEWS VSET ALL BSET DELE SYMP BMOD BSET 3 EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 EVSAVE EVNO *END *LOOP,1,6 The final event at 360 will completely close the valve by detaching the last connection (in the layer above the valve) and changing the material type of the cells trapped above the valve. EVSTEP,58,DEGREE,360.0 EDETACH ADD BRANGE 49,49 EDETACH ADD BRANGE 57,57 EFLUID,2,ADD,CTYPE,2 EFLUID,2,ADD,CTYPE,6 EVSAVE 58 Exhaust A similar sequence of events occurs for the exhaust valve. Note, however, that the Valve Events opening and closing times are different. Reuse event nos. 30 to 36 for deactivating overlapping cell layers prior to time t = 0. *SET EVNO 30,1
Version 3.26 13-17
Tutorial 13.1
*SET TIME -10,1 *SET IC3 280,18 *SET IC4 284,18 *DEFINE EVGET EVNO EDDIR,LOCAL,1,2 EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC3,IC4 EVSAVE,EVNO Y *END *LOOP 1,6 Reuse event no. 40 for the attachment at t = 0. EVGET 40 CSET NEWS CRAN 518,578,10 CSET ADD CRAN,522,582,10 CSET ADD CLIST 406,410 VSET NEWS CSET BSET NEWS VSET ALL BSET DELE SYMP BMOD BSET 3 EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 Change the material type of the exhaust valve region. EFLUID,1,ADD,CTYPE,3 EFLUID,1,ADD,CTYPE,7 EVSAVE 40 Y Define events 61 to 67 for the exhaust valve opening. *SET EVNO 61,1 *SET IC1 388,-18 *SET IC2 392,-18 *SET IC3,578,-10 *SET IC4,582,-10 *SET VLFT 1.5,1 *DEFI Find the crank angle corresponding to this valve lift by interpolating the spline; note that vertex 1998 is given an x-coordinate value of 10 as an initial guess. CSYS 1 V,1998,10.0,0,VLFT VSPM,1,1998,1,V,V,F *GET THET X 1998 EVSTEP,EVNO,DEGREE,THET EDDIR LOCAL 1,2
13-18 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
EACELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC3,IC4 CSET NEWS CRAN IC1,IC2 VSET NEWS CSET BSET NEWS VSET ALL BSET DELE SYMP BMOD BSET 3 EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 EVSAVE EVNO *END *LOOP,1,6 Define events 71 to 77 for the exhaust valve closure. *SET EVNO 71,1 *SET IC1 280,18 *SET IC2 284,18 *SET IC3,518,10 *SET IC4,522,10 *SET VLFT 7.5,-1 *DEFI V,1998,170.0,0.0,VLFT VSPM,1,1998,1,V,V,F *GET THET X 1998 EVSTEP,EVNO,DEGREE,THET EDDIR LOCAL 1,2 EACELL,ADD,CRAN,IC3,IC4 EDCELL,ADD,CRAN,IC1,IC2 CSET NEWS CRAN IC3,IC4 VSET NEWS CSET BSET NEWS VSET ALL BSET DELE SYMP BMOD BSET 3 EAMATCH 1,3 BMOD BSET 2 EVSAVE EVNO *END *LOOP,1,6 For the complete closure of the exhaust valve at 180, reuse event number 41. EVGET 41 EDETACH ADD BRANGE 41,41 EDETACH ADD BRANGE 65,65 EFLUID,3,ADD,CTYPE,3 EFLUID,3,ADD,CTYPE,7 EVSAVE 41 Y
Version 3.26
13-19
Tutorial 13.1
Grid Changing Commands Final Operations
This completes the event definitions. Final Operations Before writing the geometry and problem files, check the events file by executing the EVPREP command. Files tut.geom and tut.prob are then written in the usual way and the pro-STAR session is terminated, saving the problem data to file tut.mdl. File > Write Geometry File Type 0.001 in the Scale Factor text box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom,.001 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE This completes the pre-processing session. Grid Changing Commands Preliminaries We now consider the pro-STAR commands needed to re-define (move) the mesh at each time step, i.e. the EGRID commands mentioned in the previous section. In general, such commands are included in a file called cgrid.cgrd created with a suitable editor of your choice. However, since grid movement commands usually represent over half the effort needed to set up this kind of problem, it is convenient to maintain several different EGRID files so as to allow easy investigation of alternative strategies. The easiest way of deploying alternative strategies is to use the technique of file re-direction, in which all pro-STAR pre-processing runs refer to the same file, cgrid.cgrd. This file in turn simply redefines the input stream as coming from the file that actually contains the required variant of the grid movement commands. Hence, the contents of cgrid.cgrd could be: IFILE cgrid1.cgrd In the above, cgrid1.cgrd is the name of the grid movement file needed for setting up the problem prior to a CFD analysis, as described in the previous section. The commands in file cgrid1.cgrd will now be explained. Note that the methodology adopted may not be the simplest for the purposes of this tutorial, but it introduces concepts that may be useful in more complex situations. Parameter Settings In describing the EGRID commands, it is important to understand the context in which they will be executed. During a transient run of this kind, STAR initiates a temporary pro-STAR session at the start of every time step. The session is given the default case name PROTEMP and its purpose is to set up an appropriate mesh for the time step that is about to be calculated. This operation can only be performed by reference to the events already defined in the section on Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) and stored in file tut.evn. The first task is therefore to connect this file
Version 3.26
13-20
Tutorial 13.1
Grid Changing Commands Parameter Settings
to the PROTEMP session. EVFILE CONN tut.evn The grid-change methodology described below uses information about the active cells at a given solution time to determine the cylinder cell layer distribution. To do this, all events up to the last executed event must be loaded via command EVLOAD. However, since the loaded events include the special EGRID event (no. 40), all the grid change commands would also be executed. To avoid unnecessary recursion of grid changes, command EVFLAG must also be used to explicitly turn off grid changing. EVFLAG PREP OFF GRID,UPARM,NEWXYZ EVLOAD UPTO EVENT EVEX Note that STAR provides a number of built-in variables that are updated at each time step for the purposes of mesh generation. These variables can be used as parameters in pro-STAR commands. Advanced users may create extra variables of their own, if necessary, using the UPARM user subroutine. The built-in STAR variables are: YPST piston position EVEX last executed event number TIME current solution time
In calculating the new grid at any given time step, it is convenient to use a number of locally computed variables, as follows: YIVL Intake Valve Lift YIVB Intake Valve Bottom position YEVL Exhaust Valve Lift YEVB Exhaust Valve Bottom position NCYL Number of active cell layers in Cylinder (1-14) NIVT Number of active cell layers at Intake Valve Top (1-8) NEVT Number of active cell layers at Exhaust Valve Top (1-8)
Using the *GET command, assign the number of active cell layers in the cylinder, intake and exhaust valve regions in the following way: CSET CSET *GET CSET CSET *GET CSET CSET *GET NEWS SUBS NCYL NEWS SUBS NIVT NEWS SUBS NEVT CRANGE 1 235 18 ACTIVE NCSET CRANGE 273,399,18 ACTIVE NCSET CRANGE 282,408,18 ACTIVE NCSET
The intake and exhaust valve lifts at the corresponding time are determined by interpolation of the lift spline discussed in the previous section. Note that the piston position is directly available via the STAR variable YPST.
Version 3.26 13-21
Tutorial 13.1
Grid Changing Commands Cylinder Mesh
*SET RPM 1000 *SET THET TIME * RPM * 6 CSYS 1 V,1998,THET,0,0 VSPM,1,1998,1,F,V,V *GET YIVL Y 1998 *GET YEVL Z 1998 *SET YIVB 78. - YIVL *SET YEVB 78. - YEVL Cylinder Mesh The mesh structure within the cylinder at any given time is determined by collecting the bottom layer of vertices and placing them at the current piston position. CSYS VSET VSET VMOD 1 NEWS VRAN 1,23 ADD VRAN 2001,2023 VSET,,YPST
This has the effect of reducing only the thickness of the cell layer adjacent to the piston. The rest of the cylinder mesh remains unaltered. When this layer is eventually removed (at the point where the piston reaches its original mid-thickness location) the bottom vertices of the next layer up are moved to meet the piston surface and the process continues until TDC is reached. *IF NCYL LT 14 *SET NGEN 15 - NCYL VGEN,NGEN,50,VSET *ENDIF Intake Valve Mesh The mesh movement in the intake region is controlled by a similar process. Thus, the vertices at the top and bottom valve surface are set to follow the valve position and the adjacent cell layers above and below the valve are activated or deactivated accordingly. This is done in two stages, for the mesh above and below the valve. A detailed view of the inlet valve region is shown in Figure T13.1-2 with the vertex numbering switched on. This may help to follow the commands below. First, fix the vertex layer above the inlet valve to the top valve surface using the calculated lift, YIVL. VSET NEWS VRAN 1204,1209 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-400,VSET,,,0,-1 * YIVL Generate the required number of deactivated layers above the valve. *IF NIVT LT 8 VSET NEWS VRAN 804,809 RP2,,,2000,2000 *SET NGEN 9 - NIVT VGEN,NGEN,50,VSET *ENDIF
13-22 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Grid Changing Commands Intake Valve Mesh
Generate new vertices for the active layers. *IF NIVT GT 1 VFILL 1204,-50 * NIVT + 1204,NIVT - 1,1154,-50,6,1 RP2,2000,2000,0,2000 *ENDIF Match the active layers to the adjacent cylinder mesh. VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN -50 * NIVT + 1204,1204,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-1,VSET VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN -50 * NIVT + 1209,1209,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,1,VSET Similarly, fix the vertex layer below the inlet valve to the bottom valve surface. *SET NIVB 8 - NIVT VSET NEWS VRAN 5054,5059 RP2,,,2000,2000 VMOD VSET,,YIVB Generate the required number of deactivated layers. *IF NIVB LT 7 *SET NGEN 8 - NIVB VGEN NGEN -50 VSET *ENDIF Generate new vertices for the active layers. *IF NIVB GT 1 VFILL 4704,NIVB * 50 + 4704,NIVB - 1,4754,50,6,1 RP2,2000,2000,0,2000 *ENDIF Match up vertices with those in the adjacent cylinder mesh. VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN 4704,50 * NIVB + 4704,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-4001,VSET VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN 4709,50 * NIVB + 4709,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-3999,VSET Fill in the intermediate nodes on the valve lip.
Version 3.26
13-23
Tutorial 13.1
Grid Changing Commands Exhaust Valve Mesh
VFILL 50*NIVB+703, -50*NIVT+1203, 1, 50*NIVB+753, 1, 2, 2000 VFILL 50*NIVB+710, -50*NIVT+1210, 1, 50*NIVB+760, 1, 2, 2000 Exhaust Valve Mesh A similar set of commands are used for the exhaust valve grid. Fix vertices to the top surface of the exhaust valve: VSET NEWS VRAN 1215,1220 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-400,VSET,,,0,-1 * YEVL Generate the required number of deactivated layers. *IF NEVT LT 8 VSET NEWS VRAN 815,820 RP2,,,2000,2000 *SET NGEN 9 - NEVT VGEN,NGEN,50,VSET *ENDIF Generate vertices for the active layers. *IF NEVT GT 1 VFILL 1215,-50 * NEVT + 1215,NEVT - 1,1165,-50,6,1 RP2,2000,2000,0,2000 *ENDIF Match vertices to the adjacent cylinder mesh. VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN -50 * NEVT + 1215,1215,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-1,VSET VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN -50 * NEVT + 1220,1220,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,1,VSET Fix vertices to the bottom surface of the exhaust valve. *SET NEVB 8 - NEVT VSET NEWS VRAN 5065,5070 RP2,,,2000,2000 VMOD VSET,,YEVB Generate the required number of deactivated layers. *IF NEVB LT 7 *SET NGEN 8 - NEVB VGEN NGEN -50 VSET *ENDIF
13-24 Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Event Verication Preliminaries
Generate new vertices for the active layers. *IF NEVB GT 1 VFILL 4715,50 * NEVB + 4715,NEVB - 1,4765,50,6,1 RP2,2000,2000,0,2000 *ENDIF Match up vertices to the adjacent cylinder mesh. VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN 4715,50 * NEVB + 4715,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-4001,VSET VSET NONE VSET ADD VRAN 4720,50 * NEVB + 4720,50 RP2,,,2000,2000 VGEN,2,-3999,VSET Fill in the intermediate nodes on the valve lip. VFILL 50*NEVB+714, -50*NEVT+1214, 1, 50*NEVB+764,1,2,2000 VFILL 50*NEVB+721, -50*NEVT+1221, 1, 50*NEVB+771,1,2,2000 This concludes the description of the commands in file cgrid1.cgrd. Event Verication pro-STARs event verification facilities can be used to preview the mesh structure at any point in time and thus verify that all events and grid-changing commands have been specified correctly. This can be achieved through a separate pro-STAR session, described below. Preliminaries Before starting pro-STAR, save the contents of file cgrid1.cgrd by copying it to file cgrid1.tmp. Now edit file cgrid1.cgrd and omit the first three commands, i.e. the file should start with command CSET NEWS CRANGE 1 235 18 Begin a fresh pro-STAR session: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Select the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Mesh Continue the session by displaying the initial mesh as follows: Visualisation EVFILE CONN EVLOAD UPTO TIME 0.0 CSET NEWS ACTIVE
Version 3.26 13-25
Tutorial 13.1
Event Verication Mesh Visualisation
CPLOT
Figure T13.1-3
The mesh at any point in time can be visualised by similar commands. For example, to display the mesh at a crank angle of 90, use: EVLOAD UPTO DEGREE 90.0 CSET NEWS ACTIVE CPLOT
Figure T13.1-4
13-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
CFD Analysis (STAR) Mesh Animation
It is suggested that a few different mesh configurations be visualised in this way to understand better the mesh movement strategy. Mesh Animation The following sequence can be used to create an animation demonstrating the mesh movement: Plot a single image on the screen displaying the overall problem geometry. EVLOAD RESET CSET ALL CPLOT PLFIX ON Now set up a loop to dump successive mesh states (frames) to a binary neutral-plot file. Note that the presence of EVLOAD within the loop requires the use of parameter NOEXECUTE with the *DEFINE command. This ensures that EVLOAD is activated only when the *LOOP command is executed. NFILE tut0.plot BINA TERM,,FILE *SET ATHT 0.000001 1 *DEFINE,NOEXECUTE EVLOAD UPTO DEGREE ATHT CSET NEWS ACTIVE CPLOT *END *LOOP 1,360 The *LOOP command takes some time to complete as pro-STAR performs the grid change commands at every step of the loop. Play back the frames from the neutral plot file by displaying them on the screen. Type Ctrl+C to stop the animation. TERM,, PLAYBACK,tut0.plot,1,360,1 Terminate the event verification session without saving file tut.mdl. QUIT, NOSAVE Before running the case, restore the original contents of the grid movement file by copying file cgrid1.tmp back to file cgrid1.cgrd. CFD Analysis (STAR) Start the CFD analysis by typing star in your STAR-CD session window. The solution should run for 360 time steps, as requested, and should dump flow field data to file tut.pstt every 5 degrees of crank revolution.
Version 3.26 13-27
Tutorial 13.1
Post Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries
Post Processing (pro-STAR) Post processing of transient moving-mesh solutions presents special challenges. First, there is usually a large amount of data to visualise. Second, the mesh changes with time. The solution data are stored in file tut.pstt at intervals of 5 time steps, as specified in the Pre-Processing (Problem Setup) section. In this problem, each time step corresponds to 1 of crank revolution, allowing the step number to be interpreted as the crank angle. The vertex coordinates per time step are also stored in this file by default. However, the cell status at any stage (i.e. activated or deactivated) must be reconstructed by pro-STAR using the events file. Preliminaries Begin a new pro-STAR session: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Select the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Select the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue
Specify the file containing the transient post data and then load the solution at a crank angle of 90: In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu As this is a moving-mesh transient calulation, the events file needs to be connected to the session. This is done by selecting Yes from the Moving Mesh menu . Check that the transient solution le, tut.pstt, is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select the rst position on the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list In the Select Time Step list, select step number 90 Click Store Iter/Time
EVFILE CONN TRLO tut.pstt MVGR C STORE ITER 90 Static Displays The velocity vectors and scalar concentrations may now be plotted as usual.
13-28
In the main window, select C > All In the STAR GUIde window, go to the Data tab, select item Velocity Components UV from the Vector Data list and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab, choose Option Vector and Edge/Mesh Grid
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Post Processing (pro-STAR) Static Displays
Click Plot to Screen
Figure T13.1-5
CSET ALL GETC U V NONE PLTYPE QHID PLME ON POPTION VECT CPLO
To produce the scalar concentration plot: Click Go To Load Data Select On from the Smooth Option menu Select item Intake from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Select Contour (lled) from the Option menu Click Plot to Screen
Figure T13.1-6
GETC NONE CONC 1 CAVE ALL PLTYPE EHID POPTION CONT REPL
Version 3.26
13-29
Tutorial 13.1
Post Processing (pro-STAR) Animated Displays
Animated Displays
A more powerful means of visualising transient results is provided by pro-STARs animation commands. A series of static frames can be saved in a binary neutral plot file and then played back onto the screen to give the appearance of animation. For successful use of this feature, the viewing distances, colour scales and vector lengths must remain fixed between frames. Velocities can be animated as follows: Plot one frame on the screen to display the problem geometry EVLOAD RESET CSET ALL POPT GEOM CPLOT PLFIX ON For vector plots, fix the colour scale and arrow size POPT VECT VESC 30.0 VMAG CSCALE 14 USER 0 30.0 PLTY QHID EDGE ON Set up a loop to dump frames onto the neutral plot file NFILE tut1.plot BINA TERM,,FILE *SET IT 5,5 *DEFINE NOEXE
13-30
Version 3.26
Tutorial 13.1
Post Processing (pro-STAR) Animated Displays
STORE ITER IT GETC U V NONE REPL *END *LOOP 0,71 Play back the frames in the neutral file (type Ctrl+C to terminate the animation cycle). TERM,, PLAY tut1.plot,1,72,1 The concentration distribution of the inlet charge can also be animated in a similar manner: Plot one frame on the screen to display the problem geometry EVLOAD RESET CSET ALL POPT GEOM EDGE OFF CPLOT PLFIX ON As for the vector plots, fix the colour scale and arrow size POPT CONTOUR CSCALE 14 USER 0 1.0 PLTY EHID EDGE ON Set up a loop to dump frames onto the neutral plot file NFILE tut2.plot BINA TERM,,FILE,RAST *DEFINE NOEXE STORE ITER IT GETC NONE CONC 1 CAVE ALL REPL *END *LOOP 0,71 Play back the frames on the neutral file (type Ctrl+C to terminate the animation cycle). TERM,, PLAY tut2.plot,1,72,1 The animation is an efficient means of examining the solution interactively. For hard copy presentation, another efficient technique is to plot multiple frames on one page. This can be achieved using the WINDOW command (see page 5-8 in the User
Version 3.26 13-31
Tutorial 13.1
Post Processing (pro-STAR) Final Operation
Guide) to divide the page into smaller segments in a systematic manner. Final Operation Terminate the pro-STAR session without saving file tut.mdl (because the mesh has been altered by the events replay) QUIT NOSAVE
13-32
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14 CELL COUPLE MATCHING

This tutorial is designed to familiarise users with the cell coupling facilities available in STAR-CD. Cell coupling establishes the connectivity between adjacent mesh regions whose geometry and mesh spacing is such that the usual one-to-one correspondence between neighbouring cell faces is not present. Situations that may require this operation include embedded refinement and joining together separately-created cell blocks, representing different sub-regions of a model. Two sub-tutorials are included, illustrating the following types of cell-couple matching: Matching of Common Perimeter Surfaces Matching of Arbitrary Surfaces
Version 3.26
14-1
Tutorial 14.1
MATCHING OF COMMON PERIMETER SURFACES
Tutorial 14.1
This tutorial introduces coupling of cell blocks by matching adjacent block faces. Although the perimeters of the block faces in question are identical, the mesh density of the two blocks is such that a simple coupling operation using vertex merging is not possible. Therefore, pro-STARs special cell coupling facility based on matching of adjacent block faces has to be used instead. This involves matching several cell faces, referred to as the slave faces, on one of the block surfaces to a cell face, referred to as the master face, on the other block surface. The matching operation does not require that the slave cell faces are completely bounded by the master cell face. Therefore, its success is based only on the premise that the master and slave cell faces lie on the same surface to within a user-specified tolerance. The current example involves coupling two mesh blocks of equal size but differing mesh densities, as shown below:
The tutorial outlines the following basic procedure for creating cell couples: 1. 2. 3. 4. Identify the cells whose faces need to be matched Bring all such cells into the current set Create cell couples Check the quality of the couples
In addition to introducing some useful quality checks, this tutorial also addresses possible causes and remedies for incomplete or poor-quality couples.
14-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut14-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 14.1 - MATCHING OF COMMON PERIMETER SURFACES Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 14.1 - MATCHING OF COMMON PERIMETER SURFACES Mesh Creation The two blocks in the model are built using STAR GUIde facilities. The first block will consist of type 1 cells and will contain 5 cells along each side of the surface where matching is to take place: Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Open the Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes panel Click Select Cell Type to open the Cell Table Editor dialog Conrm that cell type no. 1 is the currently active cell type in the scroll list Go to the Extent of Domain part of the panel and enter appropriate values in the text boxes provided, as shown below, to create the mesh block
Click Generate Mesh
CTYP 1 VC3D 0 1 5 0 1 5 0 5 25 The second block will consist of type 2 cells and will contain 7 cells along each side of the surface where matching is to take place:
Version 3.26
In the Cell Table Editor dialog, select cell type no. 2 in the scroll list
14-3
Tutorial 14.1
Choose option Fluid in the Cell Type menu Change the colour in the Color Table Index box to turquoise (colour number 5) Click Apply to conrm the settings and change the active cell type to 2 Close the Cell Table Editor Enter appropriate values in the Extent of Domain text boxes, as shown below, to create the second mesh block
Click Generate Mesh In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > + X Figure T14.1-1 2 FLUI 5 2 0 1 7 0 1 7 5 10 25 1 EHID NEWS FLUI
CTAB CTYP VC3D VIEW PLTY CSET CPLO
14-4
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Viewing this from another angle further illustrates the difference in mesh density: Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Figure T14.1-2
VIEW 0 0 1 PLTY QHID REPL
Version 3.26
14-5
Tutorial 14.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Creating the Coupled Cells
From this view it is obvious that simple vertex merging cannot be performed on these surfaces. Creating the Coupled Cells One method of checking visually whether two mesh regions are connected is through a cell plot (of type Quick Hidden Line) and then examining the connectivity of the displayed cell set. Any face that is shared by two cells is obviously internal and is discarded, leaving only free surfaces to be plotted. In addition, pro-STAR also removes external cell faces with normals pointing away from the viewer. The result of the Quick Hidden Line plot is shown below: Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, -1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, -1 Click Zoom in, draw a zoom border corresponding approximately to the magnication shown in the plot below and then click Yes to conrm your action Figure T14.1-3
VIEW 1 1 -1 DIST 1 REPL
14-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Cell faces belonging to the fine-mesh block are visible, indicating that the two blocks are not connected at present. The next step is to bring only those cells whose faces will be matched into the current cell set. This is a recommended step that prevents incorrect coupling from taking place. For large models, this operation will also significantly speed up the creation of the required couples. Change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > + X Select C > New > Zone and then draw a box around the two layers of cells on either side of the interface between the blocks
VIEW 1 REPL CSET NEWS ZONE pro-STARs couple creation utility is then used to connect cells on either side of the interface between the layers. This will not move or merge vertices, it will merely establish a connectivity between master faces on one side and slave faces on the other side. Typing HELP CPCREATE will show the options that can be used to select the master and slave faces. These include: 1. Selecting the master and slave faces by cell type 2. Selecting the master and slave faces by group number 3. Selecting the faces using specially created shells on the surfaces to be matched For all three options, the cells to be matched should reside in the current set. For the third option, the shells do not need to be in the current set. Typing HELP CPTOLERANCE will show the various tolerances used for determining whether a successful match can be created. As listed, three tolerance
Version 3.26 14-7
Tutorial 14.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Checking the couples
values are used: 1. TOLIN if a slave face vertex lies outside the master face perimeter, the maximum allowable distance between them 2. TOLPL if a slave face centroid lies ouside the master face plane, the maximum allowable normal distance between them 3. TOLANG the maximum allowable angle between the normal to the master cell face and that of a slave cell face In this example, cell face matching is performed using default tolerances and requiring that master cells are of cell type 1 and slave cells of cell type 2, as follows: Check the current contents of the couple table by choosing Tools > Couple Tool from the main windows menu bar. The Couple Table scroll list at the top of the tool shows that a default denition exists for a single couple type, no. 1 Close the Couple Tool In the STAR GUIde window, open the Assemble Grids panel Select the Create Couple tab Check that the Cell Set option is selected in the Choose Cells menu Select Choose Cell Types from the Master/Slave Option menu. The Master Cell Type and Slave Cell Type menus that appear should be left at the Cursor Select default Accept the default couple type (no. 1) appearing in the Couple Type box Click Apply and then use the mouse to pick one of the large cells on the right, designating it as a master cell. Now pick one of the smaller cells on the left, designating it as a slave cell. All other cells participating in the coupled interface will follow this designation. The cell couples will now be created.
CPTL ALL CPCR TYPE 1,2,1 Although the selection of the slave and master cells is arbitrary as far as pro-STAR is concerned, it is generally advisable to select the finer grid for the slave cells, as was done here. This will reduce the number of couples generated and will therefore minimize memory requirements. Checking the Following execution of the matching operation, two kinds of checks are needed to couples verify the quality of the newly created couples: 1. Verify that the correct cells have been matched 2. Check the quality of the couples Step 1 Verify that the Correct Cells were Matched The first step in checking is to examine the output of the matching operation. The information in the I/O window shows that 25 couples were created. This is the correct number as there are 25 master cell faces present. Although the correct number of couples has been created, it is possible that cells were matched incorrectly (i.e. slave cells are missing or incorrect cells were matched).
14-8 Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Consequently, checks on the couples should also be performed visually or using the checking facilities of the Couple Tool: Visual checks The available options include: 1. Use the cell set operation to look for missing cells Select C > New > Couples > Both Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, -1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, -1 Click Cell Plot Figure T14.1-4
CSET NEWS CPRA ALL VIEW 1 1 -1 CPLO
Here, you can visually check that all cells that should have been matched are present. 2. Display the grid in Quick Hidden Line mode, whereby missing slave faces will manifest themselves as visible internal surfaces: Select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot Figure T14.1-5
CSET NEWS FLUI CPLO
Version 3.26
14-9
Tutorial 14.1
It will be seen that none of the internal slave faces are visible, indicating that the couples have been correctly created. 3. Choose a special plotting option for coupled cell faces whereby master faces are displayed (in red) followed by slave faces (in blue) on top of the mesh plot. Finally, all overlapping master-slave surfaces are displayed in green. Consequently, if the coupled cell match was done correctly, a green-only surface should appear. If any red appears, either one or more of the slave cells is missing or the areas of the slave and master cells do not match. From the menu bar, select Plot > Couple Display > Master, Slave Select Cp > All Click Replot Figure T14.1-6 Select Plot > Couple Display and then deselect the Master, Slave option
CPDI ON MAST SLAVE CPSET ALL REPL CPDI OFF
14-10
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
As an alternative, the slave faces may be displayed rst by using the Slave, Master option. Using the Couple Toolss check facilities The Couple Tool is activated via Tools > Couple Tool and will compare only the total surface area differences between the master and slave surfaces. Because both surfaces in this case have a common perimeter, area differences can result either from missing slave surfaces or out-of-plane vertices. To start the check, choose Couple Check in the Couple Tool In the Couple Check dialog, accept the default settings and then click Apply. The results of the operation will be shown in the I/O window. Close the Couple Check dialog Close the Couple Tool
CPCH .01 ALL,,,,OFF The I/O window output shows that no significant area differences were found. Step 2 Check the Quality of the Couples While the previously described operation checks for area differences in the master and slave surfaces, other checks are advisable to determine the quality of the couples created. These include checking that: 1. Large warp angle(s) do not exist on the face of the master cells 2. Slave vertices are reasonably in-plane with the master surface Couples that fail one of these checks are known as poor quality couples.
Version 3.26
14-11
Tutorial 14.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Fixing couples
Fixing couples
In the event that a couple was created incorrectly or was not created at all, the appropriate cells should be fixed or the matching tolerances adjusted. Care should be taken when adjusting the default tolerances to prevent matching incorrect cells or creating couples of poor quality. Prior to re-applying CPCREATE to an incorrectly created couple, the couple should first be deleted using the Delete Couple button on the Couple List dialog or command CPDELETE. This is necessary because CPCREATE will only create new couples and will not modify existing ones. Alternatively, an incorrectly created couple can be manually modified using the editing facilities of the Couple List dialog. If two or more couples exist for the same master cell face, the couples can be merged into one using the Couple Merge button on the Couple Tool or command CPMERGE. For poor quality couples, the cell face vertices need only be modified to improve the quality. For these cases, CPCREATE does not need to be re-executed. To verify the success of the couple creation, a simple steady-state analysis will be performed. The boundary faces for the inlet and outlet will first be selected using STAR GUIde facilities: In the main window, select C > All Click Zoom off Go to the STAR GUIde window and select the Locate Boundaries folder Open the Create Boundaries panel and then select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select option Inlet from the Type menu and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges. Pick a vertex on the lower right face of the coarse-grid block to create boundary region no. 1 Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option Outlet from the Type menu and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the lower left face of the fine-grid block to create boundary region no. 2
Analysis Setup
CSET ALL ZOOM OFF VSET NEWS EDGE CPLO RDEF BFIN VIEW REPL RDEF BFIN 1 INLE $ $ 1 VX 1 1 1 2 OUTL $ $ 2 VX
To allow for input of boundary values for turbulence, the standard k- turbulence model must first be turned on:
14-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Analysis Setup
Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Turbulence Models panel Click On to select turbulence modelling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu Click Apply Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply Select region no. 2 in the scroll list The default settings for this boundary are appropriate in this case so no further action is necessary
TURB KE RDEF 1 INLE 0 0 1 1 0 1.205 RTURB 1 MIXL 0.05 0.001 For verification, the boundaries are collected together and plotted: In the main window, click Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Replot Turn off boundary plotting by clicking Bound again Figure T14.1-7
BSET ALL BDIS ON REPL BDIS OFF
Version 3.26
14-13
Tutorial 14.1
CFD Analysis (STAR) Analysis Setup
Check the run-time controls and then write the problem and geometry files: Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Set Run Time Controls panel. No changes are necessary. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob You are now ready to compile and run STAR. CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all panel settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
14-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Analysis Setup
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Click folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst The operations needed to create a section plot of the velocity magnitude through the middle of the model are shown below: Go to the Data tab Select On from the Smooth Option menu Select item Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z values (0.45, 0, 0) for the section Point (the point through which the section plane will pass) and (1, 0, 0) for the section Normal. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the y-z plane with an x-value of 0.45. Click Apply Click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window Figure T14.1-8 SECT .45 0 0 1 0 0 NONE VMAG ALL CSET 1 0 0 CONT
PLTY SPOI SNOR GETC CSET CAVE VIEW POPT CPLO
To view a section plot of the vertex-based pressure:

Version 3.26
Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Click Plot to Screen Figure T14.1-9
14-15
Tutorial 14.1
GETV NONE P CPLOT QUIT NOSAVE
14-16
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.1
Version 3.26
14-17
Tutorial 14.1
14-18
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
MATCHING OF ARBITRARY PERIMETER SURFACES
Tutorial 14.2
This tutorial introduces coupling of cell blocks whose adjacent faces have arbitrary perimeters. Here, both the mesh density and the areas of the two block surfaces to be matched are completely arbitrary. The procedure is similar to that for matching of common-perimeter surfaces given in Tutorial 14.1. The success of matching is based only on the premise that the master and slave cell faces lie on the same surface to within a user specified tolerance. The current example involves matching a rectangular Cartesian block to a cylindrical mesh block, as shown below:
The tutorial outlines the following basic procedure for creating cell couples: 1. 2. 3. 4. Identify the cells whose faces need to be matched Bring all such cells into the current set Create cell couples Check the quality of the couples
In addition to introducing some useful quality checks, this tutorial also addresses possible causes and remedies for incomplete or poor-quality couples. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut14-2). Start up pro-STAR and supply the following input:
Version 3.26
Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume from Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option
14-19
Tutorial 14.2
Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 14.2 - MATCHING OF ARBITRARY PERIMETER SURFACES Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 14.2 - MATCHING OF ARBITRARY PERIMETER SURFACES Mesh Creation The two blocks in the model are built using STAR GUIde facilities. The first block will consist of type 1 cells and will contain 10 cells along each side of the surface where matching is to take place: Select folder Create and Import Grids followed by sub-folder Create Grids Open the Create 3D Grids Using Simple Shapes panel Click Select Cell Type to open the Cell Table Editor dialog Conrm that cell type no. 1 is the currently active cell type in the scroll list Go to the Extent of Domain part of the panel and enter appropriate values in the text boxes provided, as shown below, to create the mesh block
Click Generate Mesh
CTYP 1 VC3D 0 2 10 0 2 10 5 10 25 The second block will be created using a local cylindrical coordinate system:
14-20
In the Cell Table Editor dialog, select cell type no. 2 in the scroll list Choose option Fluid in the Cell Type menu Change the colour in the Color Table Index box to turquoise (colour number 5) Click Apply to conrm the settings and change the active cell type to 2 Close the Cell Table Editor In the STAR GUIde panel, click Select a Coordinate System Highlight system no. 5 in the scroll list
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
Select option Cylindrical from the menu at the bottom left-hand corner of the Coordinate Systems dialog Specify the coordinate systems origin by typing 1.0, 1.0, 0.0 in the rst three boxes under the scroll list Click New (Global) Close the Coordinate Systems dialog Enter appropriate values in the Extent of Domain text boxes, as shown below, to create the second mesh block
CTAB CTYP LOCA CSYS VC3D
Click Generate Mesh 2 FLUI 5 2 5 CYLI 1 1 0 5 0 0.77 5 0 360 18 0 5 25
The cylindrical block should now be plotted to view the mesh interior: In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 1, -1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, -1 Select C > New > Type and then pick any cell in the cylindrical block Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Click Cell Plot Figure T14.2-1
VIEW 1 1 -1 CSET NEWS TYPE 2 PLTY QHID CPLO
Version 3.26
14-21
Tutorial 14.2
The visible interior face indicates that a discontinuity exists within the block. This can be removed by merging vertices: Select V > New > Cell Set In the STAR GUIde window, open the Assemble Grids panel In the Vertex Merge tab, select option Vertex Set from the Vertices menu Accept the default setting in the rest of the panel and click Merge
VSET NEWS CSET VMER VSET C Next, the entire model is plotted: Change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > + X Select cell plot type Hidden Surface Select C > New > Fluid Click Cell Plot Figure T14.2-2
VIEW 1 PLTY EHID CSET NEWS FLUI CPLO
14-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
Viewing the model from another angle further illustrates the differences in mesh shape and density: Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > + Z Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line Figure T14.2-3
VIEW 0 0 1 PLTY QHID REPL
Version 3.26
14-23
Tutorial 14.2
Creating the Coupled Cells
One method of checking visually whether two mesh regions are connected is to do a cell plot (of type Quick Hidden Line) and then examine the connectivity of the displayed cell set. Any face that is shared by two cells is obviously internal and is discarded, leaving only free surfaces to be plotted. In addition, pro-STAR also removes external cell faces with normals pointing away from the viewer. The results of the Quick Hidden Line plot are shown below: Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, -1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, -1 Click Zoom in, draw a zoom border corresponding approximately to the magnication shown in the plot below and then click Yes to conrm your action Figure T14.2-4
VIEW 1 1 -1 DIST 2 REPL
14-24
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
The fact that cell faces in the rectangular block are still visible indicates that the two blocks are not connected at present. The next step is to bring only the cells that will be matched into the current cell set. This is a recommended step that prevents incorrectly couples being created. Although in this example it may seem trivial, it can be a necessary step for models with more complex geometries: Change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > + X Select C > New > Zone and then draw a box around the two layers of cells on either side of the interface between the blocks
VIEW 1 REPL CSET NEWS ZONE pro-STARs couple creation utility is then used to connect cells on either side of the interface between the layers. This will not move or merge vertices, it will merely establish a connectivity between master and slave faces. Typing HELP CPCREATE will show the options that can be used to select the master and slave faces. These include: 1. Selecting the master and slave faces by cell type 2. Selecting the master and slave faces by group number 3. Selecting the faces using specially created shells on the surfaces to be matched For all three options, the cells to be matched should reside in the current set. For the third option, the shells do not need to be in the current set. Typing HELP CPTOLERANCE will show the various tolerances used for determining whether a successful match can be created. As listed, three tolerance
Version 3.26 14-25
Tutorial 14.2
values are used: 1. TOLIN if a slave face vertex lies outside the master face perimeter, the maximum allowable distance between them 2. TOLPL if a slave face centroid lies ouside the master face plane, the maximum allowable normal distance between them 3. TOLANG the maximum allowable angle between the normal to the master cell face and that of a slave cell face In this example, cell face matching is performed using default tolerances and requiring that master cells are of cell type 1 and slave cells of cell type 2. During this operation, coupled cell matches with area differences greater than 2% will be designated as partial boundaries (note that setting the tolerance to 1% effectively disables the partial boundary function). Check the current contents of the couple table by selecting Tools > Couple Tool from the main windows menu bar. The Couple Table scroll list at the top of the tool shows that a default denition exists for a single couple type, no. 1 Select this couple type in the list and then click Edit Types In the Couple Table Editor, select option On for Partial Boundaries and accept the default tolerance value Click Apply and then Close Close the Couple Tool In the STAR GUIde window, open panel Assemble Grids and select the Create Couple tab Check that the Cell Set option is selected in the Choose Cells menu Select Choose Cell Types from the Master/Slave Option menu. The Master Cell Type and Slave Cell Type menus that appear should be left at the Cursor Select default Check that couple type no. 1 appears in the Couple Type box Click Apply and use the mouse to pick one of the rectangular-block cells on the left, designating it as a master cell. Continue the operation by picking one of the cylindrical-block cells on the right, designating it as a slave cell. All other cells participating in the coupled interface will follow this designation. The cell couples will now be created.
CPTAB 1,,,,,ON 0.02 CPCREATE TYPE 1,2,1 Note that the selection of the slave and master cells is arbitrary as far as pro-STAR is concerned so that, where the mesh density is comparable, it does not matter which side is master and which is slave. Checking the Following execution of the arbitrary matching operation, two kinds of checks are couples needed to verify the quality of the newly created couples: 1. Verify that the correct cells have been matched 2. Check the quality of the couples
14-26
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
Step 1 Verify that the Correct Cells were Matched The first step in checking is to examine the output of the matching operation. The information in the I/O window shows that 60 couples were created. This indicates that although 100 cells were present on the surface of the rectangular block, 40 cells did not match up to any slave cell faces. To determine whether the right number of cells were matched and that the cells were matched correctly, checks on the couples should be performed visually or by using the checking facilities of the Couple Tool: Visual checks The available options include: 1. Use the cell set operation to look for missing cells Select C > New > Couples > Both Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, -1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, -1 Select cell plot type Hidden Surface Click Cell Plot Figure T14.2-5
CSET NEWS CPRA ALL PLTY EHID VIEW 1 1 -1 CPLO
2. Display the grid in Quick Hidden Line mode, whereby missing slave faces will manifest themselves as visible internal surfaces:
Version 3.26
Select C > New > Fluid Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line
14-27
Tutorial 14.2
Click Cell Plot
Figure T14.2-6
PLTY QHID CSET NEWS FLUI CPLO
As shown above, the only visible master faces are those that have been specied as partial boundaries. Since no other internal faces are visible, this indicates that the correct number of master cells were matched. 3. Choose a special plotting option for coupled cell faces whereby master faces are displayed (in red) followed by slave faces (in blue) on top of the mesh plot. Finally, all overlapping master-slave surfaces are displayed in green. Consequently, if the couples were created correctly, none of the master faces should appear except on the partial boundaries. If any red appears in the interior, either one or more of the slave cells is missing or the areas of the slave and master cells do not match. From the main windows menu bar, choose Plot > Couple Display > Master, Slave Select Cp > All Click Replot Figure T14.2-7 Choose Plot > Couple Display and then deselect the Master, Slave option
CPDI ON MAST SLAVE CPSET ALL REPL

14-28 Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
CPDI OFF
As an alternative, the slave faces may be displayed rst by using the Slave, Master option. Use the Couple Toolss check facilities The Couple Tool is activated via Tools > Couple Tool and will compare only the total surface area differences between the master and slave surfaces. To start the check, choose option Couple Check from the Couple Tool In the Couple Check dialog, accept the default settings and then click Apply. The results of the operation will be shown in the I/O window. Close the Couple Check dialog Close the Couple Tool
CPCH .01 ALL,,,,OFF For arbitrary perimeter couples, there will in general be a difference in the areas of the master and slave surfaces listed in the I/O window. For these cases, however, it is important to ensure that the total area of overlap coincides with either the master or slave face area. As shown by the I/O window output, although the area difference is 31.5% (attributed to partial boundaries), the area of overlap is practically the same as the total slave face area. Significant differences between the overlap area and the slave or master face area can result from incorrectly created couples (i.e. a master cell is matched to more than one set of slave cells, or slave cells are missing), out-of-plane vertices, or mismatched master and slave surfaces (i.e. the master or slave surface was shifted so that the two no longer overlap correctly).
Version 3.26
14-29
Tutorial 14.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Fixing couples
Step 2 Check the Quality of the Couples While the previously described operation checks for area differences in the master and slave surfaces, other checks are advisable to determine the quality of the couples created. These include checking that: 1. Large warp angle(s) do not exist on the face of the master cells 2. Slave vertices are reasonably in-plane with the master surface Couples that fail one of these checks are known as poor quality couples. Fixing couples In the event that a couple was created incorrectly or was not created at all, the appropriate cells should be fixed or the matching tolerances adjusted. Care should be taken when adjusting the default tolerances to prevent matching incorrect cells or creating couples of poor quality. Prior to re-applying CPCREATE to an incorrectly created couple, the couple should first be deleted using the Delete Couple button on the Couple List dialog or command CPDELETE. This is necessary because CPCREATE will only create new couples and will not modify existing ones. Alternatively, an incorrectly created couple can be manually modified using the editing facilities of the Couple List dialog. If two or more couples exist for the same master cell face, the couples can be merged into one using the Couple Merge button on the Couple Tool or command CPMERGE. For poor quality couples, the cell face vertices need only be modified to improve the quality. For these cases, CPCREATE does not need to be re-executed. To verify the success of the couple matching, a simple steady state analysis will be performed. The boundary faces for the inlet and outlet will first be selected using STAR GUIde facilities: In the main window, select C > All Click Zoom off Go to the STAR GUIde window and select the Locate Boundaries folder Open the Create Boundaries panel and then select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select option Inlet from the Type menu and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Edges. Pick a vertex on the planar face of the cylindrical block to create boundary region no. 1 Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Select region no. 2 in the scroll list Select option Outlet from the Type menu and then click Dene region Click Surface Based on Vset and then pick a vertex on the lower left face of the rectangular block to create boundary region no. 2 ALL OFF NEWS EDGE 1 INLE $ $ 1 VX 1 1 1
Version 3.26
Analysis Setup
CSET ZOOM VSET CPLO RDEF BFIN VIEW

14-30
Tutorial 14.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Analysis Setup
REPL RDEF 2 OUTL $ $ BFIN 2 VX To allow for input of boundary values for turbulence, the standard k- turbulence model must first be turned on: Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases Open the Turbulence Models panel Click On to select turbulence modelling Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu Click Apply Select folder Dene Boundary Conditions Open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select region no. 1 in the scroll list Select option TI/Length in the Turb. Switch menu Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
Click Apply Select region no. 2 in the scroll list The default settings for this boundary are appropriate in this case so no further action is necessary
TURB KE RDEF 1 INLE 0 0 1 1 0 1.205 RTURB 1 MIXL 0.05 0.001 For verification, the boundaries are collected together and plotted:
Version 3.26
In the main window, click Cell Plot Display Option Bound Click Replot
14-31
Tutorial 14.2
CFD Analysis (STAR) Analysis Setup
Turn off boundary plotting by clicking Bound again
Figure T14.2-8
BSET ALL BDIS ON REPL BDIS OFF
Check the run-time controls and then write the problem and geometry files: Click folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Set Run Time Controls panel. No changes are necessary. File > Write Geometry File In the Geometry File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File In the Problem File Write dialog, click Apply and then Close
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob You are now ready to compile and run STAR. CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:
14-32
File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within the specified maximum number of iterations. Note that the run output signals that there are warnings in file tut.info. To inspect these warnings: Click Run History of Previous Analysis to display the corresponding panel Select Browse Additional Output File. It will be seen that the warnings refer to the fact that uid inow was detected at the outlet boundary. Although the solution converges, the warnings indicate that, if realistic results are to be obtained, the outlet boundary condition needs to be changed to a more appropriate condition. Alternatively, its position could be moved futher away from the main ow area so that the assumptions made for this boundary are truly satised.
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Read in the results of the analysis from file tut.pst: Click folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst The operations needed to create a section plot of the velocity magnitude through the middle of the model are shown below: Go to the Data tab Select On from the Smooth Option menu Select item Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots In the Create Plots panel, go to the Section Clipped tab Choose Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Enter the X, Y, and Z values (1.0, 0, 0) for the section Point (the point through which the section plane will pass) and (1, 0, 0) for the section Normal. The values entered will produce a plane parallel to the y-z plane with an x-value of 1.0. Click Apply Click Plot to Screen Select View > SNORMAL from the main window Figure T14.2-9
PLTY SECT SPOI 1.0 0 0

Version 3.26 14-33
Tutorial 14.2
SNOR GETC CSET CAVE VIEW POPT CPLO
1 0 0 NONE VMAG ALL CSET 1 0 0 CONT
To view a section plot of the vertex-based static pressure: Click Go To Load Data In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots Click Plot to Screen Figure T14.2-10 File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
GETV NONE P CPLOT QUIT N
14-34
Version 3.26
Tutorial 14.2
Version 3.26
14-35
Tutorial 15 FREE SURFACE CALCULATION OF A COLLAPSING WATER COLUMN

This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up a free surface flow. The model consists of a water column collapsing under its own weight and hitting an obstacle situated a small distance downstream. The position and dimensions of the water column and the obstacle, plus the overall size of the solution domain, are shown in Figure T15.0-1. The problem geometry to be analysed is similar to the experimental set up described by Koshizuka, S., Tamako, H. and Oka, Y. (1995), A particle method for incompressible viscous ow with uid fragmentation, Computational Fluid Dynamics Journal, Vol. 4, pp. 29-46.
0.292 m
Water Column
0.04745 m 0.292 m 0.0237 m 0.2683 m
Figure T15.0-1
Outline of water column and obstacle geometry
Version 3.26
0.584 m
0.146 m
Air
15-1
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
The tutorial describes the basic steps of building the mesh and applying the free surface conditions for the resulting transient flow. Isothermal conditions are assumed throughout the analysis. Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut15-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title text box type TUTORIAL 15.1 - FREE SURFACE CALCULATION OF A COLLAPSING WATER COLUMN Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 15.1 - FREE SURFACE CALCULATION OF A COLLAPSING WATER COLUMN Ensure that the STAR-GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required: Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu Select On from the Free Surface menu Click Apply
TIME SINGLE FSURF ON Mesh Creation Create a two-dimensional hexahedral mesh containing 80 x 80 cells. The thickness of the mesh is set to 2 cm but will have no effect on the calculations, given the two-dimensional nature of the simulation. Select the Create and Import Grids folder followed by Create Grids Open the Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes panel Enter appropriate values in the text boxes in the Extent of Domain part of the panel, as shown below, to create the required mesh:
Version 3.26
15-2
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0.0 0.584 80 0.0 0.584 80 0 0.02 1 PLTY EHID CSET ALL VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT In order to capture the flow around the obstacle more accurately, the mesh in that region is refined further as follows: Choose C > New > Zone and then select all cells in the range 0.25 < x < 0.36, 0 < y < 0.095 using the screen cursor. The CSET command shown in the box below may be used as an alternative selection method Click Cell Plot to display the required cell set
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.25 0.36 -1.0 0.095 CPLOT Create a refined mesh in the region specified above by sub-dividing the cell set by a factor of 2 in both the x- and y-directions. pro-STARs automatic coupling option will be used in this process, so it is important to check also the current definitions in the couple table: Inspect the contents of the couple table by selecting Tools > Couple Tool from the main windows menu bar. The Couple Table scroll list at the top of the tool shows that a default denition already exists for couple type no. 1 and that this is currently active. Close the Couple Tool
CPTL ALL Select Tools > Cell Tool > Cell Rene In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 2 Number divisions in J direction box 2 Number divisions in K direction box 1
15-3
Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Couple Option pop-up Couple Couple Type Number box 1 Accept the default settings in the rest of the dialog and click Apply Close the Cell Rene dialog Select C > All from the main window Click Cell Plot
CREF 2 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE,COUP CSET ALL CPLOT Create a further level of refinement as follows: Choose C > New > Zone and then select all cells in the range 0.281 < x < 0.325, 0 < y < 0.0584 using the screen cursor. The CSET command shown in the box below may be used as an alternative selection method Click Cell Plot to display the required cell set
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.281 0.325 -1.0 0.05841 CPLOT Select Tools > Cell Tool > Cell Rene In the Cell Rene dialog, enter the following data: Number divisions in I direction box 2 Number divisions in J direction box 2 Number divisions in K direction box 1 Couple Option pop-up Couple Couple Type Number box 1 Accept the default settings in the rest of the dialog and then click Apply Close the Cell Rene dialog Select C > All from the main window Click Cell Plot
CREF 2 2 1 CSET,,,MERGE,COUP CSET ALL CPLOT The block of cells occupied by the obstacle can now be identified and deleted. This is done by selecting and deleting all cells within the geometric range 0.292 < x < 0.3157 and 0 < y < 0.04745: Create a new cell set by choosing C > New > Zone and then selecting the cells located within the above range (or use the CSET command in the box below as an alternative) Click Cell Plot In the Cell Tool, select Delete Cells > Cell Set Eliminate all redundant cells from the model by clicking Cell Compress Close the Cell Tool
Version 3.26

15-4
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Select C > All from the main window Click Cell Plot
Figure T15.1-1
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.2919 0.3162 -1.0 0.0482 CPLOT CDEL CSET CCOM Y CSET ALL CPLOT
The mesh generation is now complete. Delete all redundant vertices from the model to create a new, renumbered mesh. In the main window, select V > New > Cell Set Select V > Invert In the main window, select Tools > Vertex Tool Click Delete Vertex Set Click Vertex Compress In the VCompress dialog, click Apply and then Close Close the Vertex Tool
VSET NEWS CSET VSET INVE VDEL VSET

Version 3.26 15-5
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
VCOM ALL Y Save all model data generated so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary The required definitions of boundary location are limited to symmetry planes on Specication either side of the 2D geometry and are applied as follows: In the main window, click Cell Plot Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select region no. 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Dene the region type by selecting Symmetry from Type menu and then click Dene region Click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z Again, click Select a Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT BZONE 1 ALL VIEW 0 0 -1 REPLOT BZONE 1 ALL RDEF 1 SYMP Check the boundaries graphically: In the main window, select B > All Select Cell Plot Display Option Bound Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1 Deselect Cell Plot Display Option Bound Restore the default viewpoint by clicking the Reset button on the plot orientation cube
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 REPLOT BDIS OFF

15-6 Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Material Properties and Thermo-uid Models
VIEW 0 0 1 Material Check the physical properties of the light and heavy fluids in your model. Note that, Properties in the current version of STAR -CD, only the constant density setting may be used and for either uid type. Thermo-uid Select the Free Surface folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open Models the Molecular Properties panel Check the settings on the Light Fluid tab. The default uid properties are those for air which acceptable for this case. Check the settings in the Heavy Fluid tab. The default uid properties are those for water which are also acceptable for this case. Include the effect of gravity acting in the -y direction. The gravity setting will apply to both light and heavy fluids. Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and inspect the default settings for the gravity force Type -1 in the Y box and 0 in the Z box to change its direction as required Click Apply to turn on the gravitational effect
ACCE,0,-1,0,1,9.8066 Switch on turbulence modelling: Select the Liquids and Gases folder Open the Turbulence Models panel Select the On button and then choose k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number in the Turbulence menu Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUI TURB KE Note that although the turbulence setting is only applied to the light fluid (material no.1), it will also apply automatically to the heavy fluid. Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells (at the top of the initial water column) and set the density datum location inside the light fluid: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Type 440 in the Monitoring cell number box Type 40 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box Click Apply Open the Buoyancy panel and select the On button Select option Enter Coordinates from the the Dene Datum Location menu and then enter the required coordinates values (0, 0.584, 0) Select option Specify from the Dene Datum Density menu. Accept the default density value (1.205) since the datum location has already been
15-7
Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Initial Conditions
placed inside the light uid Click Apply
MONI 440 PRESS,,40 BUOY,ON,0,0.584,0,SPEC,1.205 Initial Conditions Specify initial conditions for the light and heavy fluids. In this tutorial, the only essential item of information to be supplied is the initial position of the free surface, i.e. the initial position of the water column. The most convenient way of doing this is to assign all cells in the column to a different cell type and define this type as having the Heavy fluid property. We therefore start by collecting all cells in the initial water column into a set: In the main window, choose C > New > Zone and then select all cells in the range 0 < x < 0.292, 0 < y < 0.292 using the screen cursor. The CSET command shown in the box below may be used as an alternative selection method.
CSET NEWS GRAN -1.0 0.1469 -1.0 0.2929 -1 1 Use the Cell Table Editor to change all cells in the set to cell type no. 4 and display the result: Select Tools > Cell Tool Select entry no. 4 in the Cell Table scroll list Click Edit Types to open the Cell Table Editor Assign a distinct colour to this cell type by entering 5 in the Color Table Index box Select option Heavy from the Initial Free Surface Material menu Click Apply to create the new cell type. Note that it still remains indexed to material no. 1, i.e. the default light uid material. Close the Cell Table Editor Select Modify Type > Cell Set Close the Cell Tool Select C > All from the main window Click Cell Plot Figure T15.1-2
CTAB 4,FLUID,5,,,,,,,,,HEAVY CTYPE 4 CMOD CSET CSET ALL CPLOT
15-8
Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Note two further results of this setting: 1. The VOF variable, used in the code to calculate the free surface location, is automatically given an initial distribution that is consistent with the initial position of the two uids (0.0 in air, 1.0 in water) 2. The code automatically assigns the correct initial hydrostatic pressure distribution inside the water column Analysis Controls Inspect the control parameters for the free-surface numerical solution algorithm: Go to the Free Surface folder and open the Controls panel Consult the on-line Help text for this panel and then check the current settings: Maximum Courant Number box the default value of 0.3 is a reasonable number to use for free-surface calculations Check Courant Number menu a free surface will appear in only a small region of the total ow eld, therefore option All Cells Adjacent to Interface is appropriate VOF Gradient Threshold box change the value to 0.01 Interface Sub-Cycling button the desired setting is already On by default. The stability of the analysis sometimes depends critically on the number chosen for the sub-cycle limit (Cycles in subsequent time steps box). In general, ne-mesh models require a smaller value than the default, so a value of 10 is chosen here. Click Apply
FSDSCH,1,1.0,0.01 FSSUB,ON,10,1
Version 3.26
15-9
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Since the flow is two dimensional, it is sensible to switch off the calculation of the W-velocity component: Go to the Analysis Controls folder and select sub-folder Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behavior, open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation Status tab Click the Solve button for item W-Mom to exclude it from the calculations Click Apply
SOLV LW N Reduce the residual solver error tolerance for the VOF scalar to 0.01 to obtain higher accuracy in the calculated values: In sub-folder Equation Behavior, open the Additional Scalars panel Check that scalar VOF is selected and then enter 0.01 in the Residual Tolerance box Click Apply
SCCO,1,1,100,0.01,N,N Specify the flow variables that are to be saved to the transient post data file. In this case, only the velocity components and the VOF scalar values need to be saved: Select sub-folder Output Controls and then open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab Dene an output period starting at a time 0 s and a frequency of writing data to the transient post data le equal to 0.025 s by entering these values in the corresponding boxes. It will be seen later on that this is equivalent to writing data every 25th time step. Note that, by default, the Velocity and Pressure variables are already selected for output in the upper scroll list. i) Highlight item Pressure and then click the Post button to deselect it ii) Highlight item VOF and then click the Post button to select it The list display will conrm your choices Click Apply
WRPOST 1 SPEC 0 0.025 U Y P N SC01 Y Run Time Controls In order to obtain a full transient solution up to the point where the water settles, several thousands of time steps would have to be calculated. However, for the purposes of illustration, it is reasonable to limit the run duration to half a second:
15-10
Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running and then open panel Set Run Time Controls Select option Run for and type 0.5 in the adjacent input box Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Enter 0.0 in the Period Start Time box and 0.001 in the Time Step for Period box. Note that STAR will perform up to 10 sub-cycles when calculating the VOF variable and, if necessary, will adjust the step size in order to stay within this limit. Click Set Period
RUNT DURAT 0.5 DELT CONST 0 0.001 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section. File > Write Geometry File Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows: File > Save Model In the Analysis Preparation/Running folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel Leave all settings at their default values and click Start New Analysis
The analysis will then start automatically. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Open the file containing the transient post data (tut.pstt): In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Check that le tut.pstt is displayed in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select le tut.pstt on the list again and then click Open Transient Post File; the time steps at which ow data were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list
15-11
Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
TRLO tut.pstt C Postprocessing Read in the first set of results and load the VOF values: In the Select Time Step list, select step number 25 and then click Store Iter/Time. Go to the Data tab and select On from the Smooth Option menu Select item VOF from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data
STOR ITER 25 GETC NONE CONC 1 CAVER ALL To best way of visualising free surface analysis results is to limit the number of display colours used by pro-STAR to two. This helps to sharpen the interface observed between the two fluids: Select Go To > Create Plots Go to the Options tab Enter 2 in the Number of Color Indices box Select option User from the Range menu and then enter 0 and 1 as the end values of the range Click Apply
CSCA 2 USER 0 1 PLDI ON ALL It is also advisable to set the two colours to distinctive hues by, for example, typing in the following commands: CLRT,POST,1,0.15,0.57,0.34 CLRT,POST,2,0.43,0.72,1.0 Specify a cross-sectional contour plot: Go to the Section Clipped tab and then choose Option Contour (lled) and Edge/Mesh Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T15.1-3
PLTY SECT POPT CONT EDGE ON CPLOT
15-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Transient results of this kind are best viewed by successive displays of the state of the free surface. Instruct pro-STAR to loop over the entire results file by typing the following commands in the I/O window: *SET ITT 0 25 *DEFI NOEX STOR ITER ITT GETC NONE CONC 1 CAVER CSET PLTB ON REPLOT PLTB OFF *END *LOOP 1 20
Figure T15.1-4
It will be seen that, as part of the free-surface calculation, the code predicts a number of flow behaviour patterns that would be expected in this type of problem, such as the break-up of the leading edge of the water column into separate droplets, the rebounding of the water wave from the opposite wall and the temporary entrapment of air bubbles within the water body, as shown in Figure T15.1-4 below:
Version 3.26
15-13
Tutorial 15.1
ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Final Operations
QUIT N
15-14
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16 EULERIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW

The following tutorials are intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up Eulerian two-phase simulations. The four cases presented are: 1. Bubble terminal velocity simulation 2. Bubbly ow in which the bubbles are allowed to escape through the free surface of the liquid 3. Fluidised bed simulation 4. Boiling simulation
Version 3.26
16-1
Tutorial 16.1
TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES
Tutorial 16.1
In this case, air bubbles and water are injected at the bottom of a vertical channel at 1 m/s. The main forces acting on the bubbles are buoyancy and drag. From the inlet, the air bubbles are accelerated due to buoyancy but pulled back due to drag from the surrounding water and reach their terminal rise velocity when the drag force is balanced by the buoyancy force. Mathematically, we can express this force balance as:
3 2 CD d 2d --------- g = ------ u --------6 2 c r 4
where d is the bubble diameter, the density, = c d the density difference between the two phases, g the acceleration of gravity, C D the drag coefficient and u r = u c u d the relative velocity between the two phases. Subscripts c and d denote continuous and dispersed phase, respectively. Equation can be re-arranged to give an expression for the relative velocity between the phases, which in this case is also the bubble terminal rise velocity: ur = 4 gd -- ------ -----3 c C D
In this tutorial we will use the following data for the two phases: Phase 1 is water with density of 1000 kg/m3 and viscosity of 0.001 kg/m/s. Phase 2 is air bubbles of 2 mm diameter with density of 1 kg/m3 and viscosity of 1 105 kg/m/s
Assuming C D = 0.44 and substituting the physical properties of the two phases into equation , we obtain: ur = 29.7 d
For 2mm bubbles, the relative velocity is 0.24 m/s. Since the water phase is moving up the channel at 1 m/s, the terminal rise velocity of the bubbles is 1.24 m/s. We will now set up this case, carry out an Eulerian two-phase flow calculation and check whether the computed bubble rise velocity agrees with the value given by the equations above.
16-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.1
0.1 m Outlet gy
1.0 m Slip wall on all side walls
x Inlet
Figure T16.1-1 Schematic of vertical ow channel
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut16-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title box type TUTORIAL 16.1 TERMINAL RISE VELOCITY OF BUBBLES Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 16.1 - TERMINAL RISE VELOCITY OF BUBBLES Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required:
Version 3.26
Select option Eulerian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu Click Apply
16-3
Tutorial 16.1
EMPHASE ON 2 Mesh Creation Create a two-dimensional hexahedral mesh containing 5 50 cells. The thickness of the mesh is set to 1 cm but will have no effect on the calculations, given the two-dimensional nature of the simulation. Select the Create and Import Grids folder followed by Create Grids Open the Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes panel Enter appropriate values in the text boxes in the Extent of Domain part of the panel, as shown below, to create the required mesh:
Extent of Domain: Minimum 0 X 0 Y 0 Z Maximum 0.1 X 1.0 Y 0.01 Z Number of Cells 5 X 50 Y 1 Z
Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0.0 0.1 5 0.0 1.0 50 0.0 0.01 1 CSET ALL PLTY EHID VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT The mesh creation is now complete. Save all model data generated so far: SAVE File > Save Model tut.mdl
Boundary Define the Inlet and Outlet boundary locations as follows: Specication Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select Reg#1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Accept the default Inlet boundary Type, enter In in the Name box and then click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Pick Cell Faces, select the 5 cells displayed in the main window and then click DONE at the top right-hand corner Select Reg#2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Outlet for Type and enter Out in the Name box
16-4 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Material Properties and Thermouid Models
Click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 1 ,0) by selecting View > Axis > Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Pick Cell Faces, select the 5 cells displayed in the main window and then click DONE at the top right-hand corner
RDEF,1,INLE $ $ RNAM,1,In VIEW 0 -1 0 REPLOT BCRO ADD 1 RDEF,2,OUTL $ $ RNAM,2,Out VIEW 0 1 0 REPLOT BCRO ADD 2 Check the boundaries graphically: Click Plot All at the bottom of the Create Boundaries panel In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 1 ,1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Restore the default viewpoint by deselecting Bound in Cell Plot Display Options and clicking the Reset button on the plot orientation cube
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 REPLOT BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT Material Properties and Thermouid Models We now assign physical properties to the two phases: Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, -1, 0) Click Apply 1 9.8066
ACCE 0 -1 0
Version 3.26
Select the Liquid and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel
16-5
Tutorial 16.1
Make sure the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase#1 position Assign appropriate property values for phase 1. Thermal properties are not relevant in this case so they may be left at their default values: i) Name Water ii) Density 1000 iii) Molecular Viscosity 0.001
Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,WATER,0,1 DENS,CONSTANT,1000 LVIS,CONSTANT,0.001 Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Assign appropriate property values for phase 2 as follows: i) Name Air ii) Density 1 iii) Molecular Viscosity 1.0e-5 Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,AIR,0,2 EDENS,2,1,CONSTANT,1 ELVIS,2,1,CONSTANT,1.0e-5 Initialize phase 1 field values as follows: Open the Initialization panel Make sure the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase#1 position Set the V velocity to 1 m/s Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID CINI N N INIT,STAN,0,1,0,1,0,0,KEPS,,,293 Initialize phase 2 field values as follows: Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Set the V velocity to 1 m/s Set the Volume fraction to 0.001 Click Apply
EINIT,2,1,STAN,0,1,0,0,0.001,293
16-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.1
Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Click the mouse icon button next to the Monitoring cell number box and then pick the top middle cell in the main window (or enter 150 in the box). Click the mouse button next to the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and then pick the top right hand corner cell in the main window (or enter 250 in the box). Click Apply
MONI 150 PRESS,,250 Turn on the buoyancy force as follows: Open the Buoyancy panel Click On Select option Centroid of pressure reference cell for the datum location Select option Use reference and/or initial values, together with Reference pressure and Reference temperature for the datum density value Click Apply
BUOY,ON,PREF,,,DREF,REFE,REFE We now define the interaction between the two phases: Select the Eulerian Multi-Phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum Transfer sub-folder Open the Drag Forces panel Select Constant in the menu at the top of the panel and accept the default Drag Coefcient value of 0.44 shown in the Constant box Click Apply
EDRAG,2,1,CONSTANT,0.44 Set the bubble diameter to 2 mm: Open the Particle Size panel Enter 0.002 in the Mean Diameter box. Click Apply
ESIZE,2,1,CONSTANT,0.002 Boundary Conditions First we re-define all walls as slip walls:

Version 3.26
Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select Reg#0 for Wall in the scroll list
16-7
Tutorial 16.1
Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Select Slip from the Slip Option menu Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Select Slip from the Slip Option menu Click Apply
RDEF,0,WALL,STANDARD SLIP,STAND ERDEF,2,0,WALL SLIP We now define the inlet conditions: Select Reg#1 in the scroll list Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Enter 1 m/s for the V velocity and 1000 kg/m3 for the Density Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Enter 1 m/s for the V velocity, 1 kg/m3 for the Density and 0.001 for the Vol. Fraction Click Apply
RDEF,1,INLET,STANDARD 0,1,0,1,0,1000 ERDEF,2,1,INLET 0,1,0,0,0.001,1 No extra input is needed for the Outlet boundary. Analysis Controls We will now specify various solver parameters required for this case:
16-8
Select folder Analysis Controls followed by Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and go to the Equation Status tab Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Deselect item W-mom since we are solving a 2D ow in the x-y plane only. Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Deselect item W-mom. Click Apply Go to the Solver Parameters tab Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#1 position Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Pressure. Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Volume
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.1
Fraction Click Apply
SOLV LW N ESOLVE 2 LW N RELAX,0.3,0.1 ERELAX,2,0.3,0.1 Run Time Controls Set the number of iterations to 1000 for this case: Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Change the Number of Iterations to 1000 and the Max. Residual Tolerance to 1.0e-5 Click Apply
ITER,1000,1.0e-5 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below: File > Write Geometry File Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) You may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively without quitting pro-STAR. Alternatively, you may run the CFD analysis (in double precision) by typing star -dp in your session window. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Examine the velocities of the two phases at the channel exit: the water velocity (phase 1) should remain close to 1 m/s and the bubble velocity (phase 2) should be around 1.24 m/s, as calculated by equation above. This can be done very effectively by plotting the monitored value for the V velocity as follows:
Version 3.26
16-9
Tutorial 16.1
Select folder Analysis Preparation/Running Open the Run History of Previous Analysis panel Select item V-Component and then move the Phase# slider to the Phase#1 position Click Plot Monitor History to display monitored values for the V-velocity component of phase 1 Figure T16.1-2
gstar,tut.rsi,flui,1,1,1,moni,all frame,1,xreg,init,1 frame,1,yreg,init,3 frame,1,grtype,cartesian gdraw,1
Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Click Plot Monitor History to display monitored values for the V-velocity component of phase 2 Figure T16.1-3 File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
greset$y egstar,2,tut.reu,flui,1,1,1,moni,all frame,1,xreg,init,1 frame,1,yreg,init,3 frame,1,grtype,cartesian gdraw,1 QUIT, NOSAVE

16-10 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.1
Suggestions for Further Exercises Final Operations
Suggestions for Further Exercises Other bubble rise cases You may wish to repeat this tutorial with different input parameters; for example, change the density of the fluid or use a different bubble diameter. Recalculate the terminal velocity using equation and compare the answer with the simulation results. Terminal velocity of solid particles Another exercise you may want to perform is to simulate the terminal velocity of a falling solid sphere. In this case, both phases are moving in the same direction as gravity (downwards). To re-use the setup described above, you can simply change the gravity vector direction to (0, 1, 0). Try this exercise with the following parameters: Phase 1 is water, density = 1000, viscosity = 0.001 Phase 2 is steel spheres, density = 8000, viscosity = 1.0e-5, diameter = 1.0e-4
Substituting these parameters into equation , we get: ur = 208.1 d
For steel spheres of 1.0e-4m diameter, the terminal velocity is 1.144 m/s with the background fluid moving at 1 m/s. The terminal velocity relative to the background fluid is 0.144 m/s.
Version 3.26
16-11
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
Aeration is used in many process industries. Air or gas bubbles are injected into a liquid to promote mixing and mass transfer of chemical species between the phases. An example of this is the transfer of oxygen from air bubbles to a liquid for oxidation reactions. In this tutorial, we consider an aeration tank commonly used in the treatment of waste-water.
2m Degassing outlet gy 1m
x Air inlet Figure T16.2-1 Outline of an aeration tank
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut16-2). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title box type TUTORIAL 16.2 AERATION TANK Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 16.2 AERATION TANK Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Click Select Analysis Features to display the corresponding panel
This panel enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only
Version 3.26 16-13
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required: Select option Eulerian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu Click Apply
Extent of Domain: Minimum 0 X 0 Y 0 Z Maximum 2 X 1 Y 0.01 Z Number of Cells 100 X 50 Y 1 Z
Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0 2 100 0 1 50 0 0.01 1 CSET ALL PLTY EHID VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT The mesh creation is now complete. Save all model data generated so far: SAVE File > Save Model tut.mdl
Boundary Define the Inlet and Outlet boundary locations as follows: Specication Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select Reg#1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Accept the default Inlet boundary Type, enter In in the Name box and then click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y
16-14 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
Adjust and enlarge the picture to show the rst 10 cells from the left In the Create Boundaries panel, click Pick Cell Faces, select the 6th to the 10th cells from the left in the main window and then click DONE at the top right hand corner
RDEF 1 INLE $ $ RNAM 1 In VIEW 0 -1 0 REPLOT ZOOM ON BCRO ADD 1 Select Reg#2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Degas for Type and enter Top in the Name box Click Dene region Click Zoom off and change the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > Y Click Select a Zone and then enclose all the cells in the main window by a polygon. Click DONE at the top right hand corner
RDEF 2 DEGA RNAM 2 Top ZOOM OFF REPLOT VIEW 0 1 0 REPLOT BZONE 2 We also need to convert the two side boundaries into symmetry planes: Select Reg#3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Symmetry under Type and enter Sides in the Name box Click Dene region Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > Z Click Surface Based on Edges and then click on any cell displayed in the main window Turn to the other side by selecting View > Axis > -Z to change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) Click Surface Based on Edges and click on any cell in the main window
RDEF 3 SYMP RNAM 3 Sides VIEW 0 0 1

Version 3.26 16-15
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
REPLOT SURF ON VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 3 VX VIEW 0 0 -1 REPLOT VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 3 VX Check the boundaries graphically: Click Plot All at the bottom of the Create Boundaries panel Change viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Restore the default viewpoint by deselecting Bound in Cell Plot Display Options and clicking the Reset button on the plot orientation cube
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 REPLOT BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 ANGLE 0 REPLOT Material Properties and Thermouid Models Assign physical properties to the two phases. Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, -1, 0) Click Apply
ACCE 0 -1 0 1 9.8066 Select the Liquid and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel Make sure the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase #1 position Assign appropriate property values for phase 1. Thermal properties are not relevant in this case so they may be left at their default values: i) Name Water ii) Density 1000 iii) Molecular Viscosity 0.001
16-16
Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
PMAT,1,FLUID,WATER,0,1 DENS,CONSTANT,1000 LVIS,CONSTANT,0.001 Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Assign appropriate property values for phase 2 as follows: i) Name Air ii) Density 1 iii) Molecular Viscosity 1.0e-5 Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,AIR,0,2 EDENS,2,1,CONSTANT,1 ELVIS,2,1,CONSTANT,1.0e-5 Specify that the flow is turbulent and set up the turbulence drag force: Open the Turbulence Models panel In the Turbulence tab, click On and then Apply Go to the Multiphase Options tab Select option Bubble-Eddy Interaction from the Ct Model menu Select On for Turbulence Drag and then click Apply
TURB,KE,,STAN ETURB,1,1,2,1 Initialise phase 1 field values as follows: Open the Initialization panel Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Click Apply, since the default values are all acceptable.
PMAT,1,FLUID CINI N N INIT,STAN,0,0,0,1,0,0,KEPS,,,293 Initialise phase 2 values as follows: Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Set the Volume fraction to 0.001 Click Apply
EINIT,2,1,STAN,0,0,0,0,0.001,293 Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows:
Version 3.26 16-17
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
Go to the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Click the mouse icon button next to the Monitoring cell number box and then pick a cell above the air injector in the top row of cells (or enter 650 in the box). Click the mouse button next to the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and then pick the top right hand corner cell in the main window (or enter 5000 in the box). Click Apply
MONI 650 PRESS,,5000 Turn on the buoyancy force as follows: Open the Buoyancy panel Click On Select option Centroid of pressure reference cell for the datum location Select option Use reference and/or initial values, together with Reference pressure and Reference temperature for the datum density value Click Apply
BUOY,ON,PREF,,,DREF,REFE,REFE Define the interactions between the two phases: Select the Eulerian Multi-Phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum Transfer sub-folder Open the Drag Forces panel Select Bubbles in the menu at the top of the panel Click Apply
EDRAG,2,1,BUBBLE Set the bubble diameter to 1 mm: Open the Particle Size panel Enter 0.001 in the Mean Diameter box Click Apply
ESIZE,2,1,CONSTANT,0.003 Boundary Conditions Define boundary conditions at the inlet:

16-18
Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene Boundary Region panel Select Reg#1 in the scroll list Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Enter 1000 kg/m3 for Density Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
RDEF,1,INLET,STANDARD 0,0,0,1,0,1000 Define the injection of air bubbles (phase 2) at the inlet: Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Enter 0.25 m/s for the V velocity, 1 kg/m3 for Density and 0.5 for the Vol. Fraction Click Apply
ERDEF,2,1,INLET 0,0.25,0,0,0.5,1 No extra input is needed for the Degassing outlet. Analysis Controls Specify various solver parameters required for this case: Select folder Analysis Controls followed by Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and go to the Equation Status tab Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Deselect item W-mom since we are solving a 2D ow in the x-y plane Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Deselect item W-mom Click Apply Go to the Solver Parameter tab Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#1 position Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Pressure. Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Volume Fraction. Click Apply
SOLV LW N ESOLVE 2 LW N RELAX,0.3,0.1 ERELAX,2,0.3,0.1 Run Time Controls Set the number of iterations to 6000 for this case:
Version 3.26
Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Change the Number of Iterations to 6000 and the Max. Residual Tolerance to 1.0e-4 Click Apply
16-19
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
ITER,6000,1.0e-4 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below. File > Write Geometry File Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) You may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively without quitting pro-STAR. Alternatively, you may run the CFD analysis (in double precision) by typing star -dp in your session window. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Use pro-STAR to check the analysis results by first reading in the data stored in file tut.pst: Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Postprocessing Examine the velocities of the two phases and the volume fraction of the second phase:
16-20
Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected Check that the Phase# slider is in the Phase #1 position In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UV to load the two velocity components in the plane of analysis for phase 1 Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T16.2-2
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data Move the Phase# slider to the Phase #2 position In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UV to load the two velocity components in the plane of analysis for phase 2 Click Get Data In the main window click Replot Figure T16.2-3 In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu In the Vector Data list, select None In the Scalar Data list, select item Volume Fraction and then click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to display the Create Plots panel In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (lled) and Edge Click Plot to Screen Figure T16.2-4
GETC U V NONE PLTY EHID EDGE ON POPT VECT TERM,,,VECT CPLO EGEC U V NONE REPLOT EGEV,2,NONE,VF POPT CONT TERM,,,RAST REPLOT
Version 3.26
16-21
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
16-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.2
AERATION TANK
Suggestions for Further Exercises Post- processing
It will be seen that bubbles rise from the injection point to the top surface. The rising bubbles also lift the water around them and create an up-flow of liquid above the injector. Under the top surface, the flow turns horizontally to the right and then downwards on the right-hand-side of the tank. The bubbles are carried by the flow and spread across the top surface, some being carried downwards again by the down-flow on the right-hand-side. Suggestions for Further Exercises Bubble columns Changing the geometry of this tutorial to a cylindrical tank results in a model for a bubble column. Gas-liquid mixing vessels Adding a rotating impeller to the tank results in a model for a gas-liquid mixing vessel (see Tutorial 7.3 describing the setup of a mixing vessel).
Version 3.26
16-23
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up an Eulerian two-phase calculation for fluidised beds. Fluidised beds are used in many process industries for drying, gasification and burning of coal particles and in fluidised catalytic crackers (FCCs). Usually the lower portion of the equipment is loaded with solid particles. The particle concentration is close to the maximum packing limit, around 63% in volume fraction. A gas is blown through the bottom inlet boundary and through the particles, lifting and moving them by virtue of drag forces. The particle motions are random and constantly changing with time, hence it is necessary to model fluidised beds in transient mode. Often, the gas moves through the particles in the form of large gas pockets called bubbles. In this tutorial, we consider a simple fluidised bed similar to the riser of a fluidised catalytic cracker unit.
0.15m 0.15m Pressure outlet gy 1m Fluidised bed y x Air inlet Figure T16.3-1 Outline of a FCC riser Free board
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut16-3). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title box type TUTORIAL 16.3 - FLUIDISED BED RISER Click Apply
Version 3.26
16-25
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
TITLE TUTORIAL 16.3 - FLUIDISED BED RISER Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required: Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu Select option Eulerian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu Click Apply
TIME SINGLE EMPHASE ON 2 Mesh Creation Create a two-dimensional hexahedral mesh containing 100 x 50 cells. The thickness of the mesh is set to 15 cm but will have no effect on the calculations, given the two-dimensional nature of the simulation. Select the Create and Import Grids folder followed by Create Grids Open the Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes panel Enter appropriate values in the text boxes in the Extent of Domain part of the panel, as shown below, to create the required mesh:
Extent of Domain: Minimum Maximum 0 0.15 X X 0 1 Y Y 0 0.15 Z Z Click Generate Mesh
Number of Cells 20 X 100 Y 1 Z
VC3D 0 0.15 20 0 1 100 0 0.15 1 PLTY EHID CSET ALL VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT The mesh creation is now complete. Save all model data generated so far:
16-26
File > Save Model

Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
SAVE
tut.mdl
Boundary Define the Inlet and Outlet boundary locations as follows: Specication Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select Reg#1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Accept the default Inlet boundary Type, enter In in the Name box and then click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Select a Zone and then enclose the visible cells in a polygon. Select each corner point of the polygon by clicking with the screen cursor and then click DONE at the top right hand corner of the main window. RDEF,1,INLE $ $ RNAM,1,In VIEW 0 -1 0 REPLOT BZONE 1 Select Reg#2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Pressure for Type and enter Top in the Name box Click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0,1,0) by selecting View>Axis>Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Select a Zone and then enclose all visible cells in another polygon, clicking DONE at the top right hand corner after the last corner has been dened
RDEF,2,PRES $ $ RNAM,2,Top VIEW 0 1 0 REPLOT BZONE 2 We now need to define the two side-boundaries as symmetry planes: Select Reg#3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Symmetry for Type and enter Sides in the Name box Click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0,0,1) by selecting View>Axis>Z
16-27
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Click Surface Based on Edges and then click on any cell in the main window To turn to the other side, change the viewpoint to (0,0,-1) by selecting View>Axis>-Z Click Surface Based on Edges and click on any cell in the main window
RDEF,3,SYMP RNAM,3,Sides VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT SURF,ON $VSET,NEWS,EDGE BFIND 3 VX VIEW 0 0 -1 REPLOT VSET,NEWS,EDGE BFIND 3 VX Check the boundaries graphically: Click Plot All at the bottom of the Create Boundaries panel In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1,1,1) by selecting View>Isometric>1,1,1 Restore the default view by deselecting the Bound Cell Plot Display Option and clicking the Reset button on the plot orientation cube
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 REPLOT BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT Material Properties We now assign physical properties to the two phases: Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, -1, 0) Click Apply
ACCE 0 -1 0 1 9.8066 Select the Liquid and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel
16-28
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Initialisation
Assign appropriate property values to phase 1. Thermal properties are not relevant in this case so they may be left at their default values. Make sure the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase#1 position Enter the following values: i) Name Air ii) Density 1.205 iii) Molecular Viscosity 1.81e-5 Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,Air,0,1 DENS,CONSTANT,1.205 LVIS,CONSTANT,1.81E-5 Assign appropriate property values to phase 2. In this case, the only relevant property is the particle desnsity. However, in section Other Model Settings the kinetic theory model will be used to calculate solid-phase forces and this employs an internally calculated solid-phase viscosity. Since the value supplied in this panel is added to the calculated one and in order not to affect the latter, the panels phase viscosity should to be set to a very small value. Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Enter the following values: i) Name Solid ii) Density 2600 iii) Viscosity 1.0e-6 Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,Solid,0,2 EDENS,2,1,CONSTANT,2600 ELVIS,2,1,CONSTANT,1.0E-6 Initialisation As can be seen in Figure T16.3-1, the particles are initally situated in the lower half of the riser. Therefore, all cells in the model below 0.5m in the vertical (y-direction) need to be assigned a value for the initial particle volume fraction, 0.58 in this case. Above the 0.5m level, the volume fraction is to be set to 0.001 for stability purposes. The above initialisation is performed using subroutine INITFI, as shown below: Signal to pro-STAR that this case requires a user subroutine by choosing File > System Command from the main window Type ules in the text box, click Apply and then Close Open the Initialization panel Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of this panel to Phase#1 position Select option User from the Values menu and then click Dene user coding
16-29
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Other Model Settings
Accept the default values in the rest of the panel by clicking Apply
SYSTEM ufiles USUB,WRITE $INITFI CINI,N,N,,0 INIT,USER The complete contents of INITFI for this case are shown in the User Subroutine section. Other Model Settings Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows: Go to the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Click the mouse icon button next to the Monitoring cell number box and then pick a cell in the lower half of the model geometry (or enter 1121 in the box). Click the mouse button next to the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and then pick the top right hand corner cell (or enter 2000 in the box). Click Apply
MONI 1121 PRESS,1.E+5,2000 Turn on the buoyancy force as follows: Open the Buoyancy panel Click On Accept the default setting by clicking Apply
BUOY,ON,PREF,,,SPEC,1.205 We now define the interaction between the two phases: Select the Eulerian Multi-Phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum Transfer sub-folder Open the Drag Forces panel Select option High Particle Loading, leaving the default values unchanged Click Apply
EDRAG,2,1,HIGHPL,0.2,-1.7
16-30
Open the Other Forces panel Select option Kinetic Theory Model from the Solid Particle Stress menu Accept the defaults shown for Maximum Volume Fraction and Restitution Coefcient Click Apply
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
EINT,2,1,KINE,0.63,0.9 Finally, set the particle diameter to 0.3 mm: Open the Particle Size panel Enter 0.0003 in the Mean Diameter text box. Click Apply
ESIZE,2,1,CONSTANT,0.0003 Boundary Conditions Define boundary conditions at the inlet: Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder, then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select Reg#1 in the scroll list Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to Phase#1 position Enter 0.35 m/s for the V velocity Click Apply
RDEF,1,INLET,STANDARD 0,0.35,0,1,0,1.205 Now define particle (phase 2) conditions at the inlet: Move the Phase# slider l to the Phase#2 position Enter 2600 kg/m3 for Density and 0 for Vol. Fraction Click Apply
ERDEF,2,1,INLET 0,0,0,0,0,2600 Finally, define boundary conditions at the pressure outlet: Select Reg#2 in the scroll list Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#2 position Select option Vol. Frac. from the VF Switch menu and enter 0 in the Vol. Fraction box Click Apply
ERDEF,2,2,PRESS ERTP,2,2,,,VOLF,0 Analysis Controls Specify various solver parameters required for this case: Select folder Analysis Controls followed by Solution Controls Select sub-folder Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and go to the Equation Status tab Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position
16-31
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Output Controls
Deselect option W-Mom since we are only solving a 2D ow in the x-y plane Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Deselect option W-mom. Click Apply
SOLV LW N ESOLVE 2 LW N Output Controls Set the output frequency of transient data calculated during the analysis: Select the Output Controls folder and then open the Analysis Output panel In the Post tab, enter 1000 for both the Output frequency and Backup frequency Click Apply In the Transient tab, enter 0.1 (seconds) in the Write data every box. As can be seen in the panel, velocity and pressure data will be written by default at the above frequency. Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position and select item Volume Fraction from the list of data items shown Click the Post button, which selects this item (along with the phase velocity) for output to the transient post le Click Apply
WDATA,REST,1000,1000 WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,0.1,U,Y,P,Y WRPOST,2,SPEC,0,0.1,U,Y,VF,Y Run Time Controls Set the run time to 2 seconds and the time step of 1.0 x 10-4 sec for this case: Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Enter 2 in the Run for box Click Apply Enter 1.e-4 in the Time Step for Period box Click Set Period at the bottom of the panel
RUNTIME,DURATION,2 DELTIME,CONSTANT,0.0,0.0001 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from PROSTAR, saving the model data as shown below.
16-32
File > Write Geometry File Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE User Subroutine Introduce the code needed to initialise particle volume fractions and gas velocities by using pro-STARs built-in editor to edit subroutine INITFI (in file initfi.f, sub-directory ufile) as follows: File > Edit File In the pro-STAR Editor dialog, click File > Open In the File Selection dialog displayed, enter sub-directory ule and select le init.f Click OK Edit the contents of the subroutine by adding the extra lines of code after the explanatory section, as shown below Click File > Save In the File Selection dialog, re-specify ule / init.f as the save location of the modied subroutine Click File > Quit to exit from the editor
C************************************************************************* SUBROUTINE INITFI(U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T,SCALAR,XVF2) C Initialise fields C************************************************************************* C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE 'comdb.inc' COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) DIMENSION SCALAR(50) INCLUDE 'usrdat.inc' EQUIVALENCE( UDAT12(001), ICTID ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(001), CON ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(020), F2 ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(021), F4 ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(022), F6 ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(001), CP ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), DEN ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(062), VISM ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(063), VIST ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(067), X ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(068), Y ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(069), Z ) C------------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to initialise the following Version 3.26 16-33
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
C dependent variables: U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T,SCALAR,XVF2 to arbitrary C values. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T, C SCALAR,XVF2 C C The returned velocity components (U, V and W) are in the C coordinate system requested for initialisation. C C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C C.....HEIGHT OF FLUIDISED BED HBED=0.5 C.....SOLID VOLUME FRACTION IN BED VFSOL=0.58 C.....MINIMUM VOLUME FRACTION VFMIN=0.001 C U=0.0 V=0.0 W=0.0 IF (IPHA.EQ.2) THEN IF (Y.LE.HBED) THEN XVF2=VFSOL ELSE XVF2=VFMIN END IF ENDIF C RETURN END
CFD Analysis (STAR) You may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively without quitting pro-STAR. Alternatively, you may run the CFD analysis (in double precision) by typing star -dp in your session window. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Use pro-STAR to display the results stored in the .pstt file and check the volume fraction of the second phase:
16-34
In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab Select option Transient from the Analysis menu Check that le tut.pstt appears in the File Name box and then select the rst position in the Transient Post File(s) list Click Add File to List Select the rst position in the list again and then click Open Transient
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Post File; the time steps at which analysis results were stored during the run should appear in the Select Time Step scroll list In the Select Time Step list, select the rst step at which data are available (i.e. at time 0.1 s) Click Store Iter/Time Go to the Data tab and select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) in the Data Type menu Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position and select item Volume Fraction from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data at the bottom of the panel Select Go To > Create Plots In the 3-D Surface tab select Contour (lled) for Option and Edge for Edge/Mesh Click Plot to Screen to display the particle volume fraction at the chosen time step Figure T16.3-2
TRLO tut.pstt C STORE ITER 1000 EGEV 2 NONE VF PLTY EHID EDGE ON POPT CONT CPLOT
Now fix the colour scale to a range between 0 and 1:
Version 3.26
16-35
Tutorial 16.3
FLUIDISED BED RISER
Go to the Options tab In the Color Scale section, select User from the Range menu and enter 0 in the rst box and 1 in the second Click Apply In the main graphics window, click Replot
CSCA,14,USER,0,1 The above process may be repeated for each of the results calculated every 0.1 sec in the analysis. However, the best way of displaying these is by instructing pro-STAR to loop over the entire post file. To do this, type the following commands in the I/O window: *set itno 1000 1000 *define stor iter itno egev 2 none vf cset news fluid cplot *end *loop 1 19 1 Examine the volume fraction plots in the time sequence of your outputs. You should see gas bubbles rise through the particle bed. The ow is rather random and chaotic, with particles pushed around by the gas ow. The maximum particle volume fraction should be around the maximum packing value set in the model (typically 0.63). From time to time a higher maximum volume fraction can occur in one or two spots.
16-36
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up an Eulerian two-phase model for a boiling problem. The solution domain is a vertical channel whose geometry is shown below. The flow regime consists of superheated water entering the channel at the bottom, some of the water evaporating into steam bubbles, and a water/steam mixture emerging from the pressure boundary outlet at the top.
0.1m 0.1m Steam/water outlet gy 2m Steam bubbles
y x Superheated water Figure T16.4-1 Outline of ow channel with boiling
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut16-4). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name text box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File ? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File ? option Click Continue Select File > Model Title In the Title box type TUTORIAL 16.4 - BOILING CHANNEL FLOW Click Apply
TITLE TUTORIAL 16.4 - BOILING CHANNEL FLOW Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
Version 3.26
16-37
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
This panel enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required: Select option Eulerian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu Click Apply
Extent of Domain: Minimum 0 X 0 Y 0 Z Maximum 0.1 X 2 Y 0.1 Z Number of Cells 5 X 20 Y 1 Z
Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0 0.1 5 0 2 20 0 0.1 1 CSET ALL PLTY EHID VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT The mesh creation is now complete. Save all model data generated so far: SAVE File > Save Model tut.mdl
Boundary Define the boundary locations as follows: Specication Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select Reg#1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Accept the default Inlet boundary Type, enter In in the Name box and
16-38 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
then click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0,-1,0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Pick Cell Faces, select all the cell faces displayed in the main window then click DONE at the top right-hand corner Select Reg#2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Pressure for Type and enter Top in the Name box Click Dene region In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0,1,0) by selecting View > Axis > Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Pick Cell Faces, select all the cell faces displayed in the main window then click DONE at the top right hand corner
RDEF,1,INLE $ $ RNAM,1,In VIEW 0 -1 0 REPLOT BCRO ADD 1 RDEF,2,PRES $ $ RNAM,2,Top VIEW 0 1 0 REPLOT BCRO ADD 2 Note that using an Outlet boundary condition for the top boundary will give the same results. We now need to convert the two side boundaries into symmetry planes: Select Reg#3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Symmetry under Type and enter Sides in the Name box Click Dene region Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > Z Click Surface Based on Edges and then click on any cell displayed in the main window Turn to the other side by selecting View > Axis > -Z to change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) Click Surface Based on Edges and click on any cell in the main window
RDEF 3 SYMP RNAM 3 Sides VIEW 0 0 1
Version 3.26
16-39
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
REPLOT SURF ON VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 3 VX VIEW 0 0 -1 REPLOT VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 3 VX Check the boundaries graphically: Click Plot All at the bottom of the Create Boundaries panel Change viewpoint to (1,1,1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Restore the default viewpoint by deselecting Bound in Cell Plot Display Options and clicking the Reset button on the plot orientation cube
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 REPLOT BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 ANGLE 0 REPLOT Material Properties and Thermouid Models Assign physical properties to the two phases. Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, -1, 0) Click Apply
ACCE 0 -1 0 1 9.8066 Select the Liquid and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel Make sure the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase#1 position Assign appropriate property values for phase 1 as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
16-40
Name Water Density 958 Molecular Viscosity 0.000283 Specic Heat 4218 Conductivity 0.681
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
6. Molecular Weight 18 Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,WATER,0,1 DENS,CONSTANT,958 LVIS,CONSTANT,0.000283 SPEC,CONSTANT,4218 COND,CONSTANT,0.681 MOLWT,18 Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Assign appropriate property values for phase 2 as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Name Steam Density 0.6 Molecular Viscosity 1.2e-5 Specic Heat 2034 Conductivity 0.0248 Molecular Weight 18
Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,STEAM,0,2 EDENS,2,1,CONSTANT,0.6 ELVIS,2,1,CONSTANT,1.2e-5 ESPEC,2,1,CONSTANT,2034 ECND,2,1,CONSTANT,0.0248 EMOLWT,2,1,18 Turn on the solution of the energy equation: Open the Thermal Models panel For each of the two phases: 1. Click Temperature Calculation On 2. Click Apply TEMP,ON ETEMP,2,ON Initialise field values as follows: Open the Initialization panel Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Check that Values option is Constant and then enter the following values: 1. V velocity 0.5 m/s
Version 3.26 16-41
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
2. Temperature 375 Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and then click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Enter the following values: 1. V velocity 0.5 m/s 2. Volume Fraction 0.01 3. Temperature 373 Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and then click Apply
INIT,STAN,0,0.5,0,1,0,0,KEPS,,,375 EINIT,2,1,STAN,0,0.5,0,0,0.01,373 Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows: Go to the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Click the mouse icon button next to the Monitoring cell number box and then pick a cell in the lower half of the geometry (or enter 44 in the box). Click the mouse button next to the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and then pick the top right hand corner cell in the main window (or enter 100 in the box). Enter 273 for Temperature Click Apply
MONI 44 PRESS,1.E+5,100 TDATUM,273 Turn on the buoyancy force as follows: Open the Buoyancy panel Click On Select option Centroid of pressure reference cell for the datum location Select option Use reference and/or initial values, together with Reference pressure and Reference temperature for the datum density value Click Apply
BUOY,ON,PREF,,,DREF,REFE,REFE Define the interactions between the two phases:

16-42
Select the Eulerian Multi-Phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum Transfer sub-folder Open the Drag Forces panel
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
Select Bubbles in the menu at the top of the panel Click Apply
EDRAG,2,1,BUBBLE Interphase heat transfer will be defined later via a user subroutine, so the Nusselt Number shown in STAR GUIde may be set to zero: Open the Interphase Heat Transfer panel Select Constant and enter 0 in Nusselt number box Click Apply
EHTRANSFER,2,,CONSTANT,0 Set the bubble diameter to 1 mm: Open the Particle Size panel Enter 0.001 in the Mean Diameter box Click Apply
ESIZE,2,1,CONSTANT,0.001 The boiling heat and mass transfers are to be defined as source terms via user subroutines. First, you need to create a ufile sub-directory in the working directory to store the subroutines: Signal to pro-STAR that this case requires user subroutines by choosing File > System Command from the main window Type ules in the text box, click Apply and then Close
SYSTEM ufiles Prepare the user subroutines for mass and energy sources as follows: Select the Sources folder and then open the Source Terms panel In the Mass tab, click On, select User Coding and then click Apply and Dene User Coding In the Enthalpy tab, click On, select User Coding and then click Apply and Dene User Coding
RSOU,MASS,,,USER USUB,WRITE,FLUINJ RSOU,ENTH,,,USER USUB,WRITE,SORENT Boundary Conditions

Version 3.26
Define boundary conditions at the inlet: Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene
16-43
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
Boundary Region panel Select Reg#1 in the scroll list Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Enter the following values: 1. V velocity 0.5 2. Dens. 958 3. Temp. 375
Click Apply
RDEF,1,INLET,STANDARD 0,0.5,0,1,0,375,958 Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Enter the following values: 1. 2. 3. 4. V velocity 0.5 Dens. 0.6 Temp. 373 Vol. Fraction 0.01
Click Apply
ERDEF,2,1,INLET 0,0.5,0,0,0.01,0.6,373 Define boundary conditions at the pressure outlet: Select Reg#2 in the scroll list Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to Phase#1 position Select Zero Grad for the Temp. Switch Click Apply
RDEF,2,PRESSURE,STANDARD PIEZO,0,n,n,n RTPRESS,2,ZGRAD Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Select Zero Grad for the Temp. Switch Select Zero Grad for the VF Switch Click Apply
ERDEF,2,2,PRESSURE ERTP,2,2,ZGRAD,ZGRAD Analysis Controls Specify various solver parameters required for this case: Select folder Analysis Controls followed by Solution Controls followed
Version 3.26
16-44
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
by Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and go to the Equation Status tab Move the Phase# slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase#1 position Deselect item W-mom since we are solving a 2D ow in the x-y plane. Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position Deselect item W-mom Click Apply
SOLV LW N ESOLVE 2 LW N Go to the Solver Parameter tab Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#1 position Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum, 0.1 for Pressure, 0.3 for Temp. Click Apply Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2position Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum, 0.1 for Volume Fraction, 0.3 for Temp. Click Apply
RELAX,0.3,0.1,,0.3 ERELAX,2,0.3,0.1,0.3 Run Time Controls Set the number of iterations to 1000 for this case: Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Change the Number of Iterations to 1000 and the Max. Residual Tolerance to 2.0e-5 Click Apply
ITER,1000,2.0e-5 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below: File > Write Geometry File Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE
Version 3.26
16-45
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
User Subroutines The boiling model is implemented in user subroutines FLUINJ (to be found in file fluinj.f in sub-directory ufile) for interphase mass transfer and SORENT (in file sorent.f) for interphase heat transfer. The mass transfer rate due to evaporation is defined in subroutine UBOIL, called from FLUINJ and this should also be resident in file fluinj.f. For further details of the boiling model, see the Eulerian Multiphase Flows Training Notes. Replace the default contents of both les with the code shown below, using pro-STARs built-in editor or any other editor. For le fluinj.f the appropriate code is as follows:
C******************************************************************* SUBROUTINE FLUINJ(FLUXI,UI,VI,WI,TEI,EDI,TI,SCINJ,IPMASS) C Fluid injection C******************************************************************* C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 * C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE 'comdb.inc' DIMENSION SCINJ(50) COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) C C.....USER'S ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS REAL DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG REAL TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN REAL SMASS,UR,VR,WR COMMON/UBOIL1/ DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG COMMON/UBOIL2/ TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN C INCLUDE 'usrdat.inc' DIMENSION SCALAR(50) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT12(001), ICTID ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(001), CON ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(019), VOLP ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(001), CP ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), DEN ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(003), ED ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), PR ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(008), TE ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(009), SCALAR(01) ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(059), U ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(060), V ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(061), W ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(062), VISM ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(063), VIST ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(007), T ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(067), X ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(068), Y ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(069), Z ) C------------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to specify fluid injection 16-46 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
C (addition or removal) into live cells. In the case of mass C removal (sink), only the mass flux (FLUXI) can be specified. In C the case of mass addition (source), the fluid will bring all its C user-specified properties (momentum, turbulence, temperature and C concentrations). Zero will be assumed for omitted properties. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: C (Sink) FLUXI (<0) C (Source) FLUXI (>0),UI,VI,WI,TEI,EDI,TI, C SCINJ,IPMASS C C IPMASS is an interphase mass transfer indicator used in C Eulerian two-phase (E2P) simulations only. C The default value, passed from STAR to FLUINJ, is always zero. C IPMASS=0: no interphase heat transfer - the mass sources specified C in FLUINJ are independent for each phase. C IPMASS=1: the phases are exchanging mass - the mass source specified C is directed from one phase into the other phase. C For more information, please refer to the E2P sections of the C manuals. C C------------------------------------------------------------------------C C Sample coding: Fluid injection and removal C C IF(ICTID.EQ.3) THEN CC Injection C FLUXI=0.1 C WI=0.05 C TI=373.0 C SCINJ(1)=1.0 C ELSE IF(ICTID.EQ.4) THEN CC Removal C FLUXI=-0.05 C ENDIF C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C C DENL=DEN VISL=VISM CPL=CP TKL=CON UR=U-UCEL2 VR=V-VCEL2 WR=W-WCEL2 SLIP=SQRT(UR*UR+VR*VR+WR*WR) DIAP=DIAM TL=T TG=TCEL2 VFG=VFCEL2 C CALL UBOIL(SMASS) C C.....SET INTERPHASE MASS FLUX IF(IPHA.EQ.1) THEN FLUXI=-SMASS UI=UCEL2 VI=VCEL2 Version 3.26 16-47
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
WI=WCEL2 TI=TSAT ELSE IF(IPHA.EQ.2) THEN FLUXI=SMASS UI=U VI=V WI=W TI=TSAT ENDIF IPMASS=0 C RETURN END SUBROUTINE UBOIL(SMASS) C============================================================ C C CALCULATE EVAPORATION/CONDENSATION RATE C C CREATED BY SIMON LO 27/04/04 C C============================================================ C C IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z) C REAL DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG REAL TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN REAL AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS REAL REY,PRT,RNU,SMASS C COMMON/UBOIL1/ DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG COMMON/UBOIL2/ TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN COMMON/UBOIL3/ AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS C C****************************************************************** CHAPTER 1 MODEL DATA C C.....SET ADDITIONAL MODEL DATA HERE C TSAT = SATURATION TEMPERATURE (K) C H1SAT = SATURATION ENTHALPY OF PHASE 1 (J/KG) C H2SAT = SATURATION ENTHALPY OF PHASE 2 (J/KG) C TSAT=100.0+273.0 H1SAT=419.2E3 H2SAT=2676.0E3 QLATEN=H2SAT-H1SAT C C****************************************************************** CHAPTER 2 MASS TRANSFER RATE C C.....SIMPLE BULK BOILING/CONDENSATION MODEL C (ASSUME GAS PHASE AT SATURATION TEMPERATURE, C IF T(LIQ) < TSAT, I.E. SUB-COOLED LIQUID, WE HAVE CONDENSATION C IF T(LIQ) > TSAT, I.E. SUPER-HEATED LIQUID, WE HAVE EVAPORATION C C COMPUTE MASS TRANSFER RATE SMASS C PHASE 1 IS LIQUID AND PHASE 2 IS VAPOUR C IF SMASS < 0, CONDENSATION, MASS GOES FROM PHASE 2 TO PHASE 1 16-48 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
C IF SMASS > 0, EVAPORATION, MASS GOES FROM PHASE 1 TO PHASE 2 C C C.........REYNOLDS NUMBER REY=DENL*SLIP*DIAP/VISL C C.........PRANDTL NUMBER PRT=CPL*VISL/TKL C C.........NUSSELT NUMBER C RNU=2.0+0.6*REY**0.5*PRT**0.3 C.........USE CONSTANT RNU=2.0 FOR SIMPLICITY RNU=2.0 C C.........LIQUID-SIDE HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT HTCOEF=RNU*TKL/DIAP C C.........INTERFACIAL AREAM IN CELL AI=6.0*VFG/DIAP C C.........HEAT TRANSFER ACROSS INTERPHASE QLIQ=HTCOEF*AI*(TL-TSAT) C C.........GAS-SIDE HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT HTCGAS=10.0 C C.........HEAT TRANSFER FROM GAS TO INTERPHASE QGAS=HTCGAS*AI*(TG-TSAT) C C.........MASS TRANSFER RATE SMASS=(QLIQ+QGAS)/QLATEN C RETURN END
For le sorent.f the appropriate code is as follows:
C******************************************************************* SUBROUTINE SORENT(S1P,S2P) C Source-term for enthalpy C******************************************************************* C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* C STAR VERSION 3.26.000 * C--------------------------------------------------------------------------* INCLUDE 'comdb.inc' COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100) C.....USER'S ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS REAL DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG REAL TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN REAL AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS REAL SMASS,UR,VR,WR COMMON/UBOIL1/ DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG COMMON/UBOIL2/ TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN Version 3.26 16-49
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
COMMON/UBOIL3/ AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS INCLUDE 'usrdat.inc' DIMENSION SCALAR(50) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT12(001), ICTID ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(001), CON ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(019), VOLP ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(001), CP ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), DEN ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(003), ED ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(004), HP ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(006), P ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(008), TE ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(009), SCALAR(01) ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(059), U ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(060), V ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(061), W ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(062), VISM ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(063), VIST ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(007), T ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(067), X ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(068), Y ) EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(069), Z ) C----------------------------------------------------------------------C C This subroutine enables the user to specify a source term (per unit C volume) for enthalpy in linearized form: C C Source = S1P-S2P*T, (W/m3) C C in an arbitrary manner. C C If temperature is to be fixed to a given value T, then the C following may be used: C C S1P=GREAT*T C S2P=GREAT, C C where T can be a constant or an arbitrary function of the C parameters in the parameter list. C C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: S1P,S2P C C------------------------------------------------------------------------C C Sample coding: Fix temperature to the value of 300 K in solid C No 3 (IMAT=-3) C C IF(IMAT.EQ.-3) THEN C S1P=GREAT*300. C S2P=GREAT C ENDIF C------------------------------------------------------------------------C DENL=DEN VISL=VISM CPL=CP 16-50 Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
TKL=CON UR=U-UCEL2 VR=V-VCEL2 WR=W-WCEL2 SLIP=SQRT(UR*UR+VR*VR+WR*WR) DIAP=DIAM TL=T TG=TCEL2 VFG=VFCEL2 C CALL UBOIL(SMASS) C C.....SET HEAT TRANSFER BETWEEN PHASE AND INTERFACE IF(IPHA.EQ.1) THEN S1P=HTCOEF*AI*TSAT S2P=HTCOEF*AI ELSE IF(IPHA.EQ.2) THEN S1P=HTCGAS*AI*TSAT S2P=HTCGAS*AI ENDIF C RETURN END
CFD Analysis (STAR) You may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively without quitting pro-STAR. Alternatively, you may run the CFD analysis (in double precision) by typing star -dp in your session window. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Use pro-STAR to check and examine the results. Select folder Post-Processing Open the Load Data panel to display the Files(s) tab Click Open Post File
LOAD tut.pst Plot the volume fraction for phase 2 as follows:

Version 3.26
Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected Set the Smooth Option to On Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position and select item Volume Fraction from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel
16-51
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
In the 3-D Surface tab, select Contour (lled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu Click Plot to Screen Figure T16.4-2
EGEC,2,NONE,VF CAVE ALL PLTY EHID EDGE ON POPT CONT CPLOT
The steam volume fraction at the exit should be about 0.85. Now plot the temperature as follows: Go back to the Load Data panel by clicking Go To Load Data Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window click Cell Plot Figure T16.4-3
EGEC,2,NONE,T CAVE ALL CPLOT
16-52
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
Note that the steam temperature remains within its saturation value of 373 K throughout the solution domain. Repeat the above steps to obtain a phase 1 temperature plot: Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#1 position and select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window click Cell Plot Figure T16.4-4
GETC,NONE,T CAVE ALL CPLOT
Version 3.26
16-53
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
Note that the water temperature drops to the saturatiuon value (373 K) in the upper part of the solution domain. Finally, obtain a V-velocity component plot for the second phase: Move the Phase# slider to the Phase#2 position and select item Velocity Component V from the Scalar Data list Click Get Data In the main pro-STAR window click Cell Plot Figure T16.4-5
EGEC,2,NONE,SV CAVE ALL CPLOT
16-54
Version 3.26
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
Discussion of Results Final Operations
Discussion of Results In Figure T16.4-4 we can see that water enters at 375 K. As energy is lost due to steam generation, the water temperature drops gradually to the saturation value of 373K. In Figure T16.4-2, the volume fraction of steam shows an immediate increase from its inlet value of 0.01 to 0.425 and peaks at 0.852. When the water temperature reaches saturation no further steam is generated. Figure T16.4-3 shows that the steam temperature remains at the saturation value of 373 K. Validation Check According to the inlet boundary conditions, water enters the channel with a two degrees superheat (i.e. two degrees above saturation). The volume fraction for water is 0.99 and inlet velocity is 0.5 m/s. The amount of thermal energy above saturation can be calculated as: q liq = m liq c p, liq ( T liq T sat ) The water flow rate is: m liq = liq liq A v liq Substituting appropriate values into the above formulae, we obtain q liq = 40 kJ/s Assuming that all this excess energy is used in generating steam, the latters generation rate is:
Version 3.26 16-55
Tutorial 16.4
BOILING SIMULATION
q liq m g = ------h fg where h fg is the latent heat, in this case 2256.7 kJ/kg. The steam generation rate is therefore 0.0177 kg/s. We can check this result against the exit conditions of steam shown in the plots above. From these plots, the volume fraction equals 0.8522 and the V-velocity equals 3.445 m/s. Using the specified density value of 0.6 kg/m3 and the channel corss-sectional area of 0.01 m2., the mass flow rate of steam calculated from these results is 0.0176 kg/s. Suggestions for Further Exercises Condensation The same model can be used to study condensation.
0.1m 0.1m Water outlet gy 2m Steam bubbles y x Subcooled water + steam Figure T16.4-6 Outline of ow channel
Start by copying the entire working directory for boiling tutorial tut16-4 to another directory, say tut16-4b, as follows: cp -r tut16-4 tut16-4b Enter the tut16-4b directory and start a pro-STAR session as normal, re-using the model settings of tut16-4. Now make the following changes: Initial and inlet conditions: Water temperature = 372 K (i.e. one degree subcool) Steam volume fraction = 0.1 Save the problem and and model les Run STAR and post-process the results as described above.
Version 3.26

16-56
Tutorial 17 LIQUID FILM SIMULATION

The following tutorials are intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up liquid film simulations. The two cases presented are: 1. Initial 2D lm blob owing under gravity down a vertical wall, and comparison with the analytical solution 2. 3D lm formation and transport due to spray impingement
Version 3.26
17-1
Tutorial 17.1
2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL
Tutorial 17.1
In this tutorial we consider the evolution of a rectangular, two-dimensional and initially stationary blob of liquid flowing down a vertical wall under the action of gravity, as shown in Figure T17.1-1. The calculation is compared with an analytical solution for film thickness as a function of position x and time t given in [1]: 1 2 x -------- = -------12 gf t where is the film viscosity, f the film density and g the value of gravity. The solution is independent of initial values, i.e. it is valid regardless of initial film profile, film thickness and wall area covered at the start of the calculation. y Initial blob
12
2m
Air
Wall
Gravity
Film
Figure T17.1-1 Schematic of vertical lm ow and CFD mesh
In the problem we assume that the initial 2D blob has a film thickness of 1 mm and covers a wall length of 250 mm. The case is run for a simulated time of 10 seconds, which is long enough for the similarity condition given by the above equation to be satisfied. Heat and mass transfer simulations are deactivated. The solution domain is 2 m long in the vertical direction and 50 cm wide in the wall-normal direction. A uniform mesh is used, as shown in Figure T17.1-1. The following properties are used for the two phases: The gas phase is ambient air with a density of 1.205 kg/m3 and viscosity of 1.81 10-5 Pas The liquid phase is pure water with a density of 1000 kg/m3 and viscosity of 0.00089 Pas
[1] D.A. Acheson, Elementary Fluid Dynamics. Oxford University Press, 1992
17-2 Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.1
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut17-1). Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title: Type tut in the Enter Case Name box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title In the Title box type TRANSIENT 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL Click Apply
TITLE TRANSIENT 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required: Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu Select option Film Initialization from the Liquid Films menu Click Apply
TIME SINGLE LFSOLV INIT Mesh Creation Create a two-dimensional hexahedral mesh containing 120 20 cells. The thickness of the mesh is set to 5 cm but will have no effect on the result, given the two-dimensional nature of the simulation. Select the Create and Import Grids folder followed by the Create Grids folder Open the Create 3-D Grids using Simple Shapes panel Enter appropriate values in the text boxes of the Extent of Domain section, as shown below, to create the required mesh:
Extent of Domain: Minimum 0 X 0 Y 0 Z

Version 3.26
Maximum 2 X 0.5 Y 0.05 Z
Number of Cells 120 X 20 Y 1 Z

17-3
Tutorial 17.1
Click Generate Mesh
VC3D 0.0 2.0 120 0.0 0.5 20 0.0 0.05 1 CSET ALL PLTY EHID VIEW 0 0 1 CPLOT The mesh generation is now complete. Save all model data generated so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Boundary Define the boundary locations, starting with the part of the wall supporting the Specication liquid blob in its initial position. Note that this part needs to be defined as a separate wall region so that you can specify initial film conditions. Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and then open the Create Boundaries panel Select Reg#1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Select Wall for Type, enter Initial_Film in the Name box and then click the Dene region button In the main window, set the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Select a Zone and, in the main plot window, select the rst 15 cells from the left by drawing a box around them with the screen cursor
Define another region for the remaining part of the wall (which is initially film-free) Select Reg#2 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Select Wall for Type and enter Rest_of_Film in the Name box Click Dene region Click Select a Zone and select the rest of cells displayed in the main window by drawing a box around them
Define two symmetry planes to create a 2D problem Select Reg#3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Symmetry for Type and leave the Name box empty Click Dene region In the main window, set the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > Z In the Create Boundaries panel, select Surface Based on Edges and then click on one of the internal vertices to select the entire plane as a symmetry plane Select Reg#4 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries
Version 3.26
17-4
Tutorial 17.1
panel Select Symmetry for Type and leave the Name box empty Click Dene region In the main window, set the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View > Axis > -Z In the Create Boundaries panel, select Surface Based on Edges and then click on one of the internal vertices to select the whole plane as a symmetry plane
Define the upstream and downstream end-boundaries and the region opposite the wall as pressure boundaries Select Reg#5 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Pressure for Type and enter Upstream in the Name box Click Dene region In the main window, set the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -X In the Create Boundaries panel, click Select a Zone and then select all 20 cells displayed by drawing a box around them Select Reg#6 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Presure for Type and enter Downstream in the Name box Click Dene region In the main window, set the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View > Axis > X In the Create Boundaries panel, click Select a Zone and then select all 20 cells displayed by drawing a box around them Select Reg#7 in the Boundary Regions scroll list of the Create Boundaries panel Select Presure for Type and enter Opposite_to_Wall in the Name box Click Dene region In the main window, set the viewpoint to (0, 1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > Y In the Create Boundaries panel, click Select a Zone and then select all cells displayed by drawing a box around them
RDEF 1 WALL $ $ RNAM 1 Initial_Film VIEW 0 -1 0 $CPLOT BZONE 1,, RDEF 2 WALL $ $ RNAM 2 Rest_of_Film BZONE 2,, RDEF 3 SYMP VIEW 0 0 1 $CPLOT SURF,ON $VSET,NEWS,EDGE
Version 3.26 17-5
Tutorial 17.1
BFIN 3 VX RDEF 4 SYMP VIEW 0 0 -1 $CPLOT SURF,ON $VSET,NEWS,EDGE BFIN 4 VX RDEF 5 PRES $ $ RNAM 5 Upstream $REPLOT VIEW -1 0 0 $CPLOT BZON 5,, RDEF 6 PRES $ $ RNAM 6 Downstream VIEW 1 0 0 $CPLOT BZON 6,, RDEF 7 PRES $ $ RNAM 7 Opposite_to_Wall VIEW 0 1 0 $CPLOT BZON 7,, Check the boundaries graphically: Click Plot All at the bottom of the Create Boundaries panel In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1,1,1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1 Restore the default viewpoint by deselecting Cell Plot Display Option Bound and clicking the Reset button on the plot orientation cube
BSET ALL BDIS ON VIEW 1 1 1 REPLOT BDIS OFF VIEW 0 0 1 REPLOT Material Properties and Thermouid Models Assign physical properties to the two phases: Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (1, 0, 0) Click Apply
ACCE 1 0 0 1 9.8066
17-6
Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.1
Select the Liquid and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel
The displayed default properties of air are acceptable so no input is needed for this panel. Open the Initialization panel
Again, the displayed defaults are appropriate for this case so no input is needed. Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows: Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Enter 501 in the Monitoring cell number box Enter 501 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box Click Apply
MONI 501 PRESS,,501 Define liquid film model controls and film properties: Select the Liquid Film folder and then open the Film Controls panel Select the Gravity Force option and then click Apply
LFFORCE,ON Open the Film Physical Models and Properties panel On the Film Models tab, deselect the Mass Transfer and Heat Transfer options and then click Apply
LFTYPE,1 LFMM,ON LFMA,OFF LFHE,OFF On the Film Properties tab, enter Water in the Film Name box For Bulk Properties, enter 1000 for Density and 0.00089 for viscosity. The remaining property values are not used in this case. Click Apply
LFTYPE,1,WATER LFPROP,DENS,STAN,1000 LFPROP,VISC,STAN,0.00089 Boundary Conditions Before a film can be formed on a wall, the corresponding wall region must be defined as capable of supporting liquid films. This is part of the wall boundary conditions and is specified as follows:
Version 3.26
Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene
17-7
Tutorial 17.1
Boundary Regions panel Select Reg#1 in the scroll list Set the Liquid Film option to Active and then click Set to dene the lm Initial Conditions In the Liquid Film pop-up window, check that the lm type is 1 Enter 0.001 in the Thickness box and 0 for all other initial conditions Click Close In the Dene Boundary Regions panel, click Apply Select Reg#2 in the scroll list Set the Liquid Film option to Active and then click Set to dene the lm Initial Conditions In the Liquid Film pop-up window, change the Thickness value to 0.0. This signies that initially there is no lm on this part of the wall Click Close In the Dene Boundary Regions panel, click Apply
RDEF,1,WALL,STANDARD NOSLIP,YES,STAND,9 0,0,0,1,0 1,0,0,0,0.001,0 RDEF,2,WALL,STANDARD NOSLIP,YES,STAND,9 0,0,0,1,0 1,0,0,0,0.0,0 No input is needed for any of the other boundaries. Analysis Controls Specify various solver parameters and output controls required for this case: Select folder Analysis Controls followed by Solution Controls followed by Equation Behavior Open the Primary Variables panel and go to the Equation Status tab Deselect W-mom since we are solving a 2D ow in the x-y plane only Click Apply Select folder Output Controls and open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab. Enter 0 in the Starting at time box and 0.1 in the Write data every box. In view of the time step size chosen below, this will result in transient post data being saved every 10 time steps Select the Wall data button Scroll to nd Film Thickness in the variable list Select this item and then click Post Repeat this process for Film Mass and Film Velocity Click Apply
SOLV LW N WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,0.1,U,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,0.1,P,Y

17-8 Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.1
WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,0.1,THLF,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,0.1,M_LF,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,0.1,U_LF,Y Run Time Controls Run the analysis for a total of 10 seconds using two time periods. The first period is over 1 sec and uses a time step of 0.001 sec in order to ensure computational stability. The second period is over the remaining 9 seconds and uses a time step of 0.01 sec. Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Select the Run for button and enter 10 in the adjacent box Click Apply In the Time Step Option section, enter 0 for the Period Start Time and 0.001 for the Time Step value Click Set Period Now enter 1.0 for the Start Time and 0.01 for the Time Step value and click Set Period again
RUNTIME,DURATION,10 DELTIME,CONSTANT,0,0.001 DELTIME,CONSTANT,1.0,0.01 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below. File > Write Geometry File Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM tut.geom PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) You may continue with the CFD analysis, using the STAR GUIde facilities for running STAR interactively without quitting pro-STAR. Alternatively, you may run the CFD analysis in double precision by typing star -dp in your session window.
Version 3.26
17-9
Tutorial 17.1
Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Open the file containing the transient post data (tut.pstt): In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load data panel Toggle the Analysis option to Transient Select entry no. 1 in the Transient Post File(s) list and click Add File to List Select le tut.pstt from the list and then click Open Transient Post File. All the stored transient time step data will now be displayed in the Select Time Step window
TRLO tut.pstt C Read in the last set of results and make a contour plot of film thickness: In the Select Time Step list, scroll to the end of the list, select step number 1900 and click Store Iter/Time Go to the Data tab and select Wall for the Data Type In the Scalar Data list, select item Film Thickness Click Get Data In the main window, select plot option Contour Plot Click Plot > Wall Plot Turn mesh plotting off by clicking the mesh on/off button Rotate the plot using the mouse controls so that it is displayed approximately as shown below Figure T17.1-2
STORE,LAST GETW,THLF POPT,CONT VIEW 0 -1 0.5 ANGLE -90 PLME OFF WPLOT
17-10
Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.1
Transient results of this kind are best viewed by displaying film conditions at successive time steps. Instruct pro-STAR to loop over the entire post file by typing the following commands in the I/O window (or, more conveniently, by saving them into a macro file): store first *define noex store next getw thlf bset news regi 1 bset add regi 2 vset news bset cset news name wall cset subs vset any wplot *end *loop 1 99 The spatial distribution of film thickness at a particular time (e.g. at 10 seconds) can be plotted using pro-STARs graph facility as follows: First load the film thickness as described above. Then type the following commands in the I/O window (again it is more convenient to save these commands in a pro-STAR macro file): ! *** select the wall film cells bset news region 1 bset add region 2 vset news bset cset news name wall
Version 3.26 17-11
Tutorial 17.1
cset subs vset all ! *** reset the graph properties greset y ! *** load x value gload,1,wall,cset,0,0,1 gvalue,2,1,wall,x,2 ! *** load film thickness gvalue,4,1,wall,pst4,0 ! *** draw the graph frame,1,locate,1.70,2.10,9.65,9.45 frame,1,legend,none frame,1,xrange,0,2 frame,1,xtick,0,0,real,noindent,bottom frame,1,xtitle,5.25,1.3 Distance (m) frame,1,yrange,0,0 frame,1,ytick,2.5e-05,0,real,left frame,1,ytitle,0.28,7.58 Film thickness (m) frame,1,legend,none frame,1,xreg,init, 2, frame,1,yreg,init, 4, gdraw,1 ! *** save the data in a ASCII file named fthick.grf sdata,fthick.grf,2,2,2,coded close fthick.grf
17-12
Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.1
Figure T17.1-3
Spatial distribution of lm thickness
The data saved in fthick.grf can then be used for comparison against analytical solutions. File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
S
Suggestions for Further Exercises The agreement between the model prediction and the analytical solution would be improved further if a smaller time step is used. The user may also wish to test the theory that the similarity solution for film thickness is independent of the initial film profile by setting up a film covering the full length of the wall at the start of the simulation.
Version 3.26
17-13
Tutorial 17.2
SPRAY WALL IMPINGEMENT
Tutorial 17.2
In this tutorial, diesel fuel (n-Dodecane, C12H26) spray is injected into the closed box shown in Figure T17.2-1 (dimensions 16 16 44 mm). The spray is injected from a nozzle whose axis is perpendicular to the bottom of the box and is located 24 mm above it. The diameter of the nozzle is 0.3 mm. The injection lasts for 1.2 ms and the total fuel injected is approximately 8 mg. The temperature of the fuel is 293 K. The fluid in the box is quiescent air at an elevated pressure of 15 bar and a room temperature of 293 K. The Huh atomisation and Reitz-Diwakar breakup models are used in the spray simulation. Furthermore, inter-droplet collisions and spray-wall interactions are taken into account. Liquid film is formed on the bottom wall due to spray impingement. We will now set up this case and carry out a liquid film calculation. The case will be run for 500 time steps with a time step size of 4.0 106 s.
20 mm
24 mm
16 mm
Figure T17.2-1
16 mm
Mesh geometry
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial (say tut17-2). For this problem, the mesh geometry is supplied in advance, i.e. cell and vertex definitions are provided ready-to-use in files tut.cel and tut.vrt. Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure that the supplied files are copied into your current directory. Start up pro-STAR and supply the case name and title:
Version 3.26
Type tut in the Enter Case Name box Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File? option Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option Click Continue File > Model Title
17-15
Tutorial 17.2
In the Title box, type SPRAY WALL IMPINGEMENT AND LIQUID FILM In the Subtitle Line 1 box, type Impingement distance: 24 mm Click Apply
TITLE SPRAY WALL IMPINGEMENT AND LIQUID FILM SUBTITLE Impingement distance: 24 mm (c/r) Make sure that the STAR GUIde window is displayed on your screen, next to the main pro-STAR window. Open the Select Analysis Features panel
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the following special settings are required: Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu Select option Lagrangian Multi-Phase from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu Select option No Initialization from the Liquid Films menu Click Apply
TIME SINGLE TPHL ON LFSOLV NOINIT Mesh Creation The computational mesh data have already been created and are stored in files tut.cel and tut.vrt. These can be imported using pro-STARs GUI panels as follows:
17-16
Open the Cell Tool by choosing Tools > Cell Tool from the main pro-STAR window Click on Cell Read Accept the default values in the Cell Read panel and click Apply; pro-STAR will read in cell data from le tut.cel Close the Cell Read panel Close the Cell Tool Open the Vertex Tool by choosing Tools > Vertex Tool Click on Vertex Read Accept the default values in the Vertex Read panel and click Apply; pro-STAR will read in vertex data from le tut.vrt Close the Vertex Read panel Close the Vertex Tool
Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.2
In the main window, collect all cells into a set by selecting C > All Collect all vertices into a set by selecting V > All
CREAD tut.cel VREAD tut.vrt CSET ALL VSET ALL Define the z axis as the vertical axis and then display the imported mesh: In the main window, select Plot > Up Axis > Z Select View > Isometric > 1 1 1 Click Cell Plot
Figure T17.2-2
AXIS Z VIEW 1 1 1 CPLOT
Check the coordinate system used to create the mesh: Click the CSYS button on the main window and select the underlying Cartesian system (no. 1) Check the location of this system by rst clicking the Show Triad button and then selecting a Quick Hidden Line plot type from the main window.
PLLOCAL ON 1 1
Version 3.26 17-17
Tutorial 17.2
PLTY QHID REPLOT It will be seen that the origin is already at the desired location (the injector nozzle tip). What is now needed is to define a local cylindrical coordinate system with the same origin and with its z-axis along the injection direction, as shown in Figure T17.2-1. In the Coordinate Systems dialog, click Hide Triad Select system no 10 Select Cylindrical from the pop-up menu and enter the following values in the adjacent boxes: xc = 0 yc = 0 zc = 0 Rxy = 0 Ryz = 0 Rzx = 180 Click New (Local) Click Show Triad In the main window, click Replot to display the location of this system and conrm that it has been dened correctly Click Hide Triad Select system no. 1 and then click Set Active Close the Coordinate Systems dialog
PLLO OFF 1 1 CLOCAL 10 CYLI 0,0,0,0,0,-180 PLLOCAL ON 10 10 REPLOT PLLO,OFF,10,10 CSYS 1 Boundary We next define the bottom wall as a distinct boundary region, i.e. one that can Specication support a film. Note that, by default, all other boundaries will be treated as not capable of supporting a lm. Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the STAR GUIde window and open the Create Boundaries panel Select Reg#1 in the Boundary Regions scroll list Select Wall for Type, enter Film_Wall in the Name box and then click Dene region In the main window, set the viewpoint to (1, 1, -1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 In the Create Boundaries panel, select Surface Based on Edges and then click on any vertex on the bottom wall displayed in the main window
Version 3.26
17-18
Tutorial 17.2
RDEF 1 WALL $ $ $ RNAM 1 Film_Wall VIEW 1 1 -1 REPLOT SURF ON $VSET NEWS EDGE BFIN 1 VX The mesh setup is now complete. Save all model data generated so far: File > Save Model
SAVE tut.mdl Material Properties and Thermouid Models We now assign physical properties to the two phases: Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, 0, -1) Click Apply
ACCE 0 0 -1 1 9.8066 Select the Liquid and Gases folder Open the Molecular Properties panel and check that the Material #1 slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 Select Ideal-f(T,P) as the Density option and then click Apply Activate the turbulence calculation by opening the Turbulence Models panel and selecting On (turbulent ow) Choose k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu and then click Apply Open the Thermal Models panel and select Temperature Calculation On Click Show Options and check that option Thermal is selected in the Enthalpy menu Click Apply Open the Initialization panel and check the values in the Flow Condition tab. All defaults are acceptable Open the Monitoring and Reference Data panel Enter 1 in the Monitoring Cell number box Enter 1.5e6 in the Pressure box, 1 in the Reference Pressure Cell Number box and 273 in the Temperature box. Click Apply
PMAT,1,FLUID,AIR,0 DENS IDEAL Y TURB KE,,STAN

Version 3.26 17-19
Tutorial 17.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Droplet Properties
TEMP ON MONI 1 PRES,1.5e+06,1 TDATUM,273 Define scalar no. 1 to be the product of droplet evaporation and import its physical properties from pro-STARs built-in database: In the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder, select the Additional Scalars sub-folder Open the Molecular Properties (Scalar) panel and check that the Scalar # slider at the bottom of the panel is set to 1 Choose option Select scalar from database from the menu at the top of the panel Select Dodecane (V) from the Scalar Data scroll list and then click Select Scalar The physical properties of dodecane vapour are read in from pro-STARs property database into the appropriate boxes of the panel. Check that the displayed values are reasonable and then click Apply.
SC,1,DEFI,ACTI,UDEF,1 $C12H26 170,4.43143,0 2535.78,7.79824e-06,0.0250567 -1.69896e+06,298.15 SCLI,,ALL Droplet Properties The maximum number of droplet parcels required for this case (10,000) is above the default maximum allowed by the code, so it is necessary at this point to resize pro-STAR by issuing the following commands from the I/O window: MEMORY MAXDRP 10000 MEMORY WRITE Check the basic control settings for droplets: Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase and open the Droplet Controls panel Check that option Coupled is set in the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations menu and keep the default Courant number Check that option Use Gradient is selected in the Interpolation Method menu Accept the default value of 0.35 for the Under-Relaxation of Lagrangian Sources term Type 10000 in the Maximum Number of Parcels box Select option Spray injection with atomisation Click Apply
17-20
Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Droplet Properties
TPHL,ON,COUPLED,0.35 DINTERPOLATION,GRADIENT DRNPROCEDURE,STANDARD,0.35 DMAX,10000 DRPMODE,SPRAY,3D Activate the turbulent dispersion model and define transport mechanisms and physical properties for the droplets: Open the Droplet Physical Models & Properties panel and select the Global Physical Models tab Activate the Turbulent Dispersion and Gravity Effects options Select option Standard for the Collision Model Click Apply Select the Droplet Physical Models tab For Momentum Transfer, select option Standard and accept the default Mass Coef. and Slip Factor values Select option Standard for the Mass Transfer Select option Standard for the Heat Transfer Select option Reitz for the Droplet Breakup and accept the default values of the model constants Select option Bai for the Droplet-Wall Interaction and accept the default values of the model constants Click Apply
DRTURB ON DRFORCE ON DCOLLISION STANDARD DRMOMENTUM,STAN,0,1 DRMASS,ON,STAN DRHEAT,ON,STAN DRBREAKUP,REITZ DRWALL,BAI Specify droplet physical properties for n-Dodecane, which can be calculated from STARs internal fuel property functions: Select the Droplet Properties tab Click Select from Database to open the Droplet Properties Database dialog Scroll down the database material list to locate item # DODECANE(L), select it, check the Use Internal Property Calculation box and then click Select Material Close the Droplet Properties Database dialog Click the Evaporates to Scalar Select button
17-21

Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.2
Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Liquid Film Model
Dene scalar no. 1 as the product of evaporation by selecting it in the Scalars list Click Close In the Droplet Properties tab, click Apply
DRTYPE,1,DODECANE(L) DRCM,1 1 FUEL,N-DODECANE The injector location was specified earlier using local coordinate system 10. Its geometrical and flow properties can now be specified: Open the Spray Injection with Atomisation panel Select 3 Dimensional for the Domain and Huh for the Atomization Model Accept the default settings in the Nozzle specication section Click Apply Spray Options In the Dene Injectors section, enter the following parameters: Injection Temperature 293 Hole Diameter 0.0003 Coordinate System 10 For the fuel Mass Flow Rate, select option Fixed and then enter a value of 0.007 (kg/s) in the box next to drop-down menu Enter 0 in the Start of Injection box Enter 0.0008 in the End of Injection box Enter 1.0e+06 in the Number of Parcels/Injector box Check that the value in the Droplet Type list box is 1 and the name DODECANE(L) appears next to it Click Update Injector
AMODEL,HUH NMODEL,EFFE INJECTOR,1,0.0003,10,,NOPI,,1,FIXED,0.007,0,0.0008,1.e+06,293
Liquid Film Model
We now define the liquid lm model controls. Note that since the film is formed only from wall-impinging droplets, the films physical properties will be inherited from the droplets and therefore do not need to be specified explicitly. Select the Liquid Film folder followed by the Film Controls panel Accept the default lm model setting and under-relaxation factor Select the Gravity Force button Click Apply
LFMODEL DYNAMIC 0.7 LFFORCE ON
17-22
Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.2
Boundary Conditions
Specify thermal boundary conditions for the spray impingement plane at the bottom of the box; also that this boundary can support a liquid film: Select the Dene Boundary Conditions folder and then open the Dene Boundary Regions panel Select Reg#1 in the scroll list Select option Fixed from the Wall Heat menu and enter 293 for the boundary Temperature and 0 its thermal Resistance Set the Liquid Film option to Active Click Apply
RDEF 1 WALL STANDARD NOSLIP,YES,STAND,9 0,0,0,1,0 FIXED 293,0 All other boundaries will be treated as default wall boundaries with no liquid film. Analysis Controls Specify various solver parameters and output controls required for this case: Select folder Analysis Controls followed by Solution Controls Open the Solution Method panel and change the Under-Relax. for Press. Correction value to 0.5 Click Apply Select the Equation Behavior folder and then open the Primary Variables panel Go to the Differencing Schemes tab and select MARS for all variables, accepting the default value of the compression level for all equations Click Apply Open the Additional Scalars panel and select C12H26 from the Scalar list. Change the Residual Tolerance to 0.01 and set the Difference Scheme to MARS, accepting the default value of the compression level Click Apply Select the Output Controls folder and then open the Analysis Output panel Select the Transient tab. First enter 0 in the Starting at time and 4.0e-5 in the Write data every box. The last setting will ensure that post data will be saved every 2 time steps Scroll to locate item C12H26 in the data list. Select it and then click the Post button Deselect the Cell Data option and then select Wall data Locate and select item Film Thickness in the data scroll list Click Post Repeat for items Film Mass, Film Velocity and Film Temperature Click Apply
ALGOR PISO NODE 20,0.25,0.5 DSCH MARS UVW 0.5

Version 3.26 17-23
Tutorial 17.2
DSCH MARS TURB 0.5 DSCH MARS T 0.5 DSCH MARS DENS 0.5 DSCH MARS CONC 0.5 SCCO,1,1,100,0.01,N,N WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,4e-5,U,Y,P,Y,SC01,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,4e-5,T_LF,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,4e-5,THLF,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,4e-5,M_LF,Y WRPOST,1,SPEC,0,4e-5,U_LF,Y Run Time Controls Check the status and then set the run time control parameters: Select the Analysis Preparation/Running folder Open the Set Run Time Controls panel Select the Run for button and then enter 0.002 in the adjacent box Click Apply In the Time Step Option section, enter 0 in the Period Start Time and 2.0e-5 in the Time Step for Period boxes Click Set Period
RUNTIME,DURATION,0.002 DELTIME,CONSTANT,0,2.0e-5 Final Operations If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below: File > Write Geometry File Enter 0.001 in the Geometry Scale Factor box Click Apply and then Close File > Write Problem File Click Apply and then Close File > Quit > Save & Quit
GEOM,tut.geom,0.001 PROB tut.prob QUIT SAVE CFD Analysis (STAR) For flows involving sprays, it is recommended that STAR is run in double precision mode, by typing star -dp in your session window. The analysis will then start automatically. The simulation
17-24 Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.2
should run for 100 time steps and save flow field data to file tut.pstt every 2 time steps. Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Open the file containing the transient post data (tut.pstt): In the STAR GUIde window, select folder Post-Processing Open the Load data panel Toggle the Analysis option to Transient Select entry no. 1 in the Transient Post File(s) list and click Add File to List Select le tut.pstt from the list and then click Open Transient Post File. All the stored transient time step data will now be displayed in the Select Time Step window
TRLO tut.pstt C Plot the film thickness formed at the 20th time step: In the Select Time Step list, scroll down to the 10th entry, select it and click Store Iter/Time button Go to the Data tab. Select Wall for the Data Type and On for the Smooth Option In the Scalar Data list, select item Film Thickness Click Get Data In the main window, select plot options Contour Plot and Hidden Surface Deselect mesh plotting by clicking the mesh on/off button Select edge plotting by clicking the edge plotting button Click Plot > Wall Plot
STORE ITER 20 GETW THLF CAVE ALL POPT CONT PLTY EHID PLME OFF EDGE ON WPLOT Add droplets to this plot:
Version 3.26
In the main window, select the droplet display option by choosing Plot> Cell Display>Droplets In the STAR GUIde window, select the Particle Tracks folder
17-25
Tutorial 17.2
Open the Plot Droplets/Particle Tracks panel and go to the Droplets tab In the Load Droplet Data section, select Current Post Data File from the Load from menu Click Load Data In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Off for the Edge Plot Options. Select Diameter for the Droplet Radius and enter 0.5 in the Size box Select Color for the Fill Color and enter 0 in the Color box Select None for the Vectors option Click Apply Collect all droplets in the domain into a set by selecting Dp-> All in the Collect/Plot section Click Plot > Wall Plot Figure T17.2-3
CDIS ON DROP GETD POST DOPT EDGE OFF DOPT RADI DIAM 0.5 DOPT FILL COLOR 0 DOPT VECT NONE DSET ALL WPLOT
The above steps may be repeated for other times of interest. As pointed out in Tutorial 17.1, transient results for spray and liquid film problems are best viewed by means of an animated display. In the command set given below, we set up a pro-STAR loop which will:
17-26 Version 3.26
Tutorial 17.2
Load data every other time step from the transient post le Read in droplet and liquid lm thickness data Plot them
The required commands are as follows: store first *define noex store next getd post dset all getw thlf cave all bset news regi 1 vset news bset cset news name wall cset subs vset all wplot *end *loop 1 49 The above executes all commands within the loop 50 times to produce successive snapshots of the spray and liquid film state at every saved time step. The loop may be also saved as a macro file for ease of use. File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
QUIT NOSA
Version 3.26
17-27

Star Tut

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Star Tut

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

TUTORIALS

STAR-CD VERSION 3.26

CONFIDENTIAL FOR AUTHORISED USERS ONLY

Working with commands

Using tutorial command les

Using tutorial command les

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Constant properties

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS Laminar ow

Using tutorial command les

SOLUTION ALGORITHMS SIMPLE

Using tutorial command les

Using tutorial command les

TURBULENCE MODELS k- model (standard)

Using tutorial command les

SOLUTION ALGORITHMS SIMPLE

Using tutorial command les

Using tutorial command les

TURBULENCE MODELS k- model (standard)

Using tutorial command les

SOLUTION ALGORITHMS SIMPLE

Using tutorial command les

Using tutorial command les

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Constant properties

TURBULENCE MODELS k- model (standard)

Using tutorial command les

SOLUTION ALGORITHMS SIMPLE

Using tutorial command les

Physical Problem Description

Tutorial 1 TWO-DIMENSIONAL FLOW IN A LABYRINTH

0.1 Outlet 0.1 0.03

0.15 Z 0.05 Inlet 0.1 0.3 0.1

All dimensions in metres

Mesh structure for 2-D labyrinth model

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Preliminaries

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation

Click Generate Mesh

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation

CSET ALL PLTY NORM VIEW 1 1 1 CPLOT

VSET ALL CDISP ON VERT VSTYLE,3,6,4 VPLOT CDISP OFF VERT

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation

Click this button on the left side of the main window

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Mesh Creation

EDGE OFF REPLOT

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Locations

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Locations

COUNT BOUND BSET ALL BDISP ON CPLOT

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Locations

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Material Properties

Click on any vertex not on the edge of the displayed plot

PROP STAT MONI 165 Boundary Conditions

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Conditions

BSET DELE SYMP REPL

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Boundary Conditions

BDIS OFF REPL

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Solution Controls

Pre-Processing (pro-STAR) Final Operations

CFD Analysis (STAR) Flow Analysis

Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Solution Checks

Select Go To > Create Plots to open the Create Plots panel

Post-Processing (pro-STAR) Basic Plots